rh Pree Meer re rt See
he ral Ae de J AR ANoYNTi
AE ON GRD!
are weer
ey eutue kata ye
“Nba
ete te a Te Wee? PERCY cH,
ee Me ae
De Qe AR Fela Pe RED
RNS
Po yk
FG de Se TENT
Mes as ahtneeams M4
AMARONE LA Diy ie mde Me Mola wie eas Me
Bone | CaM NS TM tte aa
ona bie
hy scratch Ancona
Day vese Neh camel CEA
Uh ee ae
Peers
Rent
SR as he
SEMPLE
pas ue ease
spe 4 set vaasann
(oasaratlne ab a ok. acts
Si ged ay ee
ae LER ul topr Raber
ete ares
doe Bip ced (ae toe agar
rake eee aye pp os wari
SVMS +a
Gin Seb D aa Vee NE GI 2 a RE ane
eegaee aa a) pawn ext
SG he pak pause sad saan
Pure suaeey jenigae Wemeda es 5s
pidee re ae aia sea eS
Twila A esd BSI AE aft ase ie 2 tivrd
o ro vee aioee
eee a AN aK) IP KG, ; Becteey Fhe fe seuss
Soe Roa ge Be Ey pst le yee E w WR Ee Sl
« carter sy ie ute ri i Lyapayagaiegs ree) npieyle
1 : she (LUE AID Cg Ge SW) sree eae
BEAM ie 3 Pearanceun Caran cavers Ter GAG LUMEN Hated veo arr SAU
valued : cas see ped eave: Rae res
he fae vargerged : quateit Peri
peasy MOEN fo hart 3 er SUB Liye yn ined CUR DS le WA
Bais StU Ate ag
a Hag ws4sae
Bnet wese AG
‘ jae
“f Tae = ea Pei @adegea eg
WNL EIS einer were HoH
os Ay pRRe eS
Gaia sang ORNs
Westra Sees
x Rene eel ty eth aoa
wag las ta age rex: ‘ ‘at ee. es Peed EST
Pee re sl
Boe ese ge BrePoe ri tits
rigs is (en or boa Cat be
nee poiasaudle (0 ash Aye STB LER MENS
ve SG aty Wie, YER SOY
Ay Gee Sethe Vp FESS EL
Cn MLA IR ROSY OST RY
SS Co i yesett
ApH
oh gout
ee yaghhyre eps 3
SO Se aK
Hohe Le aa FORA IRE eyea!
< ais as rads a TES as chap i
SCRar CN a
suv 4 wae tee fants
ey CSE Pe eS Benes
Teak ae Vat fe FS me EAB eae
Peas Att St ices ay Seay Aer
Wkly mC wRKeN YS e fewettey ea WUBI BAe
SY RE UGE SOT WA PNP OE SS OVE
WOLF Wp tage ge SOROS
Wet UR Aras ?
yy wet. hee
!
= oe ats | eee q Ws" S| [<p os) 4 (Se
< <i < Bae) = & Jo WA Eee, cB
eg % y 3S 4 *
5 = oe bc y a ns = N\ Q i Censey S LOND
Ey z ad Zz loge. ae
£ NOILNLILSNINVINOSHLINS | S3 luvudiT LIBRAR |ES_ SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION _ NOILN |
S eae O . O Las S
—_ w > am oO —
= > WA, — > = “en ES
= és WN = a a es .
2 : wg D z D z
pp SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHIINS Saluvugi7_ LIBRA
< = < = : < = =
a = = = iy a a Pa .
: : 3 2 &,? z 5 N
Yh? fh t SN
r O oa O Uli, ag fe) NS
= Zz = BU Mit ee = = <<
= ; > Ss > Ss > = YY
NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS _LIBRARI ES) SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTI N
“ z \ z= z= Lu
uw 77) tu w ul ” =
~ = oe sa = nee oc
= = = a = % a, <
pis = oa sr ne = e
= o e .o ie 5 =
a z fei 2 ah 2 a
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saluvadi] LIBRAF
rt a a ia a at
- O he S) ie NES fe) ow
eu) = 19.9) =~ oo =
= kK & bh a]
a = Se = a “ >
s > ant 2a
2 ah 2 = 2 =
NOILNLILSNI _ rt VUPITLLIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION , NOILNL
wn = ea ee
= < S = = < =
rar nS Wa lh ae Ee ANY ern are = z =
2 yy § 5 BY 3S § § x
0 GF i O Mit: 7 O r oO
Z “yy = 2 G4 E Z a 2
> @ = > a = pee = ae 4
WY) : ;
~ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION | NOILMLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SaluVdaiT_LIBRAR
— Ww) = ses
z lJ = LW z N uw Zz
” «V7 es ep) ae w
on fe. cies oc eB. o a
- < a < a < =
S 5 = = = a =
2 ie a z ae Zz ae Zz
, NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS _S31YVNaIT le -!NSTITUTION | NOILAL
S tee ° = ° = S)
= 2 \ = x0 a Bes x
a= > SK > i: >
z a Se = > eT 2 5
2 st) ee m a ; :
= ” ma — ap) = wn =
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS, Sa luvugly - BRAT
= : x. “se ‘ *
= z = x ‘ z= L° @ = Vie = § §&
z = z Sj = = typ Zz w™N
5 YX = S = 2 = fp 5 \
DA ~ WAX @ 7) 7) ( w m Y fe ie: a
A ee a nee = S aM
| NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31uvualy LIBRARIES | _ INSTITUTION _olne
Y : * ao
Lu = tu = ul b om
ae =f a “4 = |
8 _- a ~s (9 (7, seme OF
PS C ee a < pes <
mz Cc © i tc es (x
3 + ~|
ma = 68) oa m.- — jaa)
sae @) ae: ak ©) _
a z cal 3 ms) z ad
1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S21uV¥aI) LIBRA
_ sO S ~ quSON; S ~ ee 5 SvAy a GMSON,
wo RESORT. — a bs ‘a’ Ge SKESONIN. — OLIN mri MS | Pesesik PCO lee) fi *
©): —_ Or = Wo YW G2 om Oc
a A < 7 NN Rote 2 x
2 am =| Ge YQ e 5 is
; fe O — Oo oe oO aay
j Fz, —- Fa 7 =a] Fes =
NVINOSHLIWS ~S31YVYAIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN” INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSH:
. Fa <
~ oO — oO — O —
J — w = wo = oo WN
| = : 5 2 = 2 LNs
: kK > > > AN
= 2 = = Ez D ws
: as k ae - ets QV
n gg” ” WS
Ce 0 Z F 2 Aa ns
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3iuvualy LIBRARIES = SMITHSOI
: =a 2 a z oe en =
z = nea = Zz 4
O x je 1) 2 O BE
7) on an 7p) w” 7) ”
a a @) 25 oO als O
= Z, = Z = =
= , >’ = >" = >
”) i z W) Zz wn - Zz
SSIYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSH.
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
% yg ha
: ~
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
NVINOSHLINS S31YvVYd!l1 LIBRARIES SMITHSO!
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES
(79)
tid
Oc
<
[a
m.
3
i 2 ‘a = tes =
es S se S om =
2 os es) = fa .
e 2 E = a
“ z 2 ue D ~
SAIYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHI
w z= es, ” = e ” z
= FN oe =< es 2 x
7 JSG 4 DO NES = O = GO ONS -
S OY = nice ? 5 Le a
A) Se ONE ae
= 5 = > > > Gis
Pz (a) ie Ww a ae ”Y
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS Se lava aid LA BRAR LES) SMITHSOR
_ a: = a “ a LY fis
eS = = < e <i dif
sj =a = oe st a Uy
L, = a a ca = an bY
=z ea Pa i Ea FZ ea!
NVINOSHLINS S3!1uYVuYait LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHL
~ 5 if 2 iss 2 as
S Bs) 5 io Ee a Na
E > = > = Bil NaN
E iu re eS - z XS
_ ow pee (op) =
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saluvyay LIBRARIES SMITHSON
ee (ep) ) = “~
° & r < = Ei =
2 WY? = =
8 WEF ? é : g
Pa Gf i ee es IF Z
= = = <
z = 5 5 =
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNILILSNI NVINOSHL
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
£4
LIBRARIES
NOLLALILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILALILSNI
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NWINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARI ES SMITHSON
rc
ZA ASON SS ay
17
IN
ON
TTT ye
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
~ SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 93 BAND 93
ARTHSONI AR
NOV - 9 1984
LIBRARIES 7
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 93 BAND
THE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1984
SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA
BY THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY) LTD, WYNBERG, CAPE
D828
LIST OF CONTENTS
DE Decker, A. H. B.
Near-surface copepod distribution in the south-western Indian and south-eastern
Niantic Oceana (kublished une lO S4e ewe am gee ce foe misc asa. 6 a.
DINGLE, R. V.
Mid-Cretaceous Ostracoda from southern Africa and the Falkland Plateau.
(RublishedicbnuanyelO Sse ern Crevice Set ee tk Mier tee nes aauNa saa
GOSLINER, T. M. see Marcus, E. D. B.-R.
HuLtey, P. A.
The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 14. Family Myctophidae
(Osteichthyes, Myctophiformes). (Published February 1984.).................
KENSLEY, B.
The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 15. Marine Isopoda of the
LO PASTS eT chuisesa (aublishedeune T9844") baer er eer eer a
Marcus, E. D. B.-R. & GOSLINER, T. M.
Review of the family Pleurobranchaeidae (Mollusca, Opisthobranchia). (Published
RCWIUIAy eI SA) res eee pea iree en tee iar Ap rim ames ie san eee Mate a kee ss
Volume 93 is complete in 5 parts.
Page
303
J)
33
ZN
NEW GENERIC AND SUBGENERIC NAMES
PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME
Page
ANB OROM TALON SSIS ES ToS oo pas lao id a chee, ots ee eke See a) career 27
Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) Dingle, 1984 .............. 0 ccc cece eee 135
IMCL TIGL DOA cg TTC ices 5 te tahoe Cen ae oodles ALOR ane ee ee 166
INGIGIIGNINGINCNSICY PALO SA we wegen es ean Sees ore gle ble cesta ok NS OAR GR Bale ne 279
Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) Marcus & Gosliner, 1984 ....................02005. 40
POnCOlAGV UCL DIN GIO MIO SA yar ee dere eye aa oe oe ks Dees thor eee hs ba oA 148
is
k
i
nua
=
Ht (2 93 PART 1 FEBRUARY 1984 ISSN 0303-2515
1
- $67X
q NH
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 93 Band
February 1984 Februarie
Part 1 Deel
REVIEW OF THE FAMILY
PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, OPISTHOBRANCHIA)
By
EVELINE d. B.-R. MARCUS
&
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
i, DGS, G8), HOD, 45,8, Bas), SUS, 5, TO),
EG, tp), HO), &, DUD, D), 10 G8),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t--p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 45(1)
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 054 0
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica’ Press, Pty, ids Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
REVIEW OF THE FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, OPISTHOBRANCHIA)
By
EVELINE D. B.-R. MARCUS
Department of Zoology, University of Sado Paulo
&
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER*
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 25 figures)
[MS accepted 28 June 1983]
ABSTRACT
A review of the Pleurobranchaeidae is provided, including keys to the notaspidean genera
and the described species of Pleurobranchaeidae. Eleven members of the family are considered
as junior synonyms while eight additional species are insufficiently described and their status re-
mains uncertain. The morphology of eleven previously described and six new species is charac-
terized and discussed. New taxa are Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) subgen. nov., and
Pleurobranchaea confusa, P. augusta, P. bonnieae, P. bubala, P. notmec, and P. vayssierei spp.
nov.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MHOC CEO gery ete ene reese ten me ta BA Eco 1
General characters of the Pleurobranchaeidae.................... 2
igleuropranchaca Ieeles LOIS win scc., se Wok ete is = Bes a ei ees 8
Pleurobranchaea (Pleurobranchaea) Leue, 1813.................. 8
Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) subgen. nov. .................. 40
EUSCICH OPS MAS OIRO SIO oh lan mses Goch eis ee tae ies mse mics gee 42
leuropranchellatnicle. W925 eiy eis oeyni t+ ees cee ee a elk 43
INGONSIGIN Clie LSS vee os, ce. ye ae ee ha ancl as 46
Gigantonotum Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965 .................. 48
Zoogeography of the Pleurobranchaeidae ....................... 48
PNCKMOWIECOCINENUS past eras re oe as ays ae moda hae a ns 49
FRETC HE TCC Seppe eae ts ee ee Ti ME ee Sie Cs Sars or 49
INTRODUCTION
This paper was originally intended to be the eighth contribution to the cata-
logue of the western Atlantic warm-water Opisthobranchia (Marcus, Ev. 1972a,
1972b, 1973, 1974, 1978, 1980, 1982a). During the course of investigations it was
* Present address: Dept. of Invertebrate Biology and Paleontology, California Academy of
Sciences, San Francisco.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 93 (1), 1984: 1-52, 25 figs.
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
determined that the family Pleurobranchaeidae was in need of substantial re-
vision and the scope of this work was expanded.
The classification of the Pleurobranchaeidae has in many cases been based
upon insufficiently described material, and the species were often simply iden-
tified with previous descriptions from geographically related regions. Vayssiére
(1885: 108) found that the descriptions and diagnoses of the Pleurobranchacea
had been so incomplete that the species were confused, considered as synonyms,
or recorded only as varieties. He tried to define clearly the important characters.
The external morphology is influenced by preservation, contraction, and
loss of pigment. The presence of well-separated rhinophores serves as a familial
distinction.
The jaw plates and radula can be used for generic separation but hardly dif-
fer within a genus. Vayssiére (1901: 72) maintained that jaws and radula are in-
dispensable for classification. He stated that it was a pity that Bergh had not
figured jaws and radula, as the comparison of these organs might have elimi-
nated all doubts (Vayssiére 1901: 51, 71).
Few authors have described the reproductive organs completely, although
these offer good specific characters (Vayssiére 1901: 53). This is probably largely
due to the fact that the reproductive organs are very difficult to dissect without
tearing the various ducts, as indicated by Vayssiére (1901: 38). For this study
there are sufficient specimens of some species, but in the case of several others
complete descriptions cannot be given nor can all specimens be classified. Often
the male organs have not been observed in detail and they are often species-
specific in their structure. For these reasons the present authors have concen-
trated on the determination of penial morphology but describe other characters
whenever possible.
Vayssiére (1898: 234) described the oviduct entering the albumen gland in
the Berthellinae: Berthellina brocki (fig. 180) and Berthella ocellata (fig. 182). In
Berthellina edwardsi (fig. 179) the duct, though touching the albumen gland,
seems to continue (p. 234) to its own outer opening. Vayssiére stated that in the
Pleurobranchidae, Pleurobranchus (figs 177-178), Susania, and Oscanius, and in
the Pleurobranchaeidae there is no such connection; the oviduct goes directly
into the vagina and the gland mass opens into the outer part of the vagina. In
earlier papers the senior author also misinterpreted the close proximity of the
oviduct to the gland mass as an entrance in Pleurobranchus aerolatus (Marcus,
Ev. & Marcus 1967a: 165, fig. 19, 0), Pleurobranchaea gela (Marcus, Ev. &
Marcus 1966: 176, fig. 37, oi), and P. agassizii (Marcus, Ev. & Marcus 1967a:
49, fig. 56D, ov).
GENERAL CHARACTERS OF THE PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
The colours are variable in life, but most species are brownish. A shell is
absent. The size differs between species but depends on age and may vary be-
tween populations. The notum varies in size. It is usually slightly smaller than or
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 3
equal to the foot in size, but sometimes it is larger. The relative proportions of
the mantle to the foot were used for generic separation but they are largely de-
pendent upon the degree of contraction during preservation. Anteriorly the no-
tum is separated from the oral veil by a slight fold. The notum may be smooth
or rough, or with bosses or tubercles, which may be altered during preservation.
The right side of the notum projects over the gill, forming an exhalant
siphon posteriorly. On the left side the notum sometimes leaves the upper side
of the foot free. Posteriorly it merges gradually with the upper side of the foot.
In Pleurobranchaea brockii the notum and foot remain separated posteriorly.
The oral veil is broad. Its anterior border bears one or two rows of simple
or branched papillae, which may disappear with fixation. The sides of the veil
form the oral tentacles, which are split posteriorly and inwardly rolled. The
blunt, rolled rhinophores are situated in the angles between the tentacles and
lateral notal borders and are well separated from each other.
Between the right rhinophore and the gill are the genital apertures, sur-
rounded by a circular fold. This fold often has one or two flaps that are fre-
quently protruded. The flaps vary intraspecifically. Behind these apertures lies
the prebranchial gland, Bourne’s gland, called the organ of Bojanus by Moquin-
Tandon (1870: 20). It opens on a small papilla.
The gill occupies the middle of the right side below the border of the no-
tum. It has a variable number of pinnae on both sides, which increases with age.
The gill rachis is smooth or bears two rows of papillae, which may disappear
with preservation. Part of the underside of the gill is adnate to the body wall.
The anal opening is situated between the gill and notum, while the nephropore
is ventral to the gill.
The anterior border of the foot is transversely grooved. The hind end is
rounded and often bears a soft spur or horn on the dorsal side. The presence or
absence of the spur (Figs 6A, 13A) varies intraspecifically. The pedal (metapodi-
al) gland on the ventral side of the foot is not always visible. Macnae (1962:
168-169) found this gland only in sexually active individuals, although its ab-
sence may be a result of poor preservation.
The mouth opening is often extended by the everted buccal cavity and pro-
truded pharynx. The pharynx has a vertical entrance to the digestive tract and is
flanked by the jaw plates. The anterior border of the jaws may vary in shape
(Figs 6G, 19C) even in the same species (Marcus, Ev. & Marcus 1966, fig. 35).
The platelets comprising the jaws are polygonal columns with a flat surface. The
ratio of length to breadth of the platelets varies intraspecifically and may vary
with position in a single individual (Fig. 10C-F). We agree with O’Donoghue
(1929: 58) that the jaw platelets cannot be utilized for specific separation.
The radula has numerous transverse rows of uncinate, uni- or bicuspid
teeth. A rachidian tooth is rarely present. The teeth are largest in the middle of
the half-row. The presence or absence of a secondary denticle on the teeth is
variable. The number of unicuspid teeth on the outer edge of the radula also
varies. In some specimens of P. tarda there are up to twenty unicuspid teeth,
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
while in other individuals they are entirely absent. We believe that the rudi-
mentary secondary cusp on all teeth in P. californica is a useful subgeneric
character. In specimens where the radular rachis is more or less complete, the
first lateral tooth varies in size in different rows. It gradually increases in size
from older teeth to newer and ranges from 0,105 to 0,250 mm. As additional
teeth are added to the radula from the inner side, the size of the inner lateral
again decreases. Malformations of teeth are not rare. Most commonly two
adjacent teeth are fused within a transverse row. On one occasion two entire
transverse rows of abnormal teeth were observed (Fig. 13B).
The stomach often contains the remains of food, demonstrating the vari-
ability of diet within the Pleurobranchaeidae. In the specimens examined, prey
included the bryozoan Cellaria sp., polychaetes up to 15 mm long, an amphipod,
a small prosobranch shell, a specimen and a pharynx of a pleurobranchid, a
gymnosomatid radula, an aeolid 2,5 mm long and a complete pharynx with jaw
plates and radula, a 20 mm branch of a crinoid, a spine of the sea urchin Eucida-
ris tubulinoides (identified by F. M. Bayer, U.S. National Museum) and a 6 mm
long octopod. A 65 mm specimen of Pleurobranchaea brockii contained four
specimens of Philine aperta in its stomach, the largest of which was 18 mm in
length. Eales (1937) found fourteen specimens (10-17 mm long) of Pleurobran-
chaea tarda in the stomach of Pleurobranchella nicobarica.
Bergh (1897: 2) indicated that a blood gland is situated dorsal to the heart
in the Pleurobranchacea, not over the central nervous system as in the Dorida-
cea.
Bergh’s (1897: 25-26, pl. 4 (figs 1-7)) description and figures of the cuticu-
lar penial tube of P. meckelii differ from Vayssiére’s (1901: 40-41, fig. 228). As
this is the evaginable part of the male duct, we consider it as the penis proper.
Bergh’s (1897: 34-37) terms for the reproductive ducts differ somewhat from
ours. Vayssiere (1901: 39-40, pls 4-6) described the male duct of P. meckelii.
He called Bergh’s term ‘penial sheath’ the penial sac (his fig. 224) ard applied
the term ‘penis’ rather than ‘glans penis’ to the small muscular cone at the open-
ing of the efferent duct into the atrium (his figs 225-226). He did not mention
nor figure any cuticularized penis inside the efferent duct, except for a trans-
verse section (fig. 228). Macnae (1962) roughly figured the penis of four pleuro-
branchid species. MacFarland (1966: 99, pl. 17 (figs 1-7)) described and figured
the ‘glans penis’ of Pleurobranchaea californica and compared it with Bergh’s
description of P. meckelii.
The inner genital organs dissected from the intestine and digestive gland,
but still connected with the body wall, can best be studied by slightly staining
them in carmine and sketching them before clarification to see the cuticular
penis, if present. In laying the organs flat (Vayssiére 1901: 38) for balsam prepa-
rations they frequently stick together or tear, so that the course of the ducts is
no longer recognizable.
From the ovotestis, in which the follicles contain either sperm or oocytes
(Mazzarelli 1891: 234), a winding hermaphroditic duct emerges. It widens as an
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE >)
elongate ampulla. Shortly after it narrows again, it divides into the oviduct and
male duct.
The ciliated oviduct widens, forming some pouches full of sperm, the sper-
matocyst (Fig. 3B, y). The following long, coiled portion is also ciliated. The
oviduct enters the vagina near the stalk of the vesicular spermatheca. The albu-
men and mucous glands open into the vagina.
The male duct generally enters the centre of a round prostatic gland com-
posed of many narrow tubules. It emerges from the gland on the opposite side
and enters the penial sac, when present, usually near its fundus and often close
to the retractor muscle. In Euselenops the prostatic cells are contained with the
efferent duct.
The penial sac is narrow along the loop of the efferent duct in P. tarda and
slightly wider in P. maculata, P. bubala, and P. californica, and widest in P.
meckelii and P. augusta. In one specimen of P. notmec and in P. bonnieae and
P. inconspicua, it is tight around the many windings of the efferent duct (Fig.
18F). The number of crowded windings of the efferent duct in the penial sac in
P. inconspicua, P. bonnieae and P. notmec could not always be accurately deter-
mined. The penis is not known in detail for P. maculata. The penis does not
have a cuticle in P. agassizii, P. brockii, P. bonnieae, and P. vayssierei. It is cov-
ered with papillae in Euselenops luniceps, and with cuticular hooks in Pleuro-
branchella nicobarica (Fig. 24D) and Koonsia obesa. There is an external cuticle
in Pleurobranchaea notmec (Fig. 18C—E), and an internal cuticular cylindrical
stylet of different transverse section (Fig. 1A—-H) in Pleurobranchaea meckeiii,
P. tarda, P. inconspicua, P. californica, and P. bubala.
The spermatocyst is often a simple widening, or its epithelium forms
pouches. In P. brockii it is generally a spiral caecum of three to five whorls, but
in one specimen (SAM—A29866) it consisted of epithelial pouches.
The spermatheca is small and not transparent, or wide and thin-walled. In
P. bubala there may be a larger ental vesicle with a smaller ectal one on its top
(Fig. 16G).
Mazzarelli (1891: 233-238, figs 1-3) gave an excellent description of the re-
productive apparatus of P. meckelii, but seemed to have confused the prostate
and albumen glands. He described the cuticular tube in the efferent duct,
though he called it a filament. By dissecting mating specimens he found that the
cuticular tube is projected from the everted penial sheath into the widenings of
the inner oviduct of the partner, the spermatheca and spermatocyst.
KEY TO THE NOTASPIDEAN GENERA
(Pe Shiclifextental Serer eee eee a ie nah s ae oa ko Phe de dee ee ee Z
SS ONICHIMINGeKMalKOtmADSCHt ame can acetate melee orn ced gts ss ene eens ne Som ses 5
Pee Shelliparthycovercdibyamantlowe ws... setae ce sce shee eee che dees tee Gymnotoplax
eo nellinotcovercdibyamantic(@Wmbraculacea). ¢..gss4s-eec8s0ss eh ode oases bee oe ae 3
3. Gill from left rhinophore along front and most of right side............... Umbraculum
Se OlllLonlyonypanvomunemiCNNSIdCre ta abe tsa te om bene gerd ee he ees eee tes de mee +
JNA GAM LOO WPESeMt teat sioe ts oe aia kiko awit Peat bd ee coe ee wo de Tylodina
INO brachicianecoothiearewrag eon ices es Us te AES waned NE Ml aoe sbeaais & dake ealie odechases Roya
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
5 Shell internal; rhinophores anteromedial, posterior to veil; jaw elements flat posteriorly,
pointedianteriorly (Pleurobranchidae) 42455 7 sees ae ee ee 6
Shell absent, rhinophores lateral, between veil and mantle border; jaw elements more or
less high polyconal'column'(Pleurobranchaeidac) a sees ee eee 11
6) Oviduet enters'albumen)eland|(Berthellinac)-ee ss ee ee 7
— ‘Oviduct unites with vagina (Rleurobranchinae)ie ao. 4 .4oe eae ae ee eee 9
7 ~Yeeth lamellitorm . 5 2.0. + oye esas Fo ha oe Spe ee ee On 8
—. Teeth hook shaped...) 0 sce oe nuh aoe te ane Neo ee ae Berthella
8 Teeth with one secondary cusp; prostatic gland cells in male duct........... Pleurehdera
——) Neethidenticulate prostate presenter ee a eee eee eee Berthellina
9° “Prostate presemt: 5 i 2. chine « artaeiaye a Som cece OS Sucre tise oe ne 10
=" Prostatic, sland cells;in: male: duct; 23-447 so ne ea a eee Susania
LO} Shelllarge-ibig fapsvaround!genitalvapentunesi ese en eee Oscanius
— Shell small, no big flaps around genital apertures...................... Pleurobranchus
11 ‘Notum half the length of f00t+-5 0. 25.3 dee en oe nee on eon Cr 12
—* Notum larger than footor equal... 2c pansies oe ee oo eee 13
12S Boldionhindtendloknotumspenisipapillateaeen eee eee Euselenops
=" Spuron hind endo toot] penisswith hoOksiee naa ne eee eee Koonsia
13) Radular teéeth:unicuspide © 5.235 ee eee eee re eee Pleurobranchella
— | Radular'teethibicuspid 2.35506 San ee ae ee ee 14
14 Secondary cusp of tooth well developed............ Pleurobranchaea (Pleurobranchaea)
= Se candahy Cusp iuGiINentahy nal are an eae ae Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea)
SPECIES OF THE FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE TREATED IN THE PRESENT PAPER
Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813; Mediterranean to Gulf of Guinea
. maculata (Quoy & Gaimard, 1832); Australia, New Zealand, Japan
. tarda Verrill, 1882: 546; western and south-eastern Atlantic
. agassizii Bergh, 1897; western Atlantic
brockii Bergh, 1897: 41; Japan to South Africa
. Inconspicua Bergh, 1897: 49; western Atlantic, Mediterranean, Israel
confusa sp. nov. pro parte Koonsia obesa, Verrill; north-western Atlantic
augusta sp. nov.; west Africa
bonnieae sp. nov.; Florida
bubala sp. nov.; Sow Africa
notmec sp. nov.; Israel
. vayssierei sp. nov.; Algiers
. (Macfarlandaea) subgen. nov.
. (M.) californica MacFarland, 1966: 94; California
Busclenons luniceps (Cuvier, 1817); Japan to South Africa
Koonsia obesa Verrill, 1882: 545; 1884, pl. 28 (fig. 7); western Atlantic
Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele, 1925: 283; Indian Ocean, South Africa
Gigantonotum album Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965; China
nel ssh nel as} ae) ae) ns} os} Fe) Sel Se) a5) Mel
LIST OF SYNONYMS
Pleurobranchaea meckelii var. occidentalis Bergh, 1897: 28; syn. nov. of P. tarda
Pleurobranchaea hedgpethi Abbott, 1952; syn. nov. of P. inconspicua
Oscaniopsis semperi Bergh, 1897: 54; syn. of Euselenops luniceps
Oscaniopsis compta Bergh, 1897: 58; syn. of Euselenops luniceps
Oscaniopsis amboinei Vayssiére, 1901: 15; syn. of Euselonops luniceps
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 7
Pleurobranchaea capensis, Vayssiére, 1901: 46; syn. nov. of P. tarda
Pleurobranchoides gilchristi O'Donoghue, 1929: 62; syn. nov. of Pleurobranchel-
la nicobarica Thiele
Pleurobranchaea hamwa Marcus & Marcus, 1955: 21; syn. of P. inconspicua
Pleurobranchaea gemini Macnae, 1962: 178; syn. nov. of P. brockii
Pleurobranchaea gela Marcus & Marcus, 1966: 174; syn. nov. of P. inconspicua
Pleurobranchaea occidentalis Bergh, 1897: 28; syn. nov. of P. tarda
Pleurobranchaea novaezealandiae Cheeseman, 1878: 378; syn. of P. maculata
INSUFFICIENTLY DESCRIBED SPECIES NOT TREATED HERE
Pleurobranchillus morosus Bergh, 1892: 28
Pleurobranchaea morula Bergh, 1905: 48
Pleurobranchaea melanopus Bergh, 1907: 33
Oscaniopsis pleurobranchaeana Bergh, 1907: 35
Pleurobranchaea algoensis Thiele, 1925: 282
Pleurobranchaea japonica Thiele, 1925: 283
Pleurobranchaea dorsalis Allan, 1933: 445
Classification, synonymy, and geographic distribution of the insufficiently
described species remain doubtful, .particularly as two or more well-
distinguished species may be sympatric.
[Sl Slelealalalwls|wlele
12
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF THE FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
INotumbhalitthescnethtotthetoote asi aren oe eine mee esate eG dete be eee be ae Z
INosumblancemthanioovonecqualieacsa 4 a. eos ate eis oe nee ted eee oe et ew eae | 3
Roldvonthindrendlofnotums penis papillate aye. sae aaa ee Euselenops luniceps
SPUmon mincdienadoltoot penis withiiOOks) 4.4.46 eae. es lo. -o- Koonsia obesa
aduilarteethtumicuspidh.. sea ae. aoe cae oee cs ener tae mee Pleurobranchella nicobarica
Naa Ul arte e Chiat Cus Picline wanes cer ree an hs A wee Poe a Ma ee LPS ches, geome 4
Secondary cusp of tooth well developed ...... . Pleurobranchaea (Pleurobranchaea) .... 5
Secondary cusp rudimentary.............. Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) californica
REMISISOLMECULIC ORD SC It eran Were ware nie hed ae ie EGON Le ie sed oy bade a 6
ISHS CUCM Sis a ois dee Gea: Bet cl oL Orly te En ORNS yee to once MEER IT
WATE S NOME <5 3 glee, bo 68 bd acd Ao Oo Hiro Mid citer HIG isi cea Gane ees arene ne ae ete besten 7
VEU MOVIE 5 6 dio: doo. ove Odo. od G15, Gro e URG eS aOR ark res ls otc a rae ea 10
IN@® [DEMME GAC.ou; a wig bbe Blac sig bots ee Magrerore Bromo See one toate RR ann P. agassizii
enialisa cd ev elope din: qymermrnen cro eee ie MRSS Nas dss Ales ca tuayh a Heh bee tees 8
RE MIAlESA CH ARKOWareite aay ware te ae eM yl a cade SE Ss P. maculata
PSTN GAGS CUOITIBNE os.°5 Shoso Goto rciote os 8) 6'b polols ra)n)G Gees Gln S IO cope ne Rater earner afc et 9
NOOMOl PE MISIeMlAanged ian. wanes eee ens eas edie he ews Be eas P. bonnieae
IOOUOL penismot widen than following parte... ee s4.¢e5-2-62+ 0405+. 5: P. vayssierei
eMISAVehys ONG ran GepniChpmmrnr ase eee ite Fa Ge en aise pase bas eo ates P. brockii
JOINS GINO soe oles 6 oo RAUMLaOm 6 Gta Rinne ons CENCE Rae een eee ee P. confusa
memistarsligintlyscumvc GisOViCtene at. cma yee ee mee Ce ee eee cw lnt ovla Seated o's ween ofl 12
Renisa lone ube withaanyloopsin)pemialiSaci anys) 458555) ae neste eos s oe 13
ESMIASAC Manowar till ania. (4 ee oe yk ee sa kins cbs m vues LHe wera hare P. tarda
Reimialsac widencdrarOunquGuct euaesnecm cas lem.. aqee na cess hase cena P. bubala
\WRGANI EY SINOLEL’ <a io & cls ooo: accied Notice Sass nine eT ee ed et an Sone ere ares a ere 14
NYRI OTN D386, oto 6 dig orcs eho Bless ol Ghee cients noe tea ae ea P. meckelii
Penial cuticle with crest, less than ten loops in penial sac ................... P. augusta
Penial cuticle cylindrical, ovoid in transverse section, up to twenty loops in penial sac
P. inconspicua
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Sufficient characters were not obtained to include P. notmec sp. nov. in the
key, though in the discussion it is distinguished from similar species. Bergh’s
(1892: 27, 28) genus Pleurobranchillus for morosus and brockii was synonymized
to Koonsia by Pilsbry (1896: 221, 223) and by Abbott (1974: 349). Later Bergh
(1897: 27, 28) transferred morosus and brockii to Pleurobranchaea.
Thiele’s (1925: 283) Pleurobranchella and its synonym Pleurobranchoides
O’Donoghue, 1929, have a notum noticeably larger than the foot. This is excep-
tional in the family Pleurobranchaeidae.
Pleurobranchaea Leue, 1813
Pleurobranchidium Blainville, 1824.
Cyanogaster Blainville, 1825.
Pleurobranchillus Bergh, 1892.
Koonsia Verrill, 1882, partim.
Non Pleurobranchella Thiele, 1925.
Type species
Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813.
Diagnosis
Pleurobranchaeidae with bicuspid radular teeth.
Pleurobranchaea (Pleurobranchaea) Leue, 1813
Type species
Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813.
Diagnosis
Secondary cusp of radular teeth well developed.
Remarks
Thiele’s (1931: 419) definition is confused and the forms he attributed to the
subgenus have quite different characters.
Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813
Figs 1A, H—-P, 2A—C
Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813.
Pleurobranchidium meckelii Blainville, 1824.
Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813. Mazarelli, 1891: 223. Pelseneer, 1894: 31, figs 86-99.
Bergh, 1897: 7, pls 1-4, pl. 7 (figs 16-18); 1899: 26; 1902: 228, pl. 9 (figs 1-3). Vayssiére,
1901: 42, figs 205-231.
Non P. meckelii var. occidentalis Bergh, 1897: 28 (= P. tarda).
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 9
Fig. 1. A-H. Optical transverse sections of penial stylets. A, H. Pleuwrobranchaea meckelii
Leue, 1813. B. P. inconspicua Bergh, 1897. C. P. augusta sp. nov. D. P. bonnieae sp. nov.
E-G. P. notmec sp. nov. I-P. P. meckelii Leue, 1813. I-J. Jaw platelets from Algiers specimen
from Vayssiére’s collection. K-L. Teeth from Algiers specimen. M-—P. Jaw platelets from
Israel specimen.
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. A-C. Pleurobranchaea meckelii Leue, 1813. A. Penial sac. B. Optical section of
penial stylet. C. Diagram of reproductive organs. D. P. maculata (Quoy & Gaimard, 1832),
diagram of reproductive organs (after Vayssiére 1901, fig. 247).
Material
Museum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris: two specimens, Algiers, AI-
geria, 1900; five specimens, Mediterranean, Israel to northern Sinai. Zoology
Museum, Copenhagen: some dissected incomplete specimens. United States
National Museum, Washington, D.C.: P 239, one specimen, Gulf of Guinea
(04°56’N 05°00’E).
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE it
Distribution
Mediterranean, Atlantic, Azores (Bergh, 1899); Cape Verde Islands (Vays-
siére, 1902).
Description
Length up to 100 mm. Radular teeth bicuspid, one to five outermost teeth
unicuspid. The efferent duct passes transversely through the retractor muscle. In
the strongly muscular penial sac it divides into penis proper and penis sheath.
The penis is an elastic cuticular stylet, 0,06—0,1 mm diameter, with a high crest
(Fig. 1A, H). It forms no more than six to ten loops and is up to 10,5 mm long.
Vayssiére’s (1901, fig. 223) figure of the structure of the penis, seen by
transparence, evidently refers to a young specimen.
Discussion
Bergh’s (1897) and Vayssiére’s (1901) descriptions and figures of P. mecke-
lii differ. Vayssiére evidently did not have homogeneous material. He indicated
a thin, transparent penial sac in P. meckelii, but for one of his samples an
Opaque, nacraeous, muscular one is present. He did not see the elastic cuticular
stylet that we found in his Algerian specimen (Fig. 2B) and in the Israeli speci-
men (Fig. 1A, H). The latter agrees perfectly with Bergh’s description and
figure (pl. 4, fig. 4) of the penial stylet, while the present specimen from Algiers
has a different transverse optical section.
Vayssiére (1901: 43) indicated that P. meckelii was the only species occur-
ring in the Mediterranean. Therefore, all subsequent findings of Pleurobran-
chaeidae from the region were identified as P. meckelii. However, the present
material from Turkey, Israel, and Algeria contains several other species. Even
among the three specimens received from the Museum National d’Histoire
Naturelle, of Vayssiere’s material collected in Algiers in 1890, there was one dif-
ferent from P. meckelii. It is called here P. vayssierei (see p. 38). The specimen
from the Gulf of Guinea extends the range of the species. Most of the synonyms
assigned to P. meckelii are insufficiently described. This is true of Sturany’s
(1904) description, and the record of specimens from the Red Sea is question-
able (Pruvot-Fol 1933: 91). P. meckelii var. occidentalis Bergh (1897: 28) is ac-
tually P. tarda.
Pleurobranchaea maculata (Quoy & Gaimard, 1832)
Figs 2D, 25E
Pleurobranchidium maculatum Quoy & Gaimard, 1832: 301-302, pl. 22 (figs 11-14).
Pleurobranchaea maculata (Quoy & Gaimard, 1832) Vayssiére, 1901: 49-56, figs 238-247.
Pleurobranchaea novaezealandiae Cheeseman, 1878: 378. Willan, 1983: 254, figs 57-70.
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Distribution
Australia, China, Japan, New Zealand, Sri Lanka.
Description
The length is up to about 50 mm.
The radular formula is 40—49 x 80.0.80; ten to fifteen of the outermost teeth
lack a secondary denticle.
The reproductive organs described by Vayssiére (1901) differ from those of
the other now known species by the long vagina ending in a globular caecum to
which the spermatheca is connected (Fig. 2D). The efferent duct winding up and
down the retractor muscle in the penial sac is similar to that of P. tarda (Fig.
5B), but it evidently does not have a stylet.
Discussion
Vayssiére (1901: 51) studied specimens of Quoy & Gaimard’s (1832) orig-
inal material and found that Bergh’s (1898b: 429, pl. 29, figs 2-9) animals from
Juan Fernandez were not P. maculata. The same must evidently hold for Odh-
ner’s (1921: 224) undescribed specimens from Masatierra.
The reproductive organs of a young specimen of P. tarda were somewhat
similar to those of P. maculata in Vayssiére’s figure, but the spermatocyst and
spermatheca are quite different.
The synonymizing of insufficiently described species only because they also
come from the Indo-Pacific region (Thompson 1970) cannot be maintained. P.
melanopus Bergh (1907: 33), P. japonica Thiele (1925: 283), and P. dorsalis Al-
lan (1933: 445) are possibly synonyms, but P. tarda (Fig. 5) is quite distinct from
P. maculata. Pleurobranchoides gilchristi O’ Donoghue (1929: 62), a synonym of
Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele (1925: 283), is a species with unicuspid teeth
and is also very different from P. maculata.
The male organ of Vayssiére’s (1901: 49-56, figs 238-247) P. maculata
(Quoy & Gaimard, 1832) from Australia is similar to that of Bergh’s (1897, pl.
7, fig. 14) P. tarda, but it does not have a stylet.
Pleurobranchaea confusa sp. nov.
Fig. 3
Koonsia obesa Verrill, 1882: 545-546, partim. Verrill, 1884: pl. 28 (fig. 7). Verrill, 1885, partim.
Pleurobranchaea obesa Bergh, 1897, non Verrill: 30-33, pl. 7 (figs 19-21). Vayssiére, 1901, non
Verrill.
Type material
Holotype: United States National Museum 784657, off Delaware Bay
(38°35'N 73°13'W), 400 m, 10 October 1881. This specimen was previously a
paratype of Koonsia obesa.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 13
ES aa ares
= =
=:
Se Sener fy
SOLS SS aaa
/}»
(l
Fig. 3. | Pleurobranchaea confusa sp. nov. A. Ventral view of preserved specimen (paratype
of Koonsia obesa). B. Diagram of reproductive organs. C. Optical section of efferent duct in
penis. D. Tip of penis.
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Further distribution
? Off Martha’s Vineyard, Massachusetts.
Etymology
The epithet confusa (from Latin: confusio) refers to the combination of two
distinct species in the original description of Koonsia obesa.
Description
The present contracted animal is 4,5 by 4,0 cm and has a smooth, swollen
notum extending far out over the foot (Fig. 3A). The oral veil has a single row
of papillae. The tentacles and rhinophores are smooth. The triangular foot is
narrower and shorter than the notum. It has a broad anterior border, a dorsal
spur, and a ventral foot gland (Fig. 3A). The gill has about twenty-six pinnae
and a smooth rachis.
The denticles on the jaw platelets are irregular in presence and in size;
there are two to twelve denticles per platelet. The radular formula is
34 x 90.0.90. Approximately fifteen of the outermost teeth of each row are uni-
cuspid. There is no rachidian tooth.
The male duct enters the prostate and, after leaving it, winds to enter the
wide penial sac. Inside the sac it forms a wide sheath and a strongly muscular
penis with two tiny cuticular bulbs at its tip (Fig. 3D). The oviduct has some epi-
thelial pouches, the spermatocyst. The oviduct widens and receives the large
spermatheca. The wide vagina continues, joining with the female gland mass,
and opens through the female aperture (Fig. 3B).
Discussion
This description is based on a paratype of Koonsia obesa from Verrill’s col-
lection and corresponds to the paratype studied by Bergh (1897: 30-33, pl. 7
(figs 19-21)). It differs from Verrill’s (1884, 1885) figures by the swollen and
overhanging mantle, elongate tail and the absence of ‘small hooks on the verge’.
Bergh was quite right to transfer this material to Pleurobranchaea. However,
specimens of the type species of Koonsia, K. obesa Verrill, 1882, may be found
again. The name Pleurobranchaea confusa sp. nov. is proposed for the paratype
of Koonsia obesa.
Pleurobranchaea tarda Verrill, 1880
Figs 4-5
Pleurobranchaea tarda Verrill, 1880: 398; 1882: 546, pl. 58, (fig. 26). Bergh, 1897: 33, pl. 6 (figs
28-31), pl. 7 (figs 1-15). Vayssiére, 1901: 57, figs 248-251.
Pleurobranchaea tarda var. Bergh, 1897: 39, pl. 7 (figs 21-27).
Pleurobranchaea meckelii var. occidentalis Bergh, 1897: 28. Vayssiére, 1901: 46.
Pleurobranchaea occidentalis Bergh, 1897. Marcus & Marcus 1967a: 45.
Pleurobranchaea capensis Vayssiére, 1900. Vayssiére, 1901: 46, pl. 4 (figs 232-237). O’Dono-
ghue, 1929: 48, figs 52-57. White, 1955: 173, fig. 6.
Pleurobranchaea maculata Thompson, 1970: 192, partim., non Quoy & Gaimard.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 15
Fig. 4. Pleurobranchaea tarda Verrill, 1882, living animal.
Material
About 120 specimens in the U.S. National Museum and South African Mu-
seum; western Atlantic, from 31° to 5°N; eastern Atlantic from Ghana and the
Cape of Good Hope and False Bay; intertidal to 1 450 m.
Further distribution
From Martha’s Vineyard to south of Cuba; Angola and Kabinda; Agulhas
Bank (35°10’S 23’E), 500 m.
Description
The present animals preserved, are from 7,5 to 52 mm long. The mantle is
generally smooth and about the same size as the foot. On its right side the bor-
der often forms an exhalant siphon over the anal opening and the tip of the gill.
The tip of the foot often extends posteriorly (Fig. 5C). In some specimens it
bears a short spur. The metapodial gland on the end of the sole is rarely devel-
oped. The veil, tentacles and rhinophores are typical for the genus. The tuber-
cles of the veil are sometimes preserved. The proboscis is often protracted, and
the anterior border of the jaw plates are as variable as in P. gela (Marcus, Ev. &
Marcus 1966, fig. 35).
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
16
‘yoodse JemusA “q ‘JAIS Jo weg -“q ‘wodse jesiog ‘dD
‘uouttoods onuepy U19}SeM JO SUPSIO DAT]ONpOIdaY ‘q “UsUIDOds ULLIOSIN JO suUeSIO dATIONPOIddY “VY “ZBI ‘[[IOA vpsv) vavyouvégosnafg °¢ “314
SD 3
tasers
a ates,
AN O42TA
FOILS
CLT
CY)
ay NM
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 17
The gill is adnate for about two-thirds of its length. The anus lies dorsally,
just in front of the gill membrane. The number of pinnules of the gill varies from
twelve to thirty pairs. They alternate and often begin with a tubercle, so that the
rachis appears tuberculate. In some animals the gill is regenerating. The genital
apertures lie in the middle of the body or slightly anteriorly. According to their
state of contraction or eversion they are flat, small and round, with or without a
flap. The male atrium is partly everted and the tip of the cuticular penis is pro-
jected in about twenty of the present specimens (Figs 5C, E). In an animal of
10 mm the tip of the cuticular penis was well developed and stuck out of the
male aperture.
The radular teeth are bicuspid except for about six of the outermost ones.
From the ampulla (Fig. SA—B) the thin common genital duct (0), divides
into male (e) and female (f) ducts. The latter recurves backward along the com-
mon duct. It is much wider initially, forming a ciliated serial spermatocyst. Vays-
siére (1901: 49) thought this was a caecum of the common duct, from which the
efferent duct went out. Farther outward the female duct, which functions as
both oviduct and insemination duct, is rather wide and has a high ciliated epithe-
lium. The narrow efferent duct is surrounded by a ball of fine branching prostat-
ic gland tubules (q). As it leaves these tubules, it widens and loops around the
male atrium, entering the narrow penial sac (s) and traversing the retractor mus-
cle (r) for up to 7 mm. It then turns outward and reaches the fundus of the atri-
um (a). The length of the efferent duct varies considerably along the retractor
muscle and within the atrium. If the penial sac remains intact during prepara-
tion, the aspect of the duct is as in Bergh’s (1897: pl. 7 fig. 14) figure. When it is
torn, it appears like Vayssiére’s (1901, fig. 249) figure. In its descending course
the efferent duct is separated into a sheath (h) and the cuticular penis proper
(p). This is a stylet of 0,12 mm diameter at its base, narrowing to 0,08 mm in di-
ameter. Its length varies from 1,9 to 6 mm. The chitinous penis enters the atri-
um through a small papilla. The penial cuticle is rough on the outer side (Fig.
5D). Vayssiére’s (1901, fig. 25D) figure of the tip of the penis corresponds to our
observations, but we cannot confirm his interpretation of its muscular nature.
The oviduct begins with a winding spermatocyst and continues to widen
slowly to the stalk of the spermatheca (t). The vagina (v) is short and wide and
receives the outlets of the albumen and mucous glands. The atrium is generally
long and narrow when imverted, or short and wide when partially everted. Its
epithelium contains transverse bands of glandular cells.
Discussion
Both Bergh and Vayssiére studied specimens from Verrill’s original ma-
terial, but neither of them observed the cuticular stylet. They figured only the
tip of the penis (Bergh 1897, pl. 7 (fig. 27); Vayssiére 1901, fig. 250). Vayssiere
considered the penis of his specimens (30-40 mm alive, 14-16 mm preserved) in-
completely developed. In the present material a preserved animal 7,5 mm in
length had a well-developed cuticular penial stylet. The inward loop of the effer-
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ent duct in Bergh’s (1897, pl. 7 (fig. 14)) figure is held together by the penial sac,
while in Vayssiére’s figure it is loose.
Bergh (1897: 28-30, figs 16-18) described Pleurobranchaea meckelii var. oc-
cidentalis from Martinique. Marcus, Ev. & Marcus (1967a: 45-48, fig. 5SA—-C)
identified specimens from Florida with Bergh’s form and raised this to species
level due to the different penial sac. Marcus & Marcus figured the penis in its
sheath (their fig. 55C). Comparing this and the present animals with P. tarda in
Vayssiére’s figure 249, the authors did not find any difference and consider
P. occidentalis as a synonym of P. tarda.
Pleurobranchaea capensis was described from two specimens from the Cape
of Good Hope collected in 1829. Vayssiére (1901: 46-49, figs 232-237) described
the inward loop of the efferent duct as being similar to that of P. tarda. How-
ever, it did not have a loop around the atrium (Fig. 5A).
Bergh (1907: 30) identified twenty-seven of his South African specimens as
P. capensis Vayssiére, with the ‘vas deferens much shorter than in P. meckelit’.
One specimen Bergh (1907: 32, pl. 11 (figs 1-8)) called P. capensis var., because
it had a ‘much longer vas deferens than represented by Vayssiére (fig. 232)’.
The present ample material showed a high variability of the length of the male
duct. The extremes corresponded to those described for P. tarda and P. capen-
sis. Hence P. capensis Vayssiére must be considered as a junior synonym of
P. tarda Verrill.
Pleurobranchaea brockii Bergh, 1897
Figs 6-8
Pleurobranchillus brockii Bergh, 1892: 28, nom. nud.
Pleurobranchaea brockii Bergh, 1897: 41-46, pl. 4 (figs 8-17). Vayssiére 1901: 62-69, figs
255-260. ? Farran, 1905: 355, pl. 5 (figs 24-28). White, 1948: 20. Macnae, 1962: 178. Lin
Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965: 275, pl. 1 (fig. 3).
Pleurobranchaea brockii var. Bergh, 1897: 46-47, pl. 7 (figs 33-38), pl. 8 (fig. 1).
Pleurobranchaea gemini Macnae, 1962: 178, fig. 7a—c.
Material
South African Museum: SAM-—A29866, two specimens, no locality; SAM—
A30078, one specimen, no locality; holotype P. gemini, SAM—A35234, Inhaca
Island, collected by W. Macnae, 18 July 1958; paratype P. gemini, SAM-—
A35236, Inhaca, collected by W. Macnae, 19 July 1958; SAM—A35237, two
specimens and egg mass, Inhaca Island, collected by W. Macnae, December
1967.
Distribution
Japan to South Africa.
Description
The preserved specimens are 38-110 mm long. The notum is smooth or ma-
millate. The colour, when preserved, is a net of black pigment around more or
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 19
wee DPR ta sce sas ee
ROSCA het ea Per
SSO
“
—
Ase)
aI
ys
oe veleey
i
i
Fig. 6. | Pleurobranchaea brockii Bergh, 1897. A. Dorsal view of preserved specimen.
B. Ventral view. C. Extruded penis. D. Tentacle and rhinophore. E. Gonopore. F. Trans-
verse section of vagina, scale 0,5 mm. G. Anterior of pharynx with borders of jaws.
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. Pleurobranchaea brockii Bergh, 1897. A. Diagram of reproductive organs of speci-
men SAM-A30078. B.Spermatocyst. C. Tip of contracted penis. D. Female organs.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE pa
Fig. 8. Pleurobranchaea brockii Bergh, 1897, paratype of P. gemini. A. Dorsal view of pre-
served specimen. B-C. Reproductive organs. D. Gonopore with a partially everted atrium.
E. Everted male and female pores.
eps ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
less regular light circles or big blotches, which contain mamillae. Pigment is also
present on the upper side of the foot. The notal border is free around its entire
surface. There are sixteen papillae on the border of the oral veil arranged in two
rows. The anterior side of the tentacles is thickly papillate in the South African
Museum specimens (Fig. 6A, D). In those from Inhaca there are fewer tubercles
(Fig. 8A). The rhinophores are set in deep sinuses between the tentacles and no-
tum. The foot projects further posteriorly in the specimens from Inhaca (Fig.
8A), but this may be an artifact of preservation. A spur and a foot gland are
present or absent. The gill rachis is narrow; the base of the 30-40 pairs of pinnae
may bear a knob.
The jaw plates have a straight anterior border (Fig. 6G). Their denticles are
present or absent and are irregular in number and size. The radular formula
is 40-48 x 65—-90.0.65-90. The teeth are bicuspid but the outermost laterals
are sometimes unicuspid. Vayssiére (1901, fig. 260) mentioned and figured a
rachidian tooth, but said it was atrophied and often lost or absent. It seems to
be the fused first laterals. The radula of the holotype specimen of P. gemini 1s
missing. Those of the paratypes are, like that of P. brockii, without a rachidian
tooth.
The male duct passes through the prostate (Fig. 7A) and enters the narrow
penial sac (s). There it forms a strong muscular, non-cuticularized penis (p). The
retractor muscle inserts on the middle of the dorsum and traverses the sac to the
atrium. In a contracted state the penis is curled (Fig. 8C). When extruded it is
up to 4 cm long (Fig. 6C). The shape of the atrium could not be determined.
When everted it is a wide and very thin sac (Fig. 8D), and when completely ex-
truded the male and female pores open on its innermost stronger part (Fig. 8E).
The gonopore is surrounded by a circular fold with some flaps.
The oviduct, after separating from the common duct, has a swollen part
(Bergh 1897, pl. 4 (fig. 8)), that sometimes forms a small caecum lying at the be-
ginning of the spermatocyst (Fig. 7A). In most specimens the latter forms a
longer caecum with three to five spirals, but rarely it is only a widening with epi-
thelial pouches in the duct. The duct narrows into several whorls and then
widens suddenly as the vagina. The vagina is long (Bergh 1897: 46) and its epi-
thelium is divided into many folds (Fig. 6F). Farther outwards the spermathecal
pouch opens into the vagina. The vagina joins the albumen and mucous glands.
It often has an ectal widening on one side.
The holotype of P. gemini had previously been opened only for the radula.
The female organs were intact (Macnae 1962, fig. 7c). The male organ was
examined for comparison. It corresponds to Bergh’s (1897) figure. The spawn is
a tall convoluted ribbon 13 mm wide, like that of P. californica.
Discussion
The descriptions of P. brockii and P. gemini are similar, and Macnae’s dis-
tinctive characters are not convincing: P. brockii ‘is characterized by a mamelo-
nated mantle’ while the ‘smooth, not mamillated surface’ of P. gemini is not
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 23
mentioned in the description, only in the comparison. In some of Macnae’s
paratypes which we observed the mantle was smooth, in others mamillate.
In all available specimens the sixteen velar papillae are set in two rows. In
the South African Museum specimens SAM—A29866 and SAM-—A30078, the
tentacles are thickly covered with papillae (Fig. 6D), while in Macnae’s animals
there are only a few. This merely represents intraspecific variation. Bergh found
no trace of rachidian teeth in the radula of P. brockii. In Macnae’s (1962: 178)
specimen of P. brockii they were ‘very deciduous and all had fallen off. . . and
were found in the debris at the bottom of the watch glass’. In P. gemini they
were not mentioned. Macnae’s figure shows very long primary cusps and the sec-
ondary cusp inserting near the base, but he (1962: 180) noted that they were
‘without the basal prominence on the inner edge’. The teeth of the paratypes of
P. gemini that were examined are like those of P. brockii. The radulae of ten
specimens were studied and a basal prominence was found in all specimens. It is
sometimes not visible when the teeth are tilted and this fact may explain why
Macnae did not notice the prominence in the holotype.
The ‘long and worm-like penis’ of P. gemini described by Macnae (1962:
180) was not figured. Bergh (1897, pl. 4 (fig. 8)) and Vayssiére (1901, fig. 256)
illustrated the large, soft, non-cuticular penis of P. brockii. A second caecum on
the outer oviduct of P. gemini, to which the spermatheca is attached (Fig. 8B),
is not recognizable in Bergh’s figure of P. brockii nor in the dissected specimens
from Inhaca. Based on the variability observed in Macnae’s type material and
the similarity of it to P. brockii, the two species are thought to be synonymous.
Pleurobranchaea agassizii Bergh, 1897
Fig. 9
Pleurobranchaea agassizii Bergh, 1897: 48, pl. 7 (figs 28-32). Marcus & Marcus, 1967a: 49, 51,
fig. 56A—D.
Distribution
Straits of Florida; Great Bahama Bank, 262-620 m.
Description
Length up to 10 cm; radular formula 32 x 98.0.98. About seventeen of the
outermost teeth lack the secondary denticle. The efferent duct (Fig. 9E) does
not enter the penial sac but, where the retractor muscle is attached to it, it divi-
des into a sheath and a muscular penis without cuticle. (After Marcus, Ev. &
Marcus, 1967a).
Discussion
In Marcus & Marcus’s (1967a: 49-51) description there were two errors.
P. 51: the allosperm duct does not rise through the efferent duct but through the
vagina and insemination duct, which is the outer oviduct. In figure 56D the ovi-
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
S
ae
Fig. 9. Pleurobranchaea agassizii Bergh, 1897, Reproductive organs.
duct is shown entering the albumen gland; actually, it only passes near the fe-
male gland mass and continues to the vagina, where it receives the secretions of
the albumen and mucous glands.
Pleurobranchaea inconspicua Bergh, 1897
Figs 1B, 10-11
Pleurobranchaea inconspicua Bergh, 1897: 49, pl. 8 (figs 2-10).
Pleurobranchaea hedgpethi Abbott, 1952: 1, pl. 1 (figs 1-8). Marcus & Marcus, 1959: 253,
fig. 6. Marcus, Er., 1961: 141. Marcus & Marcus, 1967b: 200. Marcus & Marcus, 1969: 18.
Nijssen-Meyer, 1965: 143, figs 1-3.
Pleurobranchaea gela Marcus & Marcus, 1966: 174, figs 35-37. Marcus & Marcus, 1968: 1336.
Material
About twenty-five specimens from 37°N to 5°N, 54°W to 86°W, 27-310 m;
one specimen from Atlit, Israel.
Further distribution
From Cape Hatteras to Argentina; Texas; Ivory Coast to Nigeria.
Description
The preserved animals range from 11 to 55 mm in length and are in various
states of contraction. Often the buccal mass is everted around the large
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE DS
Fig. 10. Pleurobranchaea inconspicua Bergh, 1897. A. Everted penis, scale 2,0 m
B. Jaws showing location of platelets in C-F. C-—F. Platelets from various locations. G. L
eral view of platelet. H. Penis of specimen from Israel.
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
5
Ze Dr, 4 MLD q
Mpotr wey NN
HE) a
AS
cen,
h AOE,
A
Fig. 11. | Pleurobranchaea inconspicua Bergh, 1897. A. Diagram of reproductive organs.
B. Root of penis and penis sheath.
projected pharynx. The anterior borders of the jaw plates are then visible, and
sometimes even the radula. Also the male atrium can be everted (Fig. 10A), and
the cuticular penial stylet may be observed. The notum is smooth or has some
bosses separated by pigment, which is sometimes retained in these furrows.
The jaw plates of a 15 mm long animal were 4,6 X 2 mm. In a 26 mm speci-
men they were 5 X 1,6 mm. They are colourless in small specimens and light
brown in the largest ones. The platelets are composed of columnar rodlets
whose surface is often hexagonal. Their length varies according to their position
in the jaw and with the size of the animal. The anterior border has a row of five
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE Mg
to fifteen denticles and often some knobs on the surface. These both can be lost
in the anterior, oldest part of the jaw plate.
The radular formula is 32—40 x 55-68.0.55-68. The lateral teeth are bicus-
pid as in other species of Pleurobranchaea, largest in the middle of the half-row
and smaller towards the outer border. Up to twenty outer teeth lack a secondary
denticle.
The ovotestis and hermaphroditic duct are typical of the genus, as are the
male duct and prostate (Fig. 11A). The male duct is 0,13 mm in diameter. Be-
yond where the male duct enters the penial sac, it is surrounded by a sheath
(Fig. 11B). Its lumen is cuticularized and stiffens the duct so that it forms up to
twenty roundish loops (Fig. 10H). This is the eversible penis proper, which may
reach 14 mm in length when extended. It is ovoid in transverse view, and flat-
tened on one side. Its lumen is circular or higher than broad (Fig. 1B). Ectally it
gradually tapers to its tip. It is difficult to find the point where the penial sheath
is separated from the penis proper, owing to the many loops of the efferent
duct. Therefore it was not distinguished in the figures of the penial sac. The
sheath is about 0,34—0,40 mm in diameter at its outer part. It ends forming a
small papilla in the fundus of the male atrium. The papilla is up to 7 mm long
and 2 mm wide. The entire male organ reaches 20 mm in length. The atrium can
be everted for copulation (Fig. 10A) and the cuticular stylet projected. The
smallest animal with a cuticular penis was 11 mm long. In material from 40°S, up
to 20 mm long, specimens still did not have genital apertures (Marcus, Ev. &
Marcus 1969: 20).
Discussion
Pleurobranchaea inconspicua, of which Bergh had a single specimen from
Brazil (Sergipe), is identical in all its described characters with P. hedgpethi Ab-
bott, 1952. Hence it is considered as a senior synonym of P. hedgpethi. The in-
semination ducts of P. hedgpethi (Marcus, Ev. & Marcus 1959, fig. 6) and
P. gela (Marcus, Ev. & Marcus 1966, fig. 37) were figured differently. These dif-
ferences appear to be a result of their state of contraction. Marcus, Ev. &
Marcus (1967a: fig. 56) illustrated the insemination duct of P. hedgpethi. It has
two vesicles as described for P. gela. In the present collection both forms occur.
It is believed that P. gela is also a junior synonym of P. inconspicua.
Pleurobranchaea augusta sp. nov.
Figs 1, 12
Type material
Holotype: United States National Museum 809995, West Africa (17°02'S
11°40'E), 54 m.
Etymology
From the Latin augustus, meaning venerable.
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
bh
Os)
i
Fig. 12. Pleurobranchaea augusta sp. nov. A. Jaw platelets from middle of jaw, scale
40 um. B. The same, from front of jaw, scale 50 um. C. The same, from near border of jaw.
D. Preserved animal. E. Outermost teeth. F. Radular tooth from middle of half-row.
G. Female organs. H. Penial sac.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 29
Description
The animal is 32 mm long, 20 mm broad, and 15 mm high, in the preserved
state (Fig. 12D). It is colourless. The smooth notum forms an exhalant siphon
over the tip of the gill. It is smaller than the foot. The foot has a tiny spur and a
weak metapodial gland. The oral veil, tentacles and rhinophores are contracted.
The gill has a smooth rachis with about twenty pinnae on either side. On the
base of each of the pinnae there is a knob. Four-fifths of the length of the gill
are adnate. The labial cuticle bears conical papillae. The platelets of the jaws
vary in shape according to their position on the jaw. The central ones (Fig. 12B)
have a long narrow surface with about ten denticles and some small tubercles
behind them. The marginal platelets appear roundish with less numerous and
shorter denticles (Fig. 12C). The radular formula is 40 x 70.0.70. The teeth are
bicuspid (Fig. 12F) except for one or two of the outermost ones (Fig. 12E).
Ectally from the ampulla the hermaphroditic duct divides into the male
efferent duct, and the oviduct (Fig. 12G). The former passes through the pros-
tate and enters the thin, roundish penial sac in its middle. The efferent duct
winds upward to the entrance of the retractor muscle which it penetrates (Fig.
12H). Later it divides, widening slightly, into the penial sheath and cuticular,
stiff penis proper. Together the penis and its sheath form about six loops. In the
present specimen the penis ends before the sheath opens into the atrium with a
small papilla.
The penial cuticle is cylindrical with equally thick walls. It forms a sharp
crest (Fig. 1C), which is visible in optical transverse section. This crest serves as
the distinctive character separating P. augusta from P. meckelii, whose cuticle is
more irregular. The globular spermatheca connects directly to the oviduct. The
oviduct widens to form a short vagina into which the accessory female glands
open. The female aperture is slightly posterior to the male aperture.
Discussion
The single specimen is similar to P. meckelii, but the shape of the penial
stylet differs (Fig. 1C, 2B), and the vagina is longer in P. meckelii (Fig. 2C).
Pleurobranchaea bonnieae sp. nov.
Figs 1D, 13-14
Type material
Holotype: United States National Museum 809999, R. V. Gerda, Station G
1001, Florida (27°N, 80°W), 61 m, 21 May 1968, one dissected specimen and
slides of the jaws, radula and genital organs.
Etymology
This species is named for Bonnie J. Gosliner.
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ol Ny
Fig. 13. Pleurobranchaea bonnieae sp. nov. A. Dorsal view of preserved animal, scale
5mm. B. Abnormal rows of radula. C—D. Jaw platelets, scale 0,03 mm.
Description
The preserved animal is 15,5 mm long and 7 mm wide. Its mantle is slightly
tuberculate, white, with bits of pigment retained on the rhinophores and the
mantle. The foot is shorter than the notum anteriorly and longer posteriorly
(Fig. 13A). The contracted oral veil is short and smooth. On the hind end of the
foot is a prominent spur. A pedal gland was not observed. The gill rachis is
smooth with about twenty pinnules on either side. The prebranchial gland opens
at the beginning of the rachis. The genital apertures are retracted and there ap-
pears to be a single small pore without a flap.
The colourless jaw plates are 3 mm long and 1,5 mm wide. The platelets
are up to 0,06 mm high. They are arranged in transverse, slightly slanting rows.
Their surface is hexagonal. Near the anterior end they are about 0,034 by
0,018 mm (Fig. 13C), while posteriorly they are 0,046 by 0,018 mm (Fig. 13D).
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE Sil
A ee. ite
2 e oe a0)
6 PRI es ~
A <<: $e ene SE . oy
Le. . .
RAO
state ses cectetetet one Sess
eee el lalate ee
—. 35
Fé a2 2 =
: . 5 0 off .
% . o . . . ‘4 .
° rae TH °
Sr EO Ae
D eo°
ie 0° e
g oe
7 fe
7
PS SSE
BOSS
: afl 7 Soot?
: Oe OS -.
Ceo ee eae OR Sica
DOA ite tie eerturires rere
=e D
Fig. 14. | Pleurobranchaea bonnieae sp. nov. A. Penial sac. B. Female organs. C. Optical
transverse section of penis. D. Root of penis. E-G. Parts of penis in sheath, scale 0,2 mm.
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The platelets bear nine to twelve denticles. The radula is 4,5 mm long and
2,4 mm wide. The largest of the light yellow, bicuspid teeth is 0,36 mm long.
The formula is 35 X 55.0.55. About six of the outermost teeth are unicuspid. In
the stomach was a 2 mm long aeolid nudibranch.
The reproductive organs were torn during preparation, but the male organ
is complete. The globular penial sac is 1,2 mm in diameter, the atrium 1,6 mm
long (Fig. 14A). A narrow efferent duct, 0,05 mm wide, traverses the penial sac
and continues into the 0,14 mm wide penis proper. The penis is contained within
a 0.25 mm wide penis sheath (Fig. 14D). For the first 1,4 mm of the looping
penis the lumen is closely sinuous (Fig. 14E). Beyond this point the diameter of
the penis diminishes to 0,07 mm while the sheath narrows to 0,12 mm in di-
ameter (Fig. 14F). The 20 mm long organ is so tightly coiled that its further
structure is not recognizable, except for the transverse section (Fig. 14C) and
the tip of the penis (Fig. 14G). As a 0,082 mm wide tube the penis opens
through a tiny papilla into the fundus of the atrium. On the basis of the structure
of the penis and wide sheath around it we guess that the sheath is everted for
copulation and the delicate, non-cuticular penis is protruded.
Discussion
While the single specimen may be juvenile, and the adult may have a cuti-
cular penis, P. bonnieae can still be separated from all described members of the
genus. P. bonnieae is most similar to P. vayssierei (Fig. 19B) and P. notmec
(Fig. 18F), but differs by the wide base of the penis and in its shape in transverse
section (Fig. 14C).
Pleurobranchaea bubala sp. nov.
Figs 15-17
Type material
Holotype: SAM-—A35231, 1 specimen and egg mass, Buffels Bay at Cape
Point, 10 m, collected by William R. Liltved, 4 October 1981.
Paratypes: SAM—A33966, one specimen, Simonstown harbour, Simon’s
Bay; SAM-—A35232, 2 specimens, The Mill, Bakoven, Cape Peninsula, 20 m,
collected by T. M. Gosliner, 16 September 1982.
Other material
SAM-—A35233, 4 specimens, Inhaca, Mozambique, collected by W. Mac-
nae.
Distribution
Specimens are known from the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula to In-
haca, Mozambique.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 33
Fig. 15. | Pleurobranchaea bubala sp. nov., living animal.
Etymology
This species is named bubala after the genus Bubalus, the buffalo, as it is
common at Buffels Bay, Cape Point.
Description
One living animal (Fig. 15) was 70 mm in length. The notum has a pattern
of dark brown pigment and irregular whitish blotches. A well-preserved animal
measured 50 x 35 mm. Its notum extends over the foot on both sides (Fig.
16A-B). Posteriorly it gradually merges with the foot. The oral veil has a row of
small tubercles. A spur is absent. A triangle of pedal glands was visible in one
living specimen. The gill has a smooth rachis with twenty-six pinnae alternating
on either side.
The hexagonal jaw platelets have four to fourteen denticles, rarely more
than ten. The radula formula is 35 x 100.0.100; 20-30 of the outer laterals do
not have a secondary cusp (Fig. 16D).
The genital apertures are protruded and have a slight flap on the hind bor-
der. The glandular tubes of the prostate are united, forming globular masses
(Fig. 16G). The efferent duct between the prostate and penial sac is thick,
0,6 mm in diameter, its lumen is 0,2 mm in diameter. The penial sac (s)
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
G
Fig. 16. Pleurobranchaea bubala sp. nov. A. Dorsal view of preserved animal. B. Ventral
view of the same. C. Radular tooth from middle of half-row. D. Outermost teeth of row.
E. Spawn. F. Eggs in spawn. G. Reproductive organs.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 35)
Fig. 17. | Pleurobranchaea bubala sp. nov., egg mass.
accompanies the efferent duct (e) inward along the retractor muscle. It is wider
in the middle than in P. tarda, but less globular than that of P. inconspicua. The
cuticular stylet (c) is similar to that of P. tarda and about 5 mm in length. The
atrium (a) is strongly muscular, 6-9 mm long.
The epithelium of the oviduct forms pouches, the spermatocyst (y). From
the spermatocyst the oviduct narrows until it branches to the unstalked bilobed
spermatheca (Fig. 16G). From this point the vagina (v) or insemination duct is
much wider and has a high, folded epithelium. Near the female aperture it re-
ceives the accessory glands and forms a small caecum.
The egg mass (Figs 16E, 17) is a coiled tube of several irregular whorls.
There are one to three eggs per capsule (Fig. 16F).
This species has been observed to feed on other opisthobranchs including
members of its own species.
Discussion
The reproductive organs differ from the other species by the shape of the
penial sac, the double spermatheca and the long glandular vagina. P. bubala is
sympatric with P. tarda in South Africa and is distinguished by its larger size,
abundant white blotches, elongate vagina, and the shape of the prostate (Figs
5A, 16G).
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Pleurobranchaea notmec sp. nov.
Figs 1E-G, 18
Type material
Holotype: University of Israel, Department of Zoology 1005, eastern Medi-
terranean, off Turkey, 11-140 m.
Paratypes: University of Israel, Department of Zoology, two specimens,
Haifa Bay; one specimen, Palmahim, 80 m; one specimen, No. 16399, northern
Sinai, 45 m.
Etymology
The name refers to the fact that this species was originally identified as P.
meckelii, from which it is distinct.
Description
The size of the preserved animals is from 12 to 40 mm long and 8 to 15 mm
wide.
The surface of the mantle is slightly bossed, without tubercles.
The colour is not preserved, except some pigments in the furrows between
the bosses. The animals are ‘museum’ brown. The notum is smaller than the
foot. Its right border extends out over the gill. The anterior border of the notum
forms the oral veil bearing a row of papillae. The sides of the veil are produced
into pointed cephalic tentacles with split sides. The rhinophores are inserted be-
tween the tentacles and the lateral mantle border. They are as long as the tenta-
cles, blunt, cylindrical, and rolled.
The anterior end of the foot is divided by a transverse furrow. The hind end
bears a pointed dorsal spur. On the ventral side the pedal gland forms a longi-
tudinal furrow.
The gill is about one-third of the body length and has twenty to thirty alter-
nating pinnules on each side. Its anterior three-fourths to four-fifths are adnate.
The anus is dorsal to the middle of the gill. The rachis is smooth.
The prebranchial glands open slightly anteriorly to the gill. A little more
anteriorly are the genital apertures, united by a circular fold. Their shape varies
according to contraction. A flap is absent. The large pharynx often protrudes
from the mouth opening. The labial cuticle bears scattered papillae. The ante-
rior border of the jaws appears whitish on the everted proboscis but is light
brown when cleaned with potassium hydroxide. They are composed of columnar
rodlets of variable shape, reaching 0,2 mm in height. The rodlets are polygonal,
longer than wide. Ectally they measure about 0,05 mm in length and 0,04 mm in
width. Posteriorly they are longer and narrower, the longest attaining 0,11 mm
in length and 0,017 mm in width. Their frontal borders overlap and bear many
small denticles, which are also present on the surface behind the border. The
bases of the rodlets are more uniform in size. Anteriorly they are 0,05 by 0,03
mm; posteriorly 0,07 by 0,03 mm.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 37
nial eZ
VG
MAA SD,
1
|
(
ae \
TT WSN
tea WI NL
i ima)
é ian
aT |
\t
Cas
=
=5 \
——— ss
—————SS——
—
S—-s
———S
———S
SSS
y
Fig. 18. Pleurobranchaea notmec sp. nov. A. Radular tooth from middle of half-row.
B. Outer radular tooth. C-—E. Optical sections of penis. F. Male reproductive organ, scale
0,3 mm.
IE
HY |
: i
it
a
The radula of the largest specimen is 16 mm long; each half is 5 mm broad.
The formula is 50 x 80.0.80. The teeth have a small secondary cusp (Fig. 18A).
In the middle of the half-row the longest teeth attain 0,65 mm in length and dim-
inish gradually towards the outer edge. One to four outer teeth lack a secondary
cusp (Fig. 18B).
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The genital ducts are so compact that they could not be disentangled. The ovo-
testis follicles contain sperm or oocytes. The slender hermaphroditic duct widens
into a long ampulla, narrows again, and divides into the male and female ducts.
The male duct enters the round prostate (Fig. 18F, q) and emerges as a very thin
efferent duct (e) which penetrates the penial sac (s) near its outer end. Inside
the sac the penis is a long, winding tube, 0,17 mm in diameter. Its lumen is
0,10-0,14 mm in diameter. The penis has a very thin cuticle and is surrounded
by a thin penial sheath (Fig. 18C—E), which must evidently be everted. After
forming about six loops, the penis straightens and emerges in the male atrium as
a small papilla (Fig. 18F). The atrium (a) is a wide, thick-walled sac that opens
in front of the female pore.
It was not possible to follow the oviduct. It did not seem to have a spiralled
spermatocyst.
Discussion
The present animals from Israel were originally identified as Pleurobran-
chaea meckelii. However, P. meckelii differs by its long whip-like, cuticular
penial stylet. The single specimen of P. vayssierei (Fig. 19B) is also similar but
lacks a cuticle around the efferent duct in the penial sheath.
Pleurobranchaea vayssierei sp. nov.
Fig. 19
Type material
Holotype: Museum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, from Algiers, 1900,
one specimen among Vayssiére’s specimens of P. meckelii, No. 52. (See p. 11.)
Etymology
The name refers to the fact that the unique specimen was found in the col-
lection of Albert Vayssiere.
Description
The preserved animal is 32 mm long, 11 mm broad and 10 mm high. The
notum is as large as the foot, smooth and colourless. There is a tiny spur on the
tip of the foot (Fig. 19A), and a weak metapodial gland on its underside. The
oral veil is smooth, perhaps as a result of 82 years of preservation. The gill has a
smooth rachis with twenty-six pinnae. The jaw plates (Fig. 19C) are broken.
Their platelets are relatively broad (Fig. 19D). The platelets bear up to fifteen
denticles, which disappeared after mounting them in glycerine. The radular for-
mula is 35 x 65.0.65. The teeth are dark greyish and bicuspid (Fig. 19E). None
are unicuspid on the outer border.
The male duct forms many loops in the tight transparent penial sac (Fig.
19B). A stylet is not recognizable. The single specimen was so fragile that the fe-
male organs could not be dissected completely. The spermatocyst is a slight
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 39
yo
ef / Ci —. 5)
Cali (i we
A\t
v
we
G
D F
Fig. 19. Pleurobranchaea vayssierei sp. nov. A. Preserved specimen from Algiers. B. Penial
sac. C. Anterior view of pharynx with jaws. D. Jaw platelets. E. Radular teeth from middle
of half-row. F. Twenty-second outer tooth. G. Five outermost teeth.
widening of the oviduct, and the oviduct is continued into a long, rather narrow,
ciliated vagina.
Discussion
The most similar species is P. bonnieae from Florida (Fig. 14A), which has
an enlarged root of the penis. In P. notmec up to twenty teeth of the radula are
unicuspid.
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) subgen. nov.
Type species
Pleurobranchaea californica MacFarland, 1966.
Diagnosis
Pleurobranchaeidae with rudimentary secondary cusps on all radular teeth.
Pleurembolic penis with cuticular stylet.
Etymology
The subgeneric name honours the late Frank Mace MacFarland of Stanford
University.
Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) californica MacFarland, 1966
Figs 20-22
Pleurobranchaea californica MacFarland, 1966: 94-101, pl. 15 (figs 16-28), pl. 17 (figs 1-17).
Chivers, 1967: 515-521.
Pleurobranchaea sp. Coan, 1964: 173.
Fig. 20. Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) californica MacFarland, 1966, living animal.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 41
Fig. 21. Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) californica MacFarland, 1966 (after MacFarland
1966). A. Reproductive organs (retracted). B. Radular tooth. C. Reproductive organs with
everted penis.
Distribution
California, from Klamath River to San Diego, 10-470 m.
Description
The living animal (Fig. 20) is brown with white blotches, up to 335 mm
long. The rhinophores are typical of the family Pleurobranchaeidae. The jaw
platelets are columnar with denticles. The radular formula of a 165 mm long ani-
mal is 52 x 130—145.1.130-145. All the lateral teeth have a rudimentary second-
ary cusp (MacFarland 1966: pl. 15 (figs 22—24)). The penis sac (= penis sheath,
MacFarland 1966) is long (2 cm in an adult specimen) and not quite close
around the penial sheath (= preputium, MacFarland 1966). The efferent duct
accompanies the retractor muscle upwards and they enter the sheath together.
Here the sheath separates from the whip-like muscular penis. The egg mass is a
highly convoluted collar (Fig. 22).
Coan (1964: 173) observed that the species is carnivorous and cannibalistic.
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 22. Pleurobranchaea (Macfarlandaea) californica MacFarland, 1966. Egg mass.
Euselenops Pilsbry, 1896
Pleurobranchaea (Euselenops) Pilsbry, 1896: 228. Thiele 1931: 419.
Neda Adams & Adams, 1854. Non Mulsant.
Oscaniopsis Bergh, 1897: 53. Vayssiére, 1901: 6.
Type species
Pleurobranchus luniceps Cuvier, 1817.
Diagnosis
Notum much smaller than foot, penis papillate.
Euselenops luniceps (Cuvier, 1817)
Fig. 25D-G
Pleurobranchus luniceps Cuvier, 1817: 186.
Oscaniopsis semperi Bergh, 1897: 55, pl. 6 (figs 7-27).
Oscaniopsis compta Bergh, 1897: 58, pl. 8 (figs 11-27).
Oscaniopsis amboinei Vayssiére, 1898: 9, fig. 27; 1901: 15, figs 190-204.
Non Oscaniopsis pleurobranchaeana Bergh, 1907: 35, pl. 4 (figs 16-21).
Oscaniopsis luniceps Vayssiére, 1901: 15.
Euselenops luniceps O’Donoghue, 1929: 55, figs 65-74. Pruvot-Fol, 1933: 107. Burn, 1962: 131.
Lin Guangyu & Tchang-Si, 1965: 269, 275, fig. 4.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 43
Distribution
Indo-Pacific: Hawaii, China, Hong Kong, Hainan, Japan, Philippines, Am-
boina, Queensland, Mauritius, Inhaca, South Africa, ?Red Sea.
Description
The length is up to 90 mm (Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si 1965) with the notum
much smaller than the foot and its hind end forming a projecting tip. The radu-
lar teeth are unicuspid. The prostatic cells are contained in the efferent duct and
the acrembolic penis is covered with soft cones.
Discussion
One 12 mm long specimen from Palmahim, Israel, had the outer aspect of
Euselenops with a broad velum, small notum, large foot, and a notch in the hind
end of the mantle. At first glance it seemed to be a Euselenops sp., but it was
discovered that the radula was bicuspid, that the notal notch was the siphon of
the gill, and that there was a large spur on the tip of the foot (Fig. 25B), indicat-
ing that it was a Pleurobranchaea sp. As the reproductive organs were not devel-
oped, the species could not be determined.
Pleurobranchella Thiele, 1925
Pleurobranchella Thiele, 1925: 283. Willan, 1977: 151.
Pleurobranchoides O’Donoghue, 1929: 62.
Pleurobranchaea (Euselenops) Pleurobranchella Thiele, 1931: 419.
Type species
Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele, 1925.
Diagnosis
Unicuspid species of Pleurobranchaeidae; notum covering foot on all sides;
acrembolic penis with cuticular hooks.
Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele, 1925
Figs 23-24
Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele, 1925: 283, pl. 33 (figs 9-11).
Pleurobranchoides gilchristi O’Donoghue, 1929: 62, figs 75-85. Eales, 1937: 371.
Pleurobranchoides sp. Eales, 1938: 90, fig. 10.
Material
SAM-A33973, three specimens (105 mm, 115 mm, 150 mm long, pre-
served), Monte Belo, Mozambique, 400 m.
Distribution
Nicobares, Gulf of Aden, southern Africa, 220-269 m.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 23. | Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele, 1925. A. Diagram of reproductive organs.
B. Dorsal aspect. C. Radular tooth. D. Penial hook, scale 100 um. E. Ventral aspect.
Description
The large mantle extends far over the foot on all sides (Fig. 23E). The radu-
lar formula is 60 x 133.0.133. The extruded penis (Fig. 24B) consists of a wide
everted atrium and a long cylindrical, slightly spiralled penis proper. Its concave
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 45
D
Fig. 24. Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele, 1925. A. Outer end of penis, scale 2,0 mm.
B. Extruded penis, scale 5,0 mm. C. Penial hooks. D. Penis removed from retracted sac.
side is smooth; the convex side is covered with hook-shaped papillae (Fig.
24C-D). The extruded atrium is 30 mm long and 8 mm wide in the largest speci-
men. The penis proper is 7 by 2 mm in the largest specimen and 6 by 2,5 mm in
the smallest.
Discussion
Though Thiele (1925) did not figure the penis of his Pleurobranchella nico-
barica, his description is precise enough to identify the present specimens with
his material. O’Donoghue gave only a short description of Pleurobranchoides
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
gilchristi, but it is considered sufficient to synonymize it with Pleurobranchella
nicobarica.
Eales’s (1938: 90, fig. 10) Pleurobranchoides sp. from the Gulf of Aden has
a papillate penis and is certainly identical with Pleurobranchella nicobarica.
Koonsia Verrill, 1882
Koonsia Verrill, 1882: 545.
Type species
Koonsia obesa Verrill, 1882.
Remarks
Pilsbry (1896: 221) considered Pleurobranchillus Bergh, 1892, as a synonym
of Koonsia, but Bergh (1897) transferred Pleurobranchillus to Pleurobranchaea,
as did Willan (1977: 153).
Koonsia obesa Verrill, 1882
Fig. 25C
Koonsia obesa Verrill, 1882: 545, partim; 1884: pl. 28 (fig. 7); 1885: 571, fig. 107. Abbott, 1974:
349, fig. 2046.
Distribution
Western Atlantic, 7Martha’s Vineyard: ?Delaware Bay, 400-560 m.
Discussion
Verrill (1882) included two distinct species in his original description. In his
description of the genus Verrill (1882: 545) stated that ‘the back is overhanging
both on the sides and posteriorly, and there is a distinct mantle edge all around’.
This agrees with the species description that ‘the mantle forms a ring along the
lateral and posterior borders’; it does not correspond to the figure of Koonsia
obesa but to his distinct paratypes, which have been examined (see P. confusa).
He stated that ‘the foot is narrower’, as in the paratype. In the generic diagnosis
Verrill stated that ‘the verge is armed with small hooks, but the spicule, present
in Pleurobranchaea, is not protruded in any of our specimens of Koonsia, if
present’. He neglected to mention this in the species description, but noted of
Pleurobranchaea tarda ‘the verge . . . with rows of minute recurved hooks near
the end, and terminated by a slender, curved spicule’ (Verrill 1882: 546).
The paratypes without hooks seen by Bergh (1897), Vayssiére (1901), and
the authors (Fig. 3) are quite different from Verrill’s figure (1885: 107). They
also differ from his figures of P. tarda (1882, pl. 58 (fig. 6); 1885, fig. 105), which
possess a stylet, but lack hooks.
As Bergh (1897: 33) did not find penial hooks in the paratype specimen of
‘Koonsia obesa’ from the original locality, he rejected Koonsia and placed K.
obesa in Pleurobranchaea. The authors believe that the distinct penial spines
47
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
FO
? £
(<)
°
Q
°
fe)
fo)
os]
flo:
Soo
So
90
poe ove6
fe 250800909
5 OO a 00000
Grn 00 “50 RCocs
a9
G
E
Fig. 25. A. Gigantonotum album Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965, preserved specimen (after
Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si 1965). B. Juvenile Pleurobranchaea sp. from Israel. C. Koonsia
obesa Verrill, 1882, holotype (after Verrill 1882). D. Euselenops luniceps (Cuvier, 1817) re-
productive system (after Vayssiére 1901). E. Pleurobranchaea maculata (Quoy & Gaimard,
1832), preserved specimen (after Baba 1937). F—G. Euselenops luniceps. F. Penial papillae
G. Whole animal (after Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si 1965).
(after Bergh 1897).
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
described by Verrill indicate that his type material actually represents two
species and therefore name the paratype examined Pleurobranchaea confusa. If
the slender species (Fig. 25C) is found again, its generic placement depends
upon whether the radula is unicuspid or bicuspid. Until such time it is preferred
to maintain Koonsia as a distinct genus. Pleurobranchella nicobarica Thiele,
1925, Euselenops luniceps (Cuvier, 1817), and Pleurobranchus hirasei Baba,
1971, are the only other notaspideans known to possess an ornamented penis.
Gigantonotum Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965
Gigantonotum Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965: 270.
Type species
Gigantonotum album Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965.
Diagnosis
Pleurobranchaeid with a very wide mantle that covers the foot and the gill
completely. Its borders are almost half as wide as the foot. Its underside bears
nodules. The radula is unicuspid; its formula is 52 x 144.1.144.
Gigantonotum album Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si, 1965
Fig. 25A
Gigantonotum album Lin Guangyu and Tchang Si, 1965: 270, figs 5—6, pl. 1 (fig. 5d, v).
Pleurobranchella alba Willan, 1977: 153.
Distribution
South of Hainan Island, China Sea, 220 m.
Discussion
Lin Guangyu & Tchang Si (1965) compared their species with Koonsia, but
stated that in Gigantonotum the foot is covered by the mantle, while it extends
posteriorly for a considerable distance in Koonsia.
On the whole, Gigantonotum is similar to Pleurobranchella which, how-
ever, lacks a rachidian tooth. The geographic proximity makes a synonymy
probable. Willan (1977: 151) synonymized Gigantonotum with Pleurobranchella,
but considered only the incomplete previous descriptions. As long as the repro-
ductive organs of G. album remain unknown it is preferable to consider Gigan-
tonotum as a distinct but doubtful genus.
ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
Only preliminary zoogeographical remarks can be made, owing to the fact
that many records are based on unrecognizable, incompletely described, or un-
justly synonymized species. In other cases information about the fauna of a re-
gion is incomplete. For example, Edmunds (1977) did not record any nota-
spideans from Ghana.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 49
Five species of Pleurobranchaeidae have been recorded from the western
Atlantic: Pleurobranchaea tarda, P. agassizii, P. inconspicua, P. bonnieae, and
Koonsia obesa. Of these, P. tarda and P. inconspicua are more widespread. P.
tarda is known from the eastern Atlantic coast of Africa from Ghana and from
South Africa, where it extends into the Indian Ocean. P. inconspicua is also
known from the Mediterranean and west Africa. Pleurobranchaea meckelii, P.
notmec and P. vayssierei are known only from the Mediterranean, while P. au-
gusta has been recorded only from west Africa. P. bubala is known from the At-
lantic and Indian Ocean coasts of southern Africa.
Pleurobranchaea brockii and Pleurobranchella nicobarica are both known
from the eastern and western Indian Ocean. Euselenops luniceps is widespread
in the Indo-Pacific where it has been recorded from Hawaii to South Africa.
Other species known from the Indo-Pacific region—Pleurobranchaea maculata
and Gigantonotum album—may be widespread but their ranges need to be es-
tablished from reliable records.
Pleurobranchaea californica is restricted to the Pacific coast of North
America.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are deeply indebted to our colleagues at other institutions who gener-
ously provided assistance and specimens. To Frederick M. Bayer, Harald Reh-
der, and Joseph Rosewater of the United States National Museum, Washington;
Alexander Barash, University of Israel, Tel Aviv; Hanne Just, Zoology Mu-
seum, Copenhagen; Philippe Bouchet, Museum National d’Histoire Naturelle,
Paris; and Luise Schmekel, Zoologisches Institut der Universitat, Minster, we
extend our sincere thanks.
Several staff members of the South African Museum provided considerable
assistance. William Liltved prepared the final figures and collected specimens.
Michelle van der Merwe printed the photographs and Marcelle Scheiner typed
the final drafts of the manuscript. To them we also extend our appreciation.
REFERENCES
Assott, R. 1952. Two new opisthobranch mollusks from the Gulf of Mexico belonging to the
genera Pleurobranchaea and Polycera. Fla. St. Univ. Stud: 7: 1-7.
ABBOTT, R. 1974. American seashells. 2nd ed. New York: D. van Nostrand Reinhold.
ApaAms, H. & Apams, A. 1854. The genera of recent Mollusca 2. London: Van Voorst, Row.
ALLAN, J. 1933. Opisthobranchs from Australia. Rec. Aust. Mus. 18: 443-450.
BaBA, K. 1937. Opisthobranchia of Japan. 1. J. Dept. Agric. Kyushu imp. Univ. 5: 195-236.
Basa, K. 1969. List of the Pleurobranchidae and the Pleurobranchaeidae from Japan. Collect-
ing Breed. Tokyo 31: 190-191.
BaBA, K. 1971. Pleurobranchus hirasei, n. sp., proposed for a Mollusc formerly known as Osca-
nius testudinarius Hirase, 1927, from Japan (Opisthobranchia: Notaspidea). Venus 30:
23-28.
BarasuH, A. & DANIN, Z. Opisthobranchia (Mollusca) from the Mediterranean waters of Israel.
Israel J. Zool. 20: 151-200.
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BERGH, R. 1892. Opisthobranches provenant des Campagnes du Yacht L’Hirondelle. Résult.
Camp. scient. Prince Albert I 4: 1-35.
BErGH, R. 1894. Die Opisthobranchien. Reports on the dredging operations off the west coast
of Central America to the Galapagos, to the west coast of Mexico, and in the Gulf of Cali-
fornia, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, carried on by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer
‘Albatross’, during 1879, Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U.S.N. commanding. Bull.
Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 25: 125-235.
BERGH, R. 1897. Malacologische Untersuchungen 5. Jn: SEMPER, C., ed. Reisen im Archipel der
Philippinen 7, 4 Abt., 1 Absch., Die Pleurobranchiden 1-2: 1-115. Wiesbaden: Kreidel’s
Verlag.
BErRGH, R. 1898a. Malacologische Untersuchungen 5. Jn: SEMPER, C., ed. Reisen im Archipel
der Philippinen 7, 4 Abt., 3 Absch., Die Pleurobranchiden 3: 117-158. Wiesbaden: Krei-
del’s Verlag.
BERGH, R. 1898b. Die Opisthobranchier der Sammlung Plate. Fauna Chilensis, 1. Zool. Jb.
Suppl. 4: 481-582.
BERGH, R. 1899. Nudibranches et Marsenia provenant des campagnes de la Princesse Alice
Résult. Camp. scient. Prince Albert I 14: 1-45.
BERGH, R. 1905. Die Opisthobranchiata der Siboga Expedition. Siboga Exped. 50: 1-248.
BerGH, R. 1907. The Opisthobranchiata of South Africa. Trans. S. Afr. phil. Soc. 17: 1-144.
BLAINVILLE, H. 1824. Dict. Sci. Nat. 32: 276-282.
BLAINVILLE, H. 1825. Manuel de malacologie et de conchyliologie. Paris: F. G. Levrault.
Burn, R. 1962. On the pleurobranch subfamily Berthellinae. Mem. natn. Mus. Mel. 25:
129-148.
CHEESEMAN, S. T. 1878. Description of three new species of opisthobranchiate Mollusca from
New Zealand. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1878: 275-277.
CHIvERS, D. 1967. Observations of Pleurobranchaea californica MacFarland, 1966 (Opistho-
branchia, Notaspidea). Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. (4) 32: 515-521.
Coan, E. 1964. A note on the natural history of Pleuwrobranchaea species (Gastropoda,
Opisthobranchia). Veliger 6: 173.
Cuvier, G. 1817. Régne animal 4. Paris: Deterville.
EALes, N. 1937. Apparent viviparity in Pleurobranchoides. Proc. malac. Soc. Lond. 22:
371-374.
EALES, N. 1938. A systematic and anatomical account of the Opisthobranchia. Scient. Rep.
John Murray Exped. 5: 77-122.
Epmunps, M. 1977. Larval development, oceanic currents, and origins of the opisthobranch
fauna of Ghana. J. molluscan Stud. 43: 301-308.
FARRAN, G. 1905. Report on the opisthobranchiate Mollusca, collected by Prof. Herdman at
Ceylon in 1902. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, Suppl. Rep. 21: 329-364.
LevE, S. 1813. Pleurobranchaea novo molluscorum genre. Dissrn. Inaug. Acad. Halle 1813:
1-13.
Lin Guaneyu & TcHANG Si. 1965. Etude sur les Mollusques Pleurobranchidae de la c6te de
Chine. Oceanologia Limnolagia sin. 7: 265-276.
MACFARLAND, F. 1966. Studies of the opisthobranchiate mollusks of the Pacific Coast of North
America. Mem. Calif. Acad. Sci. 6: I-XIV, 1-546.
MacnaeE, W. 1962. Notaspidean opisthobranchiate Mollusca. Ann. Natal Mus. 15: 167-181.
Marcus, Er. 1961. Opisthobranchs from North Carolina. J. Elisha Mitchell scient. Soc. 77:
141-151.
Marcus, Er. & Marcus, Ev. 1968. Some opisthobranchs from Ivory Coast. Bull. Inst. fr. Afr.
noire (A) 30: 1334-1342.
Marcus, Er. AND Marcus, Ev. 1970. Opisthobranch molluscs from the southern tropical
Pacific. Pacif. Sci. 24: 155-179.
Marcus, Ev. 1972a. On some Acteonidae (Gastropoda Opisthobranchia). Papéis a. Dep. Zool.
S. Paulo 25: 167-188.
Marcus, Ev. 1972b. On the Anaspidea (Gastropoda Opisthobranchia) of the warm waters of
the western Atlantic. Bull. mar. Sci. 22: 841-874.
Marcus, Ev. 1973. On the genus Bosellia (Mollusca, Gastropoda, Ascoglossa). Bull. mar. Sci.
23: 811-823.
FAMILY PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE 51
Marcus, Ev. 1974. On some Cephalaspidea (Gastropoda Opisthobranchia) from the western
and middle Atlantic warm waters. Bull. mar. Sci. 24: 300-371.
Marcus, Ev. 1978. The western Atlantic species of Onchidella (Pulmonata). Sarsia 63:
221-224.
Marcus, Ev. 1980. Review of the western Atlantic Elysiidae (Opisthobranchia Ascoglossa),
with a description of a new Elysia species. Bull. mar. Sci. 30: 54-79.
Marcus, Ev. 1982a. The western Atlantic Tritoniidae. Bolm Zool. 6: (in press).
Marcus, Ev. 1982b. Systematics of the genera of the order Ascoglossa (Gastropoda). J. mollus-
can Stud. suppl. 10: 1-31.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, Er. 1955. Sea-hares and side gilled slugs from Brazil. Bolm Inst.
Oceanogr. S. Paulo 6: 3-49.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, ER. 1959. Some opisthobranchs from the north-western Gulf of Mexi-
co. Publs Inst. mar. Sci. Univ. Tex. 6: 251-264.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, Er. 1966. Opisthobranchia from tropical west Africa. Stud. trop.
Oceanogr. 4: 152-208.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, ER. 1967a. American opisthobranch molluscs. Stud. trop. Oceanogr.
6: I-VII, 1-256.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, Er. 1967b. Some opisthobranchs from Sapelo Island, Georgia,
U.S.A. Malacologia 6: 199-222.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, ER. 1969. Opisthobranchian and lamellarian gastropods collected by
the ‘Vema’. Am. Mus. Novit. 2368: 1-33.
Marcus, Ev. & Marcus, ER. 1970. Some gastropods from Madagascar and west Mexico. Mal-
acologia 10: 181-223.
MAZARELLI, G. 1891. Intorno all’aparato riproductore di alcuni Tectibranchi (Pleurobranchaea,
Oscanius, Acera). Zool. Anz. 368: 237-243.
Moaguin-TAnpon, G. 1870. Recherches anatomiques sur l’Ombrelle de la Méditerranée. Annls
Sci. nat. (5) 14: (5) 1-135.
NusseN-MEyeErR, J. 1965. Notes on a few opisthobranch Mollusca from Surinam (Guianas).
Zool. Meded. Leiden 40: 144-150.
Opuner, N. H. 1914. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Marinen Molluskenfauna von Rovigno in Is-
trien; Notizen tiber die Fauna der Adria bei Rovigno. Zool. Anz. 44: 156-170.
OpHNER, N. H. 1921. Mollusca of Juan Fernandez and Easter Island. Jn: C. SkoTTSBERG, ed.
The natural history of Juan Fernandez and Easter Island 3: 219-254. Uppsala: Almqvist &
Wiksells.
Opuner, N. H. 1926. Die Opisthobranchien. Further zool. Results Swed. Antarct. Exped. 2:
1-100.
OpuHNER, N. H. 1932. Beitrage zur Malakozoologie der Kanarischen Inseln. Ark. Zool. 23A
(14): 1-116.
O’DonoGuuE, C. H. 1929. Opisthobranchiate Mollusca collected by the southern African mar-
ine biological survey. Rep. Fish. mar. biol. Surv. Un. S. Afr. 1928-9 (7): 1-84.
PELSENEER, P. 1894. Recherches sur divers opisthobranches. Mém. cour. Sav. étr. Acad. r. Sci.
Belg. 53: I-III, 1-157.
Pitssry, H. A. 1895-6. Manual Conch. 16: I-VII, N—262.
Pruvot-FoL, A. 1933. Opisthobranchiata, Mission Robert P. Dollfus en Egypte. Mém. Inst.
Egypte 21: 89-159.
PruvotT-Fot, A. 1954. Mollusques opisthobranches. Faune Fr. 58: 1-460.
Quoy, J. & GArImaRD, J. 1832. Voyages de découvertes de I’ Astrolabe, sous le commandement de
M. J. Dumont d’Urville 2. Paris: J. Tastu.
SCHMEKEL, L. 1968. Ascoglossa, Notaspidea und Nudibranchia im Litoral des Golfes von
Neapel. Revue Suisse Zool. 75: 103-155.
STURANY, R. 1904. Gastropoden des Rothen Meeres. Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien. 74:
209-283.
THIELE, J. 1925. Gastropoda der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition, II. Wiss. Ergebn. dt. Tiefsee-
Exped. 17 (2): 37-382.
THIELE, J. 1931. Handbuch der systematischen Weichtierkunde 1. Jena: Gustav Fischer.
THompson, T. E. 1970. Eastern Australian Pleurobranchomorpha (Gastropoda Opisthobran-
chia). J. Zool., Lond. 160: 173-198.
TuHompson, T. E. 1977. Jamaican opisthobranch molluscs, I. J. molluscan Stud. 43: 93-140.
S32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Tuompson, T. E. & SLINN, S. J. 1959. On the biology of the opisthobranch Pleurobranchus
membranaceus. J. mar. biol. Ass. U.K. 38: 507-524.
TomLin, J. R. LE Brockton. 1927. Zoological results of the Cambridge Expedition to the Suez
Canal 1924. Report on the Mollusca. Trans. zool. Soc. Lond. 22: 291-319.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1885. Recherches zoologiques et anatomiques sur les Mollusques Opistho-
branches du Golfe de Marseille, I. Annls Mus. Hist. nat. Marseille (Zool.) 2 (3): 1-181.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1898. Monographie de la famille des Pleurobranchidés, I. Annls Sci. nat. Zool.
(8) 8: 209-402.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1900. Description de deux nouvelles espéces de Pleurobranchidés. J. Conch.
Paris 48: 8-11.
VayYSSIERE, A. 1901. Monographie de la famille des Pleurobranchidés, II. Annls Sci. nat. Zool.
(8) 12: 1-85.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1902. Opisthobranches et Prosobranches. In: Expéditions scientifiques du ‘Tra-
vailleur’ et ‘Talisman’: Pendant les années 1880-1883: 221-271. Paris: Masson.
VERRILL, A. E. 1880. Notice of recent additions to the marine invertebrates, etc. Proc. U.S.
nat. Mus. 3: 356-409.
VERRILL, A. E. 1882. Catalogue of marine Mollusca added to the fauna of the New England re-
gion. Trans. Conn. Acad. Arts Sci. 5: 447-587.
VERRILL, A. E. 1884. Second catalogue of Mollusca added to the fauna of the New England re-
gion. Trans. Conn. Acad. Arts Sci. 6: 139-294.
VERRILL, A. E. 1885. Third catalogue of Mollusca, added to the fauna of the New England re-
gion. Trans. Conn. Acad. Arts Sci. 6: 395-452.
VERRILL, A. E. & BusH, K. 1900. The nudibranchs and naked tectibranchs of the Bermudas.
Trans. Conn. Acad. Arts Sci. 10: 545-550.
WuiteE, K. M. 1948. On a collection of marine molluscs from Ceylon. Proc. malac. Soc. Lond.
27: 199-205.
WuitE, K. M. 1955. Some opisthobranchs from west Africa. Expéd. oceanogr. Belg. 3:
161-195.
WILLAN, R. C. 1977. A review of Pleurobranchella Thiele, 1925 (Opisthobranchia Pleurobran-
chaeinae). J. Conch. Lond. 29: 151-155.
WILLAN, R. C. 1978. An evaluation of the notaspidean genera Pleurobranchopsis Verrill and
Gymnotoplax Pilsbry (Opisthobranchia Pleurobranchinae). J. Conch. Lond. 29: 337-344.
WILLAN, R. C. 1983. New Zealand side-gilled sea slugs (Opisthobranchia: Notaspidea: Pleuro-
branchidae). Malacologia 23: 221-270.
ABBREVIATIONS
a atrium n female pore
b_ base of penis O spermoviduct
Cc penial stylet p penis
d hermaphrodite duct q_ prostate
e efferent duct r retractor muscle
f oviduct Ss penial sac
g mucous gland t spermatheca
h_ penial sheath Vv vagina
i root of penis w body wall
j rhinophore xX spur
k gill y spermatocyst
1! albumen gland z foot gland
m ampulla ? female gonopore
6 male gonopore
y ye A
ae ee
- y -_ ares
a
2
re
ay
a
‘
i
re
4
2
)
a]
}
Ws
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific namé must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new ‘species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
>] 6
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘°. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
EVELINE d. B.-R. MARCUS
&
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER
REVIEW OF THE FAMILY
PLEUROBRANCHAEIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, OPISTHOBRANCHIA)
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN :
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; sae wes
‘As described (Haughton & Broom ae
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name aa year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RAFFy, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, CB8 : masee and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4):
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Poco Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 93 Band
February 1984 Februarie
Rania. wbcel
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 14
FAMILY MYCTOPHIDAE
(OSTEICHTHYES, MYCTOPHIFORMES)
By
P. ALEXANDER HULLEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
il, AGES, S=9), AGED, AS, 8, teas), SOS, 5, ED),
G(s t= paid) 7(1=4)y Sn (EDs 7) OES)
11(1-2, 5, 7, t--p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 45(1)
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 052 4
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Itd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Part 14
FAMILY MYCTOPHIDAE (OSTEICHTHYES, MYCTOPHIFORMES)
By
P. ALEXANDER HULLEY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 19 figures)
[MS accepted 19 July 1983]
ABSTRACT
Fifty-seven species of Myctophidae (Osteichthyes, Myctophiformes) are recorded from off
the east coast of South Africa. No new species are described; thirteen species are recorded for
the first time in the southern African region. The Myctophidae include both mesopelagic and
bathypelagic high-oceanic species, and pelagic pseudoceanic species.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NERO GUC OM septa eA es cee SOON, hat nas retical shoe 53
SDE CIESIIS (0 ie tte et TS er yh me as Rs BEE 56
SySte matic aCCOUntemrrr rae rae ei eee pes os 66
ID ISCUSSIOMI Ree yea are teen Nee ere ad wat 92
ANcknowledgementsin a: 248 42 hele eects &- 94
ISX SIISIRSSIVGSS = NG Weide ae or tS eke ee eee 94
INTRODUCTION
From 1975 to 1979, the Department of Marine Biology, South African Mu-
seum, undertook a series of sampling cruises off the east coast of southern
Africa in order to investigate the deep benthic fauna (at depths greater than
500 m) and the mesopelagic fauna of that region. This paper deals with the lan-
tern-fishes (Family Myctophidae), comprising some 800 specimens, obtained
during the five cruises. The stations occupied are given in Figures 1 and 2. Sta-
tion data have been given by Louw (1977, 1980), so that the reader should refer
to these publications for details.
Genera and species are arranged alphabetically for easier reference both in
the Species list and in the Systematic account but, in the latter case, only the
species that are recorded for the first time in the southern African region (the
area between 20°S and 40°S and from 10°E to 40°E) or problematic species are
described. For these, synonymies include references to type specimens (with
type localities given in parentheses) and references pertinent to the southern
African region. Where relevant, remarks are made on other species.
2)
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 93 (2), 1984: 53-96, 19 figs.
54
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
3° 10' 20' 30! 40 50 O22 10° 20' 30° 40° 50! sep 10° 20'
> ————S= = ———— —— =
+
ee eae eed We ee 51,92,53 54 655 \"°
Kosi Bay 56
(c=) 0
2 = 27
Le iW 4 5
3
60, 28 7
104 Gle 259 dG de} 10°
68a 1s <6 62
67 2.10
8112 7
6b. ,ere ¢
y 13
0 DG 20
64 71
65 | °70
i) 14 ,
sf 5 @ | | | _ “5 973 18 fe=20 30
16 77
17 5
STMT ze
40 °73 Lo
Sma &
2,
0 88 50
26
87 |
28% 28°
10) 10°
20 L.
30 lo
fy 197196
“108
199 4
40 42 4 i) 0
43
: 10
J Richards Bay ri 50
112
29 + AG 47. tL 29°
4B 49
114
10 113 250 10
15
20 20'
30) 30°
40 % 40°
45
e
go> DURBAN 50
50" 31° 10 "20" 30" 10" 50" 37° 3S aS oS sr 10" 20°
Fig. 1. Stations occupied off the east coast of South Africa, north of Durban, during the cruises
of the South African Museum on the R.V. Meiring Naude.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
OT 28° 29° 30° 31° 32°
I — —= — ——= S== rr Tl ae aa =n co
Ns DURBAN
30 2 156; 30°
| ©157
158°
ees?
° oe 53
*118 13g” 149°
*\39 7
154-5
2120
123, 12) e124
eiz2n 22
3126
2
192, 530
2128
2129
0130
31° 133 90134 aye
| °135
0136
B7e—% 9140
ies ea A
| 144
1466
5° 196 eon
199e¢/ se
% 194
90 256 197-8
255 20h, 202
rp aes 200%203
253 °204
2243 207 AD
Mee QM 02h7 “98 209
©248
3% — P509848 S16, ile «210 32
| 245 02 |
232-3-4
20 vs oe 237 “2
Z NG e215
225
229 Qi
228.0226 220
231-8 °230 219° 80-218
©6224
227 © 8221
22¥ 0222
2159
| #159J-60
162, {61
E.LONDON q
3 (WY ~169 33°
163-4
165169
e
Oe “66-7
1m 9168
a
e174 el71J
| 175,172,179
"80,179 2176
178 igi
| ~184-5 27782
.177J
; 186 383
187
: | ;
34 =188 =I 34
J89
#190
191
a ——=s — = ——— ——== ——oos Sa Bs
an 28 29° 30° 31° V BRANCO450
Fig. 2. Stations occupied off the east coast of South Africa, south of Durban, during the cruises
of the South African Museum on the R.V. Meiring Naude.
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Methods for taking measurements and counts follow Nafpaktitis (1973) and
their abbreviations follow Hulley (1981). Additional abbreviations include:
SAM South African Museum catalogue number
SM Meiring Naude station number
A Africana IT station number (Hulley 1972; illustration only)
IK IKMT survey station number (Grindley & Penrith 1965; illustration only)
Ranges in standard length (SL) for each species at each station are given in the
Species list; maximum lengths are given in the species descriptions and are taken
from the literature. Photophore groupings and nomenclature are in accordance
with Paxton (1972). The state of sexual maturity in the case of females is given
as follows:
Stage I Ovaries immature, eggs minute and transparent
Stage II Ovaries immature, eggs small and granular
Stage III Ovaries developing, both large and small eggs present (no oil drop-
lets)
Stage IV Ovaries developed, eggs large (no oil droplets)
Stage V Ovaries mature, eggs large with oil droplets
Stage VI Ovaries spent
All specimens are housed in the collection of the Department of Marine
Biology, South African Museum.
SPECIES LIST
SAM No. SL (mm) SM Depth (m)
No. station
Benthosema fibulatum 29041 1 520) 87S 45-0
29060 1 13,8 62D 209-0
29085 1 13,0 79D 200-0
29145 1 11553 70D 200-0
Benthosema suborbitale 27543 2 20,9-28,8 97 467-0
27663 il 26,1 96 465-0
27982 2 Dane ad 119 750-0
27983 Z) 25 ,5-28,4 WAS) 415-0
27984 il 22,0 126 464-0
27985 2 26,1—26,5 182 830-0
27986 Il M32 139 250-0
27987 1 19,6 153 664-0
28316 1 24,7 190 658-0
28365 12 16,2-28,4 191 542-0
28701 1 21,0 199 250-0
29032 1 LS 1108 45-0
29036 if 13,8 12 200-0
29039 1 B)-33 ill 150-0
29049 3 13,1-18,3 124D 212-0
29054 1 25,0 54D 200-0
29055 2 11,1-11,8 13 274-0
29091 2 12,7-26,7 34 212-0
29124 1 10,5 188D 212-0
29152 1 22,9 80 359-0
29161 if 10,3 54S 45-0
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Syl
SAM No. SL (mm) SM Depth (m)
No. station
Bolinichthys indicus 27665 1 16,2 12 488-0
27990 1 23) g 126 464-0
27991 1 38,0 140 1120-0
ZOSD 1 24,0 145 1129-0
28369 1 a2 191 542-0
29029 il 2D 118D 212-0
29042 1 12,0 80 359-0
29078 1 IGF 20 580-0
29208 1 12,8 168 816-0
29609 1 12,4 79D 200-0
Bolinichthys supralateralis 26614 1 45,0 52 720-0
27102 1 BSF) D5) 600-0
27110 1 2330) 25 600-0
Zie29 1 B\1\ 105 775-0
27988 1 26,4 119 750-0
27989 Z 15,8-20,9 132 830-0
28284 1 DOM 168 816-0
28309 1 18,9 160 583-0
29028 1 12,4 80 359-0
29143 1 14,9 45 212-0
Ceratoscopelus warmingii PPS 1 22,8 LZ 488-0
27538 1 28,2 88 297-0
27662 1 16,4 97 467-0
27993 1 7 126 464-0
27994 2 21,0-51,5 SZ 830-0
277195 2 17,6-31,2 139 250-0
27996 D 369-43 ,3 140 1120-0
27997 4 18,2—43,4 153 664-0
27998 il 18,6 154 500-0
27999 6 29 ,1-42,7 148 750-0
28283 5 17,6-36,1 190 658-0
28285 1 Mo 160 583-0
28286 1 15.9) 168 816-0
28287 3 17,4—24,7 167 1091-0
28288 1 393 173 683-0
28289 1 18,1 186 583-0
28655 1 16,3 220 1416-0
28678 1 27,0 218 916-0
28702 1 36,0 214 1390-0
29037 1 G39 104D 200-0
29052 1 O57 87D 200-0
29098 1 16,3 79D 200-0
29093 1 16,4 143D 212-0
29113 1 18,9 200D 212-0
29131 1 18,3 188D 212-0
29150 1 26,8 Ie 200-0
Diaphus aliciae 28332 il 16,8 174 760-0
29142 1 28) 152D 212-0
Diaphus brachycephalus 27113 1 26,3 33 400-0
28361 2 29 ,0-30,3 160 583-0
Diaphus diadematus 27105 4 28,4-34,6 18 600-0
BUNZS 1 he 49 400-0
27498 1 34,7 111 514-0
27504 5 31,0-32,6 63 140-0
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Diaphus diadematus (contd.)
Diaphus effulgens
Diaphus garmani
Diaphus hudsoni
Diaphus jenseni
Diaphus lucidus
Diaphus luetkeni
SAM
No.
27514
27524
27536
27542
27544
28000
28001
28002
28003
28342
28672
28673
ASIVET)
29134
PSIGS
29151
2957
DING
MTT
29185
27500
Pal [SPL
28004
28248
28290
28291
29178
AY SMI
29180
29184
29188
28006
28292
28293
27523
27530
28007
28008
28009
28010
28011
28294
28295
28296
28302
28674
28675
28676
2935
29149
29176
27497
27545
28012
No.
NOR RP PWR RRP RP BN DR NKRPN WR RR RR PNR RP NFP RP RP NN PNP RP PNP RP PNP PWR PRR NN Ww
ST)
20,3-29,0
WS7/
Ms) V8)
SM
station
i
Depth (m)
488-0
775-0
297-0
400-0
467-0
830-0
750-0
664-0
500-0
816-0
1170-0
415-0
193-0
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 59
SAM No. SL (mm) SM Depth (m)
No. station
Diaphus luetkeni (contd. ) 28013 1 19,8 119 750-0
28014 1 MS) 148 750-0
28015 2 20,2-28,0 152 830-0
28016 1 40,6 139 250-0
28017 1 36,8 138 830-0
29174 1 16,3 143D 212-0
Diaphus metopoclampus 27503 1 33,0 63 140-0
DSS i 49,7 105 775-0
27664 1 18,8 112 488-0
28018 1 UD)e3) 132 830-0
28297 1 12,0 187 982-0
Diaphus mollis 27104 1 56,1 ZS 600-0
27499 1 42,0 111 514-0
AY SNS) 1 Sil 112 488-0
27526 2 29,4-31,9 105 775-0
21ST 1 45,0 88 297-0
28019 1 355i 1 750-0
28020 1 15,0 25 415-0
28021 1 2959 126 464-0
28022 2 28 ,6-31,7 12 830-0
28023 if 49,5 145 1129-0
28318 1 19,4 190 658-0
28341 1 15,6 168 816-0
28351 2 23,4-25,5 183 474-0
28352 1 19).3 186 583-0
28360 1 53) 160 583-0
28363 1 13,4 158) 690-0
28685 1 SRS 208 670-0
29125 1 iS) 188D 212-0
29136 1 14,2 95S 45-0
29137 1 1333 12 200-0
29148 2 14,7-35,4 152D 212-0
PSNSS) 2 23,5-33,5 20 528-0
29173 i 14,8 104D 200-0
29187 1 GIES, 95D 200-0
Diaphus nielseni 28029 2 27,7-35,0 148 750-0
Diaphus parri 28684 1 25,0 221 1170-0
29138 2 14,0-15,6 80 359-0
29139 1 ILS 110D 200-0
29141 1 5) 11 150-0
29156 1 HES 70D 200-0
29175 1 23)..3) 143D 212-0
29183 1 12,9 87S 45-0
Diaphus perspicillatus 28005 1 32,0 145 1129-0
28028 2 19,6-29,9 153 664-0
28298 1 DNS) 178 683-0
28299 1 21,6 183 474-0
28300 1 24,6 e/a 792-0
29190 8) 14,0-17,3 169D 212-0
DSN 3 11,3-16,3 143S 50-0
Diaphus problematicus 28024 1 SA 126 464-0
Diaphus richardsoni 28025 1 44.8 132 830-0
28319 1 IbIeS 190 658-0
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SAM No. SL (mm)
No.
Diaphus richardsoni (contd.) 28376 1 20,4
29140 1 D7
Diaphus splendidus Df SN2 1 1)9)
28026 1 a)
29179 2 20,6-21,3
29181 1 193)
29186 1 23,0
Diaphus sp. 28027 1 19,6
28301 3 12,6-16,4
29189 1 11,2
29191 3 8,3-10,3
29192 1 11,6
2ON98 1 8,4
29194 if 9,8
ZN 1 8,9
29196 3 10,2-12,0
29198 4 8,2-10,4
Diogenichthys atlanticus 28336 1 19,7
28337 D) 13,8-17,7
28699 1 14,2
29117 1 13,8
Diogenichthys panurgus 28030 if 14,3
28031 1 18,7
28032 1 19,4
28033 1 12,4
28336 if 18,8
29043 1 12,
29056 il 10,8
29065 y) 17,4-17,7
29066 1 7.0
29079 1 10,4
29082 1 18,7
29103 1 10,3
29120 1 10,6
29129 2 10,6-11,5
Gonichthys barnesi 28314 1 39,7
28671 1 41,7
Hygophum hanseni 28331 1 Sip
28334 1 28,0
28338 i 27,6-34,3
28355 if 28,4
28683 1 28,9
Hygophum hygomii 27108 2) 50,4-52,1
28034 2 47,2—49,8
28315 il S13)
28339 1 1723)
28340 1 13,3
28374 1 12,9
28646 2 55,0-56,0
28681 1 52,4
28694 1 47,0
29063 2 50,3-52,4
29075 1 1952
29106 3 13,3-14,1
SM
station
187
146D
56
Depth (m)
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 61
SAM No. SL (mm) SM Depth (m)
No. station
Hygophum hygomii (contd. ) 29108 if 13 et 2228 43-0
29126 4 14,3-19,7 118N 0
29153 1 15),{0 13 274-0
29159 1 2,8) 19 226-0
Hygophum proximum 29095 1 IO) 143D 212-0
29098 1 Mage 1 226-0
Lampadena luminosa 27518 1 24,8 112 488-0
VARIA 1 2330 105 775-0
Lampadena notialis 28035 1 24,7 148 750-0
28368 if Dap Git 542-0
29160 i 7e0 45 500-0
Lampadena speculigera 28643 1 126,6 IDs 1050-0
Lampanyctus achirus 28375 1 ValeD 187 982-0
28647 1 124,4 mp 1170-0
28666 1 136,8 195 1050-0
28699 1 91,0 195 1050-0
Lampanyctus alatus 27103 y) 43,7-44,7 25 600-0
27106 1 42,1 18 600-0
27507 2 41,9-48,2 63 140-0
27508 1 30,2 56 397-0
27520 4 37,3—41,4 i 488-0
AYSSS 2 25 ,0-30,0 88 297-0
27660 1 22,4 105 775-0
27661 1 18,6 96 465-0
28036 il Silke 119 750-0
28037 2 36,8—42,7 13 830-0
28038 1 45,0 140 1120-0
28039 1 35,6 145 1129-0
28040 il 24,7 53 664-0
28041 2 36,9-38,1 154 500-0
28042 1 38,3 Sy 750-0
28058 il 20,2 148 750-0
28303 1 20,8 191 542-0
28317 1 UD \9) 190 658-0
28329 3 35 ,8-42,0 173 683-0
28343 1 29) 168 816-0
28347 2 27,8-33,3 167 1091-0
28364 1 22) 159 690-0
28377 1 36,4 187 982-0
28656 3 38,8-50,1 220 1416-0
28679 3) 45 ,3—49,3 218 916-0
28689 1 46,7 214 1390-0
28690 1 50,0 221 1170-0
29034 1 22,4 62D 209-0
29045 1 Alto 124D 212-0
29048 2) 14,0-15,6 62D 209-0
29058 1 20,5 152D 212-0
29068 1 14,4 79D 200-0
29077 1 1D), 80 350-0
29084 1 22,8 95D 200-0
29092 1 139) 95D 200-0
29096 1 16,6 87D 200-0
29101 1 29),13) 143D 212-0
29107 1 13,4 222S 43-0
29116 1 17,4 196D 212-0
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lampanyctus alatus (contd.)
Lampanyctus ater
Lampanyctus ?ater
Lampanyctus australis
Lampanyctus festivus
Lampanyctus lepidolychnus
SAM
No.
29158
29166
29366
28044
27507
28403
27112
DDS9
28045
28046
28047
28048
28061
28325
28326
28348
28645
28649
28650
28651
28652
28680
28691
DOB TA
27534
28686
27095
27096
ZT MIL
AY SMS)
DjfSi\h
TH SSL,
PS
28049
28050
28051
28052
28053
28054
28055
28107
28327
28328
28333
28349
28353
28354
28359
28375
28642
28653
28654
28665
28667
No.
NR RR WW NR RR WRN RR RR Re Reb
RPrPWNABARNRNMNFRBRPNNFODNRRPNRFWRNRF NY FPN RRR
SL (mm)
36,5—37,0
18,0
S39
105,4
93,0
78,0
101,0
38,2
52,3-101,4
41,9-48,9
85,1-98,6
93,4
94,3
83,7
88,5-91,3
35,4
49,4
34,0
SS) AZ 50
31,6
89 ,8-92,1
J356
101,8-104,6
35,6
WSS A
104,1
93 ,4-97,5
Sei
95,0
81,4-105,5
34,4950
96,8
895-1094
97,2-101,5
84,7-101,6
LOSS
OF il
SM
station
34
143D
168
148
99
153
Depth (m)
212-0
212-0
816-0
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 63
SAM No. SL (mm) SM Depth (m)
No. station
Lampanyctus nobilis 28056 1 54,6 157 750-0
28358 if 45,0 160 583-0
Lampanyctus pusillus 28057 1 24,9 119 750-0
28059 if 728). 5 152 830-0
29046 1 29,7 124D 212-0
29128 il 14,6 188D 212-0
Lampanyctus turneri 27510 if 20,1 56 397-0
28062 3 42,4-54,5 148 750-0
28063 il 39,8 119 750-0
28064 1 57,3 125 415-0
28065 il 60,5 140 1120-0
28066 if Sle 153 664-0
28067 1 24,0 154 500-0
28322 1 SiL3 173 683-0
28323 2) 24 ,0-28,0 173 683-0
28371 1 33,0 170 708-0
29169 1 20,0 143D 212-0
Lampanyctus sp. A 28060 1 66,6 125) 415-0
28330 1 76,5 18 683-0
Lobianchia dofleini 27501 if 29,6 111 514-0
27506 2 31,4-32,0 63 140-0
28068 1 26,2 154 500-0
28069 1 DOT) 148 750-0
28070 1 28,2 Sy 750-0
28071 1 2S).) 53 664-0
28072 1 27,6 138 830-0
28073 3 28,1-33,7 139 250-0
28074 1 WS) 140 1120-0
28350 3 22,0—-31,3 183 474-0
2830M 1 30,0 160 583-0
28372 1 26,8 170 708-0
28700 1 Boe 199 250-0
28750 1 34,1 Shy) 150-0
29097 1 28,2 45 212-0
Lobianchia gemellarii 28698 1 41,1 218 916-0
29182 1 19,0 104D 200-0
Myctophum asperum 28075 1 26,0 154 500-0
29072 1 20,6 95D 200-0
29121 1 14,4 170N 0
29130 2) 14,3-14,6 188N 0
29165 2) 26,4-27,0 155N 0
29167 1 1959 95S 45-0
29168 1 BSS 152N 0
Myctophum aurolaternatum 29030 1 38), 155N 0
29035 1 37,4 95N 0
29038 1 40,2 124D 212-0
Myctophum nitidulum 27107 3 20,9-24,4 45 212-0
28076 il 57,0 148 750-0
28304 1 22,6 191 542-0
28307 1 24,8 190 658-0
28692 1 16,1 205 585-0
28695 1 40,1 198N 0
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Myctophum nitidulum (contd.)
Myctophum obtusirostre
Myctophum phengodes
Myctophum spinosum
Notolychnus valdiviae
SAM
No.
28696
29044
29059
29061
29076
29083
29090
29102
ASIN
28310
29099
29170
DDS)
27516
28305
28313
28682
28697
29801
28077
28311
28670
28688
29053
29071
29105
29118
29132
29147
29164
28078
28079
28080
28320
28335
28344
28345
28356
28367
28373
29031
29033
29050
29051
29057
29067
29074
29080
29086
29088
29094
29100
DONAZ,
29144
29162
No.
mre rR Rr WW RE RP RN WWW RR RPP NR Rr BW BR DR RRR RRR RP RP RP RP RNR PWR Re PNR BR WW R
SL (mm)
28,7
15.5-23,8
30,2
20,0-48,1
11,6-17,8
18,4-19,6
1552-1569
IZ
1956
11,6
1320
16,4
SM
station
199N
Depth (m)
Seog OOooQgqoaegee ©
£
ie“)
i
j—)
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Notoscopelus caudispinosus
Notoscopelus resplendens
Scopelopsis multipunctatus
Symbolophorus barnardi
Symbolophorus evermanni
Taaningichthys bathyphilus
Triphoturus nigrescens
SAM
No.
28362
29110
27528
28081
28082
27097
27098
27099
27100
27114
27124
PSN)
28083
28084
28085
28086
28321
28657
28658
28659
28660
28661
28662
28663
28664
28668
29114
25123
27126
ZS
27540
28370
28644
28648
27541
28087
28088
28687
29047
29073
29087
29104
29109
29111
29115
29119
29154
29163
Zo NGial
28089
28090
28677
28038
28091
No.
—s
Re WW Re RRP PrP BNP RP RP WNP PRP PNR PRP RP RP Re PNB BRP RP RP PP PPP PVN BPN EWN WHD PNP HW
SL (mm)
17,8-19,6
20,4
OFT
56,2-60,1
48,6
48 ,6-60,9
49 ,1-65,8
47,9-61,0
50,1-54,6
49,1
65,1
52,8-55,0
54,6
49,8-51,6
50,1-51,1
50,2
230-278
27,6
SM
station
159
189D
105
65
Depth (m)
690-0
212-0
T715-0
750-0
500-0
600-0
400-0
450-0
600-0
400-0
400-0
488-0
1129-0
250-0
750-0
664-0
658-0
663-0
1010-0
150-0
1260-0
2166-0
1416-0
916-0
250-0
1320-0
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SAM No. SL (mm) SM Depth (m)
No. station
28092 1 3220 153 664-0
28093 8 28,3-30,1 148 750-0
28094 1 33.0 SY 750-0
28324 1 30,9 173 683-0
28346 if Dol 167 1091-0
29040 1 Zoi 104D 200-0
29062 1 16,6 70D 200-0
29070 2 18,3-29,7 143D 212-0
29146 1 13.5) 80 359-0
29365 1 AAD 62S 45-0
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
Benthosema fibulatum (Gilbert & Cramer, 1897)
Fig. 3
Remarks
A single specimen (SAM-27462), taken at 42°11’S 19°26’E, was previously
recorded from the southern African region (Wisner 1976). The Meiring Naude
specimens, all immature (female stage I) and taken in Bongo nets between
200 m and the surface at sundown from the region of 27°S, were caught during
the 1976 cruise only. Surface temperatures ranged above 25°C at these stations,
and water of an equivalent temperature was found at least to a depth of 75 m,
with a minimum temperature of 14,18°C at maximum trawling depth. This
would suggest that the species probably penetrates the region with the Agulhas
Current and does not breed in southern African waters.
Fig. 3. Benthosema fibulatum (A 2957). Scale 10 mm.
Benthosema suborbitale (Gilbert, 1913)
Remarks
Hulley (1981) reports that the distribution of the species in the Atlantic is
related to the 15°C isotherm at 200 m. During the Meiring Naude cruises, speci-
mens were taken at seven stations at which the temperature at 200 m was below
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 67
this value (minimum value 12,84°C) but, in all cases, warm water with a mini-
mum value of 15,5°C occurred in the upper 100 m. The species was taken in the
upper 50 m on two occasions and juvenile specimens (less than 12 mm) in the
upper 45 m. Sexually mature specimens (female stage V) were present in the
material.
Bolinichthys indicus (Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969)
Fig. 4
Remarks
The specimens have been tentatively referred to B. indicus solely on the
basis of their geographic distribution. Although Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis (1969)
have given characteristics for the separation of B. indicus and B. longipes, these
are not satisfactory diagnostics in the case of the Meiring Naude material. All
specimens, except for two females (Fig. 4) from each of stations SM 140 and
SM 145, are characterized by a low GR count (less than 17) typical of B. indi-
cus. However, a luminous patch above the pectoral fin may be present or ab-
sent; luminous scales at the dorsal base vary between 0 and 2, and at the anal
base between 1 and 2; the length of the infracaudal gland as a percentage of
CPD varies between 50,0 and 88,5 % (mean 65,4%), and the supracaudal gland
as a percentage of the infracaudal gland between 43,5 and 87,5% (mean
70,0%); and the infracaudal gland reaches the last AOp in only 50% of the
specimens. The two female specimens (GR 17) fall within the range of overlap
of the two species in this diagnostic. In these specimens, the luminous patch
above the pectoral fin is absent, there are 2-3 scales at the dorsal base and a sin-
gle scale at the anal base; the infracaudal length varies between 50,7 and 52,4 %
CPD and the supracaudal between 72,7 and 77,3% of infracaudal length; and
the infracaudal gland does not reach the last AOp. This, together with the fact
Fig. 4. Bolinichthys indicus (SM 140), with dorsal view of head and right supraorbital luminous
patch. Scale 10 mm.
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
that B. indicus and B. longipes were never taken at the same station during the
R.V. Anton Bruun cruises, particularly between 10°N and 20°S (Nafpaktitis &
Nafpaktitis 1969), suggests that the taxonomic status of the two species should
be more fully investigated.
Bolinichthys supralateralis (Parr, 1928)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken during the Meiring Naude
cruises.
Ceratoscopelus warmingii (Litken, 1892)
Remarks
Immature specimens only occur in the Meiring Naude material (stages
I-III), but there are females with well-developed ovaries (stage IV) from west of
Slangkop Lighthouse and from 36°47'S 34°40’E in the SAM collection.
Diaphus aliciae Fowler, 1934
Fig. 5
Diaphus aliciae Fowler, 1934: 295, fig. 53 (between Bohol and Leyte, Philippines). Nafpaktitis,
1978: 73, figs 72-74.
Description
PD 14274 1332 10, AODe 4; totali9 GR eel lies toralwlye
Measurements (% SL): BD 24,8-25,6; HD 23,3-23,6; UJ 18,5-20,2;
ED 1052-10,95 CRD 929-105) CRIE2079 ies:
Posterodorsal margin of operculum more or less angulate. Origin of dorsal
fin about above ventral base. Pectoral fins damaged, ventral fins reaching to ori-
gin of anal fin or slightly beyond. Origin of anal fin posterior to vertical through
base of last dorsal ray. Origin of adipose fin slightly anterior to vertical through
base of last anal ray. Gill rakers lath-like. Dorsal base shorter than length of
upper jaw and longer than anal base.
Dn about size of nasal rosette, in deep recess and directed anteriorly. Vn
short, less than distance between it and So. So small, slightly posterior to verti-
cal through centre of pupil. Op: opposite posterior end of upper jaw; Op2 about
size of general body photophore, situated below level of ventral margin of orbit.
PLO 1,5 times nearer to upper pectoral base than to lateral line and associated
with a small, luminous scale. POi, PVO:, PVO: in same straight, oblique line,
with PVO; at lower end of base of pectoral fin. PO:-PO: interspace greater than
PO~PO; and PO:-POs interspaces, with POs. slightly posterior to vertical
through PO:, and POs elevated and anterior to outermost ray of ventral fin.
VLO about midway between base of ventral fin and lateral line. VOi:-VO3 on
same straight, oblique line. SAO slightly angulate; with SAO; above anus and at
about level of VO:, with SAO. immediately behind SAO; and above level of
VOs, and with SAO; about above anal origin and about 1,5-2,0 times its di-
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 69
ameter below lateral line. AO series about one photopore diameter apart, with
AOa! elevated, and with all AOp behind anal base. Pol under base of adipose
fin, about 1,5 times its diameter below lateral line. Pre curved; Pres about 1,5
times its diameter below level of lateral line.
Maximum length 60 mm; sexually mature from about 45 mm. Indian Ocean
specimens smaller—maximum length 39 mm and sexually mature from about
35 mm.
Fig. 5. Diaphus aliciae (SM 174). Scale 10 mm.
Distribution
Indian Ocean and south-eastern Asian seas: west of 70°E between 10°N and
12°S, east of 85°E between 05°N and 09°S. Pacific Ocean: off northern Kyushu.
Remarks
The Meiring Naude specimens, both of which are immature, represent the
first record of the species in the southern African region.
Diaphus brachycephalus Taning, 1928
Remarks
No sexually mature adults were present in the Meiring Naude material, but
stage IV females are known to at least 37°S in the region.
Diaphus diadematus Taning, 1932
Remarks
This is one of the most common species of Diaphus off the east coast of
South Africa. A single, sexually mature female (stage V, 28,8 mm) was taken by
the Meiring Naude (SM 112), but stage IV females were taken as far south as
31°S. This, coupled with the fact that sexually mature adults are found in the
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
eastern South Atlantic and the fact that there are no statistically valid differ-
ences in meristics between these specimens and those from the western South
Indian Ocean (D:t —0,40; di 52; A: 11843 di 545 Pot ils dine Za-
AOa: t —0,15; df 98; AOp: t 3,16; df 97; AOr: t 2,99; df 97; GRu: t 2,87; df 67;
GRi: t 1,27; df 67; GRr: t 2,50; df 67), confirms that a single population is in-
volved. The Vn in males is horizontally striated in the Meiring Naude specimens,
as pointed out by Nafpaktitis (1978) for the western Indian Ocean population.
Diaphus effulgens (Goode & Bean, 1896)
Remarks
Analysis of GR counts between specimens of this species from the South
Atlantic and those taken by the Meiring Naude in the western South Indian
Ocean reveals significant differences only in GR. count (t 4,23; df 59), with
higher values for the South Atlantic specimens.
Diaphus garmani Gilbert, 1906
Remarks
All specimens taken by the Meiring Naude are immature.
Diaphus hudsoni Zubrigg & Scott, 1976
Remarks
Nafpaktitis (1978) has suggested that the apparent absence of the species in
the Indian Ocean may be due to inadequate sampling. Grindley & Penrith
(1965) reported specimens of this species from off Cape Agulhas as D. theta
(IK 38, IK 39, IK 40). The two Meiring Naude specimens were taken at 30°49'S
30°35’E and 34°06'S 27°08’E, where the temperature at 200 m was 14,18°C, and
14,60°C respectively. The species may extend northwards in this region to
26°40'S since two specimens (45-47 mm), identified as Diaphus richardsoni by
Grindley & Penrith (1965), proved on re-examination to be specimens of D.
hudsoni. This northern limit in the western South Indian Ocean is farther to the
north of that for the species in the eastern South Atlantic, outside the Benguela
Upwelling Region (Hulley 1981), and would support both Heydorn’s (1976) and
Carter’s (1977) findings on the northern transport of the biota in association with
the northward advection of pockets of cooler water. Carter (1977, figs 40-43)
demonstrates that in the region north of 28°S, the 15°C isotherm varies between
60 m and 140 m, inshore of the Agulhas Current core.
Diaphus jenseni Taning, 1928
Fig. 6
Diaphus jenseni Taning, 1928: 141, fig. 14 (03°18’N 129°02’E). Nafpaktitis, 1973: 24, fig. 22;
1978: 21, figs 18-19. Wisner, 1976: 112, fig. 101. Parin et al., 1977: 117, fig. 18. Kawaguchi
& Shimizu, 1978: 110, figs 42-43. Kotthaus, 1979: 51, figs 509, 514.
Diaphus kylei Taning, 1932: 133, fig. 5 (07°22'N 121°16’E). Nafpaktitis, 1973: 20, fig. 17.
Diaphus gudgeri Fowler, 1934: 302, fig. 59 (northern Mindanao, Philippines).
Diaphus carlsoni Fowler, 1934: 312, fig. 67 (12°38'30’N 121°37'30"E).
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 71
Description
D 15; A 14; P 11; AO 6+5, total 11; GR 6+1+12, total 19.
Origin of dorsal fin slightly in advance of base of ventral fin. Origin of anal
fin behind vertical through base of last dorsal ray. Origin of adipose fin slightly
behind vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin not reaching base of
ventral fin; ventral fin not reaching anal origin.
————————
Fig. 6. Diaphus jenseni (SM 183). Scale 10 mm.
Dn small, heart-shaped and directed anterolaterally; Vn about same size as
Dn, situated at anteroventral margin of orbit. Ant present, dorsad to Dn. Opi
small and about opposite posterior end of maxilla; Op2 larger than general body
photophore, situated above Op: and at about level of ventral margin of orbit.
PLO much nearer to upper base of pectoral fin than to lateral line. VLO about
equidistant between outer base of ventral fin and lateral line. SAO series slightly
angulate, with SAO; in line with VO. and VOs, but well behind VOs, with SAO>
above anus at about level of VO, and with SAOs slightly behind vertical
through SAO, and about 1,5 times its diameter below lateral line. AOa!
abruptly elevated, above level of SAO2; AOa?-AOa? interspace enlarged; no
AOp photophores above base of anal. Pol under origin of adipose fin, about 1,5
times its diameter below lateral line. Pre series arched, with Prcs—Prcs interspace
enlarged; Prc, about its own diameter below level of lateral line. A large lumi-
nous scale at PLO.
Maximum length 50 mm; sexually mature from about 31 mm.
Distribution
Indian Ocean: between 05°N and 12°S, but more common west of 75°E;
south-east Asian seas. Pacific Ocean: central and western tropical waters to
about 35°N in Kuroshio Current.
7D ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The single, small, immature female (stage I, 26,6 mm), taken during the
Meiring Naude cruises at 33°48,8'S 27°47,9’E, represents the first record of the
species in the southern African region.
Diaphus luetkeni (Brauer, 1904)
Remarks
Although no sexually mature females were taken during the Meiring Naude
cruises, stage IV females are known from as far south as 34°S off the east coast
of South Africa.
Diaphus metopoclampus (Cocco, 1829)
Remarks
All female specimens taken during the Meiring Naude cruises were imma-
ture, but stage IV females are known from 25°55’S 39°30’E. The Meiring Naude
specimens showed both subdivided and continuous Vn organs, but in all cases
the PLO was nearer to the lateral line. Hulley (1981) has pointed out that GRu
counts in specimens from the North Atlantic tend to be higher than those from
the South Atlantic. A comparison of this count between specimens from the
western South Indian Ocean and those from the North Atlantic revealed a sig-
nificant difference (t —4,20; df 58), while differences in GR. count between
specimens from the western South Indian Ocean and those from the South At-
lantic were insignificant (t —2,38; df 85).
Diaphus mollis Taning, 1928
Remarks
Hulley (1981) has pointed out that in the Atlantic the species apparently
does not reach sexual maturity south of about 36°S (western sector) and about
25°S (eastern sector). SAM data indicate that sexually mature females (stage V)
have been taken at 26°40’S 40°00’E, and stage IV females from as far south as
37°30’S in the region of 40°E.
Diaphus nielseni Nafpaktitis, 1978
Fig. 7
Diaphus nielseni Nafpaktitis, 1978: 17, figs 12-13 (06°37’N 122°24’E). Gjdsaeter & Beck, 1981:
257, 259, fig. 4.
Description
D 15 (14); A 14 (13); P 10; AO 6+5, total 11; GR 6+1+ 14, total 21.
Origin of dorsal fin about above base of ventral fin. Origin of anal fin be-
hind end of base of dorsal fin. Origin of adipose fin on vertical through base of
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES q3,
—
lente
Fig. 7. Diaphus nielseni (SM 148). Scale 10 mm.
last anal ray or slightly in front of this vertical. Pectoral fin not reaching ventral
base; ventral fin extending almost to origin of anal fin.
Dn heart-shaped and directed anterolaterally, slightly larger than general
body photophore; Vn continuous with Dn, expanded posteroventrad to nasal
rosette and extending posteriorly to about middle of anterior rim of iris. PLO
about 1,5 times nearer to upper base of pectoral fin than to lateral line. VLO
slightly nearer to lateral line than to base of ventral fin. SAO series slightly
angulate, with SAO; above level of VO2 and just posterior to VOs, with SAO2
about above anus and behind line joining centres of SAO; and SAOs, and with
SAO in advance of vertical through origin of anal fin and in contact with lateral
line. AOa! abruptly and highly elevated to about level of SAOQ2; AOa’7~AOa? in-
terspace enlarged; last AOa elevated; AOp behind end of base of anal fin,
evenly spaced and level. Pol slighly in advance of origin of adipose fin and in
contact with lateral line. Prec series widely spaced, with Prcs—Prcs interspace sub-
equal to AOp—Prc: interspace; Prcs about one photophore diameter below level
of lateral line. A large, luminous scale at PLO.
Maximum length 40 mm; sexually mature from about 32 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic. Indian Ocean: Equatorial waters west of Suma-
tra; off east coast of Africa and in Mozambique Channel between 15°S and 21°S.
Pacific: south-eastern Asian seas, northward to southern Japan.
Remarks
The Meiring Naude specimens represent the first record of the species in the
southern African region, where there is a range extension to about 30°S. The
three specimens are all immature.
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Diaphus parri Taning, 1932
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude.
Diaphus perspicillatus (Ogilby, 1898)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude.
Diaphus problematicus Parr, 1928
Remarks
The single male specimen taken by the Meiring Naude represents a range
extension to about 30°S in the western South Indian Ocean.
Diaphus splendidus (Brauer, 1904)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude. The
species is now known to extend southward to about 31°S off the east coast of
South Africa.
Diogenichthys atlanticus (Taning, 1928)
Fig. 8
Remarks
One female specimen (17,7 mm, stage IV) was taken by the Meiring Naude.
D. atlanticus appears to be less common than D. panurgus off the South African
east coast; the two species were however taken in the same hauls during the
sampling.
Fig. 8. Diogenichthys atlanticus (A 3634), with dorsal view of supracaudal luminous gland (C)
and ventral view of infracaudal luminous gland (2). Scale 10 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES ID
Diogenichthys panurgus Bolin, 1946
Fig. 9
Diogenichthys panurgus Bolin, 1946: 140 (05°56’N 76°22’E). Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969:
14, figs 13-15. Kotthaus, 19725: 15, figs 264, 282. Wisner, 1976: 47. Parin et al., 1977: 109,
fig. 15.
Description
D 12 (rarely 10); A 16 (15, rarely 17); P 11 (10); AO 6 (5-7) +3 (2), total
8-9 (10); GR 2+1+8-9, total 11-12. One specimen with GR 3+ 1+ 10, total 14
(left side), GR 2+1+9, total 12 (right side).
UJ 4,9-7,1 (mean 5,8) in SL; UJ 1,5-2,2 (mean 1,8) in HL.
Origin of dorsal fin behind vertical through ventral base; origin of anal fin
on or in advance of vertical through base of last dorsal ray. Adipose origin well
in advance of vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin extending to
about anal origin; ventral fin extending to about VOu.
Dn present, sexually dimorphic in mature males; Vn absent. Opi: small, op-
posite expanded posterior margin of maxilla; Op2 somewhat posterior to Opi,
below level of vental margin of orbit. 5 PO, evenly spaced and level. PVO;
about above PO~POs interspace and slightly below level of PVO2, which is at
lower base of pectoral fin. PLO about midway between upper pectoral base and
lateral line. 4 VO, evenly spaced, with VO elevated. VLO slightly in advance of
vertical through VO; and at about level of upper pectoral base. SAO series
straight or slightly curved, with SAO; on or behind vertical through VO. and
slightly below level of VLO, with SAQO> above anus, and with SAOs behind ver-
tical through anal origin and in contact with lateral line. AO level; no AOp
Fig. 9. Diogenichthys panurgus (SM 143D), with dorsal view of supracaudal luminous gland
(C’) and ventral view of infracaudal luminous gland (2). Scale 10 mm.
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
photophores above anal base. Pol well behind vertical through adipose origin
and in contact with lateral line. Prc2 slightly raised; Prci—Prc2 interspace less than
one-half distance AOp-—Prci.
Mature males with single supracaudal gland only, extending from procur-
rent caudal rays almost to adipose base; females with infracaudal gland only,
consisting of one coalesced or two partially-coalesced luminous patches.
Maximum length 23 mm; sexually mature from about 19 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic. Indian Ocean: 19°N to 05°S.
Remarks
The diagnostics of UJ in HL and in SL, as given by Nafpaktitis & Nafpakti-
tis (1969), do not appear to be valid in the Meiring Naude specimens. However,
they have been identified as D. panurgus on the basis of GR count and the
characters given by Kotthaus (1972b). As such, the specimens represent the first
record of the species from the southern African region. During the cruises, the
species was taken south to about 34°S, but additional SAM material suggests
that it is found to as far south as 37°45’S in the region. Females with developing
ovaries (stage III) have been taken to 31°S. The least depth of capture was
50-0 m.
Gonichthys barnesi Whitley, 1943
Remarks
Andriashev (1962) and Hulley (1981) have indicated that G. barnesi is
taken in waters whose surface temperatures vary between 16°C and 22°C. The
two Meiring Naude specimens were taken at the surface in temperatures of
23,03 °C and 23,68°C. The single female (stage IV) was caught at 31°34’S.
Hygophum hanseni (Taning, 1928)
Remarks
No sexually mature females were taken during the Meiring Naude cruises.
Hygophum hygomii (Litken, 1892)
Remarks
Hulley (1981) recognizes two populations (northern and southern) in the
Atlantic Ocean. There are no significant differences in meristics between speci-
mens from the Meiring Naude cruises and those from the South Atlantic. As is
the case with the latter, Meiring Naude specimens are significantly different to
specimens from the North Atlantic in GR: (t 5,89; df 128) and GRr (t 6,23; df
128) counts. Stage V females were taken during the Meiring Naude cruises.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES V4
Hygophum proximum Bekker, 1965
Fig. 10
Myctophum (Myctophum) benoiti reinhardti Brauer, 1906: 185, fig. 97 (partim).
Hygophum reinhardtii (non Litken) Sarenas, 1954: 418, fig. 12.
Hygophum benoiti (non Cocco) Blache, 1962: 33 (partim).
Hygophum proximum Bekker, 1965: 81, figs 6-9 (00°58’S 82°53’E). Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis,
1969: 17, figs 16-17. Kotthaus, 1972b: 16, figs 265, 268, pl. 1 (4). Parin et al., 1977: 109, fig.
16. Gjdsaeter, 1981: 220.
Hygophum reinhardti (non Liitken) Grindley & Penrith, 1965: 282.
Description
D 14; A 19-20; P 13-14; AO 4-5 +7, total 11-12; GR 4+1+13, total 18.
Origin of dorsal fin on vertical through outer ventral base; origin of anal fin
on or slightly behind vertical through base of last dorsal ray. Origin of adipose
fin well in advance of vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin extend-
ing to about anal origin; ventral fin reaching anal origin.
Dn and Vn present; small, luminous organ at posterior end of supraorbital
ridge, slightly in advance of posterior margin of orbit. Opi opposite expanded
posterior margin of maxilla; Op2 about level of ventral margin of eye. 5 PO,
level. PVO; in advance of vertical through PO2, closer to level of ventral base of
pectoral fin than to ventral profile; PVO, at lower base of pectoral fin. PLO mid-
way between upper pectoral base and lateral line. VLO above outer base of ven-
tral fin, closer to lateral line than to ventral base. 4 VO, level. SAO series
obtusely angulate, with SAO; on or slightly in advance of vertical through VOs,
with SAO, about above anus; and with SAOs above origin of anal fin, in contact
with lateral line. AOa and AOp level. 2 Pol with Pol: above last AOa and with
Pols well in advance of vertical through adipose origin. 2 Pre widely separated,
with Prez in contact with or less than one photophore diameter below lateral
line.
Fig. 10. Hygophum proximum (IK 35), with dorsal view of supracaudal luminous gland (0)
and ventral view of infracaudal luminous gland (2). Scale 10 mm.
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Males with single, black-edged supracaudal gland only; females with single
infracaudal gland only.
Maximum length about 50 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic; nyctoepipelagic at the surface. Indian Ocean:
25°N to 10°S. Pacific Ocean: 24°N to 24°S (eastern sector).
Remarks
While the two Meiring Naude specimens (both immature) represent the first
record of the species in the southern African region, specimens identified by
Grindley & Penrith (1965) as H. reinhardti proved on re-examination to be H.
proximum.
Lampadena luminosa (Garman, 1899)
Remarks
Both Meiring Naude specimens are immature.
Lampanyctus achirus Andriashev, 1962
Fig. 11
Lampanyctus ater (non Taning) Norman, 1930: 331.
Lampanyctus achirus Andriashev, 1962: 256, fig. 27 (64°36'S 108°52'W). Nafpaktitis & Nafpak-
titis, 1969: 54, figs 54-55 (partim). McGinnis, 1974: 143, fig. 34. Wisner, 1976: 176, figs
165-166 (partim). Hulley, 1981: 182, fig. 84.
[Non] Lampanyctus cf. achirus: Hulley, 1972: 225 (= Lampanyctus sp. B).
Description
D 15 (14); A 18 (17); AO 6-8+8 (7-9), total 14-16; GR (first arch)
5—6+ 1+ 12, total 18-19; GR: (second arch) 1, x—xi; Ll 34-36.
Origin of dorsal fin well behind vertical through outer ventral base, with
Fig. 11. Lampanyctus achirus (SM 187). Scale 10 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 19
Pre D 46-48 % SL (mean 46,8 %); origin of anal fin about under middle of dor-
sal fin. Origin of adipose fin on or slightly behind vertical through last anal ray.
Pectoral fins absent; ventral fins extending to about anus.
Dn absent; Vn small. Opi minute, at level of posterior margin of maxilla;
Opz above Opi, below level of ventral margin of eye. 5 PO, with POs elevated
and in front of, on or behind vertical through PO3. PVO; midway between PO;
and PO2, or nearer PO2 and at about level of posterior end of maxilla; PVO>
about one photophore diameter below lateral line. VLO above outer ventral
base or slightly in front, about one photophore diameter below lateral line.
4 VO, slightly arched, but VO, not anteriorly displaced to above VO;;
VO;-VO:; interspace shorter than rest of series. SAO series angulate, with SAO;
above VO-VOs interspace and at about level of POs; with SAO above anus or
above origin of anal fin, equidistant between VO, and AOa!, or closer to VOs,
and with SAO; at or slightly below lateral line. AO series straight or slightly
arched, with AOa'-AOda? interspace somewhat larger than interspaces of rest of
series; AOp evenly spaced and level, no photophores above anal base. Pol:
slightly behind vertical through last AOa; Pol: in advance of vertical through ori-
gin of adipose fin. 4 Prc, arched and with concavity directed anterodorsally; Pre;
and Prc2 level, or with Prez lower; Prc3 almost directly below Pres, which is situ-
ated at level of lateral line or above level.
Supracaudal gland consisting of 3-4 overlapping scales; infracaudal gland
consisting of 7-8 overlapping scales, the first often separated from the rest of the
series, extending 79-91 % (mean 84,2 %) of distance between procurrent caudal
rays and base of last anal ray.
Maximum length 162 mm; sexually mature from about 133 mm.
Remarks
See under Lampanyctus sp. A (p. 83).
Lampanyctus ater Taning, 1928
Fig. 12
Lampanyctus ater Taning, 1928: 68 (24°30'N 80°00’W). Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969: 44, figs
53-54. Hulley, 1972: 225; 1981: 188, fig. 87. Nafpaktitis, 1973: 38, fig. 36. Wisner, 1976:
175, fig. 164. Nafpaktitis et al., 1977: 203, figs 139, 141.
Lampanyctus niger (non Ginther) Norman, 1930: 331 (partim). Fowler, 1936: 384 (partim).
Paralampanyctus ater Kotthaus, 1972a: 29, fig. 284, pl. 2 (12).
Description
D 15; A 19; AO 7+8, total 15; GR (first arch) 5+1+10, total 16; GR:
(second arch) 1, ix; Ll 35-36.
Origin of dorsal fin well behind vertical through outer ventral base, with Pre
D 46% SL; origin of anal fin below posterior third of dorsal fin. Origin of adi-
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pose fin well in advance of vertical through last anal ray. Pectoral fin small,
probably extending only to POs; ventral fin reaching to VOs.
Dn absent; Vn small. Op: minute, below level of posterior end of maxilla;
Op2 in advance of Opi, at level of ventral margin of orbit. 5 PO, with POs ele-
vated and slightly behind vertical through PO3. PVO: above PO:i—POQ>? inter-
space, closer to PO» and at about level of posterior end of maxilla; PVO2 at
upper pectoral base, in advance of vertical through PVO;:. PLO about three
Fig. 12. Lampanyctus ater (SM 148). Scale 10 mm.
photophore diameters below lateral line. VLO above outer ventral base, about
one photophore diameter below lateral line. 4 VO, evenly spaced and level.
SAO series angulate, with SAO: midway between VO2 and VOs:, with SAO2
slightly in advance of anal origin, closer to VO, than AOa!, and with SAO: be-
hind origin of anal fin, in contact with lateral line. AOa more or less evenly
spaced and slightly arched; AOp evenly spaced. Pol: behind vertical through last
AOa; Polk in contact with lateral line, behind vertical through adipose origin.
Pre series arched, with concavity directed anterodorsally; with Prcz above level
of Prci; with Pre3 directly below Pres; and with Pres above level of lateral line.
Supracaudal gland consisting of 3 overlapping scales; infracaudal gland con-
sisting of 5 overlapping scales, extending 49% of distance between procurrent
caudal rays and base of last anal ray.
Maximum length 129 mm; sexually mature from about 90 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic: day 680-1 200 m, exhibiting size stratification
with depth; night 51-925 m, non-migrants all sizes. Atlantic Ocean: Subtropical
Pattern (Bisubtropical Subpattern). Indian Ocean: 12°S to 44°S.
Remarks
See under Lampanyctus sp. A (p. 83).
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 81
Lampanyctus ?ater Taning, 1928
Fig. 13
Description
Dp 15-16; A 17-18; P 12; AOS+7 (8), total 12. (13); GR (first arch)
5+1+11, total 17; GRi (second arch) 1, ix; Ll 32-33.
Fig. 13. Lampanyctus ?ater (SM 99). Scale 10 mm.
Origin of dorsal fin well behind vertical through outer ventral base, with Pre
D 45-47 % SL; origin of anal fin below posterior third of dorsal base. Origin of
adipose fin well in advance of vertical through last anal ray. Pectoral fin weakly
developed, probably extending to about POs; ventral fin reaching anus.
Dn absent; Vn small. Op: minute, below level of posterior margin of max-
illa; Op2 slightly in advance of Opi, below level of ventral margin of orbit. 5 PO,
with POs, elevated and slightly behind vertical through PO: or midway between
PO; and POs. PVO: above PO:—PO> interspace, closer to PO: and at level of
posterior end of maxilla; PVO2 above PO:, at level of upper pectoral base. PLO
about two photophore diameters below lateral line. VLO about above VO; and
in contact with lateral line. SAO series angulate, with SAO; closer to VOs than
to VO and at level of POs, with SAOz above anus or anal origin, closer to VOs
than to AOa!, or equidistant, and with SAO; above anus or anal origin, in con-
tact with lateral line. AOa evenly spaced and slightly arched; AOp level and not
markedly separated from Prc series. Pol: behind vertical through last AOa; Poh
below origin of adipose fin, in contact with lateral line. Pre series arched, con-
cavity directed anterodorsally; Prez at about level of Prci; Pres slightly in advance
of vertical through Pres; and Prcz at lateral line.
Supracaudal gland consisting of 3 overlapping scales; infracaudal gland con-
sisting of 4 overlapping scales, extending 46-49% of distance between procur-
rent caudal rays and base of last anal ray.
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The taxonomic status of these specimens is at present unclear and must
await the publication of Zahuranec’s (1980) thesis on the short-finned Lampa-
nyctus species. The specimens most closely resemble L. ater and Lampanyctus
sp. A in that the adipose origin is well in advance of the vertical through the
base of the last anal ray, the Pol: is situated on the vertical through the adipose
origin, and the infracaudal gland extends less than 60% of the distance between
the procurrent caudal rays and the base of the last anal ray. While the lateral
line counts suggest a similarity with those specimens identified as Lampanyctus
sp. A, the AOr, GRr (first arch) and GRi (second arch) indicate a closer affinity
with L. ater.
Lampanyctus australis Taning, 1932
Remarks
Stage IV females were taken by the Meiring Naude as far north as 28°S.
SAM-27112 with 5 VO.
Lampanyctus festivus Taning, 1928
Remarks
The three specimens taken by the Meiring Naude are immature.
Lampanyctus lepidolychnus Bekker, 1967
Remarks
Hulley (1981: 203) has given diagnostic characters for the separation of this
species from L. intricarius. Among these is the fact that “CPD is greater than
HD’ in L. lepidolychnus, where HD is measured on the vertical through the
posterior end of the upper jaw. This is erroneous and should read ‘CPD is
greater than head depth as measured on the vertical through the middle of the
orbit’. Specimens of L. lepidolychnus from the Meiring Naude cruises show the
following variation in these two meristics: CPD 1,0—1,3 (mean 1,1) times in head
depth, as measured on the vertical through the middle of the orbit; and CPD
0,7-0,8 (mean 0,7) times in HD (measured on the vertical through the posterior
end of the upper jaw). The diagnostic ‘CPL in UJ’ varies 1,5-3,1 in Meiring
Naude specimens, the values being negatively related to increasing SL. In view
of the above, the most reliable character for the separation of L. lepidolychnus
and L. intricarius is the length of the pectoral base in relation to the vertical dis-
tance between the lower margin of the orbit and the upper lip, measured at the
middle of the orbit. Consequently, the lengths of the pectoral fins are also diag-
nostic, but these are often broken.
Lampanyctus nobilis Taning, 1928
Remarks
The two Meiring Naude specimens are immature.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 83
Lampanyctus pusillus (Johnson, 1890)
Remarks
The Meiring Naude material included only stage IV females; stage V
females are known from the southern African east coast region (SAM data).
Lampanyctus turneri (Fowler, 1934)
Remarks
SAM-28064 with 5 VO on left side. Stage V females were taken by the
Meiring Naude as far south as about 31°S. The least depth of capture during the
cruises was 212-0 m.
Lampanyctus sp. A
Fig. 14
Description
D 14; A 18; P weakly developed; AO 5+6, total 11; GR (first arch)
4+1+10, total 15; GRi (second arch) 1, viti-ix; Ll 31-32.
Origin of dorsal fin well behind vertical through outer ventral base, with Pre
D 48-49 % SL; origin of anal fin below about middle of dorsal base. Origin of
adipose fin well in front of vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin
weakly developed, probably not extending beyond level of POs; ventral fin
reaching to origin of anal fin.
Dn absent; Vn small. Op: minute, below level of posterior end of maxilla;
Op: slightly posterior to Opi, below level of ventral margin of orbit. 5 PO, with
POs, elevated above level of upper pectoral base and behind vertical through
PO3. PVO: above PO:—PO: interspace, closer to PO2 than to PO: and at level of
posterior end of maxilla; PVO2 at level of upper pectoral base. PLO about two
photophore diameters below lateral line. VLO above VOQu, in contact with lat-
eral line. 4 VO, level, with VO.VOs interspace greatest. SAO series angulate,
with SAO; closer to VO3 than to VOz and at level of POs, with SAO: on or pos-
ae:
Fig. 14. Lampanyctus sp. A (SM 125). Scale 10 mm.
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
terior to vertical through anal origin, and with SAO; about above AOa! and in
contact with lateral line. AOa series slightly arched; AOp series level and no-
ticeably separated from Prc series. Poli behind vertical through last AOa; Polz
on or behind vertical through origin of adipose fin and in contact with lateral
line. Pre series arched, concavity directed anterodorsally; Prez at level of Prei;
Pres slightly in advance of vertical through Pres; and Prcs at level of lateral line.
Supracaudal gland consisting of 3 overlapping luminous scales; infracaudal
gland consisting of 4 overlapping scales, the first of which may be separated
from the rest of the series, extending 46-48% of distance between procurrent
caudal rays and base of last anal ray.
Remarks
Due to the fact that the taxonomy of the short-finned Lampanyctus species
is at present under review (Zahuranec 1980), specific names have not been given
to the two specimens taken by the Meiring Naude. These specimens and L. ater
differ from L. achirus and an as yet unnamed species (Lampanyctus sp. B),
which is known from off the west coast of South Africa, in that the origin of the
adipose fin is well in advance of the vertical through the base of the last anal ray.
Consequently, the Pol: is situated on or behind the vertical through the adipose
origin. Further, the infracaudal gland does not extend more than 55-60% of the
distance between the procurrent caudal rays and the base of the last anal ray (in
the L. achirus-group extending 60-100 % of that distance). The specimens may
be separated from L. ater by the fewer number of lateral line organs, the lower
GRy (first arch) count and the number of tooth patches on GR: (second arch).
Lampanyctus sp. B was not present in the Meiring Naude material.
Lobianchia dofleini (Zugmayer, 1911)
Remarks
No specimens larger than about 36 mm have been taken off the east coast
(Meiring Naude and SAM data; Nafpaktitis 1978). Females are sexually mature
(stage V) from about 34 mm in the southern African region.
Lobianchia gemellarii (Cocco, 1838)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude, but SAM
data indicate that stage IV specimens (49-58 mm) are known from the region.
No specimens greater than about 56 mm are known from the western South In-
dian Ocean.
Myctophum asperum Richardson, 1845
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude. During
these cruises, most specimens (78 %) were taken at the surface at night, at tem-
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 85
peratures between 23,68°C and 24,61°C; the temperature at 200 m for all sta-
tions at which the species was taken varied between 13,10°C and 16,75 °C.
Myctophum aurolaternatum Garman, 1899
Rigel
Myctophum aurolaternatum Garman, 1899: 264, pl. 55, fig. 3 (06°21’N 80°41’W). Brauer, 1906:
162. Sarenas, 1954: 390, fig. 4. Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969: 28, fig. 10. Kotthaus,
1972b: 23, figs 266, 283, pl. 1 (5). Kawaguchi & Aioi, 1972: 167, figs 5-6. Kawaguchi et al.,
1972: 28, fig. 10. Hartmann & Clarke, 1975: 365. Wisner, 1976: 54, fig. 47. Parin et al.,
1977: 111. Gjdsaeter, 1981: 220. Gjdsaeter & Beck, 1981: 257.
Description
D 14; A 24; P15; AO 10 (11)+7, total 17 (18); GR5 (4)+1+11 (12),
total 17.
Origin of dorsal fin behind vertical through outer ventral base; origin of
anal fin slightly behind vertical through base of last dorsal ray. Origin of adipose
fin in advance of vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin reaching to
level of VO2 or VOs; ventral fin extending almost to origin of anal fin. Postero-
dorsal margin of operculum serrate. Scales cycloid.
Dn and Vn small. Op: opposite posterior end of maxilla; Op2 above Opi, at
level of ventral margin of orbit. PLO midway between lateral line and upper
base of pectoral fin or closer to upper pectoral base. 5 PO, evenly spaced and
level. PVO: above PO: and slightly above level of Opi; PVO>2 at lower pectoral
base. 4 VO, evenly spaced and level. SAO series straight, with SAO; directly
above VO,, with SAO, above anus, and with SAOs above or slightly behind ver-
tical through anal origin and in contact with lateral line. AOa series level; AOp!
above anal base. Pol well in advance of vertical through adipose origin, above
last AOa and in contact with lateral line. 2 Prc, less than one photophore di-
ameter apart and with Prc raised.
Maximum length 105 mm.
Fig. 15. Myctophum aurolaternatum (SM 95N). Scale 10 mm.
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic: nyctoepipelagic at the surface and down to
200 m. Indian Ocean: (western sector) Zanzibar to Gulf of Aden, including So-
fala Bank; (eastern sector) 05°S to 18°S; south-eastern Asian seas; Pacific
Ocean: western, central and eastern Equatorial regions.
Remarks
The three specimens, all immature, which were taken at the surface and
down to 212 m by the Meiring Naude, represent the first record of the species in
the southern African region.
Myctophum phengodes (Liitken, 1892)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude. Surface
temperatures at the capture stations varied between 22,92°C and 24,40°C, and
would substantiate the 15°C and 25°C surface isotherm limits for the distribu-
tion of the species (Hulley 1981).
Myctophum spinosum (Steindachner, 1867)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude.
Notolychnus valdiviae (Brauer, 1904)
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken by the Meiring Naude.
Notoscopelus (Notoscopelus) caudispinosus (Johnson, 1863)
Fig. 16
Scopelus caudispinosus Johnson, 1863: 42 (off Madeira).
Notoscopelus elongatus (non Costa) Grindley & Penrith, 1965: 283 (partim).
Notoscopelus caudispinosus: Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969: 66, figs 38, 40. Parin et al., 1977:
128 nen Ze
Notoscopelus (Notoscopelus) caudispinosus Nafpaktitis, 1975: 76, figs 1-2. Nafpaktitis et al.,
1977: 248, figs 173-174. Hulley, 1981: 243, fig. 116.
Description
D 27; A 20-21; P 12; AO 7+4 (5), total 11 (12); GR 4+1+49, total 14.
Origin of dorsal fin slightly behind vertical through outer ventral base; ori-
gin of anal fin below about middle of dorsal base. Origin of adipose fin slightly
in front of vertical through last anal ray. Pectoral fin reaching to ventral base;
ventral fin reaching to about anus.
Dn and Vn present. Op: more or less opposite posterior end of maxilla; Op2
above Opi, below level of ventral margin of orbit. 5 PO, level, with PO:—PO: in-
terspace greatest. PVO; at lower pectoral base; PVO2 above upper pectoral
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 87
Fig. 16. Notoscopelus (Notoscopelus) caudispinosus (SM 189D). Scale 10 mm.
base. PLO immediately below lateral line. 5 VO, evenly spaced, with VOs
sometimes distinctly raised. VLO above ventral base, midway between ventral
base and lateral line. SAO series obtusely angulate, with SAO; about two
photophore diameters posterodorsad to VOs, with SAO: above anal origin, and
with SAO; about on vertical through SAO and in contact with lateral line. 2
Pol, horizontal, immediately below lateral line and in advance of vertical
through adipose origin. 3 Pre; with Prc2 about one photophore diameter behind
Pre; and level with it; and with Prcz about one photophore diameter below level
of lateral line. Luminous tissue on nape and below anterior part of dorsal fin;
between PLO and PVOz; in region of PO:, PVO:i, PO2; between VLO and ven-
tral base; in region of SAO series and AOa!; and below ventral procurrent cau-
dal rays.
Maximum length 140 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic: day, deeper than 1 000 m; nyctoepipelagic at
surface and down to 175 m. Atlantic Ocean: Broadly Tropical Pattern (Holo-
eurytropical Subpattern). Indian Ocean: 07°56'S 65°14’E. South-eastern Asian
seas. Pacific Ocean: off Hawaii.
Remarks
The Meiring Naude specimens, all immature, represent the first record of
the species in the southern African region, with the shallowest depth of capture
being 212-0 m.
Notoscopelus (Notoscopelus) resplendens (Richardson, 1845)
Remarks
Stage V females were taken in the region by the Meiring Naude.
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Symbolophorus evermanni (Gilbert, 1905)
Fig. 17
Myctophum evermanni Gilbert, 1905: 597 (south of Oahu, Hawaii).
Symbolophorus evermanni: Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969: 29, figs 30-31. Kotthaus, 1972b:
26, figs 270, 283, pl. 1 (2). Wisner, 1976: 50, figs 44-45. Parin et al., 1977: 110. Gjdsaeter,
1981: 220, fig. 19. Gjdsaeter & Beck, 1981: 257.
Fig. 17. Symbolophorus evermanni (SM 63), with dorsal view of supracaudal luminous gland
(Cc). Scales 10 mm.
Description
D 14-15 (13-16); A 20 (19-21); P 14-15 (16); AO 8 (7-9) +5 (4-6), total 13
(12-14); GR 5 (6)+1+14 (13), total 20 (19-21). One specimen (SAM-29087)
with two SAO; photophores on left side.
Origin of dorsal fin above ventral base; origin of anal fin behind vertical
through base of last dorsal ray. Origin of adipose fin well in advance of vertical
through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin extending to midway between VLO
and SAO; or to level of SAO; ventral fin extending to about VOs..
Dn and Vn present. Op: opposite posterior end of maxilla; Op2 above Opi,
below level of ventral margin of orbit. 5 PO, evenly spaced and level. PVO;
slightly in advance of vertical through PO and below level of Op2; PVO2 at
lower pectoral base. PLO two or more photophore diameters below lateral line.
VLO on or slightly in advance of vertical through outer ventral base, nearer to
lateral line than to ventral base. 4 VO, evenly spaced and level. SAO series
angulate, with SAO; on vertical through VO or closer to VO2 than VOs and
about equidistant between SAO? and VLO, with SAO: slightly behind vertical
through VO. and at level of SAQ:, and with SAO; above anus, about one
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 89
photophore diameter or less below lateral line. AOa evenly spaced and level;
AOp evenly spaced and level, usually with AOp! above anal base. Pol on verti-
cal through adipose origin. Prec. about one and half photophore diameters be-
hind Prci and elevated.
Males with 4-6 overlapping, luminous scales supracaudally.
Maximum length 80 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic: nyctoepipelagic at surface at night. Tropical
waters of Indo-Pacific Ocean.
Remarks
The specimens represent the first record of the species in the southern Afri-
can region. No sexually mature females were taken by the Meiring Naude.
Taaningichthys bathyphilus (Taning, 1928)
Fig. 18
Lampadena bathyphilus Taning, 1928: 63 (25°11'N 20°57'W).
Taaningichthys bathyphilus: Nafpaktitis & Paxton, 1968: fig. 10 (9). Davy, 1972: 70, figs 3, 5,
6B, 6D. Nafpaktitis, 1973: 38, fig. 35. McGinnis, 1974: 133, figs 30, 58. Wisner, 1976: 145,
figs 131-132. Parin et al., 1977: 122. Nafpaktitis et al., 1977: 189, figs 127-128. Hulley,
1981: 168, fig. 77.
Description
D 13; A 13 (12); P 13 (12); AO 2-3 +1, total 4; GR 3 (4)+1+7, total 11
aD)
Origin of dorsal fin well behind vertical through outer base of ventral fin;
origin of anal fin well behind vertical through base of last dorsal ray. Origin of
adipose fin on vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin extending to
base of ventral fins; ventral fin reaching to about anus. Crescent of whitish tissue
on posterior half of iris.
Fig. 18. Taaningichthys bathyphilus (SM 138). Scale 10 mm.
90 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dn absent; Vn present. Op2 opposite posterior end of maxilla. 6 PO, with
PO,;—PQO); interspace greatest. PVOi above PO:—POz interspace, closer to PO2
than to PO; and below level of ventral margin of orbit; PVOz directly above
PVQi, at level of lower pectoral base. PLO closer to horizontal septum than to
upper pectoral base. VLO above ventral base, closer to horizontal septum than
to ventral base. VO series level. SAO behind vertical through last VO and
about one photophore diameter below horizontal septum. AOa well behind ori-
gin of anal fin; AOp in front of infracaudal gland. Pol well behind base of adi-
pose fin, about one photophore diameter below horizontal septum. Prci, Prez
about one photophore diameter apart; Prc3 at level of horizontal septum.
Supracaudal gland black-edged, occupying about 30% of distance between
procurrent caudal rays and base of adipose fin; infracaudal gland larger, occupy-
ing about 50% or more of distance between procurrent caudal rays and base of
anal fin.
Maximum length 80 mm; sexually mature from about 57 to 61 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, bathypelagic: generally below about 700 m, but with shallow-
est depth of capture at 400 m. Widespread pattern in all three oceans, generally
between about 43°N and 68°S.
Remarks
The Meiring Naude specimens represent the first record of the species in the
southern African region. One female specimen (SAM-—28090) at stage III.
Triphoturus nigrescens (Brauer, 1904)
leyrg, IY)
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) nigrescens Brauer, 1904: 403 (03°24'06"S 58°38’01"E); 1906: 241,
fig. 158.
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) micropterum Brauer, 1906: 239, fig. 157 (partim).
Lampanyctus microchir Gilbert, 1913: 101 (Suruga Bay, Japan).
Triphoturus microchir: Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis, 1969: 55, figs 62, 70. Kotthaus, 1972b: 29, fig.
284. Clarke, 1973: 406, fig. 12. Hartmann & Clarke, 1975: 636. Parin et al., 1977: 125.
Triphoturus nigrescens: Wisner, 1976: 165, fig. 155.
Description
D 14 (13-15); A 16-17 (15-18); P8; AO45+6 (5), total 10-11;
GR 3+1+8 (7), total 12 (11).
Origin of dorsal fin well behind vertical through ventral base; origin of anal
fin under middle of dorsal base or slightly more anterior. Origin of adipose fin
on vertical through base of last anal ray. Pectoral fin reaching to about PO,; ven-
tral fin extending slightly posterior to VO,.
Dn absent; Vn present. Op: low down, at about level of POi; Op2 well
below level of ventral margin of orbit. 5 PO, with PO:—PO> interspace greatest
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 91
Fig. 19. Triphoturus nigrescens (SM 157). Scale 10 mm.
and with PO, elevated and anteriorly displaced to directly on, anterior to or be-
hind vertical through POs and at level of upper pectoral base or slightly higher.
PVO; above PO:—PO: interspace, closer to PO: than to PO: and at about level
of Op2; PVOz on or slightly behind vertical through PVO: and below level of
upper pectoral base. PLO well in advance of vertical through upper pectoral
base, at or less than one photophore diameter below lateral line. 5 VO, with
VO> elevated and anteriorly displaced to before VO:. SAO angulate, with SAO;
nearer to VO3, above VO:-VOs interspace or above VO. and at level of ventral
margin of orbit, with SAO» above anal origin and at level of SAOi:, and with
SAOs behind vertical through anal origin and touching lateral line. AOa level,
with AOa'—AOa?’ interspace greatest; AOp level. 2 Pol, with Pol: behind last
AOa and with Pols in advance of vertical through adipose origin and touching
lateral line. 3 Prec, in straight ascending line, with Prc2 nearer to Prci and touch-
ing line through centres of Prc; and Pres, or slightly below this line; Prcs above
level of lateral line.
Supracaudal gland with 4 overlapping, luminous scales; infracaudal gland
with 5 overlapping, luminous scales.
Maximum length 40 mm.
Distribution
High-oceanic, mesopelagic: in upper 24 m at night. Indian Ocean: 08°N to
15°S. Pacific Ocean: 30°N to 30°S (but see Remarks).
Remarks
No sexually mature specimens were taken during the Meiring Naude
cruises.
The taxonomic status of species of the genus Triphoturus in the Indo-Pacific
is at present unresolved. Hulley (1981) has pointed out that the type series of
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) micropterum Brauer, 1906, comprises two species:
Lampanyctus isaacsi Wisner, 1974 (ZMB 17614, 17615—Gulf of Guinea) and
Triphoturus micropterus (ZMB 17616—east of Seychelles), and for the purposes
of stability has designated the latter specimen as the lectotype of T. micropterus.
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Further, he finds no differences between this lectotype and the descriptions of T.
microchir (Gilbert) given by Gilbert (1913) and by Nafpaktitis & Nafpaktitis
(1969). Accordingly, he has synonymized T. microchir with T. micropterus.
On the other hand, Wisner (1976) has synonymized T. microchir (Gilbert)
with T. nigrescens (Brauer), as there appear to be no differences warranting the
retention of Gilbert’s species. This would suggest, therefore, that T. nigrescens,
T. micropterus and T. microchir may all be synonyms, with T. nigrescens having
priority. Until a fuller investigation can be carried out, this synonymy is fol-
lowed in the present paper.
DISCUSSION
The relatively low numbers of myctophids taken during the Meiring Naude
cruises are indicative of both the types of gear employed and its deployment at
night at fishing depths below the major concentrations of lantern-fishes. The
IKMT and RMT were fished at 12 stations in depths of 400 m or less, of which
only 10 were occupied after sundown, and at 47 stations in depths greater than
400 m, of which 22 were occupied during daylight hours (Louw 1977, 1980).
These facts, coupled to the limited sampling both in geographic extent
(c. 27°S—34°S) and in seasonality (May-June), severely restrict the potential for
zoogeographic analysis of the data. Hulley (1981) has pointed out that in such an
analysis ecological differences should be distinguished, so that the distribution
patterns of oceanic species (both mesopelagic and bathypelagic) and pseud-
Oceanic species (with pelagic and epibenthic modes of life) may be separately
compared. Johnson (1982) has reviewed the papers covering Indian Ocean zoo-
geography and recognizes five groups of species for the families Scopelarchidae
and Evermannellidae, namely Transition Region Species (= Convergence
Species), Subtropical Species, Tropical—Subtropical Species (= Broadly Tropical
Species), Tropical Species, and Species Occurring North of 10°N.
Although two pseudoceanic species are known from the western South In-
dian Ocean, only the pelagic species Diaphus garmani was taken during the
Meiring Naude cruises. In the Atlantic this species is restricted to the western
provinces, with a southern limit at about 10°S in the Amazonian Region (Hulley
1981), probably due to the lens of high temperature, high salinity, and low pro-
ductivity water off the north-east coast of Brazil. D. garmani appears to be more
widespread in the Indo-Pacific (Nafpaktitis 1978: fig. 9; Kawaguchi & Shimizu
1978: fig. 54) and, due to the absence of an equivalent gyral lens, extends to
about 31°S in the southern African region. The epibenthic species Diaphus wata-
sei is known from the Mozambique Channel (Gjdésaeter & Beck 1981) and has
now been recorded from as far south as 30°05’S 31°05’E in 366-0 m (SAM
data).
Two bathypelagic species, Taaningichthys bathyphilus (Widespread Pattern)
and Lampanyctus achirus (South Temperate Pattern: Subantarctic Subpattern),
were taken by the Meiring Naude. T. bathyphilus occurred at three stations with
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 93
fishing depths of 750-0 m, 830-0 m and 916-0 m respectively, but only at the
latter station were temperature data below 250 m available. Here, the upper
600 m was warmer than 10,5°C, but a temperature of less than 5,68°C was re-
corded at 800 m and below. Lampanyctus achirus occurs northward to the posi-
tion of the Subtropical Convergence in the western sector of the South Atlantic
(Hulley 1981), but data from the Meiring Naude cruises indicate that it may be
taken as far north as 31°S in the western South Indian Ocean. This is well to the
north of the Subtropical Convergence as drawn by Deacon (1937), and is no
doubt due to the influence of cold Antarctic Intermediate Water, which under-
lies the core of the Agulhas Current, especially along its western boundary (De
Decker & Mombeck 1965; Carter 1977).
This same water mass and its associated upwelling phenomena (Carter
1977) can also be correlated with the occurrence of cold water mesopelagic
species off the east coast. The subantarctic species Diaphus hudsoni was taken
north to about 27°S, while the Convergence Subpattern species (Hygophum han-
seni, Gonichthys barnesi, and Lampadena notialis) apparently have a northern
limit at about 30°S. The deeper-living convergence species Lampanyctus austra-
lis and Lampanyctus lepidolychnus were taken throughout the sampling area, as
were the temperate species Diaphus metopoclampus (recorded to north of the
Equator—Nafpaktatis 1978) and Lampadena speculigera.
Apart from Taaningichthys bathyphilus, all new records for the southern
African region are species that have a tropical-subtropical distribution and speci-
mens that may be actively transported into the region (? as expatriates) by the
Agulhas Current. Five of these species (Benthosema fibulatum, Diaphus aliciae,
Hygophum proximum, Myctophum aurolaternatum, and M. obtusirostre) were
taken only in Bongo hauls or neuston tows, while 68,7% and 82,6% of the
specimens of Diogenichthys panurgus and Symbolophorus evermanni respect-
ively were obtained from these gears. Further, the new records of species taken
at IKMT and RMT stations (Diaphus jenseni, D. nielseni, D. problematicus, and
Notoscopelus caudispinosus) and records of Triphoturus nigrescens, from both
RMT (64,7%) and Bongo (35,3%) nets consist mainly of juvenile specimens.
This suggests, therefore, that distributional ranges of the breeding populations
should be thoroughly investigated before any attempt at pattern analysis is
made. Unfortunately the data at hand do not allow for this.
Pooled data from the Meiring Naude and other cruises at the South African
Museum reveal that, except for Diaphus effulgens and Myctophum phengodes,
stage IV and stage V females of the following subtropical species have been
taken off the east coast of South Africa: Hygophum hygomii, Lampanyctus ater,
L. pusillus, Bolinichthys indicus, Symbolophorus barnardi, and Scopelopsis mul-
tipunctatus. Stage IV and stage V females of the following tropical or broadly
tropical species have been recorded from the region: Benthosema suborbitale,
Diaphus brachycephalus, D. diadematus, D. luetkeni, D. mollis, D. richardsoni,
Diogenichthys panurgus, Hygophum proximum, Lampanyctus alatus, L. turneri,
Lobianchia dofleini, L. gemellarii, and Notoscopelus resplendens.
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
My thanks are due to Captain G. Foulis and the crew of the R.V. Meiring
Naude; to my scientific colleagues on these cruises; to Mr V. Branco for prep-
aration of the final drawings; and particularly to Mr Sidney Kannemeyer (South
African Museum) for assistance with sorting and photography. I should like to
express my gratitude to Dr G. Krefft (Hamburg) for his critical comments.
REFERENCES
ANDRIASHEV, A. P. 1962. Biological results of the Soviet Antarctic Expedition (1955-1958).
I. Bathypelagic fishes of the Antarctic. 1. Family Myctophidae. Issled. Fauny Morei
1: 216-300. (In Russian.)
BEKKER, V. E. 1965. The lanternfishes of the genus Hygophum (Myctophidae, Pisces). Okeano-
logiya 4: 469-475. (In Russian.)
BEKKER, V. E. 1967. The lanternfishes (Myctophidae) from the ‘Petr Lebedev’ Atlantic Expedi-
tion, 1961-1964. Trudy Inst. Okeanol. 84: 84-124. (In Russian.)
BLACHE, J. 1962. Liste des poissons signalés dans |’Atlantique tropico-orientale sud—du Cap
des Palmes (4° Lat. N) 4 Mossamédés (15° Lat. S) (Province Guineo-Equatoriale). Cah.
Off. Rech. Sci. Tech. Outre-Mer. (Serie Océanographie) 2: 13-102.
BoLin, R. L. 1946. Lanternfishes from ‘Investigator’ Station 670, Indian Ocean. Stanford Ich-
thyol. Bull. 3: 137-152.
BrAvuER, A. 1904. Die Gattung Myctophum. Zool. Anz. 28: 377-404.
Brauer, A. 1906. Die Tiefsee-Fische. I. Systematischer Teil. Wiss. Ergebn. dt. Tiefsee-Exped.
‘Valdivia’ 15: 1-420.
CarTeER, R. A. 1977. The distribution of calanoid Copepoda in the Agulhas Current system off
Natal, South Africa. Unpublished M.Sc. Thesis, University of Natal.
CLaRKE, T. A. 1973. Some aspects of the ecology of lanternfishes (Myctophidae) in the Pacific
Ocean near Hawaii. Fishery Bull. natn. ocean. atmos. Adm. 70: 67-78.
Cocco, A. 1829. Su di alcuni pesci de’mari di Messina. Gior. Sci. Lett. Sicilia 26: 138-147.
Cocco, A. 1838. Su di alcuni Salmonidi del mari di Messina. Nuov. Ann. Sci. nat. Bologna 2:
161-194.
Davy, B. 1972. A review of the lanternfish genus Taaningichthys (family Myctophidae) with the
description of a new species. Fishery Bull. natn. ocean. atmos. Adm. 70: 67-78.
DEAcon, G. E. R. 1937. The hydrology of the Southern Ocean. ‘Discovery’ Rep. 15: 1-124.
De Decker, A. & MomBEck, F. J. 1965. A preliminary report on the planktonic Copepoda. Jn-
vestl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. Rep. S. Afr. 51: 10-49.
Fow _er, H. W. 1934. Descriptions of new fishes obtained 1907 to 1910 chiefly in the Philippine
Islands and adjacent seas. Proc. Acad. Sci. Philad. 85: 233-367.
Fow Ler, H. W. 1936. The marine fishes of West Africa, based on the collection of the Ameri-
can Museum Congo Expedition 1909-15. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 70: 1-1493.
GARMAN, S. 1899. Reports on an expedition off the west coasts of Mexico, Central and South
America, and off the Galapagos Islands in charge of Alexander Agassiz by the U.S. Fish
Commission Steamer ‘Albatross’ during 1891, Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U.S.N.
commanding. XXVI. The fishes. Mem. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 24: 1-431.
GILBERT, C. H. 1905. The aquatic resources of the Hawaiian Islands. II. The deep-sea fishes.
Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. 1903, 23: 575-713.
GILBERT, C. H. 1906. Certain scopelids in the collection of the Museum of Comparative Zool-
ogy. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 46: 255-263.
GILBERT, C. H. 1913. The lanternfishes of Japan. Mem. Carneg. Mus. 6: 67-107.
GiLBerT, C. H. & CrAmer, F. 1897. Report on the fishes dredged in deep water near the
Hawaiian Islands, with descriptions and figures of twenty-three new species. Proc. U.S.
natn. Mus. 19: 403-435.
GIOSAETER, J. 1981. Abundance and production of lanternfish (Myctophidae) in the western
and northern Arabian Sea. FiskDir. Skr. Ser. HavUnders. 17: 215-251.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 95
GJOSAETER, J. & Beck. I.-M. 1981. Mesopelagic fish off Mozambique. FiskDir. Skr. Ser. Hav-
Unders. 17: 253-265.
GoopE, G. B. & BEAN, T. H. 1896. Oceanic ichthyology, a treatise on the deep-sea and pelagic
fishes of the world, based chiefly upon the collections made by the Steamers ‘Blake’, ‘Alba-
tross’ and ‘Fish Hawk’ in the northwestern Atlantic. Mem. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 1:
1-553.
GRINDLEY, J. R. & PenriTH, M. J. 1965. Notes on the bathypelagic fauna of the seas around
South Africa. Zoologica afr. 1: 275-295.
HARTMANN, A. R. & CLARKE, T. A. 1975. The distribution of myctophid fishes across the cen-
tral equatorial Pacific. Fishery Bull. natn. ocean. atmos. Adm. 73: 633-641.
Heyporn, A. E. F. 1976. Ecology of the Agulhas Current region—an assessment of biological
responses to environmental parameters in the south-west Indian Ocean. SANCOR Sympo-
sium § 122 (Port Elizabeth), July 1976: 1-56.
Hu tey, P. A. 1972. A report on the mesopelagic fishes collected during the deep-sea cruises of
R.S. ‘Africana IT’, 1961-1966. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 60: 197-236.
Huey, P. A. 1981. Results of the research cruises of FRV ‘Walther Herwig’ to South
America. LVIII. Family Myctophidae (Osteichthyes, Myctophiformes). Arch. FischWiss.
31 (1): 1-300.
JOHNSON, R. K. 1982. Fishes of the families Evermannellidae and Scopelarchidae: Systematics,
morphology, interrelationships, and zoogeography. Fieldiana (Zool.) (N.S.) 12: 1-252.
JOHNSON, S. Y. 1863. Descriptions of five new species of fishes obtained at Madeira. Proc. zool.
Soc. Lond. 33: 36-46.
JOHNSON, S. Y. 1890. On some new species of fishes from Madeira. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 58:
452-459.
Kawacucul, K. & Ato1, K. 1972. Myctophid fishes of the genus Myctophum (Myctophidae) in
the Pacific and Indian Oceans. J. oceanogr. Soc. Jap. 28: 161-175.
KAwaGucHl, K., IkEDA, H., TaMurA, M. & UEyYANAGI, S. 1972. Geographical distribution of
surface-migrating myctophid fishes (Genus Myctophum) in the tropical and subtropical
Pacific and Indian Oceans. Bull. Far Seas Fish. Res. Lab. 6: 23-37.
KAWAGUCHI, K. & SHimizu, H. 1978. Taxonomy and distribution of the lanternfishes, genus Di-
aphus (Pisces, Myctophidae) in the western Pacific, eastern Indian Ocean and the south-
east Asian Seas. Bull. Ocean. Res. Inst. Univ. Tokyo 10: 1-145.
KorrHaus, A. 1972a. Die meso- und bathypelagischen Fische der ‘“Meteor’’-Rossbreiten-
Expedition 1970 (2. und 3. Fahrabschnitt). Meteor Forsch.-Ergebnisse D 11: 1-28.
KorrHaus, A. 19726. Fische des Indischen Ozeans. Ergebnisse der ichthyologischen Unter-
suchungen wahrend der Expedition des Forschungsschiffes ““Meteor” in den Indischen
Ozean, Oktober 1964 bis Mai 1965. A. Systematischer Teil, IX. Iniomi (Nachtrag: Fam.
Myctophidae). Meteor Forsch.-Ergebnisse D 12: 12-35.
KorrHaus, A. 1979. Fische des Indischen Ozeans. Ergebnisse der ichthyologischen Unter-
suchungen wahrend der Expedition des Forschungsschiffes ““Meteor” in den Indischen
Ozean, Oktober 1964 bis Mai 1965. A. Systematischer Teil, XXI. Diverse Ordnungen.
Meteor Forsch.-Ergebnisse D 28: 6-54.
Louw, E. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 1. Station Data
1975, 1976. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 147-159.
Louw, E. 1980. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 10. Station Data
1977, 1978, 1979. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 187-205.
LUTKEN, C. F. 1892. Korte Bidrag til nordisk Ichthyographi. VIII. Nogle nordiske Laxesild
(Scopeliner). Vidensk. Meddr. dansk naturh. Foren. 1891 (1892) 43: 203-233.
LUTKEN, C. F. 1892. Spolia Atlantica. Scopelini Musei Zoologici Universitatis Hauiensis.
K. dansk Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. (6) 7: 221-297.
McGinnis, R. F. 1974. Biogeography of lanternfishes (family Myctophidae) south of 30°S. Un-
published Ph.D. Thesis, University of Southern California.
Narpaxtitis, B. G. 1973. A review of the lanternfishes (family Myctophidae) described by
A. Vedel Taning. Dana Rep. 83: 1-46.
Narpaktitis, B. G. 1975. Review of the lanternfish genus Notoscopelus (family Myctophidae) in
the North Atlantic and Mediterranean. Bull. mar. Sci. 25: 75-87.
Narpaktitis, B. G. 1978. Systematics and distribution of lanternfishes of the genera Lobianchia
and Diaphus (Myctophidae) in the Indian Ocean. Sci. Bull. nat. Hist. Mus. Los Ang. Cty
30: 1-92.
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
NAFPAKTITIS, B. G., BAckus, R. H., Crappock, J. E., HAEDRICH, R. L., Ropinson, B. H. &
KARNELLA, C. 1977. Family Myctophidae. Mem. Sears Fdn mar. Res. 1 (7): 13-265.
NAFPAKTITIS, B. G. & NAFPAKTITIS, M. 1969. Lanternfishes (family Myctophidae) collected dur-
ing Cruises 3 and 6 of the R/V Anton Bruun in the Indian Ocean. Bull. Los Ang. Cty Mus.
Sci. 5: 1-70.
NAFPAKTITIS, B. G. & PAXTON, J. R. 1968. Review of the lanternfish genus Lampadena with a
description of new species. Contr. Sci. Los Angeles 138: 1-29.
Norman, J. R. 1930. Oceanic fishes and flatfishes collected in 1925-27. ‘Discovery’ Rep. 2:
261-370.
OaiLpy, J. D. 1898. New genera and species of fishes. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 23: 32-41.
Parin, N. V., BEKKER, V. E., BoROoDULINA, O. D., KARMovskayA, E. S., FEDORAKO, B. I.,
SHCHERBACHEV, J. N., POKHLISKAYA, G. N. & TcHuuvasov, V. M. 1977. Midwater fishes in
the western tropical Pacific Ocean and the seas of the Indo-Australian archipelago. Trudy
Inst. Okeanol. 107: 68-188. (In Russian.)
Parr, A. E. 1928. Deep-sea fishes of the order Iniomi from the waters around the Bahama and
Bermuda Islands with annotated keys to the Sudidae, Myctophidae, Scopelarchidae, Ever-
mannellidae, Omosudidae, Cetomimidae and Rondeletiidae of the world. Bull. Bingham
oceanogr. Coll. 3 (3): 1-193.
PAXTON, J. R. 1972. Osteology and relationships of the laternfishes (family Myctophidae). Sci.
Bull. nat. Hist. Mus. Los. Ang. Cty 13: 1-81.
RICHARDSON, J. 1844-1848. Ichthyology of the voyage of H.M.S. Erebus and Terror, under the
command of Captain Sir James Clark Ross, R.N., F.R.S. Jn: RicHarpson, J. & Gray,
J. E. eds. The zoology of the voyage of H.M.S. Erebus and Terror, under the command of
Captain Sir James Clark Ross, R.N., F.R.S. during the years 1839-43. 2: 1-139. London.
SARENAS, A. M. 1954. A revision of the Philippine Myctophidae. Philipp. J. Sci. 82: 375-427.
STEINDACHNER, F. 1867. Uber eine neue Scopelus- und Monacanthus-Art aus China. Sber.
Akad, Wiss. Wien. 55: 711-713.
TANING, A. V. 1928. Synopsis of scopelids in the North Atlantic. Vidensk. Meddr dansk naturh.
Foren. 86: 49-69.
TANING, A. V. 1932. Notes on scopelids from the Dana collections. I. Vidensk. Meddr dansk
naturh. Foren. 94: 125-146.
WHITLEY, G. P. 1943. Ichthyological notes and illustrations. (Part 2). Aust. Zool. 10: 167-187.
WISNER, R. L. 1976. The taxonomy and distribution of lanternfishes (family Myctophidae) of the
eastern Pacific Ocean. Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office.
ZAHURANEC, B. J. 1980. Zoogeography and systematics of the lanternfishes of the genus Nanno-
brachium (Lampanyctini: Myctophidae). Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, George Washington
University.
ZuBRIGG, R. E. & Scott, W. B. 1976. Diaphus hudsoni (Pisces, Myctophidae) a new lanternfish
from the South Atlantic Ocean. Can. J. Zool. 54: 1538-1541.
ZUGMAYER, E. 1911. Diagnoses des poissons nouveaux provenant des campagnes du Yacht
‘Princesse Alice’ (1901-10). Bull. Inst. océan. Monaco. 193: 1-14.
,
Ly
+.
ip marwe Om 4) —
or re wy oe Ps. iby
; *~ \ a
; 7
ol ae 7
- > ae 7 « 5
: of a Fe ¥
7 tay > i
: |
|
=
5
}
iy
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific namé must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new ‘species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
b) 6
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
P. ALEXANDER HULLEY
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 14
FAMILY MYCTOPHIDAE
(OSTEICHTHYES, MYCTOPHIFORMES)
|
aH = 93 PART 3. —« FEBRUARY 1984 ISSN 0303-2515
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN”
~~ MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Jntroduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RArFFy, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 93 Band
February 1984 Februarie
Part 3 Deel
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA FROM
SOUTHERN AFRICA AND THE FALKLAND
PLATEAU
By
R. V. DINGLE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
i, WS, 5-8), VOD, 15, 8, tp.t.), SCS, 5, EO),
6(1, t.—p.i.). 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 45(1)
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 051 6
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press; sPtyeletde Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA AND
THE FALKLAND PLATEAU
By
R. V. DINGLE
Marine Geoscience Unit, Department of Geology,
| University of Cape Town
(With 42 figures and 14 tables)
[MS accepted 10 August 1983]
ABSTRACT
Fifty-one species, representing 26 genera are recorded from the Aptian to Cenomanian
strata of Zululand, the Agulhas Bank, and the Falkland Plateau (DSDP sites 327 and 330); 35
of the species are new, 10 have previously been described from south-east and east Africa, and
Australia, and 6 are left in open nomenclature; 2 new genera (Makatinella and Pongolacythere),
and 1 new subgenus Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) are erected; 25 new species are for-
mally described: Cytherella bensoni, Cytherelloidea makatiniensis, C. ndumuensis, Robsoniella
falklandensis, Pariceratina liebaui, Cytherura? oertlii, Eucytherura rugosa, E. stellifera, Procy-
therura batei, Cytheropteron bispinosa, Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) barkeri, H. (P.)
dalzieli, H. (P.) reticulata, Hemiparacytheridea ewingensis, H. challengeri, Pedicythere falklan-
densis, Pongolacythere striata, Collisarboris? stanleyensis, Isocythereis? ndumuensis, Makatinella
tritumida, M. inflata, Pirileberis makatiniensis, P. mkuzensis, Asciocythere? dubia, and Aitkeni-
cythere? striosulcata.
The marine benthic ostracod faunas of south-east Africa and the Falkland Plateau are com-
pared and contrasted in the context of mid-Cretaceous palaeogeographic refits of south-western
Gondwanaland, and Callovian to Aptian (Fauna A) and Albian to Cenomanian (Fauna B) as-
sociations are recognized in the South Gondwana ostracod province. Strong Albian faunal links
existed between south-east Africa and the Falkland Plateau, which support refits that place the
two areas in juxtaposition in Lower Cretaceous times. Environments of deposition are investi-
gated, and water depths of c. 200 m and 200-<100 m are postulated for the Falkland Plateau
sites and Zululand, respectively.
CONTENTS
PAGE
LN ROGINCHOM s. 0 3.5: oats Ban hate 6.2 See Rec Ao Oth: teak eee aCe mn 98
ZL EN OUND vs cc.6:-08 30 860 0 0.0 Seb tao Senate eg ates nS ee ae ee ee 99
alka ari Gglenate aUleee ee epee eta ee eee Ae akc ra ays 8 105
Outeniqua Basin(AeulhkastBank)eeens esac tess ss eee eee - 106
| PARENUONUS VICTOR 3.0. 616. 0b" G 0 Owe eo Otten Ane enka Cana ana a er 109
SyStemlalicadeScnimtlOnSer waar esc a ee eect) So Biel esha ctayenatel eons et ae 109
DISCUSS! ORM ey atrn ae inmate rine Win cre ie UN tonsil Ant allt vas bel 183
nalidancublatcauing perpen arise atonal Ge anie came socio ot. 183
PEI OSCONORE, cls or. gt Sates oe eR ons on ee ee ee 184
Biostratienap livaen secs t es Se Seta wae Sage Bla aa cele 12
YOUU THESES VAINICE SS bn rea oe ear MRE es rene nea 194
ZEON ENIVG| os occ 6 bie were: EecRene oOn Aes eRe ce 194
PAlACOCCOLOPWAna acetate cls Gine eon es e 194
OStHationap Veneer eA nrs da ete Slate eve mimics ee 198
@ute nila war Asimeyae saqeiie tees ee eae cracks ayer beg h anes 200
JT
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 93(3), 1984: 97-211, 42 figs, 14 tables.
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
Regional:considerations:. 795... =e 9 oan toe eee eo a ee 200
Mid-Cretaceous faunal links between south-east Africa and the
Falkland Plateau :i..sc sae ee ee eee 204
Acknowledgements: i ts.a\s oe sae etd se ee ee 207
IRGHERENCES 220) 3S So ee eee 207
INTRODUCTION
Mid-Cretaceous time spans the period in southern African geological his-
tory during which its south-eastern margin moved laterally past the Falkland
Plateau as the African and South American continental blocks progressively sep-
arated in the early opening phase of the South Atlantic Ocean (e.g. Dingle &
Scrutton 1974) (see Figs 1, 42 herein.) The commencement of continental drift
(as defined by the creation of earliest oceanic crust between the separating conti-
nental units) probably dates from about 127 m.y. (Valanginian) (Larson & Ladd
1973), while its continuation resulted in the progressive enlargement of the
Fig. 1. Sketch of pre-drift reconstruction of part of south-western Gondwanaland. East Ant-
arctica probably began to move away from West Gondwana (South America and Africa) in Ju-
rassic times, but the Falkland Plateau remained in the position shown until latest Valanginian
time. Amended from Dingle et al. (1983), which was based on Norton & Sclater (1979), Tu-
cholke et al. (1981), De Wit (1977), and Elliot (1975). Dashed lines are lines of later continental
breakup and arrows show directions of relative motion during continental separation. Stars
shows positions of DSDP samples 249 (Mozambique Ridge) and 327 and 330 (Falkland Pla-
teau). Abbreviations: N—Neuquen Basin; AB—Agulhas Bank (Outeniqua Basin); Z—Zulu-
land-South Mozambique Basin; FP—Falkland Plateau; MEB—Maurice Ewing Bank; MR—
Mozambique Ridge; WA—West Antarctica microplates; EA—East Antarctica; AFFZ—Agul-
has—Falkland Fracture Zone.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 99
south-eastern Atlantic Ocean and the southern Natal Valley. Because of the
large spreading ridge offset created by the Agulhas—Falkland Fracture Zone
(AFFZ in Fig. 1), the two continents remained physically joined along a pro-
gressively shortening zone until about 100 m.y. (late Albian-early Cenoma-
nian). In a consideration of the Barremian to Cenomanian ostracod faunas of
south-east Africa it is important, therefore, to include those of the same age
from the Falkland Plateau because the Agulhas Bank, Falkland Plateau, and
Zululand were close together in a slowly evolving palaeogeography, and their
faunas can be expected to show similarities (Fig. 1).
Figure 1 shows a pre-drift reconstruction of the south-east Africa—Falkland
Plateau area, and localities from which samples were available for study. Table 1
shows the distribution of the ostracods recovered during the study.
ZULULAND
The mid-Cretaceous (Barremian—Cenomanian) rocks of Zululand crop out
as a narrow swathe along the eastern side of the Lebombo Mountains in north-
ern Zululand, at the western edge of the coastal plain (Fig. 2). This is one of the
areas from which Kennedy & Klinger (1975) collected during their revision of
the Cretaceous ammonite faunas of south-east Africa, and the locality numbers
used in Figure 2 are the same as theirs. Kennedy & Klinger (1975) divided the
succession into two formations, which are separated by a hiatus across the Ap-
tian—Albian boundary, with Albian I strata missing at outcrop.
The lower, Makatini Formation rests unconformably upon weathered Le-
bombo lavas, and the oldest marine sediments in this sequence have been dated
as late Barremian. Unfortunately, none of the Makatini Formation older than
Aptian III contained ostracods and, consequently, all our material comes from
the upper two ammonite zones (Aptian III and IV), with exposures in two
areas, Mkuze and Mlambongwenya. At the former, localities 152 and 150 occur
in the Mantuma rest camp area of the Mkuze Game Park, to the south of the
Mkuze River. Locality 150 (27°35,8’S 32°12,47’E) is a cliff section on the south-
ern side of the Nhlohlela Pan, and exposes Aptian IHI-IV, while locality 152
(27°35,65’S 32°12,88’E) consists of hillslopes south of the road leading to Nhlo-
hlela Pan from Denyer’s Drift 500 m west of the camp area (Fig. 3). According
to Kennedy & Klinger (1975), the latter exposes a section across the Makatini—
Mzinene boundary (Aptian IV, Albian II-III), but only the lower part (Aptian
IV) contains ostracods. At the Mlambongwenya Spruit section (locality 171,
27°10,98'S 32°11,13'E) good sections in the river cliff and hillslopes 250 m west-
south-west of the store on the main road north from Jozini expose the succession
across the Makatini-Mzinene boundary, and in this area ostracods occur in all
three ammonite zones involved, Aptian IV, Albian II-III (Fig. 3). Kennedy &
Klinger’s (1975) work shows that the Albian—Cenomanian boundary is conform-
able, and that the top of the Mzinene Formation is unconformably overlain by
the St. Lucia Formation throughout Zululand, so that the basal rocks of the
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
| Contacian | I |ST.LUCIA Fm |
MOZAMBIQUE
SWAZILAND
Miambongwen
Spruit :
Vv
Vv
Vv
Vv
Vv
Vv
Vv
R
.
=
s
=
cy
=
=
yo
=
5
=
=
FF
IF
=
5
FALSE BAY 28
APTIAN
MAKATINI Fm
ST.LUCIA
ESTUARY
Fig. 2. Mid-Cretaceous strata of Zululand and sampling localities from which ostracods were
recovered. Subdivision of stages is after Kennedy & Klinger (1975) and is based on ammonite
faunas. Geological map is after Kennedy & Klinger (1975) with minor additions from Dingle et
al. (1983). Pre-Barremian basement rocks are Mesozoic Lebombo volcanics and Pre-Cambrian
metamorphics and granites. Locality numbers are those of Kennedy & Klinger (1975). Barre-
mian I & IJ ammonite faunas are Upper Barremian in age. BH9 is the Richards Bay borehole,
whose ostracod fauna has been described by Dingle (1980).
latter (Coniacian I hereabout) progressively overstep the latter (Cenomanian
IV) with the whole of the Turonian missing at outcrop.
As mentioned above, we have ostracods from the basal Mzinene Formation
(Albian II at Mlambongwenya Spruit), in addition to material from the next am-
monite zone (Albian III) at locality 153 (27°35,60’S 32°13,16’E). This is another
Mantuma rest camp exposure, which is in the banks of an excavated site for a
reservoir at the camp just east of Dreyer’s Drift. Ostracods were not recovered
from samples that were taken from ammonite stages Albian IV—V, but material
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 101
171
a | <
ALB Ill
Diese aya a year
« ALB II
Bic COO
6;/oCOo0 s
4;oo
ALB ll
72 oom Te
APT IV
m
0
silts & clays «samples with
ostracods
c——_ limestones & hard
Coo calcareous silts
5
Fig. 3. Measured sections in the Makatini and Mzinene formations of Zululand. See Figure 2
for locations and the text for coordinates. After Kennedy & Klinger (1975), Klinger (pers.
comm.), and personal field notes. Locality and bed numbers are those of Kennedy & Klinger
(1975). Horizons with ostracod-bearing samples are shown with arrows. Other localities men-
tioned in the text do not show sections suitable for illustration: 153 is a small quarry exposing a
few metres only of calcareous nodules in clays and silts; 178, 179, 182, and Ndumu are scattered
outcrops in fields, watercourses and along tracks.
from two localities (178: 26°56,23’S 32°14,42’E, and 179: 26°56,46’S 32°14,92’E)
provided fauna of Albian VI age. Both these are in shallow excavations in sisal
fields in the vicinity of Msunduzi Pan, south-west of the Ndumu store in north-
ernmost Zululand. Cenomanian I samples did not contain ostracods, but Ceno-
manian II faunas were recovered from localities 182 (26°55,63’S 32°15,22’E) and
183 (26°55,17'S 32°15,75'E). The former are poor exposures on the hillside
south-east of Ndumu store, while the latter were taken in a small quarry in the
hillside 300 m below Ndumu police station. The youngest mid-Cretaceous ostra-
cod-bearing sample (Cenomanian III) was collected at the eastern end of Inya-
mathi Pan in the Ndumu Game Reserve (26°53,0’S 32°18,10’E, referred to as
sample ‘Ndumu’ herein because it was not allocated a locality number by
Kennedy & Klinger (1975)). To allow international correlation of the ostracod
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
102
Al
* *
*
*
* *
* * *
* *
* *
*
*
*
*
*
ok
* *
Ajreo 9}e] o]ppru
II I IA A Al Ill II snjery
ueluewoud,)
uUrIqIV
*
2 GS SS ESS
uendy
DIDIINSOIS aaaysaouayny
piafyjais DAndayjAon|y
sisuapuvjsuaanb “Jo vjyjavsunibpy
sisuaspyjnsv SiasayjKyD
sisuaspynsv vapiojjasayjKy
DpNUNnj1A] DaUNOYYO A,
‘ds studdovivg
‘ds pyjasayjycy
Invgay] DUIIDAIIIAD
SISUAIUIDYDUL $14dgGa]1I1d
DIVIAIS AADYJAIDIOSUOT
pIDyUI DJaUNDYD
SISUBZNYU S149QAI11d.
SISUAIUIDYDUL Dap1o[Ja1ayIAD
Zz ‘ds ‘jopuy
DINUDUKPOAAD “JO VANABYIAIOA
[ ds pjopiddopawg
I ‘ds ‘jopuy
sypwuau vyjavsunloy
Saplojay) vjjasppuos
8I/Lze “ds fasayidouayny
avUuUAsnuays vjjavsunlopw
Aydeisnensoiq dqsd
sosejis s}1UOWUe pue[N{NZ
nesje[g purpye, pue yueg seyjnsy ‘pueyninZ ut spooe.nso snoosej}01-Q-prwt Jo UONNGINsSIq
| F1av
103
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA
$N099"}91Z-pIwi UY] JOpjoO JO ‘vore nedj}e[q PURLY[eqJ—CdJY Sed-YINOS IpIs}NoO JoyIIO BsULI JO UOISUD}X9 UMOUY ‘,—
Clas) TSE a che Cue Bees
a
omar OE IG) Ae
*
sisuanuinpu vapioyasayiK)D
sisuanuinpu ¢SiasaysAdos]
‘ds (oulvsaOUOP
‘ds uosajdosayjay
1490 (vAnsayKD
SISUBAAJUDIS {S1ILOGADSIJOD
9L/Lze “ds gojjavsuniopy
A9/Lze “ds “yopuy
8I/Lze ‘ds ‘yepuy
VOT/LZE “ds ‘Jopuy
BL/Lz¢e ‘ds uosajdosayiay
1ajsuip “JO DANAIYIAIONT
‘ds (stdaqajosavyds
SIsuapvaS S1a4ayIAIOST
psouidsiq uodajdosayjaD
uaydvg (‘d) vyjakomsuuay
1210q DANABYIAIOA
Loge “ds ‘y9puy
piqnp ~adaysKo010sy
Masuayjvyo “HH
SIsuasuiMa vapldayIAovAvduay]
pipjnones (‘d) ‘H
yaizjop (vjjakom
-SUNUaYDAVg ) DjJakvMsuluaz]
DSOBNA DANAIYIAINT
sisuapunyof asaysAoipag
nnnums1 24ai1k 91109 117
nn ee oe NS ee ive eC oe
2%
Pe
4
of
TABLE 1
Distribution of mid-Cretaceous ostracods in Zululand, Agulhas Bank and Falkland Plateau
Aptian Albian Cenomanian
Zululand ammonite stages IV hiatus Il Ill IV Vv VI I II
DSDP biostratigraphy early middle late early
*
Majungaella ?hemigymnae :
43 Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18 Tt
10 Sondagella theloides
12 Majungaella nematis
46 Indet. sp. 1 *
*
*
6 Bairdoppilata sp.1 j
24 Procytherura cf. aerodynamica z
47 Indet. sp. 2 ‘ .
4 Cytherelloidea makatiniensis S, ;
20 Pirileberis mkuzensis *
21 Makatinella inflata *
23 Pongolacythere striata * é
19 Pirileberis makatiniensis ss 7
29 Pariceratina liebaui ae Saw : :
2 Cytherella sp. a eee e z “
8 Paracypris sp. ee ee ne i eee *
22 Makatinella tritumida ee
3. Cytherelloidea agulhasensis *
18 Cythereis agulhasensis - ;
11 Majungaella cf. queenslandensis io ERNAES ESS GTS
32 Eucytherura stellifera
44 Aitkenicythere? striosulcata ey :
7 Bairdoppilata sp.2
Te a ee —
9 Robsoniella falklandensis t z * x
15 Arculicythere tumida bs ‘3 if . x
30 Pedicythere falklandensis ky
31 Eucytherura rugosa %
34 Hemingwayella (Paraheming-
wayella) dalzieli !
35H. (P.) reticulata x
36 Hemiparacytheridea ewingensis :
37H. challengeri ¢
39 Asciocythere? dubia x
48 Indet. sp. 330/1 :
25 Procytherura batei *__*
33 Hemingwayella (P.) barkeri *___*
40 Cytheropteron bispinosa *____*
16 Isocythereis sealensis : “i *____*
27 Sphaeroleberis? sp. ie
26 Procytherura cf. dinglei G4
41 Cytheropteron sp. 327/18
49 Indet. sp. 327/16A s
50 Indet. sp. 327/18 ig
51 Indet. sp. 327/16B 3
14 Majungaella? sp. 327/16 z
38 Collisarboris? stanleyensis : *
45 Cytherura? oertlii * .
42 Cytheropteron sp. ;
28 Monoceratina? sp.
17 Isocythereis? ndumuensis
5 Cytherelloidea ndumuensis
—*, known extension of range either outside south-east Africa—Falkland Plateau area, or older than mid-Cretaceous
£01
COT
WOAASAW NVOIedV HLNOS AHL JO STVNNV
VdOOVuULSO SNOSOVLENO-dIN
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ranges presented herein, Table 2 includes details of the ammonite faunas of
Kennedy & Klinger’s (1975) zones.
Preservation of the Zululand mid-Cretaceous ostracoda is generally moder-
ate to poor, with signs of local heavy decalcification. Many of the samples col-
lected were barren. This contrasts strongly with the Campanian—Maastrichtian
assemblages from Zululand, which are generally well preserved (Dingle 1981),
and it suggests local deep weathering (i.e. subaerial exposure) during the Turo-
nian hiatus.
TABLE 2
Ammonite zonation of Barremian to Cenomanian sediments in Zululand (after Kennedy &
Klinger 1975).
CENOMANIAN Iv: Sparsely fossiliferous. Fauna includes Calycoceras gr. choffati, C. nitidum,
C. gr. naviculare and Eucalycoceras. Highest parts of the Cenomanian are missing.
CENOMANIAN I: Turrilites acutus is abundant throughout, while Acanthoceras spp. are abun-
dant in the lower part and Calycoceras gr. choffati abundant in the upper part. Other forms in-
clude Turrilites costatus, T. scheuchzerianus, Acanthoceras cornigerum, Forbesiceras
largilliertianum, F. sculptum, Calycoceras gentoni paucinodatum, and species of Desmoceras,
Hypophylloceras, Borissiakoceras, Anisoceras, Stomohamites, Sciponoceras, Scaphites, Puzosia,
and Bhimaites.
CENOMANIAN II: Neostlingoceras rorayensis is common, with the remainder of the fauna consist-
ing of Hypoturrilites carcitanensis, H. gravesianus, H. tuberculatus, H. nodiferus, Mariella spp..,
Sciponoceras roto, Scaphites, sp. Desmoceras latidorsatum, Tetragonites subtimotheanus, Forbe-
siceras largilliertianum, Sharpeiceras laticlavium, Mantelliceras spp., and a number of desmoce-
ratids.
CENOMANIAN I: Sharpeiceras florencae, S. falloti, and Mariella oehlerti are abundant. Other
forms include Desmoceras latidorsatum, Sciponoceras roto, Scaphites cf. simplex, and species of
Mariella, Ostlingoceras, Hypoturrilites, and Mantelliceras.
The local base is drawn at the incoming of abundant representatives of Sharpeiceras and
Mariella oehlerti.
ALBIAN vi: Characterized by the appearance of species of Durnovarites and Stoliczkia. Species
of Idiohamites, Hamites, and Anisoceras are abundant, while species of Lechites, Mariella, Hy-
pengonoceras, and Tetragonites and puzosiids are scarcer.
ALBIAN Vv: Characterized by the abundance of mortoniceratids. Genera present include Hystero-
ceras, Oxytropidoceras, Tarfayites, Dipoloceras, Diplasioceras, Mortoniceras, Deiradoceras,
Erioliceras, Arestoceras, Cainoceras, Puzosia, Bhimaites, Desmoceras, Hypophylloceras, Ana-
gaudryceras, Gaudryceras, Tetragonites, Hamites, Anisoceras, Labeceras, Myloceras, Jouberti-
ceras, and Protetragonites.
ALBIAN Iv: Species of Oxytropidoceras, Manuaniceras and Androiavites are common. Other
genera present include Pseudhelicoceras, Mojsisovicsia, Hypophylloceras velledae, Jouberti-
ceras, and Argonauticeras, and desmoceratids.
ALBIAN Il: Douvilleiceras sp., Anagaudryceras sacya, Eubrancoceras aff. aegoceratoides and
Oxytropidoceras sp. are abundant; representatives of Carinophylloceras are common and
Lyelliceras frequent. Other forms include Umsinenoceras, Hypophylloceras, ‘Beaudanticeras’,
‘Cleoniceras’, ‘Sonneratia’, Rossalites, Ammonoceratites, Alopeceras, Argonauticeras and Picte-
tia.
ALBIAN II: Douvilleiceras spp. including D. orbignyi and D. mammillatum, are abundant. Other
forms are scarce, but include Ammonoceratites, Pictetia and democeratids and lytoceratids.
ALBIAN I: Absent.
Local base drawn at appearance of representatives of Douvilleiceras.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 105
APTIAN Iv: Giant, fine-ribbed forms of Tropaeum are abundant, and Lytoceras is common.
Other forms include Tonohamites, Acanthoplites, Diadochoceras nodosocostatum, Australi-
ceras, Sinzovia, Toxoceratoides, Helicancyloceras, and Nonyaniceras.
APTIAN II: Characterized by an abundance of Acanthoplites, ?Diadochoceras, Valdedorsella,
Phylloceras, Ancyloceras, Protanisoceras, Tonohamites, and Lytoceras. Other forms include
Tropaeum, Australiceras, Toxoceratoides, Helicancyloceras, and Nonyaniceras.
APTIAN I: Cheloniceras s.s. becomes frequent, together with Valdedorsella or Pseudohaplo-
ceras, Ancyloceras, Tropaeum and Australiceras. Other forms include Lytoceras, Adouliceras,
and Toxoceratoides. A non-sequence may separate Aptian II and I.
APTIAN I: ?Procheloniceras is abundant. Other forms include Tropaeum, Ancyloceras, Thegane-
ceras, Lytoceras, Adouliceras, and Australiceras.
Local base drawn at appearance of cheloniceratids.
BARREMIAN II: Colchidites spp. occur in very large numbers. Other forms include Sanmartinoce-
ras, Phylloceras, Lytoceras and Ancyloceras.
BARREMIAN I: Characterized by an abundance of crioceratitids including hemihoplitids and
aconeceratids, and species of ‘Emericiceras’, ‘Acrioceras’, Heteroceras, and ?Sanmartinoceras,
and Phylloceras serum and Eulytoceras phestum. Occasional species of Colchidites, Lytoceras,
and Ancyloceras also occur.
Local base drawn at appearance of ammonite faunas, and the presence of Colchidites indicates
an Upper Barremian age.
FALKLAND PLATEAU
Leg 36 of the Deep Sea Drilling Project (Barker et al. 1977) drilled three
holes on the eastern end of the Falkland Plateau. Cores through mid-Cretaceous
rocks were collected at sites 327 and 330 from which nine and three ostracod-
bearing samples, respectively, were obtained by the writer from the sample re-
pository at the Lamont—Doherty Geological Observatory (Fig. 4). The stratigra-
phy of these sites has been discussed in detail by Barker et al. (1977) (Table 3),
and reviewed in the context of their palaeogeographical position adjacent to
south-east Africa by Dingle et al. (1983).
At both sites, which lie on the western edge of the Maurice Ewing Bank,
early—middle Albian nannofossil-rich clays overlie dark, anoxic clays and
claystones of Aptian age. The latter do not contain calcareous benthic micro-
fossils, and are considered to have been deposited in stagnant and/or reducing
conditions that had persisted over the area since Upper Jurassic times. Sedi-
ments younger than Albian were not encountered at site 330, but at 327 the up-
permost part of the Cenomanian sequence (core 14) is in a zeolitic clay facies,
and this passes, presumably via a non-sequence into Santonian zeolitic
claystones. A large hiatus, approximately corresponding to the Upper Cenoma-
nian to Coniacian break in Zululand (Fig. 2) can, therefore, also be inferred on
the Falkland Plateau, although by the beginning of this event (Upper Cenoma-
nian), the Falkland Plateau had already separated from the southern tip of the
Agulhas Bank (see Fig. 42b).
Ostracods occur at all the sampled levels, with the exception of core 14
(Cenomanian), so that material of early, middle, and late Albian ages was avail-
able for study from twelve samples. For simplicity in description, the nine sam-
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ples from site 327 have been given informal numbers 1-9 (see Table 6). Because
the size of each sample was small (c. 20 cc), the ostracod faunas were relatively
small and vary from 13 to 119 valves. A total of 543 valves was recovered. Many
of these are very small specimens, and one of the characteristics of the Falkland
Plateau mid-Cretaceous assemblages is the large percentage of micro-ostracods
(<450y length). Preservation varies from good to moderate.
OUTENIQUA BASIN (AGULHAS BANK)
Two samples of mid-Cretaceous age, dredged from the sea-floor south of
Plettenberg Bay during geological mapping on the Agulhas Bank, have pre-
viously been investigated by Dingle (1971) (see Fig. 42b for locations). In the
present study, their small, but relatively well-preserved, ostracod assemblages
are re-illustrated with SEM photographs, and the taxonomy revised. These sam-
ples turn out to be particularly important because they were deposited adjacent
to the Falkland Plateau, and contain a fauna that has elements common to the
Falkland Plateau, Zululand, and western Australia.
Sample TBD 1113 (34°15,0’'S 23°36,6’'E, 95 m water depth). A dark-grey clay
containing abundant small unidentifiable shell fragments, glauconite, and com-
minuted carbonaceous material, and small irregular calcareous nodules. In ad-
dition to ostracods, several microfossil taxa have been recorded from this
sample, and Luterbacher (reported in Dingle 1971) correlates the benthic fora-
miniferal assemblage with assemblage zone F (Valanginian to Aptian) of
Espitalie & Sigal (1963) from Madagascar (Table 4), and notes that Epistomina
(Brotzenia) sp. ex gr. E. (B.) spinulifera has a range Barremian to Albian. On
the basis of calcareous nannofossils, Siesser (1982) suggests a Middle Albian—
Maastrichtian age. Overlap of the ranges of these various taxa indicates a
Middle—Upper Albian age for sample 1113. Because of the uncertainties of both
age and lithostratigraphic correspondence of the Upper Sundays River and
lower Alphard formations (e.g. see Dingle et al. 1983), assignment of this sam-
ple to a lithostratigraphic unit has to be provisional, but it probably belongs to
the Alphard Formation. Sample 1113 contained a relatively rich and well-
preserved ostracod fauna (5 spp., 91 valves).
Sample TBD 1266 (34°14,1'S 23°23,0’E, 102 m water depth). A stiff dark-grey
clay containing abundant unidentifiable shell fragments, and glauconite grains.
Luterbacher (in Dingle 1971) recognized only two benthic foraminifera in
this sample, but considered it to be of a similar age to sample 1113 (Table 4).
Siesser (1982) dated the sample as Upper Aptian—Lower Santonian on the basis
Fig. 4. Stratigraphy and location of DSDP boreholes 327 and 330 on the Falkland Plateau
(after Barker et al. 1977). Isobaths are in km, depths of the boreholes in m below the sea-floor.
Cored sections are black units, and ticks on right side of each column show sediment sample
positions, all of which, except core 14, contained ostracods. Lithological notation: cl—clay,
z—zeolite-rich, n—nanno, ch—chalk.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 107
z
© SITE
o 327
Santonian"®
cl,
micrite ooze
Cenomanian
°
n-ch =
© SITE
a & 330
120
1 z,n-cl
Albian
150
2 n-cl
n-cl cOO ee ee ee
7
7
EAE A Gs os, Beri 7
F 3 anoxic cl
anoxic cl 130
24
IS
gg KUAND PLATEQy 4
SOUTH
Beene
108
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 3
Age determinants in DSDP boreholes 327 and 330 (after Barker et al. 1977) (see Fig. 4 for core
SITE 327A
Core 14
Core 15
Cores 16 to 21
Core 22
SITE 330
Coressistor
Cores
logs).
Sections 1-5 contain the coccolith Marthasterites furcatus and/or foraminifera
which suggest a Santonian age.
Section 6 contains Rotalipora reicheli and coccoliths which indicate a Ceno-
manian age.
Specimens of Aucellina, and coccoliths assigned to Eiffellithus turriseiffeli
Zone indicate a late Albian age.
Assigned to Prediscosphaera cretacea Zone, which is considered early to
middle Albian. Planktonic foraminifera indicate a middle Albian age for cores
16-20 (Globigerinelloides bentonensis, G. caseyi, Hedbergella delrioensis,
H. amabilis, H. portsdownensis, and H. planispira), and early to possibly
middle Albian for core 21 (Hedbergella sigali, H. planispira, H. delrioensis,
and Globigerinelloides gyroidinaefomis).
Contains the coccolith Lithostrinus floralis and is assigned to the Parhabdo-
lithus angustus Zone, which is probably late Aptian to early Albian age.
Palynomorphs indicate an Aptian age.
Contain coccoliths referable to the early-middle Albian Prediscosphaera
cretacea Zone.
Dated Aptian on the basis of coccoliths, foraminifera, and pollen. It probably
belongs to the coccolith Chiastozygus litterarius Zone.
TABLE 4
Microfossils (other than ostracods) recorded from Agulhas Bank samples 1113 and 1266
FORAMINIFERA
(Dingle 1971; Siesser 1982).
1S 266
Epistomina (Brotzenia) alveata Espitalie & Sigal xX x
E. (B.) sp. sp. ex gr. E. (B.) spinulifera (Reuss)
E. (B.) sp. aff. E. (B.) caracolla (Roemer)
Lenticulina sp.
Citharinella sp.
xX
mM KO
Vaginulina (Citharina) sp. aff. V. (C.) aptiensis Eichenberg, (cf. sp. 2378C of
Espitalie & Sigal 1963) X
CALCAREOUS NANOFOSSILS
Watznaueria barnesae (Black) x c
Eiffellithus turriseiffeli (Deflandre) xX
Lithraphidites carniolensis Deflandre
Lithastrinus floralis Stradner
Manivitella pemmatoidea (Deflandre)
Prediscosphaera spinosa (Bramlette & Martini)
Lapideacassis sp.
Thoracocphara sp.
Zygodiscus sp.
xX = present,
lay te de S LOY LY Wear) lean)
r =rare, c=common, f = frequent
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 109
of the range of the coccolith Lithastrinus floralis. An overlap of the suggested
foraminifera and coccolith ranges indicates an Upper Aptian—Albian age, with
the sample probably belonging to the Alphard Formation.
Only three ostracod specimens were obtained from sample 1266.
PREVIOUS WORK
Apart from the original descriptions of samples 1113 and 1266 by Dingle
(1971), no previous work has been published on mid-Cretaceous (Aptian to
Cenomanian) ostracods from southern Africa, although preliminary determina-
tions on the Zululand faunas made from the present work were incorporated in
a general survey of Cretaceous ostracod faunas by Dingle (1982). Work on fau-
nas from the originally adjacent areas in Gondwanaland have proved valuable
for comparative purposes, and in the discussion section the significance of the
close relationships recognized across the whole southern Gondwanaland region
will be discussed. Relevant works in this category are: Aptian to Cenomanian
from Tanzania (Bate in Bate & Bayliss 1969); Albian from DSDP sites off
north-western Australia (Oertli 1974); Albian from the Artesian Basin of
Queensland (Kr6mmelbein 1975); Upper Jurassic-Lower Cretaceous from the
Rann of Kutch, India (Guha 1976); Neocomian from the Mozambique Ridge
DSDP site 249 (Sigal 1974). In addition, because some of the taxa encountered
in the present study range downward into the Upper Jurassic, the studies of
Grekoff (1963) on the Middle Jurassic to Valanginian of Madagascar; Dingle
(1969); Brenner & Oertli (1976); and McLachlan et al. 1976b on the ?Portlan-
dian to Hauterivian of the Algoa and Outeniqua basins; and Musacchio (1978,
1979) on the Callovian and Hauterivian of Argentina are also relevant.
A total of 35 fossiliferous samples was available for study, from which 51
species of ostracod were identified (Tables 1, 5). Microfossils were extracted by
washing and sieving, and were photographed with a Cambridge S180 Stereoscan
at the University of Cape Town, and with a JEOL JSM 1T200 in the Micro-
palaeontology Research Unit of University College, London. Specimens were
mounted on double-sided Sellotape, and were coated with a gold—palladium
mixture. Type specimens and illustrated material were deposited in the South
African Museum, Cape Town.
SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS
The classification used here is based on the Ostracod Treatise (Moore 1961),
with various additions necessitated by recent work. Abbreviations: RV =right
valve, LV=left valve, MPC=marginal pore canal, SCT =subcentral tubercle,
TE = terminal element, ATE= anterior terminal element, PTE=posterior ter-
minal element, ME=median element, AM =anterior margin, PM = posterior
margin, DM=dorsal margin, VM =ventral margin, NPC=normal pore canal,
RPC =radial pore canal, MA = marginal area, and CA = cardinal angle.
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Subclass OSTRACODA Latreille, 1806
Order PODOCOPIDA Miller, 1894
Suborder PLATYCOPINA Sars, 1866
Family Cytherellidae Sars, 1866
This family is represented by two genera and five species, Cytherella (two
species) and Cytherelloidea (three species), and occurs in all three areas under
investigation. Distribution is, however, uneven, with Cytherelloidea being
confined to the Agulhas Bank and Zululand, and Cytherella being relatively
more abundant and consistent on the Falkland Plateau. In terms of the CCBC
associations (see Discussion section), the Cytherellidae are consistently the
minor element in the Falkland Plateau assemblages in DSDP 327.
Genus Cytherella Jones, 1849
Cytherella is represented by two species, which are restricted to Zululand
(Cytherella sp.) and the Falkland Plateau (C. bensoni). In their respective areas,
these are amongst the most abundant and consistently present members of the
ostracod populations, although they are never the most important single species.
Cytherella bensoni sp. nov.
Figs SA-B, 6
Derivation of name
In recognition of the work of Dr R. H. Benson (US National Museum,
Washington) on South Atlantic Ostracoda.
Holotype
SAM-PC6017, RV, DSDP 36/327, core 18—6/106—110 cm, middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-PC6018, LV, DSDP 36/327, core 18—6/106-110 cm, middle Albian.
Diagnosis
Small, fragile species with compressed anterior half, and faint ridges and
reticulations in posterior half. |
Description
External features. Small, rather fragile shell, subquadrate in lateral outline,
with broadly rounded AM with narrow border, narrow truncated PM. DM
straight, VM slightly concave. Highest part of valve at about third length. Ante-
rior part of valve compressed, posterior part somewhat swollen, with weakly de-
veloped longitudinal ridges and small areas of incipient reticulation that are
difficult to see in reflected light. There is a median sulcus with MS impressions.
Interior features. Typical for genus, MS clearly seen as a rosette (Fig. 6).
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA at
TABLE 5
Geographical distribution of mid-Cretaceous (Aptian—Cenomanian) Ostracoda from south-east
Africa and adjacent areas. (Pre-mid-Cretaceous occurrences are starred.)
Sp. no. Arg. F.Plat. A.B. Zulul. M.R. Mad. NW Aus.
1 Cytherella bensoni x
(CERO xX
3. Cytherelloidea agulhasensis Xx
4 C. makatiniensis X
5 C. ndumuensis xX
6 Bairdoppilata sp. 1 X
Te TES x
8 Paracypris sp. x
9 Robsoniella falklandensis x x
10 Sondagella theloides x Xx K x
11 Majungaella cf. queensland-
ensis x
12 M. nematis x” xe x xe xa
13. M? hemigymne Xx
14 M? sp. 327/16 x
15 Arculicythere tumida i x Xx
16 Isocythereis sealensis xX x
17. (I? ndumuensis xX
18 Cythereis agulhasensis X
19 Pirileberis makatiniensis x
20 P. mkuzensis X
21. Makatinella inflata Xx
22 M. tritumida x
23 Pongolacythere striata Xe
24 Procytherura cf. aerodyna-
mica X
2 batet Xx
26 =P. cf. dinglei Xx
27 Sphaerolebris? sp. A Xx
28 Monoceratina? sp. XK
29 Pariceratina liebaui Xx
30 Pedicythere falklandensis X
31 Eucytherura rugosa x
52) E- stellifera xX
33 Hemingwayella
(Parahemingwayella) barkeri Xx
SA lies) dalzielt Xx
35 H. (P.) reticulata x
36 Hemiparacytheridea ewing-
ensis X
37 Hi. challengeri xX
38 Collisarboris? stanleyensis X
39 Asciocythere? dubia X
40 Cytheropteron bispinosa Xx
AC. spo 7/18 xX
AD E27 Sp: X
43 Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18 Xx Xx
44 A? striosulcata x
45 Cytherura? oertlii x x
46 Indet. sp. 1 xX
47 Indet. sp. 2 x
48 Indet. sp. 330/1 xX
49 Indet. sp. 327/16A X
50 Indet. sp. 327/18 x
51 Indet. 327/16B Xx
totals Z 28 8 19 2, 1 4
51 spp., 26 genera
Arg. = Argentina; F.Plat. = Falkland Plateau; A.B. = Agulhas Bank; Zulul. = Zululand;
M.R. = Mozambique Ridge; Mad. = Madagascar; NW Aus. = north-western Australia
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. A-B. Cytherella bensoni sp. nov., DSDP 327, core 18—6/106—-110 cm, middle Albian.
A. Holotype, SAM-PC6017, RV. B. SAM-PC6018, LV. C. Cytherella sp. SAM-PC6019,
LV, locality 152-5, Mkuze, Zululand, AptianIV. D. Cytherelloidea agulhasensis Dingle, 1971,
holotype, SAM-—PC6020, RV, TBD 1266, Agulhas Bank, Upper Aptian—Albian. E. Cytherel-
loidea makatiniensis sp. nov., holotype, SAM-—PC6021, RV, locality 171-21, Mlambongwenya
Spruit, Zululand, Albian III. F. Cytherelloidea ndumuensis sp. nov., holotype, SAM-—PC60272,
RV, locality 182, Ndumu store, Zululand, Cenomanian II.
Scale bars = 100 yp.
i> mea
ge
Ce
Fig. 6. Muscle scars, Cytherella bensoni
sp. nov., holotype, SAM-—PC6017 DSDP
327, core 18-6/106-110 cm, middle Al-
bian. Impressions seen in external view,
RV.
Scale bar=30y.
Remarks
The slightly swollen posterior end with incipient ridges may suggest place-
ment within Cytherelloidea, but on balance the overall shape and weakness of
ornamentation are considered consistent with Cytherella.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6017 > 0,83 0,46
6018 0,60 0,34
Age and distribution
C. bensoni occurs in most of the samples from DSDP sites 327 and 330 on
the Falkland Plateau, and ranges over the entire section covered by the core ma-
terial, i.e. early to middle Albian in 330, and early to late Albian in 327. It is a
relatively abundant species (1-15%, average 7% in 330, and 5-23%, average
14% in 327).
Cytherella sp.
Fig. 5C
Remarks
Poorly preserved specimens of an indeterminate species of Cytherella,
which has a rounded, inflated posterior area and a compressed anterior area
with an incipient AM rim. The specimen illustrated in Figure 5C has a damaged
DM, but is otherwise one of the best specimens available.
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Age and distribution
Known from the Aptian IV to Cenomanian III interval in Zululand, where
it occurs generally in moderate numbers (4-20 % total ostracod population).
Genus Cytherelloidea Alexander, 1929
This genus is represented by three species that are restricted to the southern
African outcrops: agulhasensis (Agulhas Bank), and makatiniensis and ndu-
muensis (Zululand). Only C. makatiniensis occurs in more than one ammonite
zone (Aptian IV and Albian III), and none of the species has been recovered in
large numbers.
Cytherelloidea agulhasensis Dingle, 1971
Figs 5D, 7C
Cytherelloidea agulhasensis Dingle, 1971: 397-398, fig. 2.
Remarks
No further specimens of this species have been recorded from either Zulu-
land or the Falkland Plateau. SEM photographs show that the rib pattern of
C. agulhasensis is similar to those of C. mfoloziensis Dingle, 1981, and C. um-
zambaensis Dingle, 1969, which range Campanian IV to Maastrichtian II in
Zululand, and Santonian to Campanian IV in Transkei—Zululand, respectively.
All three have prominent antero- and posteromarginal, and short longitudi-
nal ventrolateral ribs, but differ in their median and dorsolateral areas, where
C. agulhasensis has irregular-shaped elevations in contrast to the ribs of the
other two species (Fig. 7).
Holotype originally designated MG-5-1-1 (Dingle 1971), now transferred to
the South African Museum under designation SAM—PC6020.
Age and distribution
Known only from sample TBD 1266 on the Agulhas Bank (Upper
Aptian—Albian, Alphard Formation).
Cytherelloidea makatiniensis sp. nov.
Fig. 5E
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimen, Makatini Flats, northern Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-PC6021, RV, locality 171-21, Mzinene Formation, vicinity of store
on Mlambongwenya Spruit, Zululand, Albian III.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 1S
Diagnosis
Rib pattern consists of an outer spiral and a short central rib.
Description
External features. AM broadly rounded, DM and VM nearly straight, PM
rounded but somewhat truncated ventrally. A broad ridge can be traced from an
anterodorsal position round the anterior, ventral, posterior, and dorsal regions
in a flattened spiral, ending at about third length. It encloses a short median rib
which has two dorsal cusps and a slight anterior swelling. Valve surface other-
wise smooth.
Internal features. None seen.
Remarks
The rib pattern of C. makatiniensis is reminiscent of C. mairae Ramsay
from the Campanian of Tanzania (Ramsay 1968), but differs in lacking both a
well-defined connection between the middle rib and the outer spiral, and a hook
at the posterior end of the middle rib.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6021 0582 0,49
Age and distribution
C. makatiniensis is known to range Aptian IV to Albian III (Makatini to
Mzinene formations) in northern Zululand.
Cytherelloidea ndumuensis sp. nov.
Fig. 5F
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimen, Ndumu Game Reserve, northern Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-PC6022, RV, locality 182, Mzinene Formation, vicinity of Ndumu
store, Cenomanian II.
Diagnosis
Species with strongly arched dorsal margin and three short longitudinal ribs.
Description
External features. Asymmetrically elliptical in outline, with evenly curved
AM, somewhat acuminate PM, broadly rounded VM and strongly arched DM.
The central area of the lateral surface has three short longitudinal ribs, which
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
umzambaensis
mfoloziensis
agulhasensis
Fig. 7. Sketches of Cytherelloidea species, right valves, with positive features shaded. A. C.
umzambaensis Dingle, 1969, Richards Bay borehole, Zululand, Santonian III (from Dingle
1980, fig. 3a). B.C. mfoloziensis Dingle, 1981, SAM—K5665, Mfolozi River, Zululand, Maas-
trichtian II. C. C. agulhasensis Dingle, 1971, SAM—PC6020, Agulhas Bank, Upper Aptian—
Albian.
Scale bars = 300 py.
progressively increase in length ventrally: the dorsal rib is very short and slightly
convex dorsally, the middle rib is concave dorsally with a small cusp just in front
of the valve mid-length and has a small posterior swelling, and the ventral rib is
concave dorsally and curves upward posteriorly to partially enclose the two
other ribs. The rest of the valve surface is smooth.
Internal features. None seen.
Remarks
C. ndumuensis has a rather unusual outline and distinctive rib pattern,
which sets it aside from other species of the genus in southern Africa.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6022 0,63 0,41
Age and distribution
Known only from the Cenomanian II of northern Zululand.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 7,
Suborder PopocoPIna Sars, 1866
Superfamily BAIRDIACEA Sars, 1888
There is a marked constrast in the importance of this superfamily between
Zululand and the Falkland Plateau: in the former it is of minor importance,
whereas in the latter it is the dominant element (mainly with Robsoniella, con-
sistently occurring at 50% total ostracod population in borehole 327).
Family Bairdiidae Sars, 1888
Genus Bairdoppilata Coryell, Sample & Jennings, 1935
The genus was recorded from two samples only in the Zululand mid-
Cretaceous but, as may be expected, is more abundant in the deeper-water en-
vironments of the Falkland Plateau. Despite the poor quality of the comparative
material from Zululand, we recognize the species from the two areas as distinct.
Bairdoppilata sp. 1
Fig. 8A
Remarks
Four poorly preserved valves whose closest known comparatives are the
late Campanian-early Maastrichtian specimens of B. andersoni from the Lower
Needs Camp Quarry east of Algoa Bay (Dingle 1981). Bairdoppilata sp. 1 dif-
fers from the Upper Cretaceous material in having a more broadly rounded AM
outline.
Age and distribution
Known only from two Aptian IV horizons in Zululand, locality 152
(Mkuze) and locality 171 (Mlambongwenya Spruit).
Bairdoppilata sp. 2
Fig. 8B
Remarks
Species with an asymmetrically rounded AM and bluntly pointed PM,
which distinguishes it from Bairdoppilata sp. 1 from Zululand (compare Fig.
S8A-B).
Age and distribution
Ranges early to middle Albian at sites 327 (cores 21-3 to 16-6) and 330
(core 1-1) where it occurs in small to moderate numbers (2-22 %) of total ostra-
cod population. It is always less abundant than Robsoniella falklandensis. Sam-
ples with Bairdoppilata sp. 2 all cluster in the central portion of the field for site
327 populations on the CCBC diagram (Fig. 38). The significance of this is not
known, but may identify median water depth assemblages at this site.
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Genus Robsoniella Kusnetsova, 1956
In the original description (in Mandelstam ef al. 1956) and in the Treatise
(Moore 1961), Robsoniella was placed in the family Healdiidae. This seems in-
consistent, and the genus is here placed in the family Bairdiidae on the grounds
of MA structure and overall shape. R. falklandensis occurs on the Falkland Pla-
teau, where it is the dominant taxon both in abundance and distribution, and off
western Australia where it is again locally abundant.
Robsoniella falklandensis sp. nov.
Fig. 8C—F
?Indet sp. A, Oertli, 1974; plate 6 (figs 1-11).
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimens on the Falkland Plateau.
Holotype
SAM-PC6025, RV, DSDP 36/327, core 21-4/130-134 cm, early Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-—PC6026, RV, DSDP 36/327, core 21—4/130-134 cm, early Albian.
SAM-—PC6027, LV, as above.
SAM-—PC6028, LV, as above.
Diagnosis
Ovate species with markedly different RV and LV outlines. Hinge weak
with a prominent sloping surface over the RV ME.
Description
External features. LV and RV differ considerably in shape, but both are
ovate. RV has asymmetric AM with long sloping anterodorsal section, PM more
broadly rounded, but also asymmetric. Greatest length below mid-height. DM
arched, VM almost straight with median concavity. Greatest height in posterior
half. LV is less elongate, AM and PM broadly rounded and almost the same
shape, DM arched, VM weakly convex. Both valves smooth overall.
Internal features. MA moderately wide, small vestibule anteriorly, but de-
spite good material, no RPC seen. If present, they must be extremely fine. MS
not identified despite good material. Hinge in RV consists of a narrow ME
groove and narrow, elongate TE; in LV it consists of a narrow, finely crenulate
ME bar and elongate slit-like TE.
Remarks
In outline R. falklandensis closely resembles Bythocypris richardsbayensis
Dingle, 1980, from the Upper Cretaceous of Zululand, but the two differ in
hinge structure, MA, MS pattern (very weak in the former, large and prominent
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 119
Fig. 8. A. Bairdoppilata sp. 1, SAM-PC6023, RV, locality 152, Mkuze, Zululand, Aptian IV.
B. Bairdoppilata sp. 2, SAM-PC6024, RV, DSDP 330, core 1-1/112-116 cm, early—middle
Albian. C-F. Robsoniella falklandensis sp. nov., DSDP 327, core 21-4/130-134 cm, early
Albian. C. Holotype, SAM-PC6025, RV. D. SAM-PC6026, LV. E. SAM-PC6027, RV,
internal view. F. SAM-—PC6028, LV, internal view.
Scale bars: A, D=100y, others = 300 yu.
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in the latter), with R. falklandensis possessing no, or only very fine, RPC. Oertli
(1974) records an apparently identical species from off-shore north-western Aus-
tralia as indet sp. A (?Robsoniella), the only difference being the latter’s appar-
ently more strongly crenulate hinge elements. R. falklandensis differs from the
genotype R. obovata Kusnetsova from the Aptian—Albian of the Caucasus in
lacking well-defined RPC and in having a weaker hinge structure.
Asciocythere sp. 68, recorded by Damotte (1979) from the Aptian of DSDP
400A in north-western Bay of Biscay, has a very similar shape to R. falklanden-
sis, but has a longer DM and narrow anterior MA.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6025 1,08 0,60
6026 0,92 0,61
6027 1,08 0,68
6028 1,14 OWS
Age and distribution
R. falklandensis is by far the most abundant ostracod taxon in the early to
late Albian of DSDP boreholes 327 and 330, where it occurs in every sample in-
vestigated except that from core 14—6/126—-130 cm (Cenomanian), which did not
contain ostracods. The species varies from 19 to 54% (average 35%) of total
fauna at site 330, and from 15 to 70% (average 48%) at site 327.
Oertli (1974) recorded the species in four samples at DSDP site 260 (cores
9-11, Middle—Upper Albian) off north-western Australia, where it was also the
dominant taxon.
Superfamily CYPRIDACEA Baird, 1845
Family Paracyprididae Sars, 1923
Genus Paracypris Sars, 1866
There was a marked disparity in the distribution of this genus in mid-
Cretaceous times in the south-east Africa—Falkland Plateau area: it is sparse to
abundant in Zululand, but has not been recorded from the Agulhas Bank or the
Falkland Plateau. It may also be significant to note here that Paracypris is
absent from the Portlandian to Hauterivian of the Algoa—Outeniqua basins
(Dingle 1969; Brenner & Oertli 1976; McLachlan et al. 1976b), and only two
valves were recorded from the Maastrichtian III of the Agulhas Bank, while the
genus is relatively diverse and abundant in the Upper Cretaceous of Zululand
(including the JC-1 borehole) (Dingle 1981). This strongly suggests latitudinal
(thermal) control of the distribution of Paracypris in south-east Africa during
Cretaceous times.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 12
Paracypris sp.
Fig. 9A
Remarks
Although relatively abundant, specimens are poorly preserved, with good
internal views not available. Paracypris sp. has a distinctive drawn-out PM and
in this respect is very similar to P. umzambaensis Dingle. It may be a separate
taxon because of its less symmetric DM outline, but MS patterns need to be
seen to resolve the question.
Age and distribution
Paracypris sp. is known to range Aptian IV to Cenomanian III in Zululand,
while its closest local relative (P. umzambaensis) is known from the Santonian
to Maastrichtian in Zululand (Dingle 1981).
Superfamily CYTHERACEA Baird, 1850
There is a marked contrast in the importance of this superfamily between
south-east Africa and the Falkland Plateau. In Zululand, cytheraceans (ex-
pressed as numbers of valves within the total ostracod population) dominate
over the Cytherellidae and Bairdiacea—Cypridacea, whereas on the Falkland
Plateau they are consistently subordinate to the Bairdiacea—Cypridacea ele-
ments. On the other hand, on the Falkland Plateau 89% of the species present
are cytheraceans, whereas in Zululand they make up only 75% of the extant
species. In other words, the Falkland Plateau cytheracean fauna is more diverse
but numerically sparser than its Zululand counterpart. A further contrast is
found on the Agulhas Bank, where cytheraceans constitute 100% of the ostra-
cod population in Sample 1113, yet only two species account for 99 %: an abun-
dant but very restricted cytheracean element.
Family Bythocytheridae Sars, 1926
Genus Monoceratina Roth, 1928
Monoceratina? sp.
Fig. 9B
Remarks
One poorly preserved specimen showing the typical median sulcus and ven-
tromedian projection of the genus. Hinge not observed, so generic placement is
uncertain.
Age and distribution
Albian VI, Mzinene Formation at locality 178, Ndumu, Zululand.
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Genus Pariceratina Grindel & Kozur, 1971
Pariceratina liebaui sp. nov.
Fig. 9C—-D
?Nemoceratina (Pariceratina) sp. Liebau, 1977: 110-111, pl. 1C—F.
Derivation of name
After Dr A. Liebau, University of Tubingen, who first illustrated specimens
probably belonging to this species.
Holotype
SAM-PC6031, LV, DSDP 36/330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-—PC6032, LV, as for holotype.
Diagnosis
Species with lance-like posteroventral spine, prominent spine in anterodor-
sal area, and fan-like microconation on posterodorsal area.
Description
External features. Elongate quadrate. Rounded AM bearing numerous fine
elongate spines, PM asymmetrically acuminate with apex above mid-height,
posteroventral area spinose. DM straight, VM slightly concave about mid-
length. Ventrolateral areas bear three conical elevations on a wide ridge: poste-
rior elevation has a lance-like spine with numerous small spines around its base;
median elevation is low with a small cluster of two to three spines; anterior ele-
vation is larger with numerous small, stud-like spines. There is a prominent
Spine in the anterodorsal area which projects beyond the DM in lateral view.
Surface ornamented with what Liebau (1977) terms microconate protoreticula-
tion (string-of-beads-like muri), and occasional larger spines. The posterior part
of the valve has a particularly delicate ornamentation with a fan-like arrange-
ment of microconate strings on the posterior apex.
Internal features. MA moderately wide. Hinge simple and straight, with a
smooth bar, slightly expanded anteriorly in LV and complementary groove in
RV. MS not seen.
Remarks
P. liebaui is similar to P. trispinosa (Neale 1975) from the Santonian of
western Australia, but the latter is less elongate and has a more rounded AM
outline. The genus has been reported from the Maastrichtian of Zululand (P.
hirsuta) by Dingle (1981), but this species has an overall spinose ornamentation
and a somewhat different PM outline. Liebau (1977) illustrated two specimens
from the Upper Aptian near Hanover, West Germany, that appear to be identi-
cal to our material.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 123
Fig. 9. A. Paracypris sp., SAM—PC6029, LV, locality 171-7, Mlambongwenya Spruit, Zulu-
land, Albian II. B. Monoceratina? sp., SAM-PC6030, RV, locality 178, Msunduzi, Zululand,
Albian VI. C-—D. Pariceratina liebaui sp. nov., DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
C. Holotype, SAM-PC6031, LV. D. SAM-PC6032, LV interior view. E-F. Cytherura? oert-
lii sp. nov., DSDP 327. E. Holotype, SAM-PC6033, RV, core 18-6/106-110 cm, middle
Albian. F. SAM-—PC6034, LV, core 15—2/132-136 cm, late Albian.
Scale bars = 100 yp.
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dimensions (mm)
length height
(incl. spines)
6031 OZ 0,28
6032 OW 0,26
Liebau’s specimen 0,79 0,28
Age and distribution
P. liebaui ranges early—middle Albian at DSDP site 330 (core 1-cc to
1-1/112-116 cm), and middle Albian at site 327 (core 16-1/55-59 cm), where it
occurs in small numbers (1-3 % total ostracod population at both sites).
Family Cytheruridae Muller, 1894
Subfamily Cytherurinae Muller, 1894
In Zululand, the subfamily Cytherurinae is represented by one species (Pro-
cytherura cf. aerodynamica) at one locality, where it accounts for only 2 % of the
total ostracod population. On the Falkland Plateau, on the other hand, the sub-
family represents one of the most important elements of the ostracod popu-
lation, 7 genera in 13 species, and these abundant micro-ostracods constitute
one of the characteristic features of the Falkland Plateau Albian assemblages.
Considered in terms of the total ostracod population, the Cytherurinae form
18% (mean of 3 samples) at site 330, and 5% (mean of 9 samples) at site 327,
but as a percentage of the cytheraceans, they are 34% (max. 44%) at site 330,
and 17% (max. 33%) at site 327.
Genus Cytherura Sars, 1866
Cytherura? oertlii sp. nov.
Figs 9E-F, 10
Indet sp. B. Oertli, 1974: 949, pl. 7 fig. 1.
Derivation of name
After Dr H. J. Oertli (Société Nationale Elf Aquitaine) who first recorded
the species.
Holotype
SAM-PC6033, C, DSDP 36/327, core 18—-6/106-110 cm, middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-PC6034, C, DSDP 36/327, core 15—2/132—136 cm, late Albian.
Diagnosis
Elongate species, DM and VM parallel, ornamented with fine longitudinal
ribs.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA BS
Fig. 10. Comparison of rib patterns in specimens of Cytherura? oertlii sp. nov. Numbering system has
no significance other than to compare equivalent ribs. A. SAM-—PC6034, LV, DSDP 327, core
15—2/132-136 cm, late Albian. B-—C. Holotype, SAM-—PC6033 RV(B), LV(C), DSDP 327, core
18—6/106—110 cm, middle Albian. D. Specimen illustrated by Oertli (1974, plate 7 (fig. 1)) as indet.
sp. B from DSDP 260, core 9/cc, north-western Australia, Middle—Upper Albian.
Scale bars = 100 wu.
Description
External features. Small, elongate, DM and VM parallel, asymmetrically
rounded AM, narrower, slightly acuminate PM with incipient caudal process.
Valve surface ornamented with nine fine longitudinal ribs, the most prominent
being numbers 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, and 9 (see Fig. 10). In LV, rib 1 curves partly round
the AM area, and in both valves the lower two ribs converge posteriorly with
the upper three.
Internal features. None available.
Remarks
Tentatively placed in Cytherura on valve shape and ornamentation. Oertli’s
(1974) specimen from off-shore western Australia has an identical rib pattern to
C? oertlii (Fig. 10).
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6033 O38 0,23
6034 0,40 0,16
Indet. sp. B. Oertli, 1974 0,47 0,18
Age and distribution
C? oertlii ranges middle to late Albian in DSDP 327 (cores 18-6/106—110 cm
to 15-2/132-136 cm), where it is rare (3-5%), and Middle-Upper Albian in
DSDP 260 (core 9/cc) off north-western Australia.
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Genus Eucytherura Miller, 1894
Eucytherura rugosa sp. nov.
Fig. 11A—C
Derivation of name
Latin rugosa (rough): reference to rough, corrugated surface ornamenta-
tion.
Holotype
SAM-PC6035, LV, DSDP 36/330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
Diagnosis
Species with wedge-shaped eye tubercle, coarsely reticulate surface orna-
mentation, and posteriorly deflected ala termination.
Description
External features. Subquadrate outline. Broadly rounded AM with a few
short, stout, sharp spines anteroventrally, straight DM, pointed PM with apex in
line with DM. VM almost straight, converging slightly with DM. There is a large
wedge-shaped eye tubercle below the anterior CA, and a smaller wedge-shaped
elevation at the posterior CA. A sharp, rugose ventrolateral ridge lies on the
upper edge of a prominent ala terminating posteriorly in a rough, blade-like
spine. A similar second spine lies along the trailing edge of the ala, whose ven-
tral surface has several low ridges. The valve surface overall is covered by coarse
reticulation bearing small mural spines. Over the posterior part of the ala this
reticulation takes the form of transverse corrugation.
Internal features. MA wide (RPC not seen). MS not seen. Hinge in LV con-
sists of a crenulate median bar and small, rounded TE.
Remarks
E. rugosa closely resembles E. stellifera sp. nov. from DSDP 327, but dif-
fers on the following points: different reticulate ornamentation pattern; the eye
tubercle of E. stellifera projects forward; and the ventrolateral ridge of E. stelli-
fera is more sharply defined and lies in a more median position in its anterior
part. In addition, the ATE RV hinge of E. rugosa consists of a rounded pit,
compared to a more elongate socket that lies partly above the anterior end of
the ME in E. stellifera. Bate (in Bate & Bayliss 1969) recorded E. tanzanensis
from the Upper Aptian of Tanzania but, although it also possesses a coarse
reticulate ornamentation, it differs from FE. rugosa in shape, particularly the PM.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6035 0,24 0,14
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 127
Age and distribution
E.. rugosa is known only from the early—middle Albian of DSDP 330 (core
1/cc) on the Falkland Plateau.
Eucytherura stellifera sp. nov.
Fig. 11D-F
Derivation of name
Latin stellifera (starry, star-bearing): reference to star-like pattern of mural
spines.
Holotype
SAM-PC6036, LV. DSDP 327, core 21-3/71-76 cm, early Albian.
Diagnosis
Species with reticulate ornamentation that has a stellate orientation of
mural spines.
Description
External features. Subquadrate in lateral view, slightly asymmetrically
rounded AM, straight DM, acuminate PM with apex along line of DM, VM al-
most straight. Eye tubercle is large and angular, has a somewhat twisted appear-
ance, and projects slightly forward. There is a low elongate swelling over the
posterior CA. Ventrolaterally the valve is inflated and alate, with a short ter-
minal spine projecting posteriorly. The ala has a ribbed leading edge that ex-
tends forward into the anterior quarter of the valve. A second blade-like spine
occurs on the ala trailing edge. Entire lateral valve surface ornamented with a
coarse reticulation that is particularly well developed in the median areas. Muri
bear short, sharp spines that project inward, producing a stellate arrangement.
Internal features. No MA or MS seen. Hinge in LV consists of a long
straight crenulate bar, a small elongate indistinct PTE, and a small ATE that ex-
tends over the dorsal end of the ME.
Remarks
E. stellifera is very close to E. rugosa and differs primarily on ornamenta-
tion, although other differences have been listed under the Remarks section for
the latter species. The ornamentation of E. tanzanensis Bate from the Upper
Aptian of Tanzania is similar to that of E. stellifera: ‘small denticular processes
grow into the 5-6 sided pits’, but this species has only a small eye tubercle, and
differs considerably in outline, especially the PM. Similarly, E. antipodum
Neale, 1975, from the Santonian of western Australia has a well-developed
reticulate ornamentation, but differs from E. stellifera in details of ala shape,
PM outline, and size of eye tubercle.
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 11. A-C. Eucytherura rugosa sp. nov., holotype, SAM—PC6035, LV, DSDP 330, core
1/cc, early-middle Albian. A. External view. B. Detail of anterior area. C. Internal view.
D-F. Eucytherura stellifera sp. nov., holotype, SAM-—PC6036, LV, DSDP 327, core
21-3/71-76 cm, early Albian. D. External view. E. Detail of ornamentation, central part of
valve. F. Internal view.
Scale bars: A, E=30u, C-D, F=100wn.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 129
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6036 0,34 OW
Age and distribution
E. stellifera is known only from the early Albian of DSDP 327 (core
21-3/71-76 cm) on the Falkland Plateau.
Genus Procytherura Whatley, 1970, emend. Bate & Coleman, 1975
Procytherura cf. P. aerodynamica Bate, 1975
Fig. 12A
Remarks
A single broken valve that has a similar outline to that of P. aerodynamica
Bate from the Lower—Upper Kimmeridgian of Tanzania. The specimen is closest
to that illustrated in plate 11 (fig. 11) of Bate (1975) (which was regarded as a
juvenile), but differs in being more acuminate posteriorly than the east African
form.
Brenner & Oertli (1976) described three species of Procytherura (maculata,
beerae, dinglei) from the Lower Sundays River Formation (Upper Valanginian
to Lower Hauterivian) of the Algoa Basin (south-east Africa), but all three have
distinct ornamentation, whereas the specimen from Zululand is smooth.
Age and distribution
Aptian IV, Makatini Formation, locality 171 at Mlambongwenya Spruit,
northern Zululand.
Procytherura batei sp. nov.
Fig. 12B-C, E
Derivation of name
After Dr R. H. Bate (previously of the British Museum (Nat. Hist.)) for his
contribution to knowledge of east African Mesozoic Ostracoda.
Holotype
SAM-PC6038, LV, DSDP 36/327, core 16—4/66-70 cm, middle Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6039, LV, as above.
SAM-PC6040, C, as above.
Diagnosis
Ovate species with pointed PM, punctate, weakly reticulate ornamentation,
and bevelled AM and PM borders.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12. A. Procytherura cf. P. aerodynamica Bate, 1975, SAM—PC6037, LV, locality 171-1,
Mlambongwenya Spruit, Zululand, Aptian IV. B-—C, E. Procytherura batei, sp. nov., DSDP
327, core 16—4/66-70 cm, middle Albian. B. Holotype, SAM—PC6038, LV. C. SAM—PC6040,
C, dorsal view, anterior to the left. E. SAM-—PC6039, LV, internal view. D. Procytherura cf.
P. dinglei Brenner & Oertli, 1976, SAM-—PC6041, DSDP 327, core 16—6/126-130 cm, middle
Albian.
Scale bars= 100 yu.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 3a
Description
External features. Ovate, with rounded AM, PM asymmetrically acuminate
with rounded apex above mid-height. DM weakly convex, VM straight, DM and
VM converge slightly posteriorly. AM and PM have a narrow bevelled border.
Greatest height in anterior third. There is a prominent ventrolateral swelling,
giving the valve an almost alate appearance. A small angular eye swelling occurs
just below the anterior CA of each valve. Surface punctate with indistinct reticu-
lation that is best developed in posterior areas. In dorsal view carapace is almost
diamond-shaped, with a prominent RV on to LV overlap along DM. DM in RV
has a thicker rim.
Internal features. Hinge holoperatodont, with thickening of LV ME that
turns down at its anterior end. MS not seen. MA wide, but details not seen.
Remarks
P. batei is a typical member of the genus, and is closest to P. maculata
Brenner & Oertli (1976) from the Hauterivian of the Algoa Basin. The latter
has a concave VM, and has its posterior apex at about mid-height. P. batei is
also similar to a species recorded as Paijenborchellina sp. 1 Swain by Damotte
(1979) from the early—late Aptian of DSDP 402A (core 34/CC) on the continen-
tal slope in the northern Bay of Biscay. Comparison with Swain’s (1976) figures
suggests that Damotte’s specimen is not conspecific, and probably not a Paijen-
borchellina, but rather belongs to Procytherura. It differs from P. batei in pos-
sessing weak longitudinal ribbing, especially in the anterior half.
Dimensions (mm)
length height width
6038 0,45 0,23
6039 = 0,43 25
6040 0,49 0,16
Age and distribution
P. batei is known from the early-middle Albian of DSDP 330 (core
2-2/122-126 cm), and middle Albian of DSDP 327 (core 16—4/66-70 cm). It is
rare (c. 3% total ostracod population) in the former, and relatively abundant
(18 %) in the latter.
Procytherura cf. P. dinglei Brenner & Oertli, 1976
Fig. 12D
Remarks
P. dinglei was recorded by Brenner & Oertli (1976) from the Hauterivian of
the Algoa Basin (south-east Africa). Our material consists of one slightly dam-
aged valve from the Falkland Plateau. Externally the specimen has a very simi-
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
lar outline and ornamentation to P. dinglei, including the rather irregular sur-
face of the ventrolateral swelling in the posterior half of the valve. The only sig-
nificant point of difference is the somewhat smoother shell surface of the
anterior part of the valve in the DSDP specimen.
Interior details in P. cf. P. dinglei are not well preserved, but show a typical
holoperatodont hinge, although there is a suggestion of crenulation on the pos-
terior part of the LV ME (which may be due to abrasion). Brenner & Oertli
(1976) did not record internal details in their topotypes.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6041 0,45 0,25
On a length-height scattergram, this specimen plots precisely within the
field defined by Brenner & Oertli’s population (1976, fig. 27).
Age and distribution
P. cf. P. dinglei is known from a single LV in the middle Albian of DSDP
327 (core 16—6/126-130 cm) on the Falkland Plateau. P. dinglei is known only
from the Hauterivian of the Algoa Basin.
Genus Cytheropteron Sars, 1866
Cytheropteron bispinosa sp. nov.
Fig. 13A—D
Derivation of name
Latin bispinosa (two spines): reference to two spines on the alae.
Holotype
SAM-PC6042, LV, DSDP 36/330, core 1-1/112-116 cm, early—middle
Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6043, RV, as above.
SAM-PC6044, LV, as above.
SAM-—PC6045, LV, as above.
Diagnosis
Species with blunt alae that typically bear two short spines at their posterior
ends.
Description
External features. Elongate ovate in lateral outline. AM rounded, somewhat
truncated anteroventrally, acuminate PM, caudal process slightly upturned. DM
and VM broadly convex, former has a prominent rim. Alae blunt and wedge-
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 135
Fig. 13. A-D. Cytheropteron bispinosa sp. nov., DSDP 330, core 1-1/112-116 cm, early-
middle Albian. A. Holotype, SAM-PC6042, LV. B. SAM-PC6044, LV. C. SAM-PC6045,
LV, internal view. D. SAM-PC6043, RV, internal view. E. Cytheropteron sp. 327/18,
SAM-PC6046, RV, DSDP 327, core 18-2/51-55 cm, middle Albian. F. Cytheropteron sp.,
SAM-PC6047, RV, TBD 1113, Agulhas Bank, Middle-Upper Albian.
Scale bars = 100 py.
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
shaped with a short ribbed leading edge. Trailing edge bears two short, wide, sharp
spines, one at the extremity, the other just inboard at the end of a narrow ventral
surface rib. There are three other ribs on the ventral surface. Overall, valve surface
smooth except for faint coarse reticulation on upper surface of alae.
Internal features. MA broad, MS not seen. Hinge typical of genus, with two
smooth TE and crenulate ME.
Remarks
C. bispinosa resembles C. (Aversovalva) mccomborum Neale (1975) from
the Santonian of western Australia, but the latter has trispinose alae and overall
punctation.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6042 0,43 0:23
6043 0,43 0,20
6044 0,35 0,18
Age and distribution
C. bispinosa ranges early-middle Albian in DSDP 330 (core
1/ec—112-116 cm), and middle Albian in DSDP 327 (core 18—2/51-55 cm to
16-1/55-59 cm) on the Falkland Plateau. It is recorded from five levels in these
two boreholes, and is common in site 330 (10-13%) and rarer in site 327
(3-6 %).
Cytheropteron sp. 327/18
Figs 13E
Remarks
Two valves of a subquadrate species of Cytheropteron that has an asym-
metrical, bluntly rounded AM and a more acuminate PM. The alae are blunt,
with a thick leading edge. Ala shape is reminiscent of that of C. bispinosa sp.
nov. but valve outline of the two species differs considerably.
Age and distribution
Ranges middle Albian in DSDP 327 (cores 18-2/51-55cm_ to
16—6/126-130 cm) on the Falkland Plateau.
Cytheropteron sp.
Fig. 13F
Remarks
Dingle (1971: 396) listed this fragmentary specimen (as Cytheropteron? sp.)
from sample TBD 1113 on the Agulhas Bank, but did not illustrate or give any
details of it. An SEM photograph shows that it has a broad, keeled ala project-
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 165
ing almost to the AM. The rest of the valve is pitted and broken. The genus Cy-
theropteron is not well represented in the Lower and mid-Cretaceous of south-
east Africa, with only one species (C. (Infracytheropteron) persica Brenner &
Oertli) reported from the Upper Valanginian to Hauterivian of the Algoa Basin
(c. 1%) (Brenner & Oertli 1976) and Outeniqua Basin (McLachlan et al.
1976b). The specimen illustrated here differs in both ala outline and ornamenta-
tion from C. (I.) persica, C. bispinosa, and C. sp. 327/18.
Age and distribution
Known only from the Middle-Upper Albian of the Agulhas Bank (sample
BD) 1113).
Genus Hemingwayella Neale, 1975
Subgenus Parahemingwayella subgen. nov.
Derivation of name
Generic name Hemingwayella + ‘para’ to denote closeness of new taxon to
genotype H. (H.) ornata Neale 1975.
Type species
H. (P.) barkeri sp. nov.
Diagnosis
Subgenus of Hemingwayella that is blind.
Remarks
Neale (1975) erected the genus Hemingwayella to accommodate a species
that fell within the so-called Paracytheridea subgroup of Hanai (1957) but could
not be placed within existing genera such as Paracytheridea, Eucytherura, and
Paracytheropteron. The new subgenus Parahemingwayella is erected to accom-
modate three species that fulfill most of the prerequisites of Neale’s diagnosis
but differ on a few significant points. The most important is blindness, but there
are also minor features such as a slightly flexed DM (including a distinctive kink
in the hinge ME), and converging DM and VM. The considerable difference in
age between the known species of the genus suggest that H. (Paraheming-
wayella) was ancestral to H. (Hemingwayella).
Age and distribution
The subgenus Parahemingwayella is known only from the early to middle
Albian of the Falkland Plateau, while the subgenus Hemingwayella is known
only from the Santonian of western Australia.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) barkeri sp. nov.
Fig. 14A—C
Derivation of name
After Dr P. Barker, co-chief scientist of DSDP Leg 36 to the Falkland
Plateau.
Holotype
SAM-PC6048, RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-PC6049, LV, as above.
Diagnosis
Species with two prominent ventrolateral processes.
Description
External features. Elongate, subtriangular in lateral view. AM _ broadly
rounded, weakly spinose, PM small, bluntly rounded, slightly upturned. DM
flexed at about mid-length, which in RV produces a posteriorly directed step.
VM straight to weakly convex. DM and VM converge posteriorly. Highest point
of valve over prominent anterior CA. Surface features dominated by a large,
rounded, ribbed median—ventrolateral to subcentral process, and a more diffuse
elliptical ribbed posteroventral swelling which is posteriorly directed. A promi-
nent rib runs diagonally from the posterior CA, round the dorsal side of the sub-
central process, and in some specimens, to the subcentral part of the AM. A
second prominent rib skirts the ventral side of the subcentral process and passes
across the crest of the posteroventral swelling. Several smaller longitudinal ribs
occur in the ventral and posterior parts of the valve surface. Other areas are
weakly reticulate and strongly punctate. There is a median sulcus.
Internal features. MA wide, MS not seen. Hinge in RV consists of sinuous,
narrow, finely crenulate ME groove with narrow, smooth outward-projecting
ATE and PTE.
Remarks
H. (P.) barkeri differs from H. (H.) ornata Neale in shape of DM and AM,
and in having a continuation of the diagonal longitudinal rib to the posterior
CA; in H. (H.) ornata this rib runs only to a mid-height position. Average
length—-height ratios for the two species are 1,52 (ornata) and 1,98 (barkeri).
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6048 0,32 0,15
6049 0,42 OFA
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 137
Fig. 14. A-C. Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) barkeri subgen. et sp. nov., DSDP 330,
core I/cc, early-middle Albian. A-B. Holotype, SAM-PC6048, RV. A. External view.
B. Internal view. C. SAM-PC6049, LV. D-F. Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) dalzieli
subgen. et sp. nov., DSDP 330, core 1, early-middle Albian. D. Holotype, SAM—PC6050,
LV, core cutter. E. SAM-—PC6051, RV, section 1/112-116 cm. F. SAM-—PC6052, LV, core cut-
ter, internal view.
Scale bars: A=30y, others= 100u.
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Age and distribution
H. (P.) barkeri is known from the early—middle Albian of DSDP site 330
(core 1/cc), and middle Albian of DSDP 327 (core 16—4/66-70 cm) on the Falk-
land Plateau, where it is a rare species (c. 3% at both sites).
Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) dalzieli sp. nov.
Figs 14D-F, 15A
Derivation of name
After Dr I. Dalziel, co-chief scientist of DSDP Leg 36 to the Falkland
Plateau.
Holotype
SAM-PC6050, LV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6051, RV, DSDP 330, core 1-1/112-—116 cm, early—middle Albian.
SAM-PC6052, LV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
SAM-PC6053, RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Diagnosis
Species with subcentral process, coarsely spinose AM, valve surface
coarsely reticulate with two prominent converging longitudinal ribs.
Description
External features. Elongate, subtriangular in lateral view. AM broadly
rounded with a few sharp, stubby, almost hook-like spines, PM narrow and
rounded. DM almost straight, slightly flexed at about mid-length. VM straight to
slightly convex, DM and VM converge posteriorly. Subcentral process indistinct,
but large and rounded, posteroventral process elongate and outlined by several
longitudinal ribs. Surface features dominated by two narrow longitudinal ribs:
one runs diagonally from the posterior CA to the dorsal side of the subcentral
process, skirts it and continues to the AM; the other runs from the outer edge of
the posteroventral process to the ventral side of the anteroventral process, is de-
flected dorsally across the crest of the anteroventral process, and continues par-
allel to the median rib to the AM area. A short posteromedian, and two ventral
longitudinal ribs are also typically present. Highest point lies over the anterior
CA. There is a shallow median sulcus.
Internal features. Reverse of the exterior median sulcus is well developed.
MA wide, particularly posteriorly. MS not seen. NPC prominent. Hinge in LV
consists of an ME bar with slight median flexing, and two small terminal ele-
ments that are wrapped round by the MA. RV structures are complementary.
ME are probably crenulate.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 139
Remarks
H. (P.) dalzieli is close to H. (P.) barkeri, but the former can be distin-
guished from the latter by its poorly developed subcentral process, its less-flexed
DM, its more angular posterior CA, and the presence of two converging longi-
tudinal ribs, the ventral one of which has a distinctive flexure at about quarter
length. Average length—-height ratios are: 1,99 (barkeri) and 1,91 (dalzieli)
(Fig. 16).
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6050 0,34 0,20
6051 0,46 0,21
6052 0,35 0,19
6053 0,35 0,18
Age and distribution
H. (P.) dalzieli is known only from the early-middle Albian at DSDP site
330 (core 1/cc and 1-1/112-116 cm), where it is relatively abundant (c. 10% and
6%, respectively).
Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) reticulata sp. nov.
Fig. 15B—D
Derivation of name
Latin reticulata (reticulate): reference to ornamentation.
Holotype
SAM-PC6054, LV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-PC6055, RV, as above.
Diagnosis
Reticulate species with well-developed mural spines.
Description
External features. Elongate, subtriangular. AM broadly rounded with sev-
eral stout, short, frequently hooked spines, PM narrow, rounded. DM almost
straight in LV, distinctly flexed in RV. VM straight, converges posteriorly with
DM. Subcentral process very weakly developed, separated from a more promi-
nent posteroventral process by a median sulcus. The latter process bears a few
stubby spines. There is a well-developed spinose, conical process just below the
posterior CA and a similar but smaller elevation at the anterior CA. Surface
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 15. A. Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) dalzieli, subgen. et sp. nov., SAM—PC6053,
RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian, internal view. B-—D. Hemingwayella (Para-
hemingwayella) reticulata, subgen. et sp. nov., DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
B, D. Holotype, SAM-PC6054. B. LV. OD. Internal view. C. SAM-—PC6055, RV.
E-F. Hemiparacytheridea ewingensis sp. nov,. DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
E. Holotype, SAM-—PC6056, RV. F. SAM-PC6057, RV, internal view.
Scale bars: A, C, E=30yp, B, D, F=100p.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 141
26 s
yr \\ornata
mY
]
~~ 7 a 4
=
4
height
32 36 40 44 48
length
Fig. 16. Length v. height scattergram of adult specimens belonging to the genus Heming-
wayella Neale, 1975 (scale X10). Triangles: H. (H.) ornata Neale, 1975, western Austra-
lia, Santonian. Squares: H. (P.) dalzieli sp. nov., Falkland Plateau, early—middle Albian.
Circles: H. (P.) barkeri sp. nov., Falkland Plateau, early-middle Albian. Stars: H. (P.) re-
ticulata sp. nov., Falkland Plateau, early—middle Albian.
overall reticulate, with well-developed mural spines imparting a rough aspect to
valve surface.
Internal features. MA moderate to broad. Median sulcus and processes on ex-
terior surface have prominent counterparts in internal view. Hinge consists of a
long flexed ME (bar in RV), and short, narrow TE. All elements are apparently
smooth, but may be worn. MS not seen.
Remarks
H. (P.) reticulata is similar in outline to H. (P.) dalzieli but differs signifi-
cantly in ornamentation: reticulata is reticulate overall with mural spines; dalzieli
is reticulate, but also has several longitudinal ribs and does not have mural
spines.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6054 0,36 0,20
GUSS Was 0,16
Age and distribution
H. (P.) reticulata is known only from the early—middle Albian of DSDP 330
(core 1/cc and 1-1/112-116 cm) where it is rare (1-3 %).
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Genus Hemiparacytheridea Herrig, 1963
Hemiparacytheridea ewingensis sp. nov.
Fig. 1SE-F
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimen on Maurice Ewing Bank, Falkland Plateau.
Holotype
SAM-PC6056, RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—-middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-—PC6057, RV, as above.
Diagnosis
Species with large eye tubercle and large subcubic process over posterior
CA. Surface coarsely reticulate.
Description
External features. Subquadrate in lateral outline. AM broadly rounded, PM
asymmetrically pointed with apex above mid-height. DM and VM straight, con-
verging posteriorly. There is a large eye-spot and a similarly shaped feature over
posterior CA. The ala is prominent and extends foward via a ridge to a large
swelling at about third length. Surface coarsely reticulate.
Internal features. MA wide both anteriorly and posteriorly. The inner valve
surface has four large hollows corresponding to the protuberences on the exter-
ior surface. MS not seen. Hinge in RV consists of a long, straight, finely crenu-
late ME groove and small rounded ATE. PTE not preserved.
Remarks
Externally, H. ewingensis bears a resemblance to H. hemingwayi Neale,
1975, from the Santonian of western Australia, but the latter is more elongate
and has a higher PM apex. The hinge of our species is very similar to the type
species (H. occulta Herrig, 1963, Upper Maastrichtian of Rugen Island, East
Germany), but lacks the anterior ME enlargement, and has a less pronounced
convergence of the DM and VM. Similarities with H. challengeri will be dis-
cussed below.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6056) ~ 0229 0,15
SO57 GUS 0,13
Age and distribution
H. ewingensis is a rare species (c. 2%) known only from the early—middle
Albian at one horizon in DSDP 330 (core 1/cc) on the Falkland Plateau.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 143
Hemiparacytheridea challengeri sp. nov.
Fig. 17A
Derivation of name
From the drilling ship Glomar Challenger, which drilled DSDP sites on the
Falkland Plateau.
Holotype
SAM-PC6058, LV, DSDP 330, core 1—1/112-116 cm, early—middle Albian.
Diagnosis
Reticulate species with prominent longitudinal median rib, a pointed sym-
metrical PM, and a pyramid-shaped posterodorsal process.
Description
External features. In lateral view elongate quadrate, broadly rounded AM
and symmetrically pointed PM. DM straight, but deflected at anterior CA over
prominent eye-spot. There is a large pyramid-shaped process at the posterior
CA, which has a narrow anteriorly projecting ridge that partially obscures the
DM in lateral view. A ventrolateral ala terminates in a blunt spine and has a
thick leading edge that carries forward as a curved rib and crosses a swelling at
about third length. Central part of valve surface is coarsely reticulate and
crossed by a longitudinal median rib that runs from in front of the eye-spot to
about two-thirds valve length.
Internal features. MA wide, though not seen clearly. MS not seen. Hinge in
LV consists of a long, straight crenulate ME bar, which thickens at its anterior
end and possibly at its posterior end. There is an ATE socket, but PTE socket
not observed.
Remarks
H. challengeri differs from the type species and from H. ewingenis in having
a relatively subdued ventrolateral swelling and a symmetrically pointed PM. It is
closely related to H. ewingensis, but differs further in aspects of ornamentation
by possessing a longitudinal median rib and anteriorly projecting ribs from both
the posterior CA and ala. In H. challengeri the line of greatest length is closer to
mid-height.
Damotte (1979) recorded specimens identified as Paranotacythere sp. 69
from the Aptian (Foraminifera zone MC 22) of DSDP 400A in the northern Bay
of Biscay. Her illustrations (plate 1 (figs 6-7)) bear a considerable resemblance
to H. challengeri, which, taken in conjunction with the doubtful generic assign-
ment for her material (no internal views), suggests that the North Atlantic
species may also belong to Hemiparacytheridea.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6058 0,28 ORS
Age and distribution
H. challengeri is known only from the early—middle Albian of DSDP 330
(core 1/cc) on the Falkland Plateau.
Genus Pedicythere Eagar, 1965
Pedicythere falklandensis sp. nov.
Fig. 17B
Derivation of name
Falkland Plateau, site of DSDP boreholes from which type specimens were
obtained.
Holotype
SAM-PC6059, LV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Paratype
SAM-PC6060, LV, DSDP 330, core 1-1/112-116 cm, early—middle Albian.
Diagnosis
Species with drawn-out posterior area and pointed PM. Greatest length lies
along DM.
Description
External features. AM broadly rounded, separated from DM by a small
step. PM drawn out, highly asymmetric, apex in line with DM, slightly upturned
dorsally, posteroventral part of PM slopes up strongly, and bears a broad spine.
DM straight and coincides with line of greatest length. VM broadly convex, par-
tially obscured in lateral view by ala. Ventrolateral area bears a large hollow
spine that projects almost at right angles to valve surface. This spine has a short
leading-edge ridge. Anterior area compressed and separated from rest of valve
by a low ridge running in a curved line from the anterodorsal margin step to the
ventral surface under the ala. DM margin obscured by a delicate frieze-like rim.
Internal features. Poorly seen. In LV hinge ME consists of a long, slightly
sinuous narrow bar, PTE is a narrow crenulate socket, ATE is a rounded
?smooth hollow. MS and MA not seen clearly.
Remarks
P. falklandensis is closest to P. fragilis Dingle, 1981, from the Maastrichtian
of Zululand, but differs in having a more acuminate posterior area, a less pos-
teriorly deflected ala, and lacking the ala leading-edge extension to the AM.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 145
Fig. 17. A. Hemiparacytheridea challengeri sp. nov., holotype, SAM-PC6058, LV, DSDP
330, core 1-1/112-116 cm, early-middle Albian. B. Pedicythere falklandensis sp. nov., holo-
type, SAM-PC6059, LV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian. C. Majungaella ct.
M. queenslandensis Krémmelbein, 1975, LV, TBD 1113, Middle-Upper Albian. Originally
illustrated by Dingle (1971, fig. 4) and designated MG-—3-1-9, this specimen was destroyed
during SEM preparation. D-E. Majungaella nematis Grekoff, 1963, locality 171-1, Mlambon-
gwenya Spruit, Zululand, Aptian IV. D. SAM-PC6061, LV. E. SAM-PC6062, LV, internal
view. F. Majungaella ?hemigymnae Brenner & Oertli, 1976, SAM—PC6063, LV of carapace,
locality 152-5, Mkuze, Zululand, Aptian IV.
Scale bars: A=30p, others = 100.
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
P. australis Neale, 1975, from the Santonian of western Australia has different
PM and AM outlines, and has a ventrally directed ala spine.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
GUS UL. 3Z 0,17
6060 0,38 O22
Age and distribution
P. falklandensis is known only from the early-middle Albian at DSDP site
330 (core 1/cc and 1—1/112-116 cm), where it is rare (c. 1% total ostracod popu-
lation).
Family Progonocytheridae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Subfamily Progonocytherinae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Genus Majungaella Grekoff, 1963
This taxon is one of the characteristic elements of the South Gondwana
Upper Jurassic to mid-Cretaceous ostracod province, extending from Argentina
via the Falkland Plateau, South and east Africa, and India, to Australia.
Majungaella cf. M. queenslandensis Krommelbein, 1975
Figs 17C, 18
Majungaella sp. A Dingle, 1971: 400-401; fig. 4.
Remarks
Originally compared to M. cf. nematis by Dingle (1971), this species is
probably closer to M. queenslandensis on the basis of its finer reticulation pat-
tern, and small anterodorsal marginal spines. Its MS pattern consists of four
oe
Fig. 18. Muscle scars of Majungaella cf.
M. queenslandensis, TBD 1113, Agulhas
Bank, Middle—Upper Albian.
MG-3-1-9 of Dingle (1971, fig. 4) and
Figure 17C (this paper).
Scale bar = 30.
[oe
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 147
rounded adductors and a rounded anterior scar (Fig. 18). During SEM prepara-
tion, the only good specimen (illustrated by Dingle, 1971, MG-3-1-9) was unfor-
tunately crushed. The specimens illustrated by Kroémmelbein (1975) have a
slightly coarser reticulation than the Agulhas Bank material.
Age and distribution
M. cf. queenslandensis is known only from samples TBD 1113 and 1266
from the Alphard Formation of the Agulhas Bank, which have been dated as
Middle—Upper Albian and Upper Aptian—Albian, respectively (see Introduc-
tion). M. queenslandensis was recorded by Krémmelbein (1975) from the
Albian—Cenomanian Allaru Mudstone of the Great Artesian Basin, south-west-
ern Queensland, Australia.
Majungaella nematis Grekoff, 1963
Fig. 17D-E
Majungaella nematis Grekoff, 1963: 1744: pl. 5 (fig. 141-145), pl. 9 (figs 213-232). Sigal, 1974:
pl. 1 fig. 4a—b. Brenner & Oertli, 1976: 501-502, pl. 5 (fig. 11-12). McLachlan et al.,
1976b: 346, fig. 15 (14-15). Guha 1976: 87, pl. 3 (fig. 23a—c).
Neocythere (N.) uitenhagensis Dingle, 1969: 152-153, fig. 11, pl. 9a—c.
Novocythere santacruziana Rossi de Garcia, 1972: in Malumian et al.: 271, pl. 1(7).
Remarks
Specimens of M. nematis from Zululand show no significant morphological
differences to material from the Algoa—Outeniqua basins in the southern Cape
or from other Gondwanide localities, indicating that this species exhibited
intraspecific stability over its wide geographical and time ranges.
Age and distribution
M. nematis is known to have the following distributions in time and space:
1. Portlandian to Valanginian in the Majunga Basin of Madagascar
(Grekoff 1963).
2. Upper Valanginian to Hauterivian, Lower Sundays River Formation,
Outeniqua—Algoa basins (Dingle 1969; Brenner & Oertli 1976; McLachlan et al.
1976b).
3. ?Portlandian, Brenton Beds, Knysna—Outeniqua Basin (McLachlan et al.
1976b).
4. ?Hauterivian to Barremian in Santa Cruz Province, Argentina
(Malumian et al. 1972).
5. Aptian IV to Cenomanian II, Makatini and Mzinene formations in the
Mkuze, Mlambongwenya Spruit, and Ndumu areas of Zululand.
6. Early Cretaceous (860-755 m) of the Banni borehole, Rann of Kutch,
India (Guha 1976).
7. ‘Neocomian’, DSDP site 249 (Mozambique Ridge) (core 27—3/26 cm)
(Sigal 1974).
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
This list suggests that M. nematis was widely distributed in southern Gon-
dwana during mid-Mesozoic times (Argentina to India), while its total temporal
range was Portlandian to Cenomanian II. This is also its time range in southern
Africa.
In Zululand M. nematis forms only a minor element of the ostracod faunas,
but in the Algoa Basin it reached 7 per cent of the total population (Dingle
1982), and Grekoff (1963) notes that in the Majunga Basin of Madagascar it is
‘common’ and ‘rare’ in the Portlandian and Valanginian, respectively.
Majungaella ?hemigymnae Brenner & Oertli, 1976
Fig. 17F
Majungaella hemigymnae Brenner & Oertli, 1976: 504-505, pl. 6 (fig. 1-4), pl. 8 (fig. 5). Mc-
Lachlan et al., 1976b: 364, fig. 15 (17).
Remarks
A fragmentary carapace with longitudinal ribbing confined to the ventral
part of the lateral surface. Outline and ornamentation very similar to Brenner &
Oertli’s species, but comparison of critical posterior areas not possible.
Age and distribution
Known only from the Makatini Formation (Aptian IV) at Mkuze, Zululand
(locality 152-7). M. hemingymnae has been reported from the Lower Sundays
River Formation of the Algoa Basin (Hauterivian) (Brenner & Oertli 1976), and
from the Lower Sundays River and Kirkwood formations (?Berriasian to Val-
anginian) of the Outeniqua Basin and Brenton Beds (?Portlandian to Berri-
asian) at Knysna (McLachlan et al. 1976b).
Majungaella? sp. 327/16
Fig. 19A—C
Remarks
One LV of a progonocytherid with Majungaella-like aspect. Differs from
previously described species of this genus in being more acuminate posteriorly,
and having wider MA. The hinge appears to be antimerodont, with a large
accommodation groove, but is poorly preserved. MS well seen: consist of a
V-shaped frontal scar and four oval posterior scars in a vertical row.
Age and distribution
Recorded from middle Albian at DSDP site 327 (core 16—6/126—130 cm) on
the Falkland Plateau.
Genus Pongolacythere gen. nov.
Derivation of name
Pongola, river valley location of holotype, plus generic appellation cythere.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 149
Fig. 19. A-C. Majungaella? sp. 327/16, SAM-PC6064, LV, DSDP 327, core 16-6/126-130 cm, mid-
dle Albian. A. Lateral view. B. Internal view. C. Muscle scars.
Scale bars: A-B = 100y, C=30p.
Type species
Pongolacythere striata sp. nov.
Diagnosis
Progonocytherid with an elongate carapace, round AM and PM. Hinge par-
amphidont. MA anteriorly narrow with about ten short RPC. MS probably con-
sist of V-shaped anterior scar and curved row of four adductors. Lacks eye-
spots, SCT, and prominent longitudinal ridges.
Remarks
Although the hinge structure, lack of prominent longitudinal ridges, eye-
spots and SCT suggest an assignment to the Progonocytheridae, the overall
shape of this new genus is not typical of the subfamily, and the placement must
be considered provisional.
Pongolacythere has similarities to several genera, but differs from them on
various points: Acanthocythere Sylvester-Bradley, 1948 (Bathonian of England)
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
has eye-spots and a lobodont hinge; Posteroprotocythere Mandelstam, 1958
(Lower Jurassic to Upper Cretaceous of western and south-eastern Europe and
south-western Asia) has an entomodont hinge and an outline reminiscent of
Protocythere; and Mosaeleberis Deroo, 1966 (Upper Cretaceous to Lower Ter-
tiary of Europe) has an SCT, prominent longitudinal ridges and numerous
(about thirty) anterior RPC. As far as African localities are concerned, it bears
some resemblance to Mandwacythere Bate, 1975 (Portlandian of Tanzania), but
this genus has a lophodont hinge and anterior vestibules. Bate (in Bate & Bay-
liss 1969) records four specimens of an apparently blind elongate species with
fine longitudinal lateral ribs (Genus A from the Albian of Tanzania). He does
not give an additional description, but from his illustration (pl. 5 (fig. 16)), this
species could well belong within the genus Pongolacythere.
Age and distribution
So far known only from the Aptian IV to Albian III of northern Zululand,
but may occur in the Albian of Tanzania (as Genus A of Bate, in Bate & Bayliss
1969).
Pongolacythere striata sp. nov.
Figs 20A-E, 21
Derivation of name
Latin striatus (fine line): reference to surface ornamentation of fine ribbing.
Holotype
SAM-PC6065, RV, locality 171-1, Makatini Formation, Mlambongwenya
Spruit, Aptian IV.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6066, LV, as above.
SAM-PC6067, RV, as above.
Diagnosis
Species with ornamentation of fine longitudinal ribbing and reticulation,
with foveolate intercostal areas.
Description
External features. Elongate, with RV AM asymmetrically rounded. LV AM
broadly rounded and more symmetrical. PM rounded, slightly tapering. DM and
VM almost straight and parallel; DM in LV has rounded elevation over CA.
Surface ornamented with numerous fine longitudinal ribs converging somewhat
towards anterior end. Posterior area is delicately reticulate. Intercostal areas
have fine foveolate ornamentation. There is no SCT.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 151
Fig. 20. A-E. Pongolacythere striata gen. et sp. nov., locality 171-1, Mlambongwenya Spruit,
Zululand, Aptian IV. A, C-E. Holotype, SAM-PC6065, RV. A. External lateral view.
C. Detail posterior area. D. Detail anterior area. E. Interior view. B. SAM-—PC6066, LV.
Scale bars: A-B, E= 1004, C-D=30u.
52 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
<=
onl?
Fig. 21. Muscle scars of Pongolacythere
striata gen. et sp. nov., SAM-—PC6067,
LV, locality 171-1, Mlambongwenya
Spruit, Zululand, Aptian IV.
Scale bar =30wu.
Internal features. MA moderately wide, few (c. 10) straight, simple RPC an-
teriorly. Hinge paramphidont: in RV ATE consists of a large denticulate pro-
cess, PTE a similar feature, which is highest posteriorly. ME smooth: consists of
a long, narrow groove and a small, rounded anterior peg. No unworn LV hinges
seen. MS not well preserved, apparently consist of a V-shaped anterior scar
(may be subdivided and accompanied by two further scars dorsally), and four
elliptical adductors in a curved row.
Remarks
Externally P. striata bears some resemblance to Mosaeleberis interrupta
(Bosquet 1847) (Maastrichtian, western Europe), the type species of Mosaelebe-
ris Deroo, 1966, but differs in lacking a prominent median longitudinal rib and
an SCT. In addition, the DM and VM of M. interrupta converge posteriorly.
Mandwacythere striata Bate, 1975 (Upper Jurassic, Tanzania) has a similar shape
and ornamentation, but differs in the structure of its hinge and MA.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
ales O75 0,38
Geo O72 0,34
6067 0,76 0,35
Age and distribution
This species is known to range Aptian IV to Albian III in the Mkuze and
Mlambongwenya areas of northern Zululand.
Subfamily Protocytherinae Lubimova, 1955
Genus Arculicythere Grekoff, 1963
This is another taxon of the family Progonocytheridae that is typical of the
Lower to mid-Cretaceous of the South Gondwana ostracod province. It has
been recorded from the Falkland Plateau, Agulhas Bank, Madagascar, and off
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 153
north-western Australia, and although Grekoff (1963) recorded it ranging Port-
landian to Valanginian in Madagascar, it appears to be most abundant in the Al-
bian of the Falkland Plateau, Agulhas Bank, and north-western Australia.
Swain (1976) tentatively identified two valves as Arculicythere? sp. from the late
Aptian—early Cenomanian of DSDP site 144 (core 5—1/3—9 cm) (north-west of
Cape Verde Islands), but his illustrations are not typical of the genus, and prob-
ably do not belong to it. No unequivocal records of Arculicythere therefore exist
outside the south Gondwanide oceans.
Arculicythere tumida Dingle, 1971
Figs 22A-F, 23A—D
Arculicythere tumida Dingle, 1971: 401-403, fig. 5.
Arculicythere? sp. A Oertli, 1974: 947, pl. 4 (figs 1-11), pl. 5 (figs 1-12).
Remarks
In the original diagnosis, Dingle (1971) mentioned an amphidont hinge.
This was a typographical error, and in the accompanying description, it was cor-
rectly stated as antimerodont. SEM pictures of topotypes are included herein to
supplement the original descriptions. Illustrations of material from the Falkland
Plateau are indistinguishable from those of Agulhas Bank specimens. The speci-
mens illustrated by Oertli (1974) from off-shore north-western Australia are
somewhat more elongate, but otherwise fit well into the species.
The holotype and two paratypes of A. tumida originally designated
MG-3-1-1, MG-—3-1-2, and MG-—3-1-3 respectively by Dingle (1971), have now
been placed in the South African Museum under catalogue numbers
SAM-—PC-—6068, 6069, and 6070 respectively. Figure 24 shows a length—height
scattergram.
Age and distribution
A. tumida is known to have the following ranges and distribution:
1. Sample TBD 1113, Alphard Formation, Agulhas Bank (Middle—Upper
Albian) (Dingle 1971).
2. Early to late Albian (cores 21—4/130-134 cm to 15—2/132-136 cm) at
DSDP site 327, and early—middle Albian (cores 2-2/122-126cm_ to
1—1/112-116 cm) at DSDP site 330, Falkland Plateau.
3. Middle-Upper Albian (cores 17—2/21-23 cm to 12-2/60-62 cm) DSDP
site 259, north-west of Perth, western Australia (Oertli 1974).
This suggests that A. tumida was widely distributed in the proto south-
eastern Atlantic and southern Indian oceans in ?early to late Albian times. An
interesting aspect of its distribution in these three areas is that it typically forms
a major element of the total ostracod population: Agulhas Bank (46%); Falk-
land Plateau (typically between 22% and 38%); and western Australia (63 % of
all Albian ostracods recorded at site 259), where it is locally the sole species. In
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN-MUSEUM
Fig. 22. A-F. Arculicythere tumida Dingle, 1971. A-E. TBD 1113, Agulhas Bank, Middle—
Upper Albian. A. SAM-PC6071, RV. B. SAM-PC6072, LV. C, E. SAM-—PC6073, RV.
C. Muscle scars. E. Interior view. D. SAM-PC6129, LV. Details of ATE and PTE of
hinge—composite photograph, whole of ME not shown. F. SAM-—PC6074, LV, DSDP 330
core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Scale bars: A-B, E-F=100u, C=10yu, D=30uwn.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 155
Fig. 23. A-D. Arculicythere tumida Dingle, 1971. A, C-D. DSDP 330, core I/cc, early—
middle Albian. A. SAM-PC6075, RV. C. SAM-PC6077, RV, internal view.
D. SAM-PC6078, LV, internal view. B. SAM-PC6076, RV, DSDP 327, core
15—2/132-136 cm, late Albian. E-F. Collisarboris? stanleyensis sp. nov., DSDP 327, core
15-2/132-136 cm, late Albian. E. Holotype, SAM-PC6079, RV. F. SAM-PC6080, LV,
internal view.
Scale bars: A-D, F=100u, E=30w.
156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
38 are
Falkland,’ ~
P ne
Plateauv 7 @) x
4
height
42 46 50 24 58
62
length
Fig. 24. Scattergram of length v. height for adult specimens of Arculicythere tumida from the
Agulhas Bank (dots) and Falkland Plateau (squares) (scale x10 yp).
addition, both the DSDP localities probably represent deposition in water
depths between 100 and 200 m, and we suspect that this may also have been the
case on the Agulhas Bank (see Discussion).
Family Collisarborisidae Neale, 1975
Genus Collisarboris Neale, 1975
Collisarboris? stanleyensis sp. nov.
Figs 23E-F, 25, 26A
Derivation of name
Port Stanley, capital of the Falkland Islands.
Holotype
SAM-PC6079, RV, DSDP 327, core 15—2/132-136 cm, late Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-—PC6080, LV, as above.
SAM-—PC6081, RV, as above.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 157
Diagnosis
Blind species, with compressed AM area and prominent pits over MS on
valve exterior.
Description
External features. Ovate outline, symmetrical, broadly rounded AM with
narrow frilled border and low AM rim. Anterior part of valve compressed. PM
roundly acuminate, apex at about mid-height. DM straight in RV, convex in
LV. VM slightly convex, but hidden in lateral view by broad ventral overhang.
Anterior CA fairly prominent in RV, with a depression below it. Lateral surface
mostly smooth, but there are a few scattered large puncta and numerous fine
puncta, and in the vicinity of a slight median sulcus the valve surface is often
weakly and coarsely reticulate. MS pattern shows through in this sulcus as a line
of pits. The wide ventral overhang has a broad keel along its outer edge.
Internal features. Hinge antimerodont: in RV the TE have large denticles,
and the ME has finer crenulation; LV has a narrow accommodation groove and
a prominently overhanging ledge, RV has a high concave elevation that receives
the RV ledge. MA not clearly seen, nor MS from the inside, but external 1m-
pressions indicate a long curved row of five posterior scars of which P2—P4 are
partially subdivided, and a group of three smaller, rounded anterior scars (Fig.
US).
ile
ee
&
g
oof
a
a
es
@
A B @
Fig. 25. Muscle scars of Collisarboris? stanleyensis sp.
nov. A. DSDP 327, core 15—2/132-136 cm, late Al-
bian. B. DSDP 327, core 16—4/66—70 cm, middle Al-
bian.
Scale bars = 30 pu.
Remarks
Several aspects of C? stanleyensis do not fit precisely within Neale’s (1975)
original concept of the genus Collisarboris but, because it was based on one
species, some extension may be considered permissible. The new species is
blind, whereas the genotype C. cooki has small eye-spots and, while the hinges
of C? stanleyensis and C. cooki are both characterized by accommodation
grooves and shelves, it is the LV in the former and the RV in the latter that are
the more imposing structures. The MS pattern in the Falkland Plateau species
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
has five posterior scars compared to the four reported by Neale (1975), but the
MS were obviously not well preserved in Neale’s material because he could not
see the frontal scars. Despite these differences, our specimens have the ovate,
neocytherid shape, an antimerodont hinge, a carinate ala, and a smooth to punc-
tate shell surface. Rather than erect a new higher taxon, it is felt that these simi-
larities warrant tentative assignment to Neale’s genus.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6079 0:33 0,22
6080 0,36 0,26
6081 0,41 0,26
Age and distribution
C? stanleyensis is a rare to tertiary component of the middle (3%) to late
Albian (6%) strata at two levels in DSDP 327 (cores 16—4/66-70 cm, and
15—2/132-136 cm) on the Falkland Plateau.
Genus Sphaeroleberis Deroo, 1966
Sphaeroleberis? sp. A
Fig. 26B
Remarks
One carapace and two valves of a species tentatively placed in Sphaerolebe-
ris. Lack of good hinge views precludes a more definite assignment. In Europe
the genus is typical of the Maastrichtian, and Neale (1977) has reassigned North
American Campanian species to it. Bate (in Bate & Bayliss 1969) records Sphae-
roleberis africana from the Turonian of Tanzania, and notes that Apostolescu
(1963) described two species (S. gambiensis and S. senegalensis) from the Seno-
nian of west Africa.
Our specimens are fairly close to S. africana but differ in PM outline, which
is less acuminate and more upturned. In this respect, they also differ from Neo-
cythere (Centrocythere) denticulata Mertens, 1956, from the Upper Aptian to
Upper Albian of western Europe.
Age and distribution
This species ranges Albian III to Albian VI in the Mzinene Formation of
the Mkuze and Ndumu areas of northern Zululand.
Family Schizocytheridae Mandelstam, 1959
Genus Sondagella Dingle, 1969
This is a further taxon that is typical of the uppermost Jurassic to mid-Cre-
taceous of the western part of the South Gondwana ostracod province (Argen-
tina, Agulhas Bank and Mozambique Ridge).
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 159
Fig. 26. A. Collisarboris? stanleyensis, SAM-PC6081, RV, DSDP 327, core
15—2/132-136 cm, late Albian. B. Sphaeroleberis? sp. A, SAM-—PC6082, LV of carapace, local-
ity 153, Mkuze, Zululand, Albian III. C-F. Sondagella theloides Dingle, 1969. C—D.
TBD 1113, Agulhas Bank, Middle-Upper Albian. These two specimens are part of the popu-
lation identified by Dingle (1971) as Amphicytherura (Sondagella) theloides acuta.
C. SAM-PC6083, RV. D. SAM-PC6084, LV. E-F. Locality 153, Mkuze, Zululand, Albian
III. E. SAM-—PC6085, RV. F. SAM—PC6086, LV.
Scale bars = 100 pu.
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Sondagella theloides Dingle, 1969
Fig. 26C—F
Amphicytherura (Sondagella) theloides Dingle, 1969: 157-161, fig. 13, pl. 98-1. Brenner &
Oertli, 1976: 496-497, pl. 4 (figs 13-16). McLachlan et al. 1976b: 363-364, fig. 15 (3-4).
Musacchio, 1978: 464, pl. 1 (figs 21-23).
Amphicytherura (Sondagella) cf. theloides Dingle: Sigal, 1974: pl. 1 (fig. 6a—b).
Amphicytherura (S.) theloides acuta Dingle, 1971: 405-406, fig. 8.
Remarks
In view of the different lateral outline of S. theloides and Amphicytherura
dubia Israelsky, 1929, Bate (1972) is followed here in raising Sondagella to gen-
eric status. The specimens of S. theloides from Zululand are very close to those
from the southern Cape, but do seem to have a consistently less strongly curved
anterior part to the longitudinal median rib, and a somewhat coarser aspect to
ornamentation overall. The latter may, in part, be due to the relatively poor
state of preservation of the Zululand material and, in any case, these variations
are no more than can be expected intraspecifically from different geographical
areas.
Musacchio (1978, 1979) records the species from Argentina, along with two
closely related forms, S. /estai and an unnamed species that he placed in ?Acro-
cythere sp. 2. He also recognized a variant of S. theloides that was described
under A. (S.) theloides Form A (Musacchio 1978).
Age and distribution
S. theloides is known to have the following ranges and distribution:
1. Early Hauterivian in the Neuquen Basin of Argentina (Musacchio 1978).
2. Upper Valanginian to Lower Hauterivian, Lower Sundays River Forma-
tion, Algoa Basin (Dingle 1969; Brenner & Oertli 1976); Outeniqua Basin (Mc-
Lachlan et al. 1976b).
3. ?Portlandian, Brenton Beds, Knysna (McLachlan et al. 1976b).
4. Middle-Upper Albian (TBD 1113), ?Alphard Formation, Outeniqua
Basin, Agulhas Bank (Dingle 1971).
5. Albian III, Mzinene Formation, Mkuze area, Zululand.
6. Early Aptian or Barremian, DSDP site 249, Mozambique Ridge (core
26—1/40 cm) (Sigal 1974).
This suggests that S. theloides was widely distributed along the southern
edge of West Gondwana in early to mid-Cretaceous time (Neuquen Basin in the
west to Mozambique Ridge in the east), although it was absent from the eastern
Falkland Plateau. Its temporal range in south-east Africa was ?Portlandian to
Albian II (possibly Upper Albian in the Outeniqua Basin). It was probably an
environmentally tolerant species that inhabited both shallow, near-shore (Algoa
Basin), and deeper shelf areas (c. 200 m, Agulhas Bank) (see Discussion).
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 161
Family Trachyleberididae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Subfamily Trachyleberidinae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
On the Falkland Plateau, trachyleberid ostracods are represented by one
species (Isocythereis sealensis), which is relatively abundant at site 327 (average
8% in 6 samples, with a maximum of 14% in core 17). Generally speaking,
however, these localities are noted for their relative lack of members of this
family. In Zululand, in contrast, trachyleberid taxa are represented by 3 species
in 2 genera which constitute an average of 36% of the total ostracod fauna in
the 6 fossiliferous levels investigated (range 9-84 %). To emphasize the contrast
between the two areas further, the Falkland Plateau trachyleberids form an
average of 31% of the cytheracean population, while in Zululand this figure is
on
Genus Isocythereis Triebel, 1940
Isocythereis sealensis Dingle, 1971
Figs 27A-F, 28A—D
Isocythereis sealensis Dingle, 1971: 412-413, fig. 14.
Neotype
SAM-PC6087, sample TBD 1113, ?Alphard Formation, Agulhas Bank,
Middle—Upper Albian.
During the course of the present investigation, the holotype of the species
(MG-3-1-6), which was a fragile specimen, fragmented. Sample 1113 originally
contained five specimens. Following the destruction of the holotype, the para-
type (MG-3-1-6) (Dingle 1971) has been retained as such, and one of the three
remaining specimens has been selected as the neotype and illustrated.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6087 0,61 OSS
Remarks
In the original description, Dingle (1971) identified small rounded eye-
spots. Re-examination of the type material under SEM shows this to be incor-
rect, and the species is now known to have been blind. Twenty additional speci-
mens have been recovered from DSDP sites on the Falkland Plateau, and these
allow a more broadly based assessment of the species’ characters to be made.
External features that should be stressed are the flared margin over the an-
terior CA LV, and the prominent, narrow AM rim (both valves). Although the
delicate reticulate ornamentation found in the Agulhas Bank specimens is met
with in the Falkland Plateau material, the latter’s ornamentation tends to be
coarser, with the valves more heavily calcified.
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
t
Fig. 27. A-F. Isocythereis sealensis Dingle, 1971. A-—C. Neotype, SAM-—PC6087, LV, TBD
1113, Agulhas Bank, Middle-Upper Albian. A. External lateral view. B. Detail anterior
area. C. Internal view. D-F. DSDP 327. D. SAM-—PC6088, LV, core 16-6/125-130 cm,
middle Albian. E-F. SAM-—PC6089, LV, core 15—2/132-136 cm, late Albian. E. External
lateral view. F. Detail anterior area.
Scale bars: A, C-E=100y, B, F=30uwu.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 163
Fig. 28. A-D. Isocythereis sealensis Dingle, 1971. A. SAM-—PC6090, RV, DSDP 330, core
1-1/112-110 cm, early-middle Albian. B. SAM-PC6092, RV, DSDP 327, core
16-6/125-130 cm, middle Albian. C. SAM-PC6093, LV, DSDP 327, core 15—2/132-136 cm,
late Albian. D. SAM-PC6091, RV dorsal view, DSDP 327, core 18-6/106-110 cm, middle
Albian. E-F. Isocythereis? ndumuensis sp. nov., locality Ndumu 3-1, Inyamathi Pan, Zulu-
land, Cenomanian III. E. Holotype, SAM-PC6094, RV. F. SAM-PC6095, LV.
Scale bars = 100w.
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Internally, it can now be established that while the hinge is hemiamphidont,
the ATE RV is weakly subdivided and the PTE LV consists of a large socket
that opens broadly into the valve interior and has a thick, humped exterior rim.
ATE LV 1s also a rather broad structure, opening into the interior of the valve.
Bate (in Bate & Bayliss 1969) recorded Isocythereis sp. (British Museum Io
782) from the Turonian of Tanzania, but this species differs from J. sealensis in
having large eye-spots, a prominent SCT, a thick AM rim, and bluntly spinose
ornamentation on the dorso- and ventrolateral longitudinal ribs.
Age and distribution
In South Africa, I. sealensis is known only from sample TBD 1113 on the
Agulhas Bank (Middle—Upper Albian). On the Falkland Plateau it ranges as fol-
lows: DSDP 330 early—middle Albian (core 1—1/112—116 cm); DSDP 327 middle
to late Albian (cores 18—-6/106—-116 cm to 15—2/132-136 cm). It is never abun-
dant, but at two levels (DSDP 327 core 17 and core 15) reaches 14% and 10%
respectively, of the total ostracod population.
Isocythereis? ndumuensis sp. nov.
Figs 28E-F, 29A
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimens, Ndumu region of northern Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-PC6094, C, locality Ndumu 3-1, Inyamathi Pan, Mzinene Formation,
Cenomanian III.
Paratypes
SAM-—PC6095, C, as above.
SAM-PC6096, C, as above.
SAM-PC6097, C, locality 178, Msunduzi Pan, Ndumu, Mzinene Forma-
tion, Albian VI.
Diagnosis
Species with elongate triangular lateral outline, smooth to weakly reticulate
intercostal areas, prominent turret-like eye-spot.
Description
External features. In lateral view elongate, asymmetrically rounded AM
with short stout spines anteroventrally, DM and VM converge posteriorly, both
are weakly concave. PM is triangular. Anterior and posterior CA prominent,
with turret-like eye-spots in both RV and LV. Posteroventral margin weakly
spinose. Surface ornamented with dorsal and ventral spinose ridges and lines of
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 165
spines. The ventral ridge typically consists of 5 stout spines on a low elevation
that rises posteriorly and is continuous with the well-developed spinose AM
ridge. The dorsal lineation consists of four low spines on a weak ridge, and
culminates posteriorly in a well-developed CA and a short low ridge that runs
parallel to the posterior margin in LV, and almost at right angles to DM in RV.
There is a prominent rounded SCT bearing stout spines. In RV there is also a
small spine anteroadjacent to the SCT. Intercostal areas typically smooth, but
Albian specimens have weak intercostal reticulation.
Internal features. None seen.
Remarks
Tentatively placed in /socythereis on general external features. The new
species is very similar to [socythereis sp. (British Museum Io 782) from the Turo-
nian of Tanzania (Bate & Bayliss 1969) but is overall less spinose. It differs from
I. sealensis from the Agulhas Bank and the Falkland Plateau by possessing large
eye-spots (J. sealensis is blind), and by lacking well-developed reticulate orna-
mentation. Spinoleberis? GA E 12 (Grosdidier 1979) from the Upper Cenoma-
nian of Gabon has a similar ornamentation to J? ndumuensis, but is more
elongate and apparently lacks a prominent eye-spot.
Dimensions (mm)
length height width
6094 30,75 0,40
6095 0,84 0,42
6096 = 0,90 0,45
6097 = 0,84 0,38
Age and distribution
I? ndumuensis is known to range Albian VI to Cenomanian III in the
Ndumu region of Zululand.
Genus Cythereis Jones, 1849
Cythereis agulhasensis Dingle, 1971
Fig. 29B—D
Cythereis agulhasensis Dingle, 1971: 411-412, fig. 13.
Remarks
No further specimens of this distinctive species have been recovered, but
SEM pictures are included here to amplify the original description. In particular,
attention is drawn to the delicate recticulate and foveolate ornamentation at the
posterior ends of the median and ventrolateral ridges, which contrasts with the
otherwise overall smooth valve surface. The MS pattern is now shown to consist
of four elongate adductors and a U-shaped anterior scar.
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The holotype originally designated MG-—5-1-2 by Dingle (1971) has now
been placed in the South African Museum under catalogue number
SAM-PC6098.
Age and distribution
Known only from sample TBD 1266, ?Alphard Formation on the Agulhas
Bank (Upper Aptian—Albian).
Genus Makatinella gen. nov.
Derivation of name
Locality of holotype, Makatini Flats, Zululand.
Type species
Makatinella tritumida sp. nov.
Diagnosis
Trachyleberid with the following characters: asymmetrically rounded AM,
large anterior hinge ears in LV and RV, prominent eye-spots, straight VM form-
ing continuation with the ventrally deflected PM, prominent rounded SCT, three
longitudinal ribs, fourteen to sixteen anterior RPC. Surface weakly reticulate to
smooth with numerous pustules.
Remarks
Makatinella has some similarities with Cornicythereis Griindel, 1973 (which
Damotte (1977) considers a subgenus of Cythereis) and Costacythere Grindel
1966, but differs from both in possessing a straight VM that is contiguous with
the PM. Rehacythereis Griindel, 1973 (which Damotte (1977) also considers a
subgenus of Cythereis) differs from Makatinella in lacking the prominent an-
terior hinge ears and well-defined median rib. Despite these differences, Makati-
nella is clearly related to these European Cythereis-like taxa, which have the
following ranges: Cornicythereis—?Barremian to Albian (Griindel 1974); Costa-
cythereis—Hauterivian to Barremian (Bartenstein & Oertli 1975); and Rehacy-
thereis—? Valanginian to Palaeocene (Grindel 1974).
Cythereis itself has a centrally pointed PM and a symmetrically rounded
AM.
Age and distribution
The two new species recognized in this study, M. tritumida and M. inflata,
range Aptian IV to Cenomanian III and Aptian IV to Albian III respectively,
and are known only from Zululand.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 167
Fig. 29. A. Isocythereis? ndumuensis sp. nov., SAM-—PC6097, RV, locality 178, Ndumu,
Zululand, Albian VI. B-D. Cythereis agulhasensis Dingle, 1971, holotype, SAM-—PC6098, RV,
TBD 1266, Agulhas Bank, Upper Aptian—Albian. B. External lateral view. C. Detail postero-
ventral area. D. Interior view. E-F. Makatinella tritumida gen. et sp. nov., holotype,
SAM-PC6099, RV, locality 171-1, Mlambongwenya Spruit, Zululand, AptianIV. E. External
lateral view. F. Detail anterior area.
Scale bars: A-B, D-E=100p, C, F=30un.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Makatinella tritumida sp. nov.
Figs 29E-F, 30A—D
Derivation of name
Latin tres tumor: reference to three pustules postadjacent to AM rim.
Holotype
SAM-PC6099, LV, locality 171-1, Makatini Formation, Mlambongwenya
Spruit, Aptian IV.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6101, C, as above.
SAM-PC6100, C, locality 171-21, Makatini Formation, Mlambongwenya
Spruit, Albian III.
Diagnosis
Species with prominent AM rim and three pustules postadjacent to it.
Description
External features. Carapace elongate rectangular, AM broadly and asymme-
trically rounded, DM and VM straight with no posterior convergence, PM asym-
metrically pointed so that posteroventral part forms continuation of VM.
Posteroventral and anteroventral margins bear short stout spines. Anterior
hinge ears prominent, rounded, and forming highest points of the valves. In dor-
sal view, posterior area compressed, widest part of valve in posterior one third.
Eye-spots large, set below hinge ears. Lateral surface bears three prominent
ridges: dorsal ridge is sharp and straight or slightly convex dorsally, starting be-
hind anterior hinge ear and running to a prominent posterodorsal corner where
a short transverse ridge abuts at a right angle; median ridge is narrow and sharp,
running from a prominent rounded SCT to the aforementioned transverse ridge;
ventral ridge has upturned anterior end and terminates posteriorly in a ventrally
projecting spur. There is a prominent AM ridge that runs from the eye-spot to
about three-quarters down the AM where it abruptly terminates. Surface orna-
mentation ranges from smooth with a few scattered pustules, to coarsely but in-
distinctly recticulate. All varieties bear three hollow pustules postadjacent to the
AM ridge.
Interior features. Not well seen, but hinge amphidont with large arches over
the TE in LV. Elements apparently smooth, but all specimens were badly worn.
MS in central pit, apparently V-shaped anterior scar and four adductors. MA
narrow, c. 15-16 RPC in anterior RV.
Remarks
In many aspects of general shape and ornamentation M. tritumida resem-
bles Sergipella transatlantica Kr6mmelbein, 1967, as illustrated by Grosdidier
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 169
(1979) from the late Aptian to early Albian of Gabon, and recorded from the
Albian Riachuelo Formation of eastern Brazil by Krémmelbein (1967, 1972).
The two species differ in the shape of their posteroventral regions, with S. trans-
atlantica having a sharp upswing to a centrally pointed PM outline.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6099 0,80 0,40
6100 0,90 0,46
GlOL WoW 0,38
Age and distribution
This species is known to range Aptian IV to Cenomanian III in the Mla-
mbongwenya Spruit (Aptian IV to Albian III) and Ndumu (Cenomanian II to
III) regions of Zululand.
Makatinella inflata sp. nov.
Figs 30E-F, 31A—C
Derivation of name
Latin inflata: reference to plump, inflated nature of carapace.
Holotype
SAM-PC6102, C, locality 153, Mzinene Formation, Mantuma Rest Camp,
Mkuze area, Albian III.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6103, C, as above.
SAM-PC6104, LV, as above.
SAM-PC6105, RV, as above.
SAM-PC6106, C, as above.
Diagnosis
Species with inflated aspect, subdued surface ornamentation, distinct down-
turned posteroventral margin.
Description
External features. Subquadrate lateral outline, AM broadly and asymmetri-
cally rounded. DM and VM straight with little or no convergence posteriorly.
PM asymmetric, ventrally deflected with short stubby spines. Anterior hinge ear
prominent, no AM rim. There are three longitudinal ridges: dorsal ridge is
slightly dorsally convex, has a downturned anterior end, and terminates at a
sharp right angle corner; median ridge starts at a large but indistinct SCT and
terminates directly below the termination of the dorsal ridge; and ventral ridge
170
is low and indistinct and is upturned at its posterior end. Valve surface smooth
except for indistinct nodes and pustules. In dorsal view carapace is arrowhead-
shaped.
Internal features. Not well preserved. MA moderate to narrow, 14-15 RPC
anteriorly. Hinge amphidont, all elements apparently smooth, but no unworn
specimens available. PTE in LV lies in an arched recess.
Remarks
M. inflata differs from the type species in lacking an AM ridge, in being
more inflated overall, in having less well-defined longitudinal ridges, and having
a less angular outline in dorsal view with maximum width over SCT, compared
to maximum width over the median ridge in the posterior third in M. tritumida.
Dimensions (mm)
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
Age and distribution
This species is known to range Aptian IV to Albian III in the Mkuze and
Mlambongwenya Spruit areas of northern Zululand.
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimens on the Makatini Flats, northern Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-PC6107, LV, locality 171-21, Mlambongwenya Spruit, Mzinene
ORiZ
0,69
O72
0,74
0,72
length height
0,40
0,34
ORs
0,36
Formation, Albian III.
Paratypes
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
width
0,37
Family Schulerideidae Mandelstam, 1959
Genus Pirileberis Grekoff, 1963
Pirileberis makatiniensis sp. nov.
Figs 31D-F, 32, 33A
SAM-PC6108, C, as above.
SAM-PC6109, RV, as above.
SAM-PC6110, RV, as above.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA IVA
Fig. 30. A-F. Makatinella, gen. nov. A-D. M. tritumida gen. et sp. nov., locality 171,
Mlambongwenya Spruit, Zululand. A. SAM-—PC6100, LV, bed 21, Albian IU.
B-D. SAM-PC6101, bed 1, Aptian IV. B. External lateral RV. D. Dorsal view.
C. SAM-PC6099, LV interior view, bed 1, Aptian IV. E-F. M. inflata gen. et sp. nov., locality
153, Mkuze, Zululand, Albian III. E. Holotype, SAM-PC6102, LV. F. SAM-PC6103, RV.
Scale bars = 100 py.
172 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 31. A-C. Makatinella inflata gen. et sp. nov., locality 153, Mkuze, Zululand, Albian III.
A. SAM-PC6104, LV internal view. B. SAM—PC6015, RV internal view. C. SAM—PC6106,
C, dorsal view. D-F. Pirileberis makatiniensis sp. nov., locality 171-21, Mlambongwenya
Spruit, Zululand, Albian III. D. Holotype, SAM-—PC6107, LV. E. SAM-PC6108, RV.
F. SAM-—PC6109, RV internal view.
Scale bars = 100w.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA iW
Diagnosis
Species with curved DM, weakly convex VM, and slightly ventrally de-
flected PM apex.
Description
External features. Plump ovate aspect in lateral view. AM broadly rounded,
DM convex, VM weakly convex, PM acutely rounded with apex directly slightly
ventrally. Highest point of valve at mid-length. Valve surface smooth.
Internal features. MA moderately wide, with numerous (c. 15) fine RPC an-
teriorly. Hinge merodont, gently curved: in RV ATE has five teeth, PTE has six
teeth, ME is a crenulate groove; in LV TE are sockets with ventral ledges, ME
is a curved denticulate bar and a narrow, overhung accommodation groove. MS
consist of a curved row of four rounded adductors and a large rounded anterior
scar (Fig. 32).
ti
a
Fig. 32. Muscle scars of Pirileberis ma-
katiniensis sp. nov., SAM-—PC6109, RV,
locality 171-21, Mlambongwenya Spruit,
Albian III.
Scale bar=30p.
Remarks
P. makatiniensis differs from the type species (P. progonata Grekoff, Kim-
meridgian to Valanginian of Madagascar) in having a straighter VM in lateral
view, its line of greatest length well below mid-height, and in its MS pattern,
which has the anterior scar in a more ventral position. P. makatiniensis differs
from P. mkuzensis sp. nov. in details of lateral outline, hinge structure, and
MA.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
GLO7 20353 O35
6108 0,52 37)
6109) > 20553 0,30
6L10 (0553 0,35
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Age and distribution
P. makatiniensis is known to range Aptian IV to Albian III (Makatini and
Mzinene formations) in the Mkuze (locality 150) and Mlambongwenya Spruit
(locality 171) areas of Zululand.
Pirileberis mkuzensis sp. nov.
Fig. 33B—-E
Derivation of name
Locality of type specimens in the Mkuze area, northern Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-PC6111, RV, locality 153, Mantuma rest camp, Mkuze Game Park,
Mzinene Formation, Albian III.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6112, LV, as above.
SAM-PC6113, C, as above.
SAM-PC6114, LV, as above.
Diagnosis
Species with subtriangular outline of LV in lateral view.
Description
External features. Asymmetrically rounded AM. DM and VM converge to-
ward small, bluntly rounded PM. DM is straight, VM gently convex. Highest
point of valve immediately anterior of mid-length. In LV lateral outline is sub-
triangular. Valve surface smooth.
Internal features. MA narrow, with about nine fine, indistinct anterior RPC
that are grouped in the lower half of margin along axis of greatest length. Hinge
merodont. In RV, ATE and PTE strong, of equal size, with six teeth; ATE in-
clined at angle to main hinge line. ME is a straight denticulate groove above
which lies a narrow bar. In LV structures are complementary, including a nar-
row accommodation groove. MS not seen.
Remarks
P. mkuzensis differs from the type species (P. progonata Grekoff) in pos-
sessing a straighter VM, particularly in LV, and fewer RPC (9 cf. 20-24). It can
be distinguished from P. makatiniensis sp. nov. on details of lateral outline,
hingement, and number of RPC.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA WS
Fig. 33. A. Pirileberis makatiniensis sp. nov., SAM-PC6110, LV, interior view, locality
171-21, Mlambongwenya Spruit, Zululand, Albian III. B-E. Pirileberis mkuzensis sp. nov.,
locality 153, Mkuze, Zululand, Albian III. B. SAM-PC6112, LV. C. SAM-—PC6113, RV.
D. SAM-PC6114, LV internal view. E. Holotype, SAM-PC6111, RV, internal view.
F. Asciocythere? dubia sp. nov., SAM-PC6116, LV, DSDP 330, core I/cc, early—middle
Albian.
Scale bars = 100.
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6111 0,64 0,34
Oli O67 0,41
6113 0,69 0,40
6114 0,65 ().35
Age and distribution
P. mkuzensis 1s known to range Aptian IV to Albian III (Mkatini and Mzi-
nene formations), in the Mkuze area of Zululand (localities 150 and 153).
Genus Asciocythere Swain, 1952
Asciocythere? dubia sp. nov.
Figs 33F, 34A—B
Derivation of name
Latin dubia, uncertain: reference to uncertain taxonomic status.
Holotype
SAM-PC6115, RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—middle Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6116, LV, as above.
SAM-PC6117, LV, as above.
Diagnosis
Smooth species with elliptical LV, more elongate RV, hinge modified hemi-
merodont.
Description
External features. LV larger than RV. LV elliptical with round AM and nar-
row rounded PM, DM and VM strongly convex, outline tapering posteriorly.
Highest point of valve in front of mid-length, maximum length at about mid-
height. RV more elongate than LV, with straight VM, convex DM. Surface en-
tirely smooth. No eye-spots.
Internal features. Narrow MA. MS not seen. Hinge modified hemimero-
dont: in RV small elongate weakly crenulate TE project dorsally, ME is a
smooth, straight bar with a narrow accommodation groove; in LV TE are nar-
row sockets under the DM with an ME depression and DM overhang.
Remarks
This species is tentatively placed in the genus Asciocythere on the grounds
of general shape and hinge, although in detail it is not very close to any species
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA La
so far assigned to the genus. The type species A. rotunda (Vanderpool 1928) has
a similar lateral outline to A? dubia but is less elliptical and has a conventional
hemimerodont hinge.
Asciocythere is a typical Upper Jurassic to mid-Cretaceous taxon from
North America (see Swain 1972; Neale 1977), and Swain (1976) has recorded an
Asciocythere sp. from DSDP site 137 (core 11—1/86—-92 cm) off north-western
Africa in ?Cenomanian strata. The latter is a punctate species with a weakly
convex VM. Damotte (1979) records Asciocythere sp. 68 from the Aptian of
DSDP 400A (core 68—1/72-73 cm) in the north-western Bay of Biscay, but her
specimen has a more strongly arched LV DM and lacks the upswept posteroven-
tral outline of A? dubia.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
Ollils Osi 0,26
6116 0,41 OP2Z
6117 ~=—0,41 23
Age and distribution
A? dubia is known only from the early—middle Albian at DSDP site 330
(core 1/cc), where it is rare (c. 3%).
Family uncertain
Aitkenicythere Bate, 1976
Aitkenicythere? striosulcata sp. nov.
Fig. 34C—F
Derivation of name
Latin striatus (striation) + sulcus (sulcus): reference to striate ornamenta-
tion and prominent dorsomedian sulcus.
Holotype
SAM-PC6119, RV, DSDP 327, core 21—3/71-76 cm, early Albian.
Paratypes
SAM-PC6118, LV, DSDP 327, core 21-3/71-76 cm, early Albian.
SAM-PC6120, RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early—-middle Albian.
Diagnosis
Species with fine longitudinal ribs and a prominent dorsomedian sulcus.
Description
External features. Elongate subquadrate in lateral view. AM broadly and
symmetrically rounded, typically with a border frill, PM RV asymmetrically acu-
minate with maximum length below mid-height, PM LV truncated with weak
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
posteroventral extension. DM straight, but with small prominent concavity
about mid-length, VM straight in LV, slightly concave in RV. DM and VM con-
verge posteriorly. Surface ornamented with fine, broken, longitudinal ribs and
weak intercostal muri that produces reticulation. There is a dominant median rib
that runs from near the AM across the mid-point of the valve, posterior of which
it rises and has a dorsally convex hook. There are numerous wide, well-spaced
pustulate normal pore openings on the lateral surface. In the dorsal and median
part of the valve there is a low sulcus across which median ribs are deflected and
converge. A further prominent rib runs obliquely across the anterior CA.
Internal features. MA wide, apparently no vestibules and few (?five)
anterior RPC. Hinge lophodont with long straight ME bar in LV with two deep
rounded TE sockets that are partly enclosed by the duplicature. Posteroventral
MA of RV is apparently wider than corresponding structure in LV. NPC
Openings are prominent.
Remarks
Position within genus is provisional. A? striosulcata compares favourably
with the type species A. gracilis (Bate, 1975), but is not so slim in dorsal view,
and has a slightly different ornamentation.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6110 0,42 Ow?
6119 0,42 22
6120 0,33 O).17/
Age and distribution
A? striosulcata ranges early—middle Albian at DSDP site 330 (core 1-1/cc to
112-116 cm) and early Albian at DSDP site 327 (core 21-3/71-76 cm), where it
is rare (3-5 % at 330) to abundant (31% at 327).
Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18
Fig. 35A
Acrocythere? sp. A Oertli, 1974: 949, pl. 7 (fig. 6).
Remarks
One carapace of a small cytheracean with three prominent blade-like longi-
tudinal ridges, the dorsal of which is continuous with the AM ridge. Although
no internal views are available, this specimen appears close to Aitkenicythere
gracilis (Bate, 1975), and it possibly belongs to the same species as a specimen
identified as Acrocythere? sp. A by Oertli from DSDP site 261 off north-western
Australia.
The specimen differs from the type species of Aitkenicythere by being less
laterally compressed and by possessing an AM ridge.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 179
Fig. 34. A-B. Asciocythere? dubia sp. nov., DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
A. Holotype, SAM-PC6115, RV internal view. B. SAM-PC6117, LV internal view.
C-F. Aitkenicythere? striosulcata sp. nov. C-D. DSDP 327, core 21-3/71-76 cm, early
Albian. C. Holotype, SAM-PC6119, LV. D. SAM-PC6118, RV. E-F. SAM-PC6120, RV,
DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian. E. Internal view. F. External lateral view.
Scale bars: A-E= 100m, F=30w.
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Dimensions (mm)
length height
6121 0.37 0,18
Holotype of Aitkenicythere gracilis (Bate, 1975) 0,41 O21
Acrocythere? sp. A Oertli 1974 0,41 0,21
Age and distribution
Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18 occurs at one level in the middle Albian of DSDP
327 (core 18—2/51-55 cm) on the Falkland Plateau.
Acrocythere? sp. A Oertli occurs in an Upper Oxfordian horizon in DSDP
261 (core 33-1/0-20 cm) off north-western Australia.
Aitkenicythere gracilis (Bate, 1975) (type species) occurs in the Middle or
Upper Kimmeridgian (samples B219 & B223) of the Mandawa anticline,
Tanzania.
Indet. sp. 1
Fig. 35B
Remarks
One carapace of a distinctly shaped and ornamented species. Overail
the carapace is plump, with a sharply upswinging posteroventral margin. PM
apex is above mid-height. The ornamentation consists of narrow vertical ridges
arranged concentrically about the mid-length.
Bertels (1969) has described a species with similar ornamentation and shape
from the Lower Maastrichtian of Argentina (Semicytherura? similis).
Age and distribution
Aptian III, Makatini Formation, locality 150-11, northern side of Nhlohlela
Pan, Mkuze area, northern Zululand.
Indet. sp. 2
jay, SIC
Remarks
One poorly preserved carapace showing faint longitudinal lineations along
the ventromedian surface. Shape and ornamentation reminiscent of Progonocy-
there reticulata Dingle (in Dingle & Klinger 1972) from the ?Portlandian to Va-
langinian of the southern Cape coast (see McLachlan et al. 1976b).
Age and distribution
Aptian IV, Makatini Formation, locality 150-21, northern side of Nhlohlela
Pan, Mkuze area, northern Zululand.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 181
ices 35) A. Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18, SAM-PC6121, RV, DSDP 327, core
18-2/51-55 cm, middle Albian. B. Indet. sp. 1, SAM-PC6122, LC, locality 150-11, Mkuze,
Zululand, Aptian III. C. Indet. sp. 2, SAM-—PC6123, LV, locality 150-21, Mkuze, Zululand,
Aptian IV. D. Indet. sp. 327/16A, LV, DSDP 327, core 16—4/66-70 cm, middle Albian.
E-F. Indet. sp. 330/1, SAM-PC6124, RV, DSDP 330, core 1/cc, early-middle Albian.
E. External lateral view. F. Internal view.
Scale bars = 100 pu.
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Indet. sp. 330/1
Fig. 35E-F
Remarks
Two valves of a small, heavily ornamented species with an overall lepto-
cytherid appearance. It has wide MA and a lophodont hinge, a prominent ridge
along the DM, and a rib that is continuous round the AM and VM. NPC are
conspicuous.
Age and distribution
Occurs in the early-middle Albian of DSDP 330 (core 1/cc).
Indet. sp. 327/16A
Fig. 35D
Remarks
Single valve, probably juvenile of a blind trachyleberid-like species. Salient
features include small median sulcus, inflated posteroventral area, small, flat
spine on dorsal part of posterior margin, reticulate, hirsute ornamentation, lo-
phodont hinge. MS consist of V-shaped anterior scar and vertical row of four
posterior scars.
Age and distribution
Occurs in the middle Albian of DSDP 327 (core 16—4/66—70 cm).
Indet. sp. 327/16B
Fig. 36A—B
Remarks
Shape reminiscent of neocytherid taxa with reticulate ornamentation. The
hinge is lophodont with long narrow TE.
Age and distribution
Occurs in the middle Albian of DSDP site 327 (core 16—4/66—70 cm).
Indet. sp. 327/18
Figa50€
Remarks
Small species with a strongly arched DM, straight VM, acuminate PM, and
rounded AM. No internal views seen.
Age and distribution
Occurs in the middle Albian of DSDP site 327 (core 18—2/51-55 cm).
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 183
Fig. 36. A-B. Indet. sp. 327/16B, DSDP 327, core 16~-4/68-70 cm, middle Albian.
A. SAM-PC6127, RV. B. SAM-PC6126, LV internal view. CC. Indet. sp. 327/18,
SAM-PC6128, RV, DSDP 327, core 18-2/51-55 cm, middle Albian.
Scale bars: A-B = 100, C=30w.
DISCUSSION
All the ostracods encountered were benthic types, and 51 species belonging
to 26 genera (with 6 species unallocated) were identified from the Aptian to Ce-
nomanian strata of south-east Africa (Agulhas Bank and Zululand) and the
Falkland Plateau (DSDP sites 327 and 330). In this section the faunas and their
palaeoecological and biostratigraphical implications will be discussed, followed
by a regional assessment of their distribution in the light of mid-Cretaceous
palaeogeographic reconstructions of this part of Gondwanaland.
FALKLAND PLATEAU
Altogether 28 species belonging to 16 genera (with 4 species unallocated)
have been recorded from the two DSDP sites on the east Falkland Plateau: site
327 (20 species, 14 genera); site 330 (17 species, 13 genera). Their vertical distri-
bution and relative abundances are shown in Table 6.
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Palaeoecology
Although a relatively rich fauna was obtained from DSDP site 330, only
three samples contained specimens, and their limited vertical distribution
(early-middle Albian, Fig. 4) makes the determination of palaeoecological
trends uncertain. In contrast, the nine fossiliferous samples from site 327 span
early to late Albian time (Fig. 4), and allow some preliminary palaeoeocological
determinations to be attempted for comparison with those already available
from Sliter (1977) and Scheibnerova (1981).
Figure 37 and Table 6 show various statistical data on species and higher
taxal trends from DSDP 327. Throughout the section the populations are domi-
nated by Robsoniella falklandensis (37-56% of total fauna), which is usually at
least twice as abundant as the next most common type. Three species alternate
in this secondary role: Jsocythereis sealensis (0O-10%); Cytherella bensoni
(7-19 %); and Arculicythere tumida (1-18 %). The taxonomic position of Robso-
niella is uncertain and, although it was originally placed in the family Healdiidae
by Kusnetsova (in Mandelstam et al. 1956), the Treatise authors on ostracods
(Moore 1961) were not happy about the situation. We have placed it in the Bair-
diidae because of, inter alia, its similarity to Bythocypris richardsbayensis from
the Upper Cretaceous of South Africa. Bairdoppilata sp. 2, the only other rep-
resentative of the family, is locally fairly common, but does not occur consist-
ently throughout the borehole.
Considering the various populations in terms of a Cytheracea—Cytherel-
lidae—Bairdiacea + Cypridacea (CCBC) triangular diagram (Fig. 38) all, with the
exception of one, lie in the 200-100 m water-depth field of the predictive CCBC
plot of Dingle (1981, fig. 75). The exception (core 16—4/66—70 cm, sample 7) lies
in the field predicted for water depths greater than 500 m. Dingle (1980, 1981)
constructed this diagram from ostracod populations collected mainly from Zulu-
land and, in terms of the assemblages originally plotted, all the Falkland Plateau
populations lie outside them, or in one case (core 21—4/130-134 cm, sample 1)
just inside the border (of assemblage 4a).
Figure 37 shows that the relative abundances of the three groups repre-
sented on the CCBC plot remain fairly constant up the borehole, suggesting that
the overall sedimentary environment remained similar during the entire early to
late Albian period represented by cores 21 to 15. This conclusion is in broad
Fig. 37. Variations in selected components of the Albian ostracod populations at DSDP site
327 on the Falkland Plateau. a—higher taxa used in the Cytheracea, Cytherellidae, Bairdiacea
+ Cypridacea (CCBC) triangular diagram (Fig. 38) plotted as percentage of total ostracod
population; b—four important genera plotted as percentage of total ostracod population;
c—the subfamilies Cytherurinae and Trachyleberidinae (the genus /socythereis) plotted as per-
centage of Cytheracea; d—micro-ostracods (see Table 6 for species) plotted as percentage of
total ostracod population. The vertical scales on a—d are percentages, and values are smoothed
using a three-point running mean; e—shows temporal distribution of minor species, numbered
according to Table 5. Species with stars are also found at DSDP site 330. The horizontal scale is
by core and informal sample number (see Table 6).
60
40
20
60
40
20
40
20
20
10
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA
DSDP 327
ALBIAN
~as” aw 2
TN ev theraces a
--—Cytherellidae
-.__»._ Robsoniella
SF" = a b
oo
1
Arculicythere Pie
| Cytherella
Roe oS
Oe ee oe fe cee pemee eo, Brae
—Isocythereis
Cytherurinae
Trachyleberidinae Cc
micro-ostracods
32 E.stellifera
44 A?striosulcata#¥
16 I.sealensis ¥
45 C? oertlii
40 C.bispinosa*¥
41 C.sp 327/18
—— 50 Indet sp 327/18 e
—— 43 A?sp 327/18
—- 26 P? cf dinglei
38 C? stanleyensis
25 RP batei
33 H.(P) barkeri*
49 Indet sp 327/16A
51 Indet sp 327/16B
29 P. liebaui *
185
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
186
€ piqnp jadayiad01sy
if MasUuayjvyo “HY
Z SISUaBUIMa VapldaYyIArvAVdIWUAaT]
ic ayd0q (‘d) ‘H
I yaizpp (‘d) ‘H
€ DIDINIYAA
(Djjakomsuluayvivd) "H
wi I psosnd vandayAon”
uw |———[ sisuapun]yjof asayiAoIpad
wi $$$ $$$ —____—_—-¢ 0I———I psouidsiq uosajdosayiXy
I———— InDgal] DUIDAIIIAD
CCS ea os Seqrae seeps luosuaq wyja4ayiKy
Ty se ech ee ee OE C Cremer Ol eeeeeeal sisuapun]y]vf vjJaiUosqoy
Oe > ae ee oS VC aemaren mmeree Dpiuing a4aysAoyNnrAy
€ 1a]Dq DANABYIAIOL
* * * * * *
co
OG
‘ou o[duies [ewWIOJU]
(Wd) [BAIOJU]
6
Oe! OCT
Sel || =e
9 C I 4 9 (6 C )
vl SI eI
uonoes
‘OU 9109
fil ST
woud) | uriqry URIq;Y S[Ppru uUrIqhy urIqIy 53
210] Ajaeo o]pprui—Ay1e9 My
LZ Oe ‘ou ous ddqsd
‘uonejndod pooer.jso [e10} JO sodejusoJod o1e ULUN]OS Yoed UI SIOqUINN
neayeld PUepAey ‘OE WP LZE Sous AGS JO sjuouIpas ueIqry Ul spooR.so Jo UONNgISIG
9 ATAV I],
187
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA
(WI Cp‘Q>) pooeijso-o1DIW = WI
SO}IS YIOQ 0} UOWWIOD satloods =
(ic) & = O€E/LZE UOUIUIOD ‘ON
yl = Spooeriso-o19IU Jo saisads Jo ‘ou [RO],
(12101 %9€) OL = O€E/LZE UOUTLIOD ‘ON
8Z = soldeds Jo ‘ou [R10],
0 9 8 iE O1 8 O1 9 9 € (spooesjso e101) yue}xo ‘dds ‘on
0 8 € Gi o 0 Cl ¢ 6€ 0 SPOdPI}SO [BJO] % :SOdRI}SO-OIDIPA]
0 G ll € I 0 € I G 0 ajdures/'dds ‘on :spooesjso-o191j
07 oyis/'dds ‘oN
0 El OT L7 97 IZ Ce val OV II (% ‘soatea QOT/'dds ‘on) Aqtsroatq
0 9 ¢ 6 8 € [E ¢ 9 Vv ajdures/‘dds ‘on
0 8V Go ct Te vl ce [ete tall ae SOA[BA POSPIISO “ON
Sc a0) am ma ame Cc aa eames 6 Saute varie abet G (s}uowseIy
SNOLIvA) SoIsods “jopuyT
9 AOL/LZE “WOpuy| IS
£ VOL/LZE “1°PUL| «GP
wi (6 € sisuakajuvjs (S1IAOGADSI]JOD SE
€ 1aj)suip ‘Jo DANAIYIAIOAT 97
€ OL/LZE cvjjavéunlopy | 1
€ 8T/Lze ds yepuy| 0s
wu 9 8T/LzE “ds gasaysdouayyy | €h
ul € € QT/Lze ‘ds uosajdosaysk | Th
Ww C ¢ 11]J490 (vansayyaD CV
Ww 8 p1af1yja1s DANAIYJAIN| cE
* === = es | ores [2 f 7 SISUa]DAS S1IadaYyIAIOST 91
j {pS 6———z Zz ‘ds njopiddopawg | 1
=i]
2
a,
TABLE 6
Distribution of ostracods in Albian sediments of DSDP sites 327 & 330, Falkland Plateau
Numbers in each column are percentages of total ostracod population.
DSDP site no.
early—middle early late
es Albian Albian middle Albian Albian | Cenom
Core no.
section
Interval (cm) 122- 112- | 130- Ts 106- ab 108- 126- 66— a
oe a ae a = 130 70
Informal sample no. 6 yk =
25 | Procytherura batei 18 *
15 | Arculicythere tumida 22——8— 22. 29. 3—______________35 .
9 | Robsoniella falklandensis 70—15———_38——_59-———__50-—__61—__42—63 38 ‘
1 | Cytherella bensoni 5 15——22-———_______——_23—_6____ | 98 =:
29 | Pariceratina liebaui 3 :
40 | Cytheropteron bispinosa 3— 6- 3 *m
30 | Pedicythere falklandensis m
31 | Eucytherura rugosa m
35 | H. (Parahemingwayella)
reticulata m
34 |H. (P.) dalzieli m
33 | H. (P.) barkeri 3 *m
36 | Hemiparacytheridea ewingensis m
37 ‘| H. challengeri m
39 | Asciocythere? dubia
44 | Aitkenicythere? striosulcata 31 *m
48 | Indet. sp. 330/1
7 | Bairdoppilata sp. 2 3——22. 3—______—_3 is
16 | Isocythereis sealensis 11 14——_ 3_____3—_____9 10 is
32 | Eucytherura stellifera 8 m
45 | Cytherura? oertlii 5 2 m
41 | Cytheropteron sp. 327/18 3—_____—_3 m
43 | Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18 6 m
50 | Indet. sp 327/18 3
14 | Majungaella? 327/16 3
26 | Procytherura cf. dinglei 3
38 | Collisarboris? stanleyensis ———— eT) m
49 | Indet. 327/16A 3
51 | Indet. 327/16B 6
Indet. species (various
fragments) | es
No. ostracod valves
No. spp./sample
Diversity (No. spp./100 valves, %)
~
Ww
oo
\o
wm
a
coco
No. spp./site 20
Micro-ostracods: No. spp./sample 3 0 1 3 1 2 0
Micro-ostracos: % total ostracods 15 0 3 12 3 8 0
No. spp. extant (total ostracods) 8 6 0
Total no. of species = 28
No. common 327/330 = 10 (36% total)
Total no. of species of micro-ostracods =
14
No. common 327/330 3(
*
21%)
= species common to both sites
m = micro-ostracod (<0,45 mm)
98T
WAaSAW NVOIdAV HLNOS AHL dO STIVNNV
YdOoVuLso SNOFOV.LAYO-dIN
L81
CYTHERACEA
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM |
|
!
|
ZULULAND
@—>_—«—«— smooothed
v—-> raw
4
ek
LON
BAIRDIACEA & CYTHERELLIDAE
CYPRIDACEA
Fig. 38. Triangular (CCBC) plot of the mid-Cretaceous ostracod populations from the Falkland
Plateau and Zululand. The DSDP samples are numbered using the informal system shown in
Table 6 and are plotted smoothed (3 point means). Populations from site 327 are enclosed by a
thick dashed line, and samples containing Bairdoppilata sp. 2 are enclosed by a dotted line.
Samples from DSDP 330 are plotted as stars: *1 is sample 1, and *2 is a composite population
from samples 1 and 2. Samples from Zululand are composites from stage subdivisions and are
plotted both smoothed (3 point means), and raw. The 100 m predictive water depth line is
taken from Dingle (1982, fig. 75). See text for a discussion of the trends.
Abbreviations: AP—Aptian; AL—Albian; C—Cenomanian.
agreement with that reached by Barker et al. (1977), and Sliter (1977) on studies
of the planktonic foraminifera, which predicted water depths of 100-400 m from
the Albian sequence (Barker e/ al. 1977: 44, fig. 7). Sliter (1977: 524) detected a
slight reduction in benthic foraminifera numbers up the borehole (cores 21 to
15), which he interpreted as a gradually increasing water depth, as well as an
increase in the numbers of planktonic foraminifera from their incoming (few
specimens) in core 19, to 35 per cent of total biogenic debris at the base of core
16, with a further rise, after fluctuation to 45 per cent in core 15. Planktonic—
benthic foraminiferal ratios calculated from Sliter’s (1977) data (Fig. 39) indicate
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 189
an erratic increase from core 19 (c. 0,5, middle Albian) to core 15 (3,46, late Al-
bian). Above this (Cenomanian and Santonian), planktonic foraminifera are
very sparse or absent before rising to values of greater than 9,0 in the Cam-
panian—Maastrichtian, which Sliter interprets as representing water depths of
1 500-2 500 m.
Figure 39 shows the planktonic—benthic ratio curve (a) plotted against vari-
ous trends of the ostracod populations. Planktonic foraminifera appear in core
19 and there are three peaks in the curve above this point. In comparison, the
curve of cytheracean ostracods (b) (as percentage of total fauna) shows four
high points, and two of these are in, and two out of phase with the foraminiferal
peaks. Each of the cytheracean peaks can be related to the dominance of par-
ticular higher taxa: the earliest (core 21) is caused by relatively large numbers of
micro-ostracods (c) and lies below the level of the appearance of planktonic for-
aminifera; the second (core 17) lies between two peaks in the planktonic—ben-
thic curve and is related to the large numbers of Isocythereis sealensis and
Arculicythere tumida present at this level (d, e). A peak in the curve for the
micro-ostracod distribution does coincide with the first foraminifera peak in core
18, and similarly in core 16 where the numbers of micro-ostracods involved is
large enough to result in a peak in the cytheracean curve. At this level there is a
low in the values for both Isocythereis sealensis and Arculicythere tumida. In
core 15, the cytheracean peak, which coincides with a peak in the P/B curve, is
caused by reinforcement of curves (c), (d), and (e). It appears, therefore, that
fluctuations in the percentage of the cytheracean element were caused by alter-
nation in the numbers of micro-ostracods (mostly cytherurids) and combined
trachyleberids and progonocytherids, and that neither were consistently in step
with increases in the relative numbers of planktonic foraminifera. Consequently,
the latter are more likely to reflect changes in degree of access to the open ocean
than significant alternations of local sea-level.
Scheibnerova (1981) studied the Albian benthic foraminfera of site 327 and
found a relatively rich assemblage of agglutinated and calcareous benthic forms
(Table 7), which indicated to her a water depth in the vicinity of 100 m (not ex-
ceeding 300—400 m).
The results of plotting the ostracod data from site 330 on to the CCBC dia-
gram (Fig. 38) suggest shallow-water environments in both cases, with the oldest
sample (core 2—2/122-126 cm) lying close to the cluster from site 327, and prob-
ably representing somewhat shallower water (c. 100 m). A mean value for the
two samples in core 1 places it within the shallow water (less than 100 m) field of
the cytheracean-dominated populations. Although too few samples are available
from site 330 for a reliable estimate of palaeoenvironments to be made, the evi-
dence does point to deposition under similar conditions to those that prevailed
at the same time (early—-middle Albian) at site 327 (c. 10 km to the south-west).
Micro-ostracods (< 0,45 mm) (Table 6) are both diverse and relatively
abundant in the mid-Cretaceous at site 327 (and 330), and show variations along
the length of the hole that may have palaeoenvironmental significance. They are
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
190
‘BUNLJ POSPI}SO [e}0} JO ose}UDIIOd se DPN] asayIKoIINIAW JO SUSU
-1oads Jo IoquUINNN—9 ‘eUNe} Podes}soO [e10} Jo dseUD.IOd se sisuajvas Sia4ayJADOS]T JO SUSUMIDOdS JO IOQUINNN—P “JUSATA URddeIOYIAD Jo a8e}UDOIOd se
suoWIOads podesISO-OIDIUI JO IOQUINN}H—d “98e}UIIOd & SI PUR SIOJOI B[ROS [eJUOZIIOY 19]NO “eUNL] poOdes}so [e}0} JO ad9eJUD0IOd se suowIdads URDDRIOY)
-Ad JO Jaquinu :saysuer prjos ‘dds ‘ou st pue sioyor ayes [eJUOZIIOY IOUUT ‘JUL}X9 So1dods pooeIjsO Jo Joquinu :sosenbs uadQ—q ‘asejUSdI0Od B sI pue
SIOJOI a[eOs [eJUOZIIOY 19jnO ‘(suowtoeds Qo, od ‘dds ou) AyIsisatp UONe{ndod pooeNso :sajsuei UsdO ‘oONeI e& SI puke SIOJoI a]eOS [e}UOZIIOY IdUUT
“SOUI] POYSepP SP WIRISeIP JOYM 94} SsOIOe UNI IAIN sy} UI syeod s0I4} OUT ‘(ZL61) JOU[S Ul UOAIS eJep WOIJ poyepNofed ONeI eIOJIUTUILIOJ STyJUDQ
jotuoyyueyd :s30oqQ—e ‘(UOT}e[IIIOD UOT}D9S 9109 IOJ 9 BIGe I, 99S) sIOqUINU odes [eWIOJUT PUL 9109 SMOYS UUINIOD Jo] PUR *SOIJOU UT SI aTeOS [COTO A,
“LZE SUS TASC JO BLISS UPIQIY 94} Ul SJUDWIO]S [eEUNLJOIOIW SNOLIVA JO UOTINGIISIG “6¢ ‘314
0S 0
To 0 bb 0 OL 0 a
0G my tt td a er a a a OL 0
suvaseiay}AD—
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 191
TABLE 7
Characteristic benthic foraminifera from cores 26 to 16 at DSDP site 327 (after Scheibnerova
1981).
Discorbis sp.
Pseudopatellinella howchini
Osangularia utaturensis
Anomalina indica
Gavelinella intermedia
Lingulogavelinella sp.
L. frankei africana
Orithostella indica
Pseudolamarckina sp.
Reinholdella claytonensis
Hoeglundina australiensis
Rotaliatina asiatica**
Hergottella jonesi**
** only in cores 20 to 16.
mostly small species belonging to the subfamily Cytherurinae (Cytherura, Eucy-
therura, Cytheropteron, Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella), Hemiparacytheri-
dea, Pedicythere) (Table 8) but others (Collisarboris? and Aitkenicythere?)
belong to different higher taxa, and Figures 37c—d and 39(c) express these trends
as: Cytherurinae as percentage of cytheraceans; micro-ostracods as percentage
of total ostracods; and micro-ostracods as percentage of cytheraceans, respecti-
vely. From Figure 37 it can be seen that micro-ostracods constitute an important
component of the total ostracod population in the lower parts of the sequence
(c. 15-20%), but that higher up they are less numerous (c. 5-10%). A similar
trend is shown in Figure 39, where the percentage of the cytheracean component
shows erratic high and low values (0-65 %) below core 16, and steadier values of
25 % or less higher up. This suggest that in cores 21-17 palaeoenvironments con-
ducive to micro-ostracod colonization fluctuated from highly suitable to com-
pletely unsuitable, whereas in cores 16-15 conditions were moderately suitable.
The smoothed Cytherurinae curve (Fig. 37c) shows that the consistently most
suitable conditions occurred during the deposition of core 16. We suggest that
these trends could indicate an early period (early—middle Albian) during which
palaeoenvironments fluctuated from ‘hostile’ (possibly restricted circulation, or
even mildly anoxic, i.e. no micro-ostracods) to ‘somewhat hostile’ (abundant
micro-ostracods), and that these passed upwards (middle-late Albian) into pa-
laeoenvironments that were more suitable to other cytheraceans (such as Isocy-
thereis) and supported only small micro-ostracod populations. Such fluctuations
may have been affected by changing palaeogeographies and incursions of water
from the isolated South Atlantic basin where Bolli et al. (1978) reported dwart
molluscs and sparse arenaceous foraminiferal faunas of Lower to Middle Albian
age in the deep-water Cape Basin to the north of the Falkland Plateau.
To summarize, it is postulated that the ostracod populations of samples 2 to
6 (cores 21 to 16, which coincide with the occurrence of Bairdoppilata sp. 2)
were deposited in water depths of about 200 m, with sample 1 (base of core 21,
192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 8
Distribution of Cytheruridae in the Falkland Plateau DSDP 327 and 330 samples
(% total ostracods)
DSDP site nos. 330 327
Informal samples nos. eA SS a IOAN Smee eS Gr Ss] @
Cytherura? oertlii 5=—_—__________—————_2) m
Eucytherura rugosa 1 m
E. stellifera 8 m
Procytherura cf. dinglei 3
P. batei 3) 18
Cytheropteron bispinosa 13—10 3——————_6——3 m
Indet. sp. 327/18(?) 3
H. (Parahemingwayella)
barkeri 5 3) m
H. (P.) dalzieli 10—6 m
H. (P.) reticulata 3——1 m
Hemiparacytheridea
ewingensis D m
H. challengeri 1 m
Pedicythere falklandensis 1——1 m
% total ostracods 3 34) 18 |= 8 > 6 = 38°27 aw
% cytheraceans (raw) 7 44 41);— 13 26 16 — 20 69 20 4
% cytheraceans (smooth) i. 13" 18s" 14-127 30) 36S a
m = micro-ostracods
(?) = taxonomic position in family uncertain
early Albian) probably in somewhat shallower water (100-200 m), and sample 7
(middle of core 16, top part of middle Albian) possibly somewhat deeper water
(?500 m). Samples 8 and 9 (uppermost middle Albian and late Albian) suggest a
return to water depths of about 200 m. Restricted bottom circulation (possibly
accompanied by mildly anoxic conditions) may have occurred at the levels of
samples 1 to 5 (bottom part of the middle Albian). The energy of sedimentary
environments was low throughout the Albian section.
Biostratigraphy
Figure 37 and Tables 6 and 9 show the vertical distribution of Albian ostra-
cod species at DSDP sites 327 and 330. Because of the limited range covered by
the samples from 330, the distribution of the eight species restricted to it cannot
be assessed: Pedicythere falklandensis, Eucytherura rugosa, H. (Paraheming-
wayella) dalzieli, H. (P.) reticulata, Hemiparacytheridea ewingensis, H. challen-
geri, Asciocythere? dubia, and indet. sp. 330/1.
At site 327, the nine fossiliferous samples available probably cover most of
the Albian and, despite the small numbers of specimens recovered, certain
trends are evident. Because of the relatively large numbers of Robsoniella falk-
landensis, the early to late Albian ostracod populations of site 327 are bair-
diacian-dominant. The cytheracean element, on the other hand, is quite diverse
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 193
(fourteen genera, twenty-one species) although certain taxa (e.g. Arculicythere
tumida, and Isocythereis sealensis) locally constitute up to 30% of this compon-
ent.
Within the Cytheracea various higher taxa are unevenly distributed both in
time and in lower taxonomic categories. The Cytherurinae show the greatest di-
versity (seven genera and thirteen species), and locally are numerically domi-
nant, whereas the Trachyleberidinae is represented by one species only
(Isocythereis sealensis), and the Progonocytheridae by two species (Majungaella?
sp. 327/16 and Arculicythere tumida).
The diversity, local abundance, and small size of representatives of the
subfamily Cytherurinae is one of the characteristics of the Albian strata of
sites 327 and 330, particularly the dominance of micro-ostracods (c. 0,45 mm
or less in length) (Table 8). This is particularly so at site 330 (core 1/cc) and
site 327 (core 21-3), where 38% and 39%, respectively of the total ostracod
population falls into this category. Some of the species occur at one horizon
only, while others are found at several levels, where they locally make up a
disproportionately large percentage of the total ostracod fauna: Altkeni-
cythere? striosulcata—31% in 327:21-3; Cytheropteron bispinosa—13% in
330: 1/cc; and Hemingwayella (Parahemingwayella) dalzieli—10% in 330: 1/cc.
Despite the diversity of the micro-ostracods (11 out of 14 species belong to
the Cytherurinae), with 9 species in 330 and 8 species in 327, only 3 species
from a total of 14 (i.e. 21%) are common to both sites. Similarly, from the 8
genera involved, only 4 are common to the two sites, with Pedicythere and
Hemiparacytheridea restricted to site 330, and Collisarboris? and Cytherura? re-
stricted to site 327. All four of the last-named genera are widely distributed in
the Northern Hemisphere, as well as Australia, so their restriction to either of
the DSDP sites must be the result of chance sampling or subtle palaeoenviron-
mental differences.
The essential biostratigraphic features of the Albian ostracod fauna at site
327 can be summarized:
1. Numerous species of locally short-ranging, but frequently abundant
micro-ostracods (overwhelmingly cytherurids).
2. Four long-ranging, numerically abundant species, three of which are
widely distributed in mid-Cretaceous Gondwanide sediments: Arculicythere tu-
mida, Isocythereis sealensis, Robsoniella falklandensis, and Cytherella bensoni.
The first two in this list will probably turn out to be useful age diagnostic taxa,
and further comment will be made when a comparison is made between the vari-
ous regions under review. :
A breakdown of the temporal distribution of the minor taxa is summarized
in Figure 37 and Table 9. These show that two species are restricted to the early
Albian, and eleven to the middle Albian, with the remainder ranging middle to
late, and early to middle Albian. These ranges cannot be absolute, however, be-
cause, for example Cytheropteron bispinosa (middle Albian) occurs in core 1 at
site 330, as does Aitkenicythere? striosulcata (early Albian only at 327). In this
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
category, two species only are known from another area of Gondwanaland, Ait-
kenicythere? sp. 327/18 and Cytherura? oertlii, both of which occur off north-
western Australia.
TABLE 9
Ranges of ostracods in DSDP 327.
Restricted to:
late Albian — none
middle Albian — Majungaella? 327/16 (14)
Procytherura batei (25)
P. cf. dinglei (26)
Pariceratina liebaui (29)
H. (Parahemingwayella) barkeri (33)
Cytheropteron bispinosa (40)
CE; SO. S2UNG (41)
Aitkenicythere? sp. 327/18 (43)
Indet. sp. 327/16A (49)
Indet. sp. 327/18 (50)
Indet. sp. 327/16B (51)
early Albian — Eucytherura stellifera (32)
Aitkenicythere? striosulcata (44)
middle to late Albian — Isocythereis sealensis (16)
Collisarboris? stanleyensis (38)
Cytherura? oertlii (45)
early to middle Albian — Bairdoppilata sp. 2 (7)
Numbers in right-hand column refer to species numbers in Table 5.
SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
Twenty-five species belonging to sixteen genera (with two species un-
allocated) have been recorded from the Aptian to Cenomanian strata of south-
east Africa. The bulk of these (nineteen species in thirteen genera) are from the
Zululand area, where relatively large numbers of specimens were collected from
rocks that range in age from Aptian to Cenomanian. Collections from the Oute-
niqua Basin consist of two samples only (TBD 1113 and 1266), which probably
have a range restricted to Upper Aptian—Albian. One species only (Sondagella
theloides) is common to these two areas in mid-Cretaceous material, although a
further two species (Majungaella nematis and M? hemigymnae) are common in
pre-Aptian strata. The distribution of these faunas is shown in Tables 5 and 10.
ZULULAND
Palaeoecology
In Zululand a total of 21 samples yielded ostracods, but because some of
these faunas were too small to handle on a CCBC diagram, populations from in-
dividual ammonite stages were summed (Table 10) before plotting on Figure 38.
The resultant small number of data points, based on disparate numbers of sam-
ples, gives rise to two alternative plots depending on whether raw or smoothed
data are used. The latter type have usually proved most successful in previous
diversity
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 195
studies (Dingle 1980, 1981), but are probably less suitable in the present case be-
cause the populations have already been summed once to provide the stage as-
semblages. Both alternatives are shown in Figures 38 and 40.
Using smoothed data, the earliest populations (Aptian IV) lie within the
field predicting water depths of 100-200 m (the 4a populations of Dingle 1981,
figs 68 and 75). This plots as the deepest water population encountered in the
Zululand mid-Cretaceous, and younger populations suggest progressively shal-
lower water depths and higher energies of the sedimentary environments: AI-
bian III and Albian IV populations lie above the ‘Cytheracea line’ and just
within the <100 m predictive field; and the Albian IV and Cenomanian II and
III populations lie within the high-energy sector of the <100 m predictive field
(Dingle 1980, fig. 33; 1981, fig. 75).
SaaS {eas)
| ees
Sa Q 5 ay
60 ae diversity =D
aoe aaa
ea |
ae ees) of are
[ime errs ; r——- 4
ara aaa
=a] pee |
40 PSaaeaal =
Rent =
aay | N Saar)
aes ie Lop
| aaa : =
20 os ee, sae es
oS ea . —— low
a] A ee
aay > ee az
ae o-- - -O- -60 —F high
0 LY —__—- =a
IV i i Wl IV Vwvid tl il il IV
APT ALBIAN CEN
Fig. 40. Predictive water depths for mid-Cretaceous stages in Zululand. Based on the CCBC
triangular diagram in Figure 38. Open squares—smoothed data (3 point mean); solid circles—
raw data. Water depths <100 m are differentiated into high- and low-energy environments (as
defined by Dingle 1980, fig. 33B). Faunal diversity of ostracod populations (raw data) is shown
in solid triangles as a percentage (number of species per 100 specimens). Note that Albian I
strata are missing at outcrop where the Makatini Formation is unconformably overlain by the
Mzinene Formation. Non-sequences shown as horizontal ruling.
Using raw data, on the other hand, the Aptian IV population lies within the
low-energy sector of the <100 m water-depth field, while Albian II assemblages,
which appeared after the late Aptian to Albian I hiatus, plot within the upper
part of the >500 m water depth field. A relatively rapid change to shallow-water
(<100 m), high-energy environments is suggested by the Albian II populations,
and a further change to low-energy shallow-water (<100 m) conditions is indi-
cated by the Albian VI data point on the Cytheracea—Bairdiacia+ Cypridacea
WOOL 4Yzydap 4azEmM
© SOPIOPYT PI]2O0 PU,
PZ @ DIIMDUAPOAID “JI DANABYIAIOMT
17 G G SISUAIUIDYDUL VaplojjasayIAD
G6 Ol Ol a0 D ppnungl4] DYJaUIDYD
9 8 1 ‘ds nyopjiddopswg
EG if IZ DIDIAJS alaYJAIVIOSUOT
el G avuUuldsimay ¢W
cl Ol G SSS sypuau vyjavsunlopy
I@ O¢ Y pIOYful DIJaUIIVYD
OC GE 8 SISUIZNYU S149GA]1A1g
C 3G ol! y ‘ds nyjasayiXD
LV 9 Zz ‘ds japuy
8 8 ett 0 ‘ds studdkovivg
61 6 Y SISUDIUIDYDU S149GA]1A1
OV X 1 ‘ds ‘jopuy
‘ou ‘de i 9 ¢ p € z I ‘sou odures
(SL6r JosuITy 2 Apouuoy)
ANIL JU II I IA A AI | Ill II AI | Ill II I SOUOZ S}TUOWWY
ueluewousd,) ueIqIV uendy leg
(euney [210] %) pue[N[NZ Jo snoddej}01--PIW UI spodeI}sO Jo UONGISIq (Bk)
BOLIFY JSB9-YINOS JO SpOde.IYSO SNOd9k}91-_-PIW
OL d1av.L
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
196
197
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA
‘uasd of ‘dds ¢Z
‘uas , ‘dds / € = SOATPA ‘ON
AT sisuapuvjsuaanb *}9 pyjapsunlopy
AT sisuaspyjnsnv siasayIKD
AT sisuaspYyjnsy vaployjasayjAD
(uelq¢hy—uendy saddy) 9971 Ga.L a1duresg
uas ¢] “dds 67 cc OT 8 i Th eS @
Ol el S 81
%0¢ = uouUIOD ¢ ‘dds pT ‘uas 9 ‘dds 9 ueluewousd
‘uo [] ‘dds ¢y ueiqry
‘uas [I ‘dds py, uendy
puelnynz ur Ayyreprutg (9)
%OS = uowulod 6 ‘dds gt
puejninz pue uiseg enbiusajnoO 0} uoWUWOO ,
76 = SOATPA ‘ON
WT ‘ds guosajdosayyKy
WE sisuapuvjsuaanb “33 pyapsunlopy
WG sisuajvas SiadayjAIOS]
%Sv Sap1ojayj vjJasvpUos ,,
%9Iv ppiiuny adaysAdINIAy
(uerqry 1odd—o|ppiy) ETI AA. e1dwes
(uiseg enbruajnQ) eoie yueg seyjnsy (q)
SOATPA ‘ON
SUIIOJ YJOOUIS JOpUT
suesoe1oyjAd JOpUy
sisuanuinpu vaplojjasayiAD
=
2
+
te
52
5
Ne
fe
Ta
TABLE 10
Mid-Cretaceous ostracods of south-east Africa
(a) Distribution of ostracods in mid-Cretaceous of Zululand (% total fauna)
Barr
Ammonite zones
(Kennedy & Klinger 1975)
Sample nos.
Indet. sp. 1
Pirileberis makatiniensis
Paracypris sp.
Indet sp. 2
Cytherella sp.
Pirileberis mkuzensis
Makatinella inflata
Aptian
Albian Cenomanian
Majungaella nematis
M? hemigymnae
Pongolacythere striata
Bairdoppilata sp. 1
Makatinella tritumida
Cytherelloidea makatiniensis
Procytherura cf. aerodynamica
(eee 10-—16
2
*Sondagella theloides
Sphaeroleberis? sp. A
~ Monoceratina? sp.
Isocythereis? ndumuensis
Cytherelloidea ndumuensis
Indet cytheraceans
Indet smooth forms
No. valves
(b) Agulhas Bank area (Outeniqua Basin)
Sample TBD 1113 (Middle-Upper Albian)
Arculicythere tumida 46%
*Sondagella theloides 45%
Isocythereis sealensis 5%
Majungaella cf. queenslandensis 3%
Cytheropteron? sp. 1%
No. valves = 92
* common to Outeniqua Basin and Zululand
(c) Similarity in Zululand
Aptian 14 spp. 11 gen.
Albian 13 spp. 11 gen.
Cenomanian 6 spp, 6 gen.
18 spp., 9 common = 50%
14 spp., 5 common = 30%
Sample TBD 1266 (Upper Aptian—Albian)
Cytherelloidea agulhasensis lv
Cythereis agulhasensis lv
Majungaella cf. queenslandensis lv
No. valves = 3
7 spp, 7 gen.
25 spp, 16 gen.
961
WAASAW NVOIddV HLNOS AHL JO STVNNV
VdOOVuLso SNOSOVLAYO-dIN
L6I
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
base line. A deepening and increase in environmental energy is suggested for
the Cenomanian II populations that lie close to the predictive 100 m water-
depth line, while a shallow-water (<100 m), high-energy environment is indi-
cated by the Cenomanian III population. Figure 40 summarizes the water-depth
predictions from these two data sets, and shows that the most substantial differ-
ence is the water depth of Albian II deposition following the hiatus that separ-
ates the Makatini and Mzinene formations. With the exception of this point on
the ‘raw data’ plot, and the Aptian IV point on the ‘smoothed data’ plot, all
other points lie within the field predictive of water depths (<100 m), although
there is disparity in assessing environmental energy.
In summary, we suspect that the depositional environments of all the stages
shown in Figure 40, with the exception of Albian II, were in water depths of
<100 m, with that of the Cenomanian III, at least, in relatively high-energy con-
ditions prior to the commencement of the local Cenomanian IV to Coniacian hi-
atus. The Albian II populations, which re-colonized the area after the late
Aptian to early Albian hiatus, were probably dominated by Cytherella and Para-
cypris, and suggest water depths in excess of 200 m (the value of >500 m indi-
cated by one data set on the CCBC diagram may be biased because of the small
assemblage available for study).
Table 11 shows some of the population characteristics of the mid-
Cretaceous strata of Zululand, and it is significant that, except in Albian II,
cytheraceans invariably comprise the dominant (>20%) elements in the
assemblage, and in particular that /socythereis? ndumuensis is a dominant
species for Albian VI to Cenomanian III time. A further point to note is the
relatively low faunal diversity suggested for Albian HI and Cenomanian III
assemblages, both of which are predicted to lie in the higher-energy shallow-
water field of the CCBC diagram (Fig. 38, ‘raw data’ plot).
Biostratigraphy
The temporal ranges of ostracods found in the Zululand mid-Cretaceous
rocks are shown in Tables 1, 10, and 12. In the cytheracean components two
groups can be distinguished: those that are known only from Zululand, and
those that have been recorded from other localities in south-east Africa and
Gondwanaland. The latter comprises Majungaella nematis and Sondagella the-
loides, which range upwards into Cenomanian II and Albian III, respectively.
These are the youngest records of the two species, both of which have extensive
temporal and spatial ranges outside the south-east African region.
Faunal diversity in the various stages is shown in Table 11, but some of the
values are probably not meaningful because of the small numbers of specimens
involved in certain samples, in particular the high diversity recorded for Albian
VI and Cenomanian IJ. An aspect that is probably significant is the similarity
and relatively high diversity in the Aptian IV and Albian II populations, where
there are several apparently short-range cytheracean taxa such as Makatinella in-
flata, Pongolacythere striata, and two species of Pirileberis (makatiniensis and
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 199
TABLE 11
Population characteristics and suggested palaeoenvironments, mid-Cretaceous of Zululand.
Aptian Albian Albian Albian Cenomanian
IV II Ill VI II
Cenomanian
Ill
dominant Paracypris sp. | P. mkuzensis I? ndumuensis |1I? ndumuensis | I?ndumuensis
>20 % M. inflata Paracypris sp. | Cytherella sp.
C. ndumuensis
secondary M. nematis Cytherella sp. Cytherella sp. M. tritumida
>10 % S. theloides
tertiary P. mkuzensis P. makatiniensis
>5 % M. tritumida M. tritumida
suggested shallow moderate to shallow shallow water,
palaeo- water, deep water, water, <100 m,
environments |<100 m ?>200 m <100 m high energy
faunal 32 % 32 % 56 % 16 %
diversity
(no. spp./
100 spec.)
TABLE 12
Temporal distribution of mid-Cretaceous cytheracean ostracods from Zululand.
(a) Confined to Aptian:
Indet. sp. 1
Indet. sp. 2
Majungaella ?hemigymnae
Procytherura cf. aerodynamica
(b) Confined to Albian:
Sphaeroleberis? sp.
Monoceratina? sp.
(c) Confined to Cenomanian:
Cytherelloidea ndumuensis
(d) Confined to Mzinene Formation (Albian—Cenomanian):
Sphaeroleberis? sp.
Monoceratina? sp.
Isocythereis? ndumuensis
Cytherelloidea ndumuensis
mkuzensis). It appears that despite the hiatus between the Makatini and Mzi-
nene formations (Albian I is missing), there was faunal continuity in the ostra-
cod populations across the Aptian—Albian boundary. This is shown by a 50 per
cent similarity level in all ostracod taxa between Aptian and Albian strata
(Table 10). In contrast our evidence, although slender, does point to the estab-
lishment, by at least the end of Albian III times, of an Albian—Cenomanian as-
semblage whose most diagnostic element so far recognized is Isocythereis?
ndumuensis. A similarity index of only 36 per cent is found in the total fauna be-
tween the Albian and Cenomanian strata (Table 10). Makatinella tritumida, an
easily recognized taxon, is the only member of the endemic cytheracean group
known to range from Aptian IV to Cenomanian III. From these Zululand mid-
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cretaceous ostracod populations no species is known to extend into the over-
lying St. Lucia Formation (Coniacian at outcrop, Turonian at subcrop), indicat-
ing a major faunal discontinuity between the mid-Cretaceous and Upper
Cretaceous strata.
OUTENIQUA BASIN
Of the two samples from the Agulhas Bank, only TBD 1113 contains a
large ostracod fauna (ninety-two valves), and this is composed entirely of cythe-
racean types, with Arculicythere tumida (46%) and Sondagella theloides (45 %)
the dominant taxa (Table 10). We have no other similar populations with which
to make a comparison, and the known environmental preferences of the two
dominant taxa appear to be at variance. Arculicythere tumida occurs in DSDP
259, 327 and 330, and in all cases was probably deposited in water depths of
c. 200 m, whereas previous records of Sondagella theloides have been from
strata that were probably deposited in relatively shallow, near-shore conditions
(e.g. Algoa Basin where arenaceous foraminifera, wood fragments, and ostreids
are common (Brenner & Oertli 1976)). Their mutual presence in sample TBD
1113 may indicate that each species was near the limit of its own environmental
tolerance, but the anomalous aspect of this conclusion is that both occur in rela-
tively large numbers. The fact that Isocythereis sealensis also occurs in DSDP
327 in samples that suggest deposition in water depths of c. 200 m (where it
makes up 3 to 14% of the fauna), and is present in small numbers (5 %) in TBD
1113, indicates that it is probably Sondagella theloides that has a greater water
depth tolerance than previously suspected.
REGIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
During the time interval with which we are concerned, the palaeogeography
of this part of Gondwanaland underwent significant changes. Reconstructions
are shown in Figure 42 (a and b) (pre-breakup Valanginian, and middle Al-
bian—Cenomanian, respectively). It is essential to consider the regional spatial
and temporal distribution of the various taxa in terms of these palaeogeogra-
phies because they change from essentially intercontinental shelf seas (pre-break-
up) to continental margin seas separated by deep ocean basins (Cenomanian).
In addition, it must be borne in mind that there was no connection between the
north and south sectors of the Atlantic Ocean across the Walvis Ridge before
late Cenomanian-early Turonian times, and that the mid-Cretaceous ostracod
populations with which we are concerned can be seen as the last representatives
of an Upper Jurassic to Cenomanian ostracod faunal province within South
Gondwanaland seas (Dingle 1982; Tambareau 1982). Figure 41 is a range chart
for mid-Cretaceous ostracods that are common to more than one of the regions
in Figure 42, or have close relatives elsewhere in South Gondwanaland.
Dingle (1982) has given details of the whole pre-Aptian South Gondwana-
land ostracod fauna, but here it is relevant to emphasize the distribution of two
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA
201
x
5 |p| =
° Slolea|< a»
alse te | ae | SP ee
Auszx — AITKENICYTHERE? SP. 327/18
Tanz a— PROCYTHERURA AERODYNAMICA
?
Acoa SONDAGELLA THELOIDES
Mad m—aArg
m—e AB MAJUNGAELLA NEMATIS
EMR
total range
— — — — — — —— — — a
ABB— — -—cfs MAJUNGAELLA HEMIGYMNAE
ABa— —_ — — — cfmFP PROCYTHERURA DINGLE!I
Germ — -—m—as FP PARICERATINA LIEBAUI
9 AB f
” c a MAJUNGAELLA QUEENSLANDENSIS
9 us
FP w AB, Aus ARCULICYTHERE TUMIDA
| |
FP w Aus | ROBSONIELLA FALKLANDENSIS
——_______-8
FP a AB ISOCYTHEREIS SEALENSIS
p——_aI
AB, FP
zs — = SS —" es ISOCYTHEREIS SPP.
—) —_ —_—~—~s—_—~Ss — ~— —Hs8 Europe
g Aus CYTHERURA? OERTLII
o———-85 FP
Fig. 41. Spatial and temporal distribution of selected species of ostracods in the mid-
Cretaceous of south-east Africa and the Falkland Plateau, and adjacent Gondwanide localities.
For comparison some distributions in more distant areas and pre mid-Cretaceous horizons are
also noted. Dashed lines show total range from different geographical localities, solid lines are
total ranges within one locality. Numbers on right-hand side are informal sample numbers used
in Table 5. The Aptian to Cenomanian stages are those of Kennedy & Klinger (1975), and cor-
relation with early, middle, and late subdivisions of DSDP (Barker et al. 1977) are nominal. See
text for range citations. Abbreviations: Aus—Australia; FP—Falkland Plateau;
Tanz—Tanzania; Z—Zululand; AB—Agulhas Bank, Arg—Argentina; MR—Mozambique
Ridge; Mad—Madagascar; Germ.—Germany.
43
24
29
1
16
45
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
important species in terms of a pre-drift Valanginian palaeogeography
(Fig. 42a). In this reconstruction, which is meant to illustrate the period immedi-
ately prior to, and immediately after, drifting in the Natal Valley—South Atlan-
tic, conditions of no sedimentation or very slow anoxic sedimentation obtained
over the DSDP sites (327 and 330) of the southern Maurice Ewing Bank: no os-
tracods were recovered from the Kimmeridgian—Aptian condensed sequences
(or non-sequences) developed during this period. However, because the Agul-
has Bank, Mozambique Ridge (DSDP 249), and Madagascar (Majunga Basin)
are all characterized by the presence of Majungaella nematis, a shallow sea-way
must have bypassed the Maurice Ewing Bank on its southern and, possibly,
northern flanks. The latter route is suggested by the presence of marine strata of
suspected Valanginian—Hauterivian age on the Transkei coast at Mngazana (Mc-
Lachlan et al. 1976a). The Zululand—South Mozambique region lay to the west
of the coastline at this time because pre-Upper Barremian marine sediments are
unknown from the area.
Majungaella nematis also occurs in Hauterivian sediments in the Neuquen
Basin of west central Argentina (Figs 1, 42a), which, with the presence of Son-
dagella theloides, indicates a connection with the Agulhas Bank area. Whether
this connection actually lay across the site of the present South Atlantic (for
which no subsurface structural evidence has been found, but which seems the
most obvious route), or via an east Pacific to south-western Indian Ocean route
(there is a western exit to the Neuquen Basin), is not known. M. nematis also
occurs on the Mozambique Ridge (DSDP site 249) and in Madagascar, giving a
geographical range of at least 6 500 km. Faunal continuity across western South
Gondwanaland at the time of initial continental drifting between southern
Africa and South America is, therefore, an established element in the pre-mid-
Cretaceous palaeogeography. This conclusion is at variance with that reached by
Jones & Plafker (1977) who studied the Mesozoic molluscs from DSDP sites 327
and 330 on the Falkland Plateau. On the basis of the presence of bivalves such
Fig. 42. Mid-Cretaceous palaeogeographies and ostracod distribution in south-east Africa and
the Falkland Plateau. Refits are based on Dingle & Scrutton (1974), Tucholke et al. (1981),
Scrutton (1976), Martin e/ al. (1981), Dingle et al. (1983). a. Pre-drift palaeogeography
(Valanginian). Ostracod distributions relate to pre- (Valanginian) and earliest- (Hauterivian)
drift times. The extension of shallow marine conditions north-west of the Maurice Ewing Bank
are suggested by the occurrence of ?Valanginian ostracods at Mngazana on the Transkei coast
(McLachlan et al. 1976a). b. Early Cenomanian palaeogeography (say 99 m.y.). Ostracod dis-
tributions relate to mid-Albian to early Cenomanian times (except Sondagella theloides on the
Mozambique Ridge, recorded in early Aptian or Barremian).
Key: 1—shallow marine conditions on continental crust; 2—deep water conditions on oceanic
crust; 3—boundaries of Outeniqua—Falkland Basin (probably faulted); 4—lines of subsequent
continental separation; 5—continental edges; 6—sampling sites, 249 DSDP leg 25, 327 and 330
DSDP leg 36, 1113 and 1266 dredge sites on Agulhas Bank.
Abbreviations: M—Majungaella spp. (all M. nematis except M? sp. 327/16 on Falkland Plateau
and M. cf. queenslandensis in the Outeniqua Basin in (b)); S—Sondagella theloides; A—Arcull-
cythere tumida; Is—lIsocythereis sealenis; In—Isocythereis? ndumuensis. Mad—Madagascar, B—
Basin. Faunal data from numerous references cited in the text.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 203
+M,S
to Neuquen —
Falkland
Islands
Zululand +=:
Plateau
Y
Moc NOOR eo ty
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
as Aucellina and Malayomaorica, these workers faunally linked the Jurassic and
Lower Cretaceous Falkland Plateau with austral sites in the East Indies, Austra-
lasia and Pacific South America, and drew a distinction between them and the
Tethyan faunas of south-east Africa and Madagascar. To account for this appar-
ent anomaly they suggested that either the Falkland Plateau did not originally lie
off south-east Africa, or that the two areas were separated by a land or oceano-
graphic barrier. We believe that studies such as those by Norton & Sclater
(1979) and Martin et al. (1981) have firmly established the relative palaeo-
position of the Faikland Plateau, and that the remaining disparity may be caused
by our lack of knowledge of south-east African Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous
bivalves, which await modern taxonomic revision. Certainly, our study of the
benthic ostracods do not lend support to Jones & Plafker’s main conclusions. —
The post-drift palaeogeography shown in Figure 42b is designed to illustrate
the situation immediately following continental separation between the Falkland
Plateau and the Agulhas Bank (latest Albian), whilst faunal details shown at the
various sites cover the period mid-Albian (Albian III) to early Cenomanian. By
the beginning of this period, anoxic conditions over the Falkland Plateau DSDP
sites and in the deep parts of the narrow South Atlantic basin had largely been
dispelled, and marine ostracod faunas had become established, at least in the
former area. During the period covered by Figure 42b, final continental separa-
tion between southern Africa and the Falkland Plateau (i.e. South America)
took place, and after about 100 m.y. (latest Albian) no shallow-water (continen-
tal shelf depth) connections persisted between the two areas. As sea-floor
spreading proceeded, the gap between the two areas progressively increased,
presumably preventing any further contact between elements in ostracod popu-
lations that were adapted solely to shallow-water environments.
MID-CRETACEOUS FAUNAL LINKS BETWEEN SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
AND THE FALKLAND PLATEAU
Mid-Cretaceous faunal relationships are summarized in Table 13 and Figure
42b. Localities from which data are available are different to those shown in the
pre-drift palaeogeography: no marine sediments of Barremian to Lower Maas-
trichtian age are known from the Neuquen Basin, while in mid-Cretaceous
times, marine sedimentation commenced in Zululand and recommenced on the
Maurice Ewing Bank. Sondagella theloides occurs in the Outeniqua Basin and in
Zululand, but appears not to have spread to the eastern Falkland Plateau when
normal marine conditions became re-established in early Albian times, even
though it originally extended westward into the Neuquen Basin, and has been
recorded from the Mozambique Ridge (DSDP 249). Its known upper limit is
Albian III (in Zululand) (Fig. 41). The genus Majungaella, on the other hand,
did migrate into the Falkland Plateau area, presumably from the Outeniqua
Basin which lay adjacent to it in middle Albian times. Majungaella nematis is
known to extend into the Cenomanian in Zululand, but only rare specimens of
related species are known from Albian strata of the Outeniqua Basin (M. cf.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 205
TABLE 13
Summary of faunal links.
(a) South-east Africa and the Falkland Plateau
primary links
Sondagella theloides OB-Z-N*
Majungaella nematis OB*—Z-N*-M*
Arculicythere tumida OB-FP-Au
Isocythereis sealensis OB-FP
I? ndumuensis TE,
Robsoniella falklandensis FP-Au
Pirileberis spp. Z—M
secondary links
Aitkenicythere? spp. FP with U.Jur. Au, T
Procytherura cf. aerodynamica Z with Kimm. T
P. cf. dinglei FP with Haut/Val. OB
P. batei FP similar to P. maculata from Haut. OB
FP similar to Paijenborchellina sp. 1 (Damotte)
Cytherura? oertlii FP with Alb. Au
(b) Between Zululand, Madagascar, Tanzania
Pirileberis Z—-T-M
Pongolacythere Z similar to T
Abbreviations:
OB = Outeniqua Basin (Agulhas Bank + Algoa), Z = Zululand, FP = Falkland Plateau, N =
Neuquen, Au = Australia, M = Madagascar, T = Tanzania, U.Jur. = Upper Jurassic, Kimm
= Kimmeridgian, Haut = Hauterivian, Val = Valanginian, Alb = Albian.
*pre-Albian occurrences
queenslandensis) and the Falkland Plateau (Majungaella? sp. 327/16). The genus
was clearly on the wane in this part of Gondwanaland, because in all localities it
forms only a minor component of the fauna. In this situation, Sondagella and
Majungaella represent residual elements of the late Jurassic-Lower Cretaceous
faunas of South Gondwanaland that had been geographically very extensive (see
Dingle 1982).
New elements which did vigorously take advantage of the radical and evolv-
ing palaeogeographic dispensation were the genera Isocythereis and Arculi-
cythere. Presumably because of newly established circulation patterns and the
resultant environmental disparities, the faunas of Zululand and the Outeniqua
Basin show only weak links in these new taxa, whereas the latter and the Falk-
land Plateau, which were still physically joined in Albian times (although poss-
ibly bathymetrically separated by the shallow or emergent region of the Agulhas
Arch—Maurice Ewing Bank), have close links at species level. The genus Jso-
cythereis is represented by I. sealensis in the Outeniqua Basin and Falkland Pla-
teau, and by J? ndumuensis in Zululand. These two species are not closely
related, emphasizing the relative isolation of the two areas. Similarly, Arculicy-
there tumida occurs at the southern two localities but is absent from Zululand.
This species is also present in the Albian of DSDP site 259 of western Australia
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and indicates continuity at shallow to moderate water depths over a distance of
at least 6 000 km. Arculicythere first appears in the Portlandian to Valanginian
of Madagascar. Similar long-range connections between Australia and the Falk-
land Plateau are indicated by the mutual presence of Robsoniella falklandensis
and Cytherura? oertlii (in the Albian of both areas). The bulk of the cytheracean
ostracods which colonized Zululand during the late Barremian transgression do
not have relations in either the Outeniqua or Falkland basins, but have closer
ties (albeit through Upper Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous relatives) with both
Madagascar and Tanzania.
One interesting characteristic of the Falkland Albian assemblages is the
relative abundance and diversity of the micro-ostracod populations. Elements of
these indicate a connection to the North Atlantic-European areas (e.g. Paricera-
tina, Eucytherura, and Hemiparacytheridea), which all evidence points to not
being via the present-day South Atlantic route but presumably via east Africa
and Tethys. The fact that none of these distinctive taxa has been recorded from
mid-Cretaceous strata in south-east Africa indicates a subtle, but important, en-
vironmental difference between the latter areas and the Falkland Plateau. It was
certainly the most ‘oceanic’ of the three settings that we have investigated, and
possibly may also have been affected by poorly oxygenated waters periodically
sweeping over the plateau from the South Atlantic basin.
In connection with the Callovian to Cenomanian South Gondwana ostracod
province (Dingle 1982) to which reference has previously been made, the follow-
ing summary can be provided:
1. In pre-Albian times, Majungaella nematis, Sondagella theloides, Ami-
cytheridea, and Progonocythere were characteristic elements, but no record of
these is known from the eastern Falkland Plateau. This we refer to as the ‘old’
or South Gondwana Fauna A (Table 14).
TABLE 14
Main elements of Mesozoic Gondwana ostracod faunas.
1. South Gondwana Fauna A (‘old’ faunal elements) (Callovian to Aptian)
Majungaella nematis
Sondagella theloides
Amicytheridea brentonensis
‘Progonocythere’ inhopyensis
‘P.’ befotkaensis
‘P.” accessa
Pirileberis progonata
Rostrocytheridea ornata
2. South Gondwana Fauna B (mixture of ‘old’ (0) and ‘new’ (n) faunal elements) (Albian to
Cenomanian)
Majungaella nematis (0)
Sondagella theloides (o)
Arculicythere tumida (n)
Isocythereis sealensis (n)
Robsoniella falklandensis (n)
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 207
2. Following the withdrawal of the sea from the Neuquen Basin and the AI-
bian transgression in the Falkland, Outeniqua, and Zululand areas, certain ele-
ments of the ‘old’ fauna colonized Zululand, re-colonized the Outeniqua Basin,
but made only a limited penetration of the Falkland Plateau. New taxa appeared
with this transgression in all three areas, producing a mixed association of ‘old’
and ‘new’ elements that we refer to as South Gondwana Fauna B (Table 14).
3. The South Gondwana Fauna B was relatively short-lived (Albian to Ce-
nomanian) because, following the late Cenomanian—Turonian hiatus that af-
fected most parts of South Gondwanaland, it was totally replaced in the ensuing
Turonian—Coniacian transgression by aggressive new shallow-water forms in
south and east Africa and India, and by deep-water forms in the Falklands area.
Both these assemblages have a cosmopolitan aspect, which display few charac-
ters that could be specifically related to a ‘Gondwana’ location. An equally dra-
matic change can be seen in the Neuquen Basin when it was inundated again in
the Middle Maastrichtian. Here, colonization took place from the north, and its
latest Cretaceous and Palaeogene faunas are closely allied to those from Brazil
and Equatorial west Africa.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I gratefully acknowledge the help give by Dr H. C. Klinger of the South
African Museum, Cape Town, both as guidance during fieldwork in Zululand in
1977, and for valuable discussions over several years on the Cretaceous stratigra-
phy of south-east Africa. Deep Sea Drilling Project samples from the Falkland
Plateau were kindly made available by the Lamont—Doherty Geological Observ-
atory repository. Mr D. Gerneke and Dr D. Crawford of the University of
Cape Town Electron Microscope Unit are thanked for their considerable assist-
ance with photography, and Dr A. R. Lord kindly made available to me the
SEM facility in the Micropalaeontology Research Unit at University College,
London, during my study leave in 1981. University of Cape Town staff research
grants are gratefully acknowledged for fieldwork and SEM expenses. The
Editorial Board of the University of Cape Town provided a generous grant to-
wards part of the publication costs for this work. Mrs Grace Krummeck is
thanked for typing the manuscript.
REFERENCES
ALEXANDER, C. I. 1929. Ostracoda of the Cretaceous of North Texas. Bull. Univ. Texas Bur.
econ. Geol. Technol. 2907: 1-137.
APOSTOLESCU, V. 1963. Essai de zonation par les ostracodes dans le crétacé du bassin du Sene-
gal. Revue Inst. fr. Pétrole 18: 1675-1694.
BairD, W. 1845. Arrangement of British Entomostraca, with a list of species, particularly notic-
ing those which have as yet been discovered within the bounds of the Club. Hist. Ber-
wicksh. Nat. Club 2: 145-148.
BairD, W. 1850. The natural history of the British Entomostraca: 1-364. London: Ray Society.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Barker, P. F., DALZIEL, I. W. D., DINKELMAN, M. G., ELLiot, D. H., Gomsos, A. M., Lo-
NARDI, A., PLAFKER, G., TARNEY, J., THOMPSON, R. W., TJALSMA, R. C., VON DER Borcu,
C. C., & Wise, S. W. 1977. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 36: 1-1079.
BARTENSTEIN, H. & OerTLI, H. J. 1975. Index ostracodes in the Lower Cretaceous of Heligo-
land. Bull. Cent. Rech. Pau 9: 5-25.
BaTE, R. H. 1972. Upper Cretaceous Ostracoda from the Carnarvon Basin, Western Australia.
Spec. Pap. Palaeont. 10: 1-85.
BaTE, R. H. 1975. Ostracods from Callovian to Tithonian sediments of Tanzania, east Africa.
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 26: 163-223.
Bate, R. H. 1976. New name for Rhadinocythere Bate, 1975. Geol. Mag. 133: 489.
Bate, R. H. & Baytiss, D. D. 1969. An outline account of the Cretaceous and Tertiary forami-
nifera and of the Cretaceous ostracods of Tanzania. Proceedings 3rd African Micropaleon-
tological Collogium 1968: 113-164. Cairo: National Information and Documentation
Centre.
Bate, R. H. & CoLemMaN, B. E. 1975. Upper Lias Ostracoda from Rutland and Hunt-
ingdonshire. Bull. geol. Surv. Gt Br. 55: 1-42.
BERTELS, A. 1969. Micropaleontologia y estratigrafia del limite Cretacico—Terciario en Huan-
trai-co (Provincia del Neuquén). Ameghiniana 6 (4): 253-290.
Bo.Lii, H. M., RyAn, W. B. F., Foresman, J. B., HoTrmMan, W. E., KAGAmi, H., LONGorIA,
J. F., McKniGut, B. K., MELGUEN, M., NATLAND, J., PRoTo-DEcIMA, F. & SIESSER, W. G.
1978. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 40: 1-1079.
BosquEt, J. 1847. Description des entomostraces fossiles de la craie de Maestricht. Mém. Soc.
r. Sci. Liége 4: 1-24.
BRENNER, P. & OeErTLI, H. J. 1976. Lower Cretaceous ostracodes (Valanginian to Hauterivian)
from the Sundays River Formation, Algoa Basin, South Africa. Bull. Cent. Rech. Pau 10:
471-533.
CoryELL, H. N., SAMPLE, C. H. & JENNINGS, P. H. 1935. Bairdoppilata, a new genus of Ostra-
coda, with two new species. Am. Mus. Novit. 777: 1-5.
DamotteE, R. 1977. Sur les genres crétacés: Rahacythereis, Veeniacythereis, Cornicythereis, Par-
vacythereis, et Chapmanicythereis (Trachyleberididae, Ostracoda) créés par J. Gruendel en
1973. Revue Micropaléont. 19: 200-210.
DamottE, R. 1979. Cretaceous ostracods of IPOD Leg 48 (Holes 400, 400A, 401, and 402A).
In: MontaberT, L. et al. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 48: 365-369.
DeEroo, G. 1966. Cytheracea (Ostracodes) du Maastrichtian de Maastricht (Pays-Bas) et des
régions voisines; résultats stratigraphiques et paléontologiques de leur étude. Meded. geol.
Sticht. S(C) 2: 1-197.
De Wir, M. J. 1977. The evolution of the Scotia Arc as a key to the reconstruction of south-
western Gondwanaland. Tectonophysics 37: 53-81.
DINGLE, R. V. 1969. Marine Neocomian Ostracoda from South Africa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr.
38: 139-163.
DINGLE, R. V. 1971. Some Cretaceous ostracodal assemblages from the Agulhas Bank (South
African continental margin). Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 39: 393-418.
DINGLE, R. V. 1980. Marine Santonian and Campanian ostracods from a borehole at Richards
Bay, Zululand. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82: 1-70.
DINGLE, R. V. 1981. The Campanian and Maastrichtian Ostracoda of south-east Africa. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 85: 1-181.
DINGLE, R. V. 1982. Some aspects of Cretaceous ostracod biostratigraphy of South Africa and
relationships with other Gondwanide localities. Cretaceous Research 3: 1-23.
DINGLE, R. V. & KLINGER, H. C. 1972. The stratigraphy and ostracod faunas of the Upper Ju-
rassic sediments from Brenton, in the Knysna Outlier, Cape Province. Trans. R. Soc.
S. Afr. 40: 279-298.
DINGLE, R. V. & Scrutron, R. A. 1974. Continental breakup and the development of post-
Paleozoic sedimentary basins around southern Africa. Bull. geol. Soc. Am. 85: 1467-1474.
DincLeE, R. V., StESSER, W. G. & Newton, A. R. 1983. Mesozoic and Tertiary geology of
southern Africa. Rotterdam: Balkema.
EaGar, S. H. 1965. Ostracoda of the London Clay (Ypresian) in the London Basin. I: Reading
District. Revue Micropaléont. 8: 15-32.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA 209
Exuiot, D. H. 1975. Gondwana basins of Antarctica. In: CAMPBELL, K. S. W. ed. Gondwana
Geology: 493-536. Canberra: Australian National University Press.
EspiTAtiE, J. & SiGAL, J. 1963. Contribution a |’étude des foraminiféres du Jurassique
Supérieur et du Néocomien du bassin de Majunga. Annis. géol. Madagascar 32: 1-100.
GrekorF, N. 1963. Contribution a l’étude des ostracodes du Mesozoique moyen (Bathonien-
Valanginien) du Bassin de Majunga, Madagascar. Revue Inst. fr. Pétrole 18: 1709-1762.
GrospipigER, E. 1979. Principaux ostracodes marins de l’intervalle Aptien—-Turonien du Gabon
(Afrique occidentale). Bull. Cent. Rech. Expl. Prod. Elf-Aquitaine 3: 1-35.
GRUNDEL, J. 1966. Zur Entwicklung und taxonomie der Tricorninidae (ostracoda) in Mittel-
europa. Paldont. Z. 40, S: 89-102.
GRUNDEL, J. 1973. Zur Entwicklung der Trachyleberididae (Ostracoda) in der Unterkreide und
in der tieferen Oberkreide. Teil I: Taxonomie. Z. Geol. Wiss. Berlin 1, 11: 1463-1474.
GrRUNDEL, J. 1974. Zur Entwicklung der Trachyleberididae (Ostracoda) in der Unterkreide und
in der tieferen Oberkreide. Teil II: Phylogenie. Z. Geol. Wiss. Berlin 2, 1: 61-71.
GRUNDEL, J. & Kozur, H. 1971. Zur Taxonomie der Bythocytheridae und Tricorninidae (Po-
docopida, Ostracoda). Monatsber. dt. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 13: 907-937.
Guna, D. K. 1976. On some Mesozoic Ostracoda from subcrops of Banni, Rann of Kutch,
India. Proceedings 6th Indian Colloquium on Micropalaeontology, Stratigraphy 84-90.
Hanal, T. 1957. Studies on the Ostracoda from Japan. IJ. Subfamily Pectocytherinae n. sub-
fam. J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo 10: 469-482.
HeErrIG, E. 1963. Neue ostracoden Arten aus der weissen Schreibkreide der Insel Rugen
(Unter-Maastricht). Wiss. Z. Ernst Moritz Arndt-Univ. Greifswald 12 3/4: 289-325.
IsRAELSKY, M. C. 1929. Upper Cretaceous ostracods of Arkansas. Bull. geol. Surv. Ark. 2:
3-29.
Jones, D. L. & PLAFKER, G. 1977. Mesozoic megafossils from DSDP hole 327A and site 330 on
the eastern Falkland Plateau. Jn: Barker, P. F. et al. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj.
36: 845-856.
Jones, T. R. 1849. A monograph of the Entomostraca of the Cretaceous Formations of England.
London: Palaeontological Society.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 263-315.
KROMMELBEIN, K. 1967. Ostracoden aus der marinen ‘Kisten-Kreide’ Brasiliens. 2. Sergipella
transatlantica n.g., n.sp., und Aracajuia benderi n.g., n.sp., aus dem Ober-Aptium/Albium.
Senckenberg. leth. 48: 525-533.
KROMMELBEIN, K. 1972. Remarks on marine Cretaceous ostracodes of Gondwanic distribution.
Proc. 5th African Colloquium on Micropalaeontology 1972: 539-51. Madrid. Revista Espa-
nola de Micropaleontologia.
KROMMELBEIN, K. 1975. Ostracoden aus der Kreide des Great Artesian Basin, Queensland,
Australien. Senckenberg. leth. 55: 455-483.
Larson, R. L. & Lapp, J. W. 1973. Evidence for the opening of the south Atlantic in the early
Cretaceous. Nature Lond. 246: 209-212.
LATREILLE, P. A. 1806. Genera Crustaceorum et Insectorum 1: 1-303, Paris.
Liepau, A. 1977. Carapace ornamentation of the Ostracoda Cytheracea: principles of evolution
and functional significance. In: LorFLER, H. & DaNIELopoL, D., eds. Aspects of ecology
and zoogeography. of recent and fossil Ostracoda: 107—120. The Hague, Junk.
Lusimova, P. S. 1955. Ostracoda of the Middle Mesozoic formations of the central Volga area
and the Obshehego Sirta. In: Lusimova, P. S. & CHABAROVA, T. H. eds. Ostracoda of the
Mesozoic sediments of the Volga—Urals region. Trans. All-Union Petrol. Sci. Res. Geol. Ex-
plor. Inst. (V.N.I.G.R.I1.) (N.S.) 84: 1-189. (In Russian.)
Ma.LumiaNn, N., Masiux, V. & Rossi DE GarciA, E. 1972. Microfdsiles del Cretacico superior
de la perforacién CS-1, provincia de Santa Cruz, Argentina. Revista de la Asociacion Geo-
logica Argentina 27: 265-272.
MANDELSTAM, M. I. 1958. New genera and species of ostracods. Jn: ABUSHIK, A. F. et al.
Microfauna of the USSR. Trans. All-Union Petrol. Sci. Res. Geol. Explor. Inst.
(V.N.I.G.R.I.), 115: 232-287. (In Russian.)
MANDELstAM, M. I. 1959. Ostrakody iz otlozheny paleogena Srednei Azii. Microfauna USSR.
10. Trans. All-Union Petrol. Sci. Res. Geol. Explor. Inst. (V.N.1.G.R.1.) 136: 442-543. (In
Russian.)
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ManpeELstAM, M. I. et al. 1956. Ostracoda. Materiolien zur palaontologie: neue Familien und
Gattungen. V.S.E.G.E.I. Geol. Inst. Ministry of Geology, Moscow (N.S.) 12: 87-144.
Martin, A. K., HARTNADY, C. J. H. & GooDLaD, S. W. 1981. A revised fit of South America
and south central Africa. Earth planet. Sci. Lett 54: 293-305.
McLacu an, I. R., McMILLAN, I. K. & BRENNER, P. W. 1976a. Micropalaeontological study of
the Cretaceous beds at Mbotyi and Mngazana, Transkei, South Africa. Trans. geol. Soc. S.
Afr. 79: 321-340.
McLacuian, I. R., BRENNER, P. W. & McMILLAN, I. K. 1976b. The stratigraphy and micro-
palaeontology of the Cretaceous Brenton Formation and the PB—A/1 well, near Knysna,
Cape Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 79: 341-370.
MERTENS, E. 1956. Zur Grenzziehung Alb-Cenom in Nordwestdeutschland mit hilfe von Ostra-
coden. Geol. Jber. 72: 173-230.
Moore, R. C., ed. 1961. Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part Q. Arthropoda 3. Law-
rence: University of Kansas Press.
MULLER, G. W. 1894. Die Ostracoden des Golfes von Neapel und der angrezenden Meere-
sabschnitte. Fauna Flora Golf. Neapel 31: 1-404.
Musaccuio, E. A. 1978. Ostracodos del Cretacico inferior en al Grupo Mendoza, Cuenca del
Neuquén, Argentina. Actas VII Congreso Geol6gico Argentino, II, Neuquén: 459-473.
Musaccuio, E. A. 1979. Datos paleobiogeograficos de algunas asociaciones de foraminiferos,
ostracodos y carofitas del Jurasico medio y el Cretacico inferior de Argentina. Ameghi-
niana 16: 247-271.
NEALE, J. W. 1975. The ostracod fauna from the Santonian chalk (Upper Cretaceous) of Gin-
gin, Western Australia. Spec. Pap. Palaeont. 16: 1-81.
NEALE, J. W. 1977. Cretaceous ostracoda of the North Atlantic Basin. In: Swain, F. M. ed.
Stratigraphic Micropaleontology of Atlantic Basin and Borderlands: 245-270. Amsterdam:
Elsevier.
Norton, I. O. & ScLaTErR, J. G. 1979. A model for the evolution of the Indian Ocean and the
breakup of Gondwanaland. J. geophys. Res. 84: 6803-6830.
OerTLI, H. J. 1974. Lower Cretaceous and Jurassic ostracods from DSDP Leg 27—a prelimi-
nary account. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 27: 947-965.
Ramsay, W. V. 1968. A new morphological aspect of the ostracode genus Cytherelloidea Alex-
ander. Micropaleontology 14: 348-356.
Rotn, R. 1928. Monoceratina: a new genus of Ostracoda from the Pennsylvanian of Oklahoma.
J. Paleont. 2: 15-19.
Sars, G. O. 1866. Oversigt af Norges marine ostracoden. Forh. VidenskSelsk. Krist 7: 1-130.
Sars, G. O. 1888. Nye Bidrag til Kundskaken om Midlehavets Invertebrat fauna 4. Ostacoda
Mediterranea. Arch. Math. Naturv. 12: 173-324.
Sars. G. O. 1922-1928. An account of the Crustacea of Norway 9. Ostracoda, Parts 1-16:
1-277. Bergen: Bergen Museum.
SCHEIBNEROVA, V. 1981. Palaeogeographical implications of Cretaceous benthic foraminifera re-
covered by the Deep Sea Drilling Project in the western South Atlantic Ocean. Cretaceous
Research 2: 1-18.
ScruTton, R. A. 1976. Continental breakup and deep crustal structure at the margins of south-
ern Africa. Ann. Braz. Acad. Sci. 48 (supplement): 275-286.
SIESSER, W. G. 1982. Cretaceous calcareous nannoplankton in South Africa. J. Paleont. 56:
335-350.
SIGAL, J. 1974. Comments on Leg 25 sites in relation to the Cretaceous and Paleogene stratigra-
phy in the eastern and southeastern Africa coast and Madagascar regional setting. Jn: Simp-
son, E. S. W. et al. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 25: 687-723.
SLITER, W. V. 1977. Cretaceous foraminifers from the southerwestern Atlantic Ocean, Leg 36,
Deep Sea Drilling Project. Jn: BARKER, P. F. et al. Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 36:
519-574.
SwaIn, F. M. 1952. Ostracoda from wells in North Carolina, Part 2, Mesozoic ostracoda. Prof.
Pap. U.S. geol. Surv. 234B: 59-93.
SwaIn, F. M. 1976. Lower and Middle? Cretaceous Ostracoda from the Atlantic Ocean off
Guiana and off West Africa. J. Paleont. 50: 734-753.
SYLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. 1948. The ostracode genus Cythereis. J. Paleont. 22: 792-797.
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA ATI
TAMBAREAU, Y. 1982. Les ostracodes et l’histoire géologique de |’Atlantique sud au crétacé.
Bull. Cent. Rech. Explor.-Prod. Elf Aquitaine 6: 1-37.
TRIEBEL, E. 1940. Die Ostracoden der deutschen Kreide—3 Cytherideinae und Cytherinae.
Senckenbergiana 22: 160-227.
TucHOLKE, B. E., Hourz, R. E. & Barrett, D. M. 1981. Continental crust beneath the Agul-
has Plateau, southwest Indian Ocean. J. geophys. Res. 86: 3791-3806.
VANDERPOOL, H. C. 1928. Fossils from the Trinity Group (lower Comanchean). J. Paleont. 2:
95-107.
Wuat Ley, R. 1970. Scottish Callovian and Oxfordian ostracoda. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist.
(Geol.) 19: 297-358.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text _ :
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ ; a,
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
R. V. DINGLE
MID-CRETACEOUS OSTRACODA
FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA AND
THE FALKLAND PLATEAU
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
~ CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a)
Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
Introduction
Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
Summary, if paper is lengthy
Acknowledgements
References
Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b)
Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RAFFy, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 93 Band
June 1984 Junie
Part 4 Deel
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 15
MARINE ISOPODA
OF THE 1977, 1978, 1979 CRUISES
By
BRIAN KENSLEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
i, DOs SES), WED, ES, & tapal.)), SL=3y S, TO),
QC, horn HKD), 8, SX, 7), 1OCL3),
ND, 5, 7, eo), IED), 1IXGS5), 210), 27, SiIG=3)), BO), 3, 340), 0)
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 055 9
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Presssebty-. tide Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Part 15
MARINE ISOPODA OF THE 1977, 1978, 1979 CRUISES
By
BRIAN KENSLEY
Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.
(With 43 figures and 1 table)
[MS accepted 25 August 1983]
ABSTRACT
Fifty-one species (excluding the Anthuridea) collected off the east coast of South Africa
are recorded. Two new genera, Agularcturus (Arcturidae) and Natalianira (Janiridae) and the
following new species are described: Agularcturus granulatus, Antarcturus bicornis, Astacilla
eminentia, Microarcturus barnardi, M. halei, M. longispinus, M. nordenstami, Cirolana
bougaardti, C. convexissima, Paracilicaea cordylina, Stenetrium perestrelloi, Ianisera expansa,
Natalianira spinosa, Joeropsis integer, J. serrulus, Notoxenoides acalama, Haplomesus zuluensis,
Ischnomesus glabra, Stylomesus natalensis. The new name, Cirolana anocula, is provided for C.
caeca Kensley, 1978, non Dollfus, found to be a homonym of a previously described Mediterra-
nean species.
A brief discussion of the distribution and zoogeography of the isopods of all five cruises in-
dicates the presence of a large endemic isopod fauna on the continental shelf and/or slope of
the east coast of South Africa.
CONTENTS
PAGE
HINO CUCM ON meres erratic. ate TA eis. wlan Se ees DAS
Species list for the 1977-9 cruises (excluding Anthuridea)........... 214
SVSlemaliC GISCUSSION i. ware. | ats SheMet nt oa « sane « ZAG,
ammilye MnCtUid Ga Crate. Se maetess ace nie c oi. sacle aie ole tan we NG
arriilyg @in@lamidacmer, er sn pe Ce qty ne cand ost cant se 260
amilves PiacnOmavidacw ears ame oe eaten sas ii ade eno eae 268
amily: Ste ne tilGACae wunce crac eee Soares See ons ee ne ean ete Die
Jeeaaallsy VevenieVOlerS. 5 pees Wie gate core eC esee ato ice meen ectoeeae een oe 27S
Fayonlkh? VOSRO OCHS, cabs bac seus seuoe ss comecuuomor sc ogoumas 285
amulwaeleunoeOniiddcmr acc sora cree ri) cee ra 289
amaillyelschnonlesiddesar sre emer eine ota ie se o> ie 291
Distnibuciontand|zZoogeosraphye. scaeecs ss ee oe eae ee 298
FPNCKNOWICAPCINEM(S ey ateies e ee etiam cet cle Biya eee > ct 299
INGHOREINCS clave. 6 Seton s eee ee MPL is athe Aan 299
INTRODUCTION
The present paper deals with most of the isopod material collected by the
South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises of 1977, 1978, and 1979. The
isopod material from the first two cruises has already been dealt with in several
213
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 93 (4), 1984: 213-301, 43 figs, 1 table.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
publications (the Anthuridea (Kensley 1978c) and infraorders excluding the An-
thuridea (Kensley 1978a)). Several shorter papers dealing with discreet taxa
have also appeared (Kensley 1978b, 1978d, 1979). The Anthuridea of the three
later cruises have been included in a revision of the southern African fauna
(Kensley 1982). A brief discussion of the distributional information of all the
cruises is given at page 298. A review of all the southern African species of
Microarcturus (including those not collected during the Meiring Naude cruises)
is included in an attempt to clarify the complicated taxonomy of this genus.
Because of the confusion over names in the genus Astacilla, figures and a brief
description of one Mediterranean species is included.
Station data for the 1975 and 1976 cruises may be found in Louw (1977),
and for the 1977-9 cruises in Louw (1980).
SPECIES Vist FOR WHE 1977-9" CRUISES
(EXCLUDING ANTHURIDEA)
Material not identified to specific level is either damaged or immature.
SM station
no. 3 2 ovig. 2 juv.
INFRAORDER VALVIFERA
Family Arcturidae
*Agularcturus granulatus sp. nov. 163
*Antarcturus bicornis sp. nov. 226
Antarcturus kladophorus Stebbing 185
Arcturina hexagonalis Barnard 180
Arcturina scutula Kensley 164
N
Go
i)
Pel eal isl
|
(=
i)
(oS)
NO
COR WW NFR NR NN NR RR BNR YR
Arcturinoides sexpes Kensley 163/4
—
(oe)
N
Nw
Astacilla corniger (Stebbing) 185
*Astacilla eminentia sp. nov. 103
Po ees Pt Pisce l les
Astacilla longispina (Kensley) 250
Astacilla tranquilla (Kensley) 163/4
hos]
Pi dt te PSst8a Gros test td tien
Austroarcturus africana Kensley 163
— a
SoMNnN wv
—
NNN
*
= new record
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Austroarcturus foveolatus Kensley
*Microarcturus barnardi sp. nov.
Microarcturus dayi Kensley
*Microarcturus halei sp. nov.
*Microarcturus longispinus sp. nov.
*Microarcturus nordenstami sp. nov.
Microarcturus ornatus Kensley
Microarcturus oudops (Barnard)
Microarcturus quadriconus Kensley
Microarcturus youngi Kensley
Spinarcturus natalensis Kensley
Family Idoteidae
Idotea metallica Bosc
INFRAORDER FLABELLIFERA
Family Cirolanidae
Cirolana anocula nom. nov.
*Cirolana bougaardti sp. nov.
*Cirolana convexissima sp. nov.
Cirolana theleceps Barnard
Cirolana virilis Barnard
Conilorpheus scutifrons Stebbing
Family Aegidae
Syscenus infelix Harger
* =new record
SM station
no.
—
P| oe het re crea cont ton <a torent Cauiease 1) Sa Prone eee nope | renee se
—
FW Tf toe en |
= Fs eRe ||
ovig. ¢
TT)
Pers se
eel i |eniSileallesall | |elel|sa8]
OW
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SM station
no. 3 2 ovig. 2 juv.
Family Sphaeromatidae
Cymodoce alia Kensley 250 1 1 — if
Cymodoce tuberculosa Richardson 163 5 — — _
Cymodoce velutina Kensley 185 1 1 — 1
250 — — — 1
*Paracilicaea cordylina sp. nov. 15 1 _- — —
INFRAORDER GNATHIIDEA
Family Gnathiidae
Gnathia africana Barnard 179 if — — —
185 33 7 — —
Gnathia cryptopais Barnard 226 2 _- — —
228 1 — — —
232 y) — — —
Gnathia spongicola Barnard 86 3) — — —
(in situ, in sponge Tylodesma sp.)
INFRAORDER ASELLOTA
Family Stenetriidae
Stenetrium abyssale Wolff 165 — — —
226 — 1 — —
Stenetrium crassimanus Barnard 250 — 2 — —
Stenetrium dagama Barnard 123 1 1 —
129 1 2 1 oa
Sil — 1 —
185 _ 1 — ——
226 2) — — —
232 1 — — —
Stenetrium diazi Barnard 250 3 — +
*Stenetrium perestrelloi sp. nov. 163/4 2 1 il 18
Stenetrium saldanha Barnard 185 1 — — —
Family Janiridae
*Tanisera expansa sp. nov. 86 Z 1 —
103 — 4 — —
73) 2 2 _ —
129 4 3 4 —
185 — 1 — 3
226 3 2 il —
*Natalianira spinosa sp. nov. 86 1 — — —
103 1 — — —
13) 1 — — —
129 1 — 1 —
Paracanthaspidia natalensis Kensley 123 1 oo — —
226 — 1 — —
228 — 1 1
Spinianirella walfishensis Menzies 129 2 6 1 1
162 — 1 —
226 1 — — —
236 1 — — —
250 — 1 — —
Family Joeropsidae
*Joeropsis integer sp. nov. 163 — Z 1 =
*Joeropsis serrulus sp. nov. 163/4 — 1 if —
185 — — 1 —
* =new record
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Family Munnidae
Munna sp.
Family Pleurogoniidae
*Notoxenoides acalama sp. nov.
Family Haploniscidae
Haploniscus gernekei Kensley
Family Eurycopidae
Eurycope glabra Kensley
Family Ilyarachnidae
Ilyarachna wolffi Kensley
Family Ischnomesidae
*Haplomesus zuluensis sp. nov.
*Ischnomesus glabra sp. nov.
*Stylomesus natalensis sp. nov.
SYSTEMATIC DISCUSSION
INFRAORDER VALVIFERA
Diagnosis
SM station
no.
123
129
250
BIE,
Family Arcturidae
Agularcturus gen. nov.
Re eS WR Re
Sr pOTOnEy |
—_
lw |
Jw
— |
ZAG
Head and pereonite 1 fused. Eyes dorsolateral. Antennal flagellum of two
articles, ending in short claw. Pereopod 1, dactylus lacking terminal claw
or spine. Pereopods 2—4 lacking dactyli. Pereonite 4 elongate, broad in female,
cylindrical in male. Pleon consisting of one fused pleonite plus pleotelson.
Exopod of pleopod 1
in male with notch at
midlength and
three
specialized spines. Copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 male elongate-slender,
apically bifid.
Type species
Agularcturus granulatus sp. nov.
Etymology
The name is derived from the Agulhas Current, which dominates the hy-
drology of the east coast of South Africa, plus the suffix ‘arcturus’ frequently
used for members of this family.
* =new record
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Agularcturus falls into the group of genera possessing a notched exopod of
pleopod 1 male, i.e. Arcturina, Astacilla, Neastacilla, Arcturinoides, Arcturella,
and Spinarcturus. The absence of a claw on the dactylus of pereopod 1 distin-
guishes it from Astacilla, while the lack of dactyli on pereopods 2—4 separates it
from Neastacilla. The single fused pleonite in the pleon separates it from the rest
of the group, as does the apically bifid copulatory stylet.
Agularcturus granulatus sp. nov.
Figs 1-2
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM-—A15666, SM 179, 33°30'S 27°22’E,
80 m, 1 ovig. 2, TL 9,1 mm. Allotype SAM-—A15667, SM 163, 33°04’S 28°06’E,
90m, 1 3, TL7,9 mm. Paratype SAM-—A15668, SM 185, 33°39'S 27°11’E,
90m, 1 6, TL 5,5 mm. Paratypes SAM—A15669, SM 163, 90 m, 1 ovig. @,
TL 8,0 mm, 1 6, TL 5,5 mm, 3 juvs. Paratypes USNM 189066, SM 163, 90 m,
L@, Wo sO umn, lone, 2, IL 7,5 maw.
Description
Female
Dorsolateral integument densely granulate, indurate, with fairly dense pile
of fine, short setules. Head with two pairs of submedian, roughly conical tuber-
cles, posterior pair longer; anterior margin deeply concave, anterolateral corners
subacute. Eyes well pigmented, triangular. Head and pereonite 1 fused, line of
fusion indicated by dorsolateral groove and ventrolateral slit; well-developed
ventrolateral rim concealing buccal cavity and pereopod 1 in lateral view. Pereo-
nite 1 with large median conical tubercle; epimeron barely marked. Pereonites
2-3 subequal, each with blunt middorsal tubercle; epimera short, with straight
lateral margin. Pereonite 4 broader anteriorly than long, with slight posterior
taper; lateral margin a broad rounded ridge; cluster of three dorsal tubercle
clumps in anterior half; distinct hollow near posterolateral corner; strong sub-
median pair of backwardly directed spine-like tubercles on posterior margin.
Pereonites 5—6 decreasing in length posteriorly, each with middorsal spine-like
tubercle, epimera roughly triangular. Pleon consisting of single fused segment
bearing strong middorsal spine-like tubercle, plus broadly pentagonal pleo-
telson; latter lacking ornament, with strong lateral angle; apex angle obtuse.
Antennule with three-articulate peduncle and uniarticulate flagellum bear-
ing four aesthetascs. Antenna equal in length to head plus pereonites 1-4; fla-
gellum of two articles, ending in short claw. Mouth-parts as figured. Pereopod 1
much shorter than pereopod 2, five distal articles setose; dactylus lacking strong
terminal claw. Pereopods 2-4 slender, strongly setose, dactyli lacking; three
proximal articles with pile of short setules on outer margins, basal article with
outer surface granulate; coxa of pereopod 4 forming major part of brood-pouch,
219
B. Female, lateral view.
dorsal view.
dorsal view. Scales =2 mm.
A. Male,
nov.
A
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
C. Female
Fig. 1. Agularcturus granulatus sp
220
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
ae
iP
=
|
ty Zi
J
rin
i=-
=
es ale
Li /
iB .
|
1
2
eA
AG
\\
a
i
|
|
Aa
EPR NEE
yi
100)
j iy
Wit
We
Y
Fig. 2. Agularcturus granulatus sp. nov.
D. Pleopod 1 male.
A. Pereopod 1. 8B. Pereopod 2.
F. Maxillal. G. Maxilla 2.
C. Maxilliped.
E. Pleopod 2 male. H. Antennule.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 221
granulate near articulation. Pereopods 5—7 robust, all articles bearing dense pile
of fine setules, longer than in anterior pereopods; bases with two spinose tuber-
cles on outer surface.
Male
Body cylindrical, integument densely granulate. Head and pereonite 1 with
low, rounded submedian tubercle. Pereonite 4 slightly longer than head plus
pereonites 1-3; posterodorsal margin with four posteriorly directed spinose
tubercles. Pereonites 5—7 decreasing in length posteriorly, each with strong
spinose middorsal and shorter lateral tubercle. Single fused pleonite bearing
single middorsal spinose tubercle. Pleotelson relatively narrower than in female.
Antenna equal in length to head plus pereon. Pleopod 1, exopod with
broad notch at about midlength of outer margin armed with three elongate
bristled spines; about ten plumose setae on distal margin. Pleopod 2, copulatory
stylet articulating near base of endopod, basally broad, tapering distally,
extending by almost half its length beyond ramus, apically bifid, tips slightly
broadened; endopod basally narrow, widening to distal margin bearing seven
plumose setae.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the granulate integument of this species.
Antarcturus zur Strassen, 1902
Antarcturus bicornis sp. nov.
Figs 3-4
Material
Holotype SAM-A15670, SM 232, 32°14’S 29°10’E, 560-620m, 1 4d,
TL 11,5 mm. Paratypes SAM—A15671, SM 232, 560-620 m, 2 ¢6 (both dam-
aged), 2 juvs. SAM—A15672, SM 226, 32°28’S 28°58’E, 710-775 m, 1 juv. Para-
type USNM 189067, SM 232, 560-620 m, 1 6, TL 11,1 mm.
Description
Male
Body cylindrical, integument smooth, with few low, rounded tubercula-
tions. Eyes lateral, well pigmented. Head with anterior pair of dorsal conical
spines; anterior margin concave; ventrolateral margins not concealing pereopod 1
and mouth-parts in lateral view. Pereonite 1 fused with head, line of fusion
marked by shallow dorsolateral groove, and short ventrolateral slit. Pereonites 2
and 3 similar, short. Pereonite 4 about twice length of preceding segment, cylin-
drical in dorsal view, with slight posterior flange. Midventral processes lacking
on all pereonites. Pereonites 5—7 decreasing in length posteriorly, each with
shallow transverse groove. Pleon consisting of three faintly indicated fused pleo-
nites plus broadly convex, posteriorly rounded pleotelson.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
222
p=,
mf iy
Z —VWApAVAl
Dade!
p
ip
_
—S wwe ue
TRS
\
dorsal view.
Scale = 2 mm.
b)
B. Pleotelson
E. Pleopod 2 male.
A. Male, lateral view.
D. Pleopod 1 male.
Fig. 3. Antarcturus bicornis sp. nov.
C. Pereopod 1.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 223
VY
tif
jf,
Fig. 4. Antarcturus bicornis sp. nov. A. Mandible. B. Maxilla 1. CC. Maxilla 2.
D. Maxilliped. E. Penis. F. Uropodal rami.
Antennule not reaching distal end of antennal peduncular article 3; flagellum
uniarticulate. Antenna almost as long as body, articles 4 and 5 of peduncle
slender-elongate; flagellum claw-like, of three articles. Mandible with tricuspid
sclerotized incisor; strongly spinose lacinia; molar distally broad, armed with
marginal serrations and submarginal spines. Maxilla 1, inner ramus with three
stout fringed setae; outer ramus with eleven distal spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus
with nine fringed setae; inner lobe of outer ramus with two setae, outer lobe
with three setae. Maxilliped, endite with eight distal fringed setae; palp of five
articles, medial margin of articles 2 and 3 spinose; article 3 longest and broadest;
exopod elongate-oval. Pereopod 1 armed with numerous finely fringed setae-
spines on posterior margin; propodus broadest article; dactylus with strong
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
terminal claw. Pereopods 2—4 similar, slender, becoming more elongate pos-
teriorly; elongate setae on bases, ischia, meri, carpi, and propodi; dactyli
slender, with elongate slender claw. Pereopods 5-7 similar, robust, bases be-
coming shorter posteriorly; fine matting of setules on inner (posterior) surfaces;
dactyli curved, with short ungui. Penis distally bilobed, fused for proximal two-
thirds, widest at proximal third. Pleopod 1 basis with five retinaculae on medial
margin, thirteen peg-like projections on outer margin; endopod broader than
exopod, with oblique groove on anterior surface, distally flexed and convoluted,
with rounded mesial lobe bearing elongate plumose setae; numerous simple
setae-spines on outer margin proximal to modified apex; exopod elongate-
rectangular, bearing plumose setae. Pleopod 2 rami subequal, copulatory stylet
articulating at base of endopod, extending just beyond ramus, tapering distally
to slender grooved acute apex. Uropoda convex, rami minute, outer ramus tri-
angular, inner ramus one-third basal width of outer, with single apical seta.
Remarks
While the elongation of pereonite 4 and the highly modified apex of the
exopod of pleopod 1 is not usual, the rest of the appendages and overall struc-
ture of the present species agree with the generally accepted definition of Ant-
arcturus. Until a mature female of this species is found and the generic diagnosis
is settled, this would seem to be the best placement.
While several species of Antarcturus are relatively free of integumental
spines and tubercles, none seems to resemble A. bicornis in having just two
conical spines on the head and not having pleotelsonic ornament.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the two spines on the head of this species.
Astacilla Cordiner, 1795
Astacilla corniger (Stebbing, 1873)
Figs 5-6
Arcturus corniger Stebbing, 1873: 97, pl. 3 (fig. 2) (recorded from Algoa Bay); 1908: 51.
Arcturus (?) corniger: Barnard, 1914: 207.
Arcturella corniger: Barnard, 1920: 391; 1925: 381; 1940: 493, 509; 1955: 6. Kensley, 1975a: 37;
1978e: 19, fig. 7B—-C.
Antarcturus ornatus Tattersall, 1913: 889, fig. 5. Vanhodffen, 1914: 526.
Astacilla setosa Vanhoffen, 1914: 525, fig. 55.
Arcturopsis hirsutus Barnard, 1914: 207, pl. 19A.
Arcturopsis hirsutus var. subglaber Barnard, 1914: 211.
Astacilla mediterranea non Koehler, Barnard, 1920: 388; 1940: 493, 509.
Neastacilla mediterranea: Kensley, 1978e: 33, fig. 1SA-B.
Material
Saldanha Bay area. SAM-—AS52, 160 m, 1 ovig. 2 (syntype of Arcturopsis
hirsutus var. subglaber). SAM-A3888, 40m, 3 d, 1 ovig. 2, 3 2, 3 juvs.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 225
SAM-A13784, 50-54 m, 2 6, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13785, 37 m, 3 6, 10 ovig. 9,
1 juv. SAM-A13787, 18-33 m, 1 ovig. @.
Cape Pont area. SAM—A54, 56 m, 29 d, 7 ovig. 2, 7 @ (syntypes of Arc-
turopsis hirsutus). SAM-—AS55, 56 m, 24 6, 8 ovig. 2,5 2. SAM-A3829, 48 m,
1 3,3 ovig. 2, 1 juv. SAM-A4072, 74 m, 1 ¢.
False Bay. SAM—A53, 22 m, 1 ovig. ?. SAM-A13786, 26 m, 3 6, 1 juv.
SAM-A13790, 68 m, 1 6, 4 ovig. 2. SAM-A13794, 73 m, 9 6. SAM-13795,
29m, 1 6, 2 juvs. SAM-A13796, 33 m, 3 ovig. 2. SAM—A13797, 13 m, 3 juvs.
SAM-A13798, 31 m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13799, 13 m, 3 6, 4 ovig. 2, 1 9,
2 juvs. SAM-A13800, 26 m, 5 dg, 1 ovig. 2, 1 2, 11 juvs. SAM-A13801, 26 m,
DEO TOVIS ne allay ee2 juVvVS. SAM-A13802, 22 m, 1 6, 5 ovig. 2, 1 2, 6 juvs.
SAM-A13803, 4448m, 1 6, 1 juv. SAM-A13804, 7-9m, 1 92.
SAM-A13805, 26-29 m, 1 6, 2 ovig. 2, 1 2. SAM-A13806, 15 m, 2 ovig. @.
SAM-A13807 26-29 m, 1 3d. SAM-A13808, 33m, 1 juv. SAM-A13809,
29m, 2 ovig. 2. SAM-A13810, 31m, 1 ovig. 9. SAM-A13811, 29 m,
1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13812, 68 m, 1 d. SAM—A13813, 31 m, 1 d6. SAM-A13814,
42 m, 6 6, 2 ovig. 1 juv. SAM—-A13815, 5 m, 1 6. SAM-A13816, 36 m, 1 6,
1 9. SAM-A13817, 27 m 5 d, 4 ovig. 2, 1 2, 3 juvs. SAM-A13818, 1 ¢,
5 ovig. 2. SAM-A13836, 19 m, 2.6.
Agulhas Bank area. SAM-A3861, 94m, 2 6, 2 ovig. 2, 1 @, 7 juvs.
SAM-A4175, 56m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A4190, 1 6, 3 ovig. 2, 1 juv.
SAM-A5956, 80m, 1 6, 2 ovig. 2, 2 juvs. SAM-A6624, 40 m, 1 ovig. &.
SAM-A13793, 110 m, 8 6, 2 ovig. 2, 2 juvs. SAM-A13819, 84m5 d, 1 ovig. 2,
1 2. SAM-A13820, 93m, 1 6, 1 ovig. @, 1 juv. SAM-A13821, 45 m,
2 ovig. 2. SAM—A13822, 49 m, 1 6, 1 ovig. 2, 2 juvs. SAM-A13823, 79 m,
1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13824, 110m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13825, 48m, 1 o.
SAM-A13826, 42m, 2 6. SAM-A13827, 73m 1 6. SAM-A13828, 93 m,
2 6. SAM-A13829, 97 m, 1 6. SAM-A13830, 45 m, 1 d. SAM-A13831, 36 m,
1 ovig. @. SAM-A13832, 42m, 1 6. SAM-A13833, 44m, 2 4,
1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13834, 42 m, 2 ovig. 2. SAM-A13835, 110 m, 1 d, 3 ovig. &.
East London area. USNM 189068, SM 185, 90m, 1 6, 1 ovig. 2, 1 &,
5 juvs.
Description
Female
Head and pereonite 1 fused, line of fusion marked by shallow dorsolateral
groove and short slit in ventrolateral margin. Head with large rounded-
triangular eye; armed with short anterior and longer posterior pair of conical
tubercles. Pereonite 1 with strong middorsal conical tubercle. Pereonites 2-3
with median conical tubercles shorter than those of pereonite 1, and with low,
rounded, dorsolateral tubercles; coxal plates distinct, subcircular. Pereonite 4
longer than head and three anterior pereonites together; body widest (in dorsal
view) at anterior end of pereonite 4; anterior middorsal process consisting of
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. Astacilla corniger (Stebbing) A. Female, lateral view. B. Male, lateral view.
C. Pereonite 4, male, ventral view. D. Pleotelson, dorsal view. E. Pleopod 1 male.
F. Pleopod 2 male. Scale =2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 227
\
\V i}
\ \\ V/
' \ \ A / )
| \ \ MA
) | \ | K \\y i /
Fig. 6. Astacilla corniger (Stebbing) A. Pereopod2. B. Pereopod 1.
two large lateral slightly flattened apically acute tubercles flanking shorter
rounded middorsal tubercle; two large conical submedian dorsal tubercles near
posterior margin; four or five low, rounded tubercles laterally; coxal plate form-
ing major part of brood-pouch, with row of low tubercles near articulation. Pereo-
nites 5—7 each with short conical middorsal tubercle, and low lateral tubercle;
sideplates rounded. Pleon consisting of three fused segments indicated by shal-
low dorsolateral grooves, and pentagonal pleotelson, latter dorsally smooth, api-
cally rounded. Antenna, if extended posteriorly, reaching pereonite 7. Mouth-
parts typical of genus. Pereopod 1 with ventrolateral margins concealed within
ventrolateral margins of head and pereonite 1. Pereopods 2-4 increasing in
length posteriorly, slender, setose. Pereopods 5—7 robust, decreasing in length
posteriorly. Outer uropodal ramus very short, triangular, inner ramus much
smaller, bearing single apical seta.
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Male
Head with two low, rounded anterior tubercles, and two larger, rounded
posterior tubercles. Pereonite 1 with single conical middorsal tubercle. Pereonite
4 elongate, subcylindrical, widening slightly at midlength, with single small mid-
dorsal rounded tubercle in anterior half, another near posterior margin. Pereo-
nites 5—7 lacking tubercles. Antenna, if extended posteriorly, reaching to
pereonite 7. Ventral process on pereonite 4 trilobed. Pleopod 1 rami subequal in
length, both bearing elongate plumose setae; exopod with indentation in proxi-
mal half armed with three elongate bristled setae. Pleopod 2, rami subequal in
length, bearing elongate plumose setae; copulatory stylet on endopod extending
well beyond rami, terminating in one short and two more elongate slender, api-
cally acute spinose processes.
Remarks
The chaotic state of arcturid generic taxonomy is well illustrated by the
present species, Astacilla corniger, having been placed in six different genera
since 1873. An element of doubt still remains, but the present placement in As-
tacilla was decided by several factors: pereopod 1 has a strong terminal claw on
the dactylus; pereopods 2-4 lack dactyli; pleopod 1 in the male has an endopod
with a median notch and three specialized setae, while the copulatory stylet of
pleopod 2 is apically trifid. These four features agree with the definition of Asta-
cilla, as elucidated by Lew Ton (pers. comm.). While the male of A. corniger
has the slender body form typical of Astacilla, the ovigerous female is consider-
ably broader, especially at pereonite 4, than in many other females of Astacilla
species. Until Arcturella and Arcturopsis can be more closely defined, the pres-
ent placement is perhaps the most satisfactory solution.
Sixty-five samples of Astacilla corniger have been examined and the degree
of variation assessed. At one extreme the females have low, rounded tubercles
with fairly dense pile of golden setae, the males have a low pile of setae and lack
tubercles. At the other end of the range the females lack setae and have well-
developed and elongate tubercles, sometimes becoming spine-like, while the
males lack setae and have rounded to spinose tubercles. Between these extremes
almost every variation has been noted, sometimes this variation being consider-
able within the same sample. There is thus no justification for maintaining Bar-
nard’s (1914) variety subglaber, either as a subspecies or as a separate species.
Barnard (1920) based his conclusion that his specimen from Natal was the
same as the Mediterranean species on Koehler’s description and somewhat dia-
grammatic figure. Barnard did note that the tubercle on pereonite 4 in the fe-
male was not symmetrical as in Koehler’s figure. In fact, the Natal specimen was
an immature specimen. With fresh material from the Mediterranean and mature
material from Natal, closer comparison is possible. Pereonite 4 in the female
easily separates the two species: Astacilla mediterranea has a single conical ante-
rior and posterior middorsal tubercle; A. corniger has a trilobed anterior and a
bilobed posterior middorsal tubercle. The males of the two species are more
229
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
TSOP PSST OOS
—— SSS
Saas
—<—<————
= Zz SSS
EES
SOROS EON
DSSS SSS
SSS SSS SS
. SEN
>
B. Anterior margin of head.
E. Pleotelson, dorsal view.
Scale = 2 mm
&
(a0)
ht
3
zg 8
ae}
a.
URES
Po es
or)
GS SSP
oO
aoe
NG
299
a) a we
Seu, (E
, 3 &
LAd
fe)
a.
28
2 =
ee
As
o
Re
SPs
So F
Sac
ae
So 8
svo
SS) an
Er Ble
oO
7 =
~ oO
, AY
.— ae
i O
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
similar, except in pleopod structure. A. mediterranea has an undifferentiated
pleopod 1, while the copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 is a single robust cylindrical
structure. (There is a possibility that the recent Mediterranean material exam-
ined is immature, in which case this comparison is invalid). A. corniger possesses
a modified endopod of pleopod 1, while the copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 is a
slender apically trifid structure. Similar pleopodal structure is seen in A. longi-
spina and A. eminentia.
Astacilla eminentia sp. nov.
Figs 7-8
Material
Zululand to Transkei area. Holotype SAM-—A15673, SM 232, 32°14’S
29°10’E, 560-620 m, 1 36, TL6,7 mm. Paratypes SAM—A15674, SM 103,
28°31'S 32°34’E, 680m, 1 6, TL6,0 mm, 3 juvs. Paratype SAM-A15675,
SM 109, 28°41’S 32°36’E, 1 300 m, 1 ¢d, TL 6,3 mm. Paratypes SAM-—A15676,
SM 232, 560-620m, 1 6, TL3,5mm, 2 &, (damaged). Paratypes
SAM-A17791, SM 250, 31°59’S 29°22’E, 150—200 m, 2 ¢, TL 5,1 mm, 5,3 mm.
Paratypes USNM 189069, SM 226, 32°28’S 28°58’E, 710-775m, 2 4,
INL, 7/1 sorvin., 7/0 taven,
Description
Male
Integument smooth, body elongate, especially pereonite 4, cylindrical.
Head fused with pereonite 1, with lateral incision and dorsolateral groove indi-
cating area of fusion; anterior margin strongly concave, with tiny rostral point;
anterolateral and ventrolateral margin forming rim of buccal cavity; anteroven-
tral margin projecting, trilobed. Eyes circular, barely pigmented. Pereonites 2—3
subequal; pereonite 4 elongate-cylindrical; pereonites 5—7 similar, becoming
shorter posteriorly. Pleon consisting of three fused pleonites, each indicated by
shallow grooves, plus narrowly triangular pleotelson; latter with posterior half
dorsally flexed.
Antennule of three short peduncular articles and uniarticulate flagellum
bearing nine aesthetascs distally. Antennal peduncle of two short proximal arti-
cles and three more elongate articles, fourth longest; flagellum of three or four
articles. Mouth-parts typical of genus. Pereopod 1 within buccal rim, shorter
than pereopods 2-4, four distal articles bearing elongate fringed setae; strong
terminal spine present on dactylus, strong serrate spine on propodus. Pereopods
2-4 increasing in length posteriorly, dactyli absent; four distal articles bearing
very elongate fringed setae. Pereopods 5—7 robust, with fine setules on posterior —
margins of five distal articles. Penis distally bifid, curved. Pleopod 2 with exopod
shorter than endopod, both rami bearing elongate plumose setae; copulatory
stylet attached near base of endopod, proximally inflated, distally tapering to
trifid apex, extending to ends of endopodal setae. Uropod widest at midlength,
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 231
Fig. 8. Astacilla eminentia sp. nov. A. Pereopod1. B.Pereopod2. C. Pereopod 7.
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
narrowly tapered distally, outer ramus narrowly triangular, inner ramus tiny,
bearing single terminal seta.
Female
Pereonite 4 inflated, widest at midlength; coxae and oostegites forming
major part of brood-pouch.
Remarks
The present species resembles Astacilla bacillus (Barnard, 1920), recorded
from False Bay to Zululand, in its overall slender-cylindrical form, but differs in
several features, three of which easily separate these two species: pereonite 5 in
A. bacillus is ventrally produced and markedly larger than pereonites 6 and 7; in
A. eminentia, pereonite 5 is subequal to pereonites 6 and 7; the eye is pyriform
and strongly pigmented in A. bacillus, circular and weakly pigmented in A. emi-
nentia; the anterior buccal rim projects prominently (in lateral view) in A. emi-
nentia, but is barely noticeable in A. bacillus. Size is a further separating
feature, adult males of A. bacillus having a total length of 20,0 mm; adult males
of A. eminentia reach 7,1 mm in total length.
Etymology
The specific name ‘eminentia’, from the Latin meaning ‘that which projects’,
refers to the anterior margin of the buccal rim.
Astacilla longispina (Kensley, 1978)
Neastacilla longispina Kensley, 1978a: 133, figs 5-6; 1978e: 33, fig. 14C-D.
Material
East London area. SAM-—A17792, SM 250, 150-200 m, 1 6,1 @.
Remarks
From the figure of pereopods 1 and 2 (Kensley 1978a, fig. 6b—c), it can be
seen that this species is a typical Astacilla sensu Lew Ton.
Astacilla mediterranea Koehler, 1911
Fig. 9
Astacilla mediterranea Koehler, 1911: 44, figs 25-29.
Material
USNM 211346, Marseille, 75 m, 7 6, 2 ovig. 2, taken from the gorgo-
nacean Lophogorgia sarmentosa.
Previous records
Villefranche, Mediterranean Sea.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 233
Fig. 9. Astacilla mediterranea Koehler A. Female, lateral view. B. Male, lateral view.
C. Pleopod 1 male. D. Pleopod 2 male (immature).
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Because of the confusion with the South African Astacilla corniger, and be-
cause the species has not been described since 1911, the male and female are
figured here.
Astacilla tranquilla (Kensley, 1975)
Fig. 10
Neastacilla tranquilla Kensley, 1975a: 62, fig. 13; 1978e: 33, fig. 1SC-—D.
Material
East London area. SAM—A17793, SM 164, 90m, 1 d6. SAM-—A17794,
SM 163/4, 90 m, 1 36, 1 juv. SAM-—A17795, SM 179, 80 m, 1 6. SAM-A17796,
SM 185, 90 m, 2 6.
Remarks
The first and second pereopods agree with the definition of Astacilla sensu
Lew Ton.
Microarcturus Nordenstam, 1933
Diagnosis
Body anteriorly somewhat dorsoventrally flattened (more marked in fe-
male); seldom geniculate between pereonites 4 and 5. Head with lateral margins
incised. Eyes dorsolateral and well developed and pigmented, to weakly pig-
mented or absent. Integument variously sculptured, frequently tuberculate.
Pereonite 1 fused with head, line of fusion sometimes marked by groove. Coxae
visible dorsally on all pereonites, those of pereonites 2—4 often extending lat-
erally, triangular or semicircular in dorsal view. Pleon consisting of three fused
segments plus pleotelson, two anterior fused segments demarked by shallow
dorsal grooves; pleotelson often pentagonal or shield-shaped, posteriorly acute
or narrowly rounded.
Antennule with three-articulate peduncle; flagellum of single article bearing
aesthetascs. Antenna less than total body length; peduncle of four articles; fla-
gellum of two articles, ending in short claw. Mandible stout, sclerotized, with
well-developed incisor, lacinia mobilis, spine row, and molar. Maxilla 1 bi-
ramous, outer ramus with stout distal spines, inner with three stout setae. Maxil-
la 2, inner ramus with several stout distal setae; two lobes of outer ramus each
with two stout elongate distal setae. Maxilliped with broad endite; five-
segmented setose palp; broad epipod. Pereopod 1 considerably shorter than fol-
lowing legs, hidden by lateral flanges of head and pereonite 1, bearing numerous
fringed spines. Pereopods 2-4 relatively slender, with elongate setae on poste-
rior margins. Pereopods 5—7 robust, non-setose. Uropods folded ventrally, bi-
ramous, hinging with pleotelson at about midlength, basis forming most of
operculum; outer ramus short, triangular, tipped with single seta; inner ramus
B
Fig. 10. Astacilla tranquilla Kensley A. Pereopod1. _ B. Pereopod 2.
minute, with single distal seta. Penis in male elongate, curved, distally bifid.
Pleopod 1 in male, basis with three to five retinaculae on medial margin, row of
five to fifteen peg-like spines on outer margin, posterior face grooved, distally
rounded and variously convoluted, distal margin with several elongate plumose
setae; endopod varying in length from being equal in length to exopod, to less
than half length and width of exopod. Pleopod 2 in male with stout grooved
copulatory stylet articulating at base of endopod; apex of copulatory stylet vary-
ing from simple gutter-like opening, to bilobed and convoluted.
Remarks
Nordenstam (1933) separated twelve species under Microarcturus, from an
unwieldy group of species variously described as Antarcturus or Arcturus, on the
following criteria: antennae shorter than total body length, with flagellum of
three articles (rarely two or four); abdomen short, never longer than last four
pereonites. Nordenstam (1933: 128) also noted that Microarcturus contained
‘small forms’.
Hale (1946) noted that at least one species mentioned by Nordenstam under
Microarcturus possesses a longitudinally cleft exopod of pleopod 1 in the male,
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
thereby placing it closer to Pseudarcturella, while in another species the pleon is
slightly longer than the last four pereonites. Thus the character of the length of
the antennae alone separates Microarcturus from closely related forms.
Yet another difference between Microarcturus and Antarcturus not hitherto
noted lies in the structure of the lateral flanges of the head and pereonite 1. This
is similar to the criterion used by Zur Strassen (1902) to separate Arcturus and
Antarcturus. In Antarcturus, there is almost no development of a lateral flange
on the head below the eyes, and on pereonite 1. The mouth-parts and pereo-
pod 1 are thus exposed in lateral view. In Microarcturus there is some develop-
ment of lateral flanges, but not sufficient to conceal completely the mouth-parts
and pereopod 1 in lateral view, as in Arcturus. Another, but not very satisfac-
tory, feature of difference is that of the general body shape of gravid females. In
Antarcturus ovigerous females retain an overall, generally cylindrical, shape,
with barely a bulge in the region of the marsupium. In Microarcturus ovigerous
females are distinctly broadened in the region of the marsupium with a degree of
dorsoventral flattening.
In the present discussion of Microarcturus species have been recognized
primarily on the basis of body shape—ornamentation combination, plus the
structure of the male reproductive appendages. Taken alone, body shape—
ornamentation would be an insecure basis for species separation, especially
considering the degree of variation already noted in the group (e.g. M. similis,
M. stebbingii, in Nordenstam 1933: 159). In this study sixty-five samples of
M. similis have been examined, giving a good idea of the range of variation in
body shape and integumental sculpturing. The shape of the epimera of pereo-
nites 2—4, being either triangular and acute, or semicircular, remains constant,
regardless of the integumental ornamentation. It is unfortunate that Schultz
(19825), in designating new astacillid genera, did not supply information or
figures for several, basing them instead on integumental ornamentation and
presence or absence of eyes. The former feature, as noted above for M. similis,
and for M. halei (p. 243) (and for Arcturides cornutus, in Kensley 1980) can be
variable both within and between species. Eyes may be present or absent, as
demonstrated in species of Microarcturus.
The first and second pleopods of the male provide another set of features
considered useful for specific separation. On the outer margin of the bases of
pleopod 1 some variation in the number of peg-spines has been noted, but
generally not varying by more than one or two spines within a species. The exo-
pod of pleopod 1 in the male is grooved on the posterior face and the distal part
generally bears a rounded lobe bearing elongate plumose setae plus a variously
shaped finely setulose lobe in the area of the distal end of the groove. There
would appear to be a trend in reduction in size and setation of the endopod,
being of equal length to the exopod in M. similis, and less than half the length
and width, and with few plumose setae, in M. oudops. This trend may be corre-
lated with depth, the reduction being clearest in the deepest occurring species.
The copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 in the male varies from being a simple
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 5,9
tapering gutter-like structure to an almost closed tube having a bilobed and
convoluted apex. Within a species there would seem to be little variation in the
adult in these appendages.
Distribution
As most of the twelve species of Microarcturus discussed here have been
taken from a very few collecting stations, the following remarks must be treated
with caution.
Six species have not been recorded from depths beyond 100 m and may be
termed shallow-continental shelf forms; three species have been recorded from
150 m to depths in excess of 700 m—these may be termed deep shelf-slope
species; three species have been taken beyond 550 m only and may be termed
slope species. Of these latter, M. oudops (680-1 500 m) has weakly pigmented
eyes, while M. biserialis (1 300 m) lacks eyes completely. (See Table 1.)
The evolutionary radiation of the twelve South African species of Microarcturus
gives rise to some observations, in spite of the relatively few stations involved.
From Saldanha Bay to the Agulhas Bank four species have been taken from shal-
low water (9-88 m). (M. similis has also been taken from a single station off Liide-
ritz.) As this area has been well sampled to depths of 200 m, it can be said with
some confidence that the known range of these species reflects their true geographi-
cal distribution. These four species seem to form a natural group, having a simple,
open copulatory stylet and relatively simple endopodal apices to pleopod 1 in the
male. The six east-coast species from shallow to shelf-slope depths also seem to
form a natural group, having convoluted apices of the stylet and pleopod 1 in the
TABLE 1
Distribution of southern African Microarcturus.
Species Depth range Geographic range Depth category
dayi 9-18 False Bay shallow shelf
similis 15-88 Saldanha Bay-Still Bay shallow shelf
quadriconus 22-80 False Bay—Still Bay shallow shelf
laevis 48-81 False Bay—Agulhas Bank shallow shelf
nordenstami 90 East London shallow shelf
ornatus 150-700 Still Bay—Transke' deep shelf/slope
longispina 150-775 Transkei deep shelf/slope
halei 150-1 300 Transkei—Zululand deep shelf/slope
youngli 550-680 Zululand slope
oudops 680-1 500 Cape Point—Zululand slope
biserialis 1 300 Zululand slope
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
male. The deeper occurring species (M. ornatus and M. halei) appear to have
relatively wide geographic ranges, while the two shallow species (M. barnardi
and M. nordenstami) appear to have a more restricted range.
On a somewhat restricted scale, this distribution pattern agrees with that of
other isopod groups, e.g. the anthuridans, viz. shallow species with high en-
demicity and narrow ranges, deep species with wide geographic ranges.
As little is known of the distribution of the non-South African species of
Microarcturus, some of which are taxonomically poorly defined, no further
speculation on the history of the genus can be made.
In the following discussion of individual species a diagnosis is given for
each, covering only the features used for separation. Figures of whole animals
plus relevant appendages are also provided. Only for M. similis, the most fre-
quently recorded species, are all the appendages figured.
Microarcturus barnardi sp. nov.
lenge, 11
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM-—A17797, SM 163, 33°04’S 28°06’E,
90m, 1 ovig, 2, TL 5,0 mm; allotype; 1 6) Tl 5.0mm SRaranecs
SAM-A17798, SM 163, 90 m, 5 6, 1 ovig. 2, 12 juvs. USNM 189070, SM 163,
90 m, 4 6, 2 ovig. &.
Diagnosis
Integument with numerous rounded tubercles. Tuberculate supraocular
ridges fairly prominent, but not as strong as in M. nordenstami. Eyes dorso-
lateral, well pigmented. Pereonites 2—4 each with central clump of tubercles an-
terodorsally. Epimera of pereonites 2-3 broadly oval in female, epimeron 4
reduced. Pleotelson apically narrowly rounded, lacking lateral angle, with large
elongate tubercles dorsally. Bases of pereopods 2—4 unarmed. First fused pleo-
nite in male with single dorsal row of tubercles; second fused pleonite consisting
of two large rounded tuberculate bosses, markedly inflated and convex in lateral
view. Third fused pleonite with single middorsal rounded tuberculate boss. Pleo-
pod 1 in male, distal margin rounded, bearing eight short plumose setae, run-
ning imperceptibly into finely setulose rounded lobe in area at end of groove;
endopod about three-fourths length of and slightly more than half width of
exopod. Copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 distally bilobed and convoluted.
Remarks
This species was collected with a single specimen of M. nordenstami off
East London, in 90 m. These two species may easily be separated by the strong
carunculated supraocular ridges, granulate pereonal bosses, and angled pleo-
telson of M. nordenstami, and the swollen fused pleonite 2 and non-angled pleo-
telson of M. barnardi.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 239
Fig. 11. Microarcturus barnardi sp. nov. A. Female, dorsal view. B. Male, dorsal view.
C. Pleotelson, male, lateral view. D.Pleopod1male. E. Pleopod 2 male.
F. Apex of copulatory stylet. Scale =2 mm.
240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
The species is named for the late Dr K. H. Barnard who contributed much
knowledge to isopod systematics.
Microarcturus biserialis Kensley, 1978
Bigal2
Microarcturus biserialis Kensley, 1978a: 128, fig. 2; 1978e: 27, fig. 11A-B.
Material
Holotype SAM-—A15467, 1 300 m, 1 6; paratypes, 2 d.
Diagnosis
Integument finely granulate. Head lacking eyes or even unpigmented om-
matidia; with one pair of narrow submedian processes. Pereonites 1—7 each with
one pair submedian conical processes. Epimera of pereonites 2—3 short, triangu-
lar. Fused pleonites 1—3 each with submedian pair of conical processes, anterior
pair smallest. Pleotelson with distinct lateral angle, posterior margin broadly tri-
angular. Pleopod 1 d, with distal margin of exopod formed by finely setulose
lobe, evenly convex; three short plumose setae medially; endopod slightly less
than half length of exopod, lacking elongate plumose setae, having only fine
setules. Copulatory stylet robust, open, distally acute, simple. Female unknown.
Microarcturus dayi Kensley, 1977
Fig. 13
Microarcturus dayi Kensley, 1977: 246, figs 6-7; 1978a: 133; 1978e: 28, fig. 11C-E.
Material
Saldanha Bay area. SAM-—A5952, 240 m, 1 6.
False Bay area. SAM-—A13843, 75 m, 1 6, 1 ovig. 2. SAM—A13895, 87 m,
2 ovig. 2. SAM-—A17799, 75 m, 1 6, 2 ovig. @.
Agulhas Bank. SAM-—A13772, 78 m, 1 6, 2 ovig. 2, 2 juvs. SAM—A13773,
106 m, 2 6. SAM-A17800, 84m, 1 6,2 2, 3 juvs.
East London area. SAM-—A17801, SM 179, 80m, 1 6. SAM-A17802,
SM 180, 80 m, 6 d, 1 ovig. &, 4 juvs.
Diagnosis
Integument with numerous small tubercles; 1 pair large conical tubercles on
head; female with pair of large flattened submedian tubercles on pereonite 3;
male and female with conical, posteriorly directed middorsal spine on fused
pleonite 3. Epimera of pereonite 2 triangular, distally rounded, of pereonite 4
rectangular in female, with marginal denticulations, reduced in male. Pleotelson
pentagonal, with strong subspinose lateral angle.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 241
HAMISNSs
|
—
SUL
Ne May
A. Male, dorsal view. B. Pleopod 1 male.
Fig. 12. Microarcturus biserialis Kensley
C. Pleopod 2 male. D. Apex of copulatory stylet. Scale =2 mm.
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. Microarcturus dayi Kensley A. Female, dorsal view. B. Female, lateral view.
C. Male, dorsal view. D.Pleopod1 male. EE. Pleopod2 male. F. Apex of copulatory stylet.
Scale = 2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 243
Pleopod 1 d, exopod with distal margin bearing 11 plumose setae, very
similar to M. similis; endopod subequal in length and width to exopod. Copula-
tory stylet an open gutter, with slight subterminal lobe.
Remarks
Microarcturus dayi and M. quadriconus have been taken from the same
sample from False Bay.
The ornamentation of M. dayi bears some resemblance to M. ornatus, but
the latter has more flattened dorsal tubercles, epimera 3—5 are semicircular in
dorsal view, and both male and female lack a middorsal pleonal spine.
Microarcturus halei sp. nov.
Fig. 14
Material
Zululand to Transkei area. Holotype SAM-—A17803, SM 103, 28°31’'S
32°34'E, 680m, 1 ovig. 2, TL 5,8 mm. Paratypes SAM-—A17804, SM 103,
680 m, 8 6, 3 ovig. 2. Paratypes SAM-—A17805, SM 250, 31°59’S 29°22’E,
150-200 m, 4 6, 4 ovig. 2, 17 juvs. SAM—A17806, SM 123, 690m, 2 6,
2 ovig. 2. SAM-A17807, SM 109, 1300m, 1 ovig. 9. SAM-—A17808,
SM 232, 560-620m, 14 6, 4 ovig. 2, 4 juvs. SAM-A17809, SM 226,
(0-77 sm, tis 6 ovis. 2,20 juvs: USNM 1189071, SM 250, 2 6, 2 ovig. 9.
USNM 189072, SM 103, 3 ¢, 1 ovig. &.
Diagnosis
Integumental ornamentation variable, either relatively smooth between
large tubercles or with numerous fine acute granulations. Head with antero-
lateral corners acute; eyes large, weakly pigmented. Pereonite 2 with two or
four elongate conical processes; occasionally, pereonites 2-3 each with four
conical processes; epimera of pereonites 2-3 triangular, distally narrowly
rounded to almost acute. Pereonites 5—7 subequal in length, decreasing in width
posteriorly. Bases of pereopods 2—4 with two or three spinose processes on an-
terior margins; coxal processes acutely triangular. Three fused pleonites de-
marked by shallow grooves; pleotelson pentagonal, with strong lateral angle or
tooth; apically acute.
Pleopod 1 5, exopod with distal rounded margin bearing nine elongate
plumose setae; groove opening on small curled lobe; with convex finely setulose
distal lobe; endopod five-sixths length and about half width of exopod. Copula-
tory stylet stout, distally bilobed.
Remarks
The firely granulate form of Microarcturus halei has an integument similar
to that of M. hirticornis (Monod) from the Antarctic, but differs markedly from
this species in having fewer elongate dorsal processes, and in having a
244
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
| \N
iy"
Fig. 14. Microarcturus halei sp. nov. A. Female, dorsal view. B. Female, dorsal view.
C. Male, dorsal view. D.Pleopod1 male. EE. Pleopod2 male. F. Apex of copulatory stylet.
Scale = 2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 245
posteriorly acute, rather than a bifid pleotelson. The arrangement of conical
tubercles on the dorsum differs from any of the other South African species of
Microarcturus.
Etymology
The species is named for the late H. M. Hale who contributed much valu-
able work to arcturid systematics.
Microarcturus laevis Kensley, 1975
Fig. 15
Microarcturus laevis Kensley, 1975a: 48, fig. 6; 1978e: 28, fig. 12A—B.
Material
False Bay. Holotype SAM-—A13544, 75m, 1 ovig. @. Paratype
SAM-A13545, 48 m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-—A13837, 66 m, 2 d,1 2. SAM-A13852,
66 m, 11 6, 8 ovig. 2, 4 &, 4 juvs. SAM-A13879, 81 m, 1 od.
Agulhas Bank. SAM-—A13883, 78 m, 1 d.
Diagnosis
Integument smooth, occasionally very faintly pitted, lacking other ornamen-
tation. Head with convex bulge between eyes, sometimes tending to be double,
especially in males. Epimera of pereonites 2—4 rounded. Pereonites 2 and 3 with
evenly convex submedian dorsal bulges. Pleotelson shield-shaped, apically
acute, lacking distinct lateral angle; base of pleotelson with low rounded mid-
dorsal convexity. Pleopod 1 ¢ with exopod distally rounded, with ten dorsal
plumose setae; margin between end of groove and spine cluster on outer margin
gently convex; endopod subequal in length and width to exopod. Copulatory
stylet of pleopod 2 exopod distally simple, open, gutter-like.
Remarks
The rounded epimera of pereonites 2—4 and the lack of conical tubercles
distinguishes this species from M. quadriconus, which it otherwise closely
resembles.
Microarcturus longispinus sp. nov.
Fig. 16
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM-A17810, SM 226, 32°28’S 28°58’E,
710-775 m, 1 ovig. 2, TL 6,2 mm. Allotype SAM-A17811, SM 228, 32°29'S
28°57'E, 650-700 m, 1 do, TL 6,5 mm. Paratypes USNM 189073, SM 250,
31°59’S 29°22’E, 150-200 m, 2 ¢, 1 ovig. 2, 1 juv.
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
D
Fig. 15. Microarcturus laevis Kensley A. Female, dorsal view. B. Male, dorsal view.
C. Pleopod 1 male. D. Pleopod 2 male. E. Apex of copulatory stylet. Scale =2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 247
\
\
\
N
‘
\
\
N
‘
E
Fig. 16. Microarcturus longispinus sp. nov. A. Female, dorsal view. B. Male, dorsal view.
C. Pleotelson, lateral view. D. Pleopod 1 male. EE. Pleopod 2 male.
F. Apex of copulatory stylet. Scale =2 mm.
248 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Diagnosis
Integument finely granulate. Eyes well pigmented. Male, head with two
pairs of submedian conical processes; all pereonites with two pairs of elongate
conical processes; second fused pleonite inflated, with six elongate processes;
third fused pleonite with four elongate processes; pleotelson tapering pos-
teriorly, dorsally flexed, acute, with one pair of submedian processes, lateral
angle produced into elongate process. Female with pereonites 2—3 each with
single anterior middorsal elongate process, epimera triangular, acute, with one
or two small spines on anterior margin; epimeron of pereonite 4 truncate, with
anterior spine. Male with bases of pereopods 5—6 with laterally directed spinose
process; merus of pereopods 2—4 with distolateral spinose process. Female with
pereopods 2—4 armed with spines on merus, ischium, basis, and coxa; coxal pro-
cesses of pereopods 2-4 subcircular, increasing in size posteriorly; pereopods
5—6 with single spinose process on outer margin of basis. Pleopod 1 ¢, exopod
with finely setulose lobe distal to end of groove elongate, rounded, extending
beyond rounded distal margin; latter with nine elongate plumose setae; endopod
three-fourths length and subequal in width to exopod. Copulatory stylet of pleo-
pod 2 endopod with groove widening distally into hollowed area.
Remarks
Microarcturus longispinus resembles M. rugosus Nordenstam, 1933, in pos-
sessing elongate conical processes on the head, pereon, and pleon. The Ant-
arctic species, however, has two elongate terminal pleotelsonic spines, unlike
the single elongate posterior half of the pleotelson of the present species.
Etymology
The specific name is derived from the elongate spines on the head, pereon,
and pleon seen in both the male and female.
Microarcturus nordenstami sp. nov.
Fig. 17
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM—A17812, SM 185, 33°39'S 27°11’E,
90m, 1) ovig: 2) tb o.oimmervallotypes 116 WME ss 4 mim Ranatyies
SAM-A17813, SM 185, 90m, 8 6, 8 ovig. 2, 4 @, 9 juvs. Paratype
SAM-A17814, SM 163, 33°04'S 28°06'E, 90m, 1 ovig. &. Paratype
SAM-A17815, SM 226, 32°28’S 28°58’E, 710-775m, 1 6. Paratypes
USNM 189074, SM 185, 90 m, 4 6, 4 ovig. &.
Diagnosis
Dorsolateral eyes large, well pigmented. Integument highly ornamented,
with numerous rounded and acute granulate tubercles. Female with heavy
granulate tripartite supraocular ridge. Pereonites 2—3 each with two strong
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 249
ae
(~
mh
SANS
NY
\
hh
e
ph
B. Male, dorsal view.
F. Pereopod 1.
A. Female, dorsal view.
Fig. 17. Microarcturus nordenstami sp. nov.
E. Apex of copulatory stylet.
C. Pleopod 1 male. D. Pleopod 2 male.
Scale = 2 mm.
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
submedian granulate bosses. Tubercles on anterior pleon becoming elongate;
pleotelson with two strong acute submedian granulate bosses, strong lateral
angle, apically acute. Male with strong granulate supraocular ridge, not
markedly tripartite; submedian bosses on pleotelson not as large as in female.
Epimera of pereonites 2—4 rounded in female. Pereopods 2—4 in female with
bases armed with two rows of spinose tubercles; coxae expanded postero-
mesially over lateral marsupium into broad tuberculate structure. Pleopod 1 6
with distal margin rounded, with ten elongate plumose setae; gently rounded,
finely setulose lobe between plumose setae and end of groove; endopod five-
sixths length of and about half width of exopod. Copulatory stylet of pleopod 2
exopod tube-like, distally bilobed.
Remarks
See Remarks section at end of M. barnardi.
Etymology
The species is named for the late Dr A. Nordenstam who contributed much
knowledge to isopod systematics.
Microarcturus ornatus Kensley, 1975
Fig. 18
Microarcturus ornatus Kensley, 1975a: 50, fig. 7; 1978a: 133; 1978e: 28, fig. 12C-E.
Material
Agulhas Bank. Holotype SAM-—A13546, 200 m, 1 ovig. 2; allotype, 1 6.
Paratypes SAM—A13547, 200 m, 2 o.
Transkei. SAM-A17816, SM 228, 650-700m, 5 36. SAM-A17817,
SM 236, 660-670 m, 1 d. SAM-A17818, SM 250, 150-200 m, 6 o.
Diagnosis
Integument granular-tuberculate. Pereonites 2—4 in female with pair of sub-
median flattened and produced tubercles, and one pair smaller lateral tubercles;
epimera of pereonite 2 semicircular, of pereonite 3 triangular. Pereonites 5—7
and pleonites 1-3 with short ridge-like tubercles. Male with large produced sub-
median pair of tubercles on pereonite 2 only. Pleonite 2 with strong apically
acute ‘shoulders’, much less prominent in male than in female. Pereopods 2-4,
coxae with acutely triangular, posteriorly directed process; bases armed with
acute spinose processes on anterior margin in female only. Pereopods 5—7 with
single spinose process on outer margin of bases in male and female. Pleopod 1 6
with distal margin convex, bearing ten elongate plumose setae; groove opening
distally on somewhat convoluted, finely setulose lobe, separated by distinct cleft
from distal setose lobe; endopod about five-sixths length and half width of exo-
pod. Copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 endopod distally bilobed.
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 251
THE
ef
ae
ae
ZZ: :
= ————- \ Ss
YY
D
B. Female, dorsal view.
A. Male, dorsal view.
Scale = 2 mm.
Fig. 18. Microarcturus ornatus Kensley
E. Apex of copulatory stylet.
C. Pleopod 1 male. D. Pleopod 2 male.
DS? ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Microarcturus oudops (Barnard, 1914)
Fig. 19
Neoarcturus oudops Barnard, 1914: 214, pl. 28C, pl. 29B; 1920: 397; 1940: 508. Nordenstam,
LOSSES:
Microarcturus oudops: Kensley, 1978a: 130, fig. 3; 1978e: 28, fig. 13A.
Material
Cape Point area. Holotype SAM-A69, 1510m, 1 6, (damaged).
SAM-A4070, 1 400 m, 16 d, 4 ovig. 2, 1 2, 16 juvs. SAM—A14027, (no local-
ity data), 2 d, 1 ovig. 2, 2 juvs.
Zululand to Transkei area. SAM—A17819, SM 103, 680 m, 2 6, 4 ovig. 2,
4 juvs. SAM—A17820, SM 129, 850 m, 4 6, 2 ovig. 2, 1 juv. SAM-A17821,
SM 226, 710-775 m, 7 3, 6 ovig. 2. SAM—A17822, SM 228, 650-700 m, 5 d,
1 ovig. 2. SAM—A17823, SM 236, 660-670 m, 1 d, 1 juv.
Diagnosis
Integument finely granulate. Head with rounded granular eyes lacking pig-
ment or ommatidia. Pereonites 1-4 each with small anterior and large posterior
transverse granulate ridge; epimera 2—4 in female shallowly triangular; coxal
processes narrowly triangular, pereopods 2—4 unarmed. Pleonite 1 short, ridge-
like; pleonite 3 somewhat inflated in male. Pleotelson with well-developed lat-
eral angle in male, present or absent in female; posterior margin broadly angular
to rounded. Pleopod 1 3, exopod with rounded distal margin bearing five plu-
mose setae, divided by narrow cleft from elongate-rounded setulose lobe distal
to end of groove; endopod slightly more than half length and half width of exo-
pod, sparsely setose. Pleopod 2 ¢, copulatory stylet distally bilobed and convo-
luted.
Microarcturus quadriconus Kensley, 1975
Fig. 20
Microarcturus quadriconus Kensley, 1975a: 52, fig. 8; 1978e: 28, fig. 13B—C.
Material
False Bay. SAM-—A13777, 31 m, 2 d. SAM-—A13839, 53 m, 3 6, 1 ovig. @.
SAM-—A13848, 22m, 1 juv. SAM-A13850, 33m, 1 6, 4 ovig. @.
SAM-A13873, 39m, 1 6, 1 ovig. 2, 3 juvs. SAM—A13875, 40m, 1 <4,
5 ovig. 2. SAM-A13876, 39 m, 2 ovig. 2. SAM—A13904, 75 m, 1 ovig. @.
SAM-A13905, 40 m, 1 ovig. 2, 1 juv. SAM-A17867, 3 ¢, 2 ovig. 2, 1 2,
1 juv.
Agulhas Bank. Holotype SAM—A13548, 80 m, 1 ovig. 2; allotype, 1 d.
Paratypes SAM-—A13549, 80 m, 2 ovig. °.
East London area. SAM—A17824, SM 179, 80m, 2 6, 5 ovig. @.
SAM-A17825, SM 180, 80 m, 8 6, 12 ovig. 2, 1 2, 22 juvs.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 253
(
7
Fig. 19. Microarcturus oudops A. Female, dorsal view. B. Male, dorsal view. CC. Pleo-
telson, dorsal view. D.Pleopod1 male. E.Pleopod2 male. F. Apex of copulatory stylet.
Scale = 2 mm.
Diagnosis
Integument smooth, lacking scattered small tubercles; with low conical pro-
cesses, two on head, four on pereonites 1—4 each, two on pereonite 5, becoming
obsolete posteriorly; middorsal rounded tubercle at base of pleotelson. Epimera
2 and 3 triangular, subacute in male and female. Pleotelson pentagonal, lateral
angles more marked in female than in male. Pleopod 1 6, exopod very similar
to that of Microarcturus similis and M. dayi; endopod subequal in length and
width to exopod. Copulatory stylet as in M. similis and M. dayi, apically simple.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAPI L OF SDD
ERR
= SSSSSSSSSIISA SA A =
D
Fig. 20. Microarcturus quadriconus Kensley A. Female, dorsal view.
C. Pleopod 1 male. D. Pleopod 2 male.
E. Apex of copulatory stylet.
B. Male, dorsal view.
Scale = 2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES pale
Remarks
This species has been taken from twelve stations from False Bay to East
London, sometimes co-occurring with M. similis. There is a possibility that this
is another form of the variable M. similis, but even in the smoothest forms of
the latter species there are always fairly strong submedian ridges. These have
not been seen in M. quadriconus; similarly, strongly rounded and conical tuber-
cles have not been noted in M. similis.
Microarcturus similis (Barnard, 1925)
Figs 21-22
Antarcturus similis Barnard, 1925: 395, fig. 1; 1940: 508.
Microarcturus similis: Nordenstam, 1933: 128. Kensley, 1975a: 47, figs Sa—b; 1978a: 133; 1978e:
Sl ngs 13D=E.
Material
Liideritz. SAM—A13902, 35 m, 3 d.
Saldanha Bay area. SAM—A13778, 15 m, 1 2. SAM—A13781, 44 m, 1 6,
1 ovig. 2, 1 2, 8 juvs. SAM—A13782, 44m, 2 6, 2 ovig. 9, 1 2, 1 juv.
SAM-A13863, 68 m, 1 do, 1 juv. SAM-A13864, 65 m, 6 6, 3 ovig. 2, 3 @,
6 juvs. SAM-A13865, 78m, 1 6, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13866, 62m, 3 a.
SAM-A13867, 51m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13868, 78m, 1 6, 1 juv.
SAM-A13869, 42-51 m, 26 ¢, 10 ovig. 2, 8 2, 64 juvs. SAM-—A13870, 71 m,
1 juv.
False Bay. SAM-—A13776, 38m, 1 6, 1 juv. SAM-A13769, 60 m, 3 6,
2 ovig. 2. SAM-A13775, 75 m, 6 6, 2 ovig. 2, 1 juv. SAM-A13838, 64 m,
13,1 juv. SAM—A13840, 33 m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM—A13841, 66 m, 4 6, 8 ovig. 2,
3 2, 11 juvs. SAM-—A13842, 71m, 1 juv. SAM-A13844, 36m, 1 6, 1 &.
SAM-A13845, 42 m, 1 juv. SAM—A13846, 33m, 1 6. SAM-A13847, 33 m,
5 6, 3 ovig. 2. SAM-A13851, 36m, 1 ¢. SAM-—A13853, 53m, 1 6G.
SAM-—A13854, 60m, 2 6, 1 2%. SAM-A13855, 87m, 1 6, 2 juvs.
SAM-A13856, 73 m, 1 6. SAM-—A13857, 87 m, 2 6, 1 ovig. 2, 1 2, 5 juvs.
SAM-—A13858, 48m, 4 6, 1 ovig. 2, 3 juvs. SAM—A13859, 87m, 23 6,
14 ovig. 2, 8 2, 20 juvs. SAM—A13860, 31m, 3 6, 2 ovig. 2, 4 &.
SAM-A13861, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-—A13862, 26 m, 1 d, 1 ovig. 2°. SAM—A13871,
68m, 2 6, 1 juv. SAM—A13872, 40 m, 1 juv. SAM—A13874, 48 m, 1 juv.
SAM-A13877, 41m, 1 2. SAM-A13878, 68m, 1 ovig. ¢, 1 juv.
SAM-A13880, 31 m, 4 6,1 2. SAM—A13881, 73 m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM—A13882,
31m, 1 2. SAM-A13896, 28m, 1 6, 1 juv. SAM—A13897, 75m, 19 d,
8 ovig. 2, 4 2, 10 juvs. SAM—A13898, 1 2. SAM-A13903, 80m, 1 4,
1-2, 1 juv. SAM=A17826, 87m, 1 3, 1 juv. SAM—A17827, 66m, 1 dG.
SAM-A17828, 40 m, 4 6, 4 ovig. 2,7 2, 5 juvs.
Agulhas Bank. Syntypes SAM—A5951, 84 m, 1 ovig. 2, 1 ¢. SAM—A5953,
86 m, 1 6. SAM-A5954, 80 m, 2 2. SAM—A13765, 50 m, 1 6. SAM—A13766,
Ome ovpance SAM=A13767, s0m, 1.2. SAM=A13884; 79m, 3d;
256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
2 ovig. 2. SAM-A13885, 49 m, 1 ovig. 2, 1 juv. SAM—A13886, 44 m, 4 6,
4 ovig. 2, 1 2. SAM-—A13887, 73m, 1 6, 1 juv. SAM-A13888, 48 m,
1 juv. SAM-—A13889, 42 m, 4 6, 4 ovig. 2, 2 2, 1 juv. SAM—A13890, 36 m,
1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13891, 78m, 2 juvs. SAM-A13892, 32m, 2 Q.
SAM-A13893, 45m, 1 ovig. 2. SAM-A13894, 46m, 1 ovig. &.
SAM-A13901, 43 m, 1 ovig. °.
Diagnosis
Integumental sculpturing varying from very granular to almost smooth, in
all cases with double submedian dorsal series of elongate ridge-like tubercles on
head, pereonites, and three fused pleonites. Epimera of pereonites 2-4, es-
pecially in female, broadly triangular, subacute. Pleotelson pentagonal, with dis-
tinct lateral angle. Bases of pereopods 2—4 unarmed in male and female.
Pleopod 1 ¢, exopod distally rounded, with nine plumose setae, area between
setose distal margin and end of groove almost straight; endopod subequal in
length and width to exopod. Copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 endopod distally
simple, open, gutter-like.
Remarks
Barnard (1925) remarked on the superficial similarity of his species to Arc-
turus simplicissimus Whitelegge, 1904, but noted that the antennae differed
markedly. Arcturus stebbingi Beddard, 1886, which Barnard also mentioned, is
unmistakably an Antarcturus, with very elongate antennae, anterior ‘horns’ on
the head, and strong submedian spines on the pleon, and bears little resem-
blance to M. similis.
Barnard’s syntypic material of this species (SAM-—A5951) is a mixture of
two specimens of M. similis and several specimens of M. dayi, hence his remarks
on the variability of the tubercles (1925: 396).
Microarcturus youngi Kensley, 1978
Fige23
Microarcturus youngi Kensley, 1978a: 131, fig. 4; 1978e: 31, fig. 1ZE-G.
Material
Zululand to Transkei area. Holotype SAM—A15465, SM 86,550 m, 1 ovig. &,
TL 5,8 mm; allotype, 1 6, TL6,0mm. Paratypes SAM-—A15466, SM 103,
680 m, 8 6, 10 &, 37 juvs. Paratypes SAM-—A17829, SM 86, 550 m, 12 d,5 2,
3 ovig. 2, 50 juvs. SAM—A17830, SM 123, 690 m, 1 d. SAM—A17831, SM 129,
850 m, 3 6, 2 juvs. SAM-—A17832, SM 226, 710-775 m, 4 6, 2 ovig. 2, 1 juv.
Diagnosis
Eyes well pigmented. Integumental sculpturing varying, especially in male,
from relatively smooth to having small scattered granules. Epimera of pereo-
nites 2—3 in female laterally rounded to bluntly triangular. Pereonites 2-3 with
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 257
Fig. 21. Microarcturus similis (Barnard) A. Male, dorsal view. B. Female, dorsal view.
C. Mandible. D. Maxillal. E. Maxilla2. F.Antennule. G.Antenna. H. Uropodal rami.
Scale = 5 mm.
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Eee
B. Pereopod 1. C. Pereopod 2.
G. Apex of copulatory stylet.
Fig. 22. Microarcturus similis (Barnard) A. Maxilliped.
D. Pereopod 7. EE. Pleopod 1 male. F. Pleopod 2 male.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 259
Fig. 23. Microarcturus youngi Kensley
C. Pleopod 1 male.
|
D. Pleopod 2 male.
A. Female, dorsal view.
E. Apex of copulatory stylet.
E
B. Male, dorsal view.
Scale = 2 mm.
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dorsolateral tubercle sometimes spiniform. Pleotelson pentagonal, with distinct
lateral angle; basal fused pleonite in male somewhat inflated, dorsally bipartite.
Pleopod 1 in male, exopod distally rounded, with nine plumose setae, distinct
notch between setae and distal lobe; endopod about two-thirds length of exo-
pod. Copulatory stylet of pleopod 2 distally bilobed.
INFRAORDER FLABELLIFERA
Family Cirolanidae
Cirolana Leach, 1818
Cirolana anocula nom. nov.
Fig. 24
Cirolana caeca (non Dollfus, 1903), Kensley, 1978a: 141, figs 11-12.
Metacirolana caeca: Bruce, 1981: 954.
Material
Transkei. SAM-—A17833, SM 123, 690m, 2 ovig. 2, 3 2, 3 juvs.
USNM 189075, SM 129, 850 m, 5 d, 5 ovig. 2, 3 &, 6 juvs.
Previous records
Off Zululand, 750 m.
Remarks
Kensley (1978a) created a homonym for this species, being unaware of
Cirolana caeca Dollfus, 1903, described from 1 200—2 368 m in the Mediterra-
nean. This situation is corrected here. From Dollfus’s description, C. caeca
B
Fig. 24. Cirolana anocula nom. nov. A. Frontal lamina. B. Peduncle of antenna.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 261
differs from C. anocula in having a narrow, longitudinally grooved frontal
lamina, and in being a much larger species (TL ovig. 2 9,0 mm).
Bruce (1981) includes the present species in the genus Metacirolana. Ciro-
lana anocula, however, does not agree entirely with the diagnosis of Metaciro-
lana provided by Bruce (1981: 950). While the distally divergent frontal lamina
and downward-projecting clypeus agree, the endopod of maxilla 1 is neither
slender nor sparsely setose, while pleonite 5 lacks free lateral margins and is
definitely overlapped by pleonite 4. All pleonite rami, except the endopod of
pleopod 5, bear plumose setae, as is the case for both Cirolana and Metaciro-
lana. For these reasons, the species is left in Cirolana.
The antenna, which was incorrectly figured in the original description, is
again provided, along with the frontal lamina.
Cirolana bougaardti sp. nov.
Figs 25-26
Material
East London to Transkei area. Holotype SAM-—A17834, SM 226, 32°28’S
28°58'E, 710-775 m, 1 3, TL17,0mm. Paratype SAM—A17835, SM 162,
DAs ool osm, Lid, TE 10 mn.
Description
Male
Body about three times longer than wide, dorsally strongly convex. Integu-
ment faintly pitted. Head with anterior margin evenly rounded, posteriorly im-
mersed in pereonite 1. Frontal lamina basally narrow, distally dilated, rounded.
Clypeus transversely narrowly rectangular. Eyes absent. Pereonite 1 with incom-
plete dorsolateral incised line in anterior half; pereonites 2-7 with complete in-
cised line across anterior half of dorsum. Coxae of pereonites 2-4
posteroventrally rounded, becoming produced posteriorly; coxa of pereonite 5
subacute, of pereonites 6 and 7 acute. Short rounded submedian penial pro-
cesses on pereonite 7. Pleonites 1-3 with acute posteroventral angle, pleonite 3
laterally overlapping pleonite 4; pleonite 5 lacking free lateral margins, over-
lapped by pleonite 4. Pleotelson posteriorly evenly rounded, dorsally gently con-
vex, posterior margin setose.
Antennule reaching posteriorly to middle of pereonite 1; article 3 of pe-
duncle longer than articles 1 and 2 together; flagellum of twelve articles. Antenna
reaching posteriorly to pereonite 3; peduncle article 5 longest; flagellum of
about twenty-eight articles. Mandibular palp with article 2 longest, armed with
cluster of simple and fringed spines distally; article 3 strongly curved, with inner
margin bearing row of spines, becoming distally longer; incisor of three sclero-
tized cusps; spine row of about thirteen spines; molar with about twenty-eight
teeth. Maxilla 1, outer ramus with twelve distal spines, inner ramus with three
stout plumose setae. Maxilla 2, inner ramus with numerous simple and fringed
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 25. Cirolana bougaardti sp. nov. A. Holotype male, dorsal view. 3B. Antenna.
C. Antennule. D. Frontal lamina and clypeus. E. Mandible. F. Maxilla1. G. Maxilla 2.
H. Maxilliped. I. Pereopod1. Scale=5 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 263
PWG
Sass SS SS
(p
4 Zh
) r y
”) B
4 hy Z
Gy
y x
Vy K)
, I
Rr
Hil
N
SS:
S
\\
\\|
A
A. Pleopod 1. B. Pleopod 2 male. C. Apex of
Fig. 26. Cirolana bougaardti sp. nov.
G. Pereopod 7.
copulatory stylet. D.Pleopod3. EE. Pleopod 4. _ F. Pleopod 5.
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
spines on mediodistal margin; inner lobe of outer ramus with dense cluster of
short and long spines; outer lobe with six elongate spines. Maxilliped endite with
single coupling hook, six fringed setae distally; palp with elongate setae on outer
margins of all five articles; shorter setae on medial margins of four distal articles,
article 3 broadest and longest. Pereopods 1-3 shorter than following legs, pre-
hensile, with curved propodi bearing strong blunt posterodistal spine and few
short sensory spines on posterior margin; carpus short, triangular, with single
strong blunt posterodistal spine; merus with setose/spinose distodorsal lobe, row
of stout rounded peg-like spines along posterior margin; ischium distally ex-
panded. Pereopods 4—7 elongate, ambulatory; propodus straight, rectangular,
with three clusters of sensory spines on posterior margin; carpus triangular,
bearing elongate setae on anterior margin, clumps of sensory spines on posterior
margin, and row of short and long spines on distal margin; merus with anterior
setae, posterior setae and spines, clumps of short and long sensory spines at an-
terodistal and posterodistal corners; ischium with clumps of spines on anterodis-
tal corner. Pleopods with all rami except endopod of pleopod 5 bearing marginal
plumose setae. Pleopod 1, endopod half width of exopod, subequal in length.
Pleopod 2 with copulatory stylet articulating basally on endopod, rod-like,
reaching well beyond rami, distally lobed; endopod slightly narrower and
shorter than exopod. Pleopods 3—5 with exopod becoming distally more broadly
rounded. Uropodal basis produced along medial margin of endopod; laterally
distally broadened, apically narrowly rounded; exopod about half width, sub-
equal in length to endopod, distally narrowly rounded.
Remarks
Of the very few blind deep-sea species of Cirolana recorded, C. bougaardti
most closely resembles C. californiensis Schultz, 1966, from 812 m in the Coro-
nado Canyon off southern California. The American species differs from the
South African species in the posteriorly acute pleotelson, lack of a dorsal incised
line on the pereonites, in the very short antennule, the distally acute frontal
lamina, as well as in several details in the mouth-parts.
Etymology
The species is named for Michael Bougaardt, in thanks for his assistance
both on the Meiring Naude cruises and in the Department of Marine Biology at
the South African Museum.
Cirolana convexissima sp. nov.
Figs 27-28
Material
Transkei area. Holotype SAM-—A17836, SM 250, 31°59’S 29°22'E,
150-200 m, 1 ovig. 2, TL3,3mm. Paratypes SAM-A17837, SM 250,
150-200 m, 1 36, TL2,6mm, 4 juvs. Paratypes USNM 189076, SM 250,
150=200 mo 6) DE 2-6 mm Wovieee ce Me 3.3 mime Sm UV Se
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 265
G
Fig. 27. Cirolana convexissima sp.nov. A. Male, dorsal view. _ B. Frontal lamina. . C. An-
tenna. D.Antennule. E. Mandible. F. Maxillal. G. Maxilla2. H. Maxilliped.
Scale = 1 mm.
Description
Male
Body dorsally strongly convex, widest at pereonite 5. Head with tiny rostral
point, only partially immersed in pereonite 1; with relatively well-pigmented
eyes. Frontal lamina distally dilated, basally narrow. Coxae of pereonites
266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
posteriorly acute; coxa | with curved incised dorsal line; coxa 6 broad, rectangu-
lar, overlapping narrow coxa 7. Pereonites 6 and 7 with transverse incised line in
anterior half across dorsum. Pleonite 1 with very short acute lateral margin
wedged between coxa 7 and more elongate acute lateral margin of pleonite 2;
lateral margin of pleonite 3 contiguous with coxa 7, half width of lateral margin
of pleonite 4; pleonite 5 lacking free lateral margin. Pleotelsonic margin entire,
posteriorly broadly and evenly rounded.
Antennule with article 2 longer than both article 1 or 3; flagellum of five ar-
ticles, four distal articles each with single aesthetasc. Antenna with three basal
peduncle articles together equal to article 4; flagellum of seven articles. Man-
dibular palp with article 2 almost three times length of article 1, with seven
finely serrate spines distally; article 3 with six serrate spines; incisor of three
cusps; spine row with ten spines. Maxilla 1, inner ramus with three stout fringed
setae; outer ramus with nine simple and serrate spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus
with eight setae on rounded mediodistal margin, lobes of outer ramus each with
three distal spines. Maxilliped with palp article 2 longest and broadest; setae on
mediodistal corners of articles 2—5; endite with one retinaculum and four distal
setae. Pereopods 1-3 similar, with propodus robust and somewhat curved.
Pereopod 1, propodus with three sensory spines on posterior margin; carpus
with one posterodistal spine; merus with three spines; ischium with single poste-
rodistal spine. Pereopod 2, propodus with five sensory spines on posterior mar-
gin; merus produced distodorsally into triangular lobe bearing three stout
spines. Pereopods 4—7 with propodi elongate-rectangular; clumps of sensory
spines, at dorsodistal and posterodistal corner of propodi, carpi, meri, and
ischia. Pleopods with all rami except endopod of pleopod 5 bearing plumose
marginal setae. Pleopod 2, copulatory stylet articulating subbasally on endopod,
reaching by half its length beyond rami, apically narrowly acute; exopods of
pleopods 4 and 5 clearly biarticulate. Uropodal basis produced into triangular
lobe along medial margin of endopod; latter broadly oval, with marginal setae;
exopod three-fourths length and half width of exopod.
Remarks
The present species bears a close resemblance to Cirolana anocula (see
p. 260), especially in overall body shape and proportions. Numerous differ-
ences, however, make separation of the two species easy, but also suggest that
C. anocula may be a closely related species to, or even a sister-species of, C.
convexissima, the former having found an ecological niche at greater depths
and, in so doing, lost its eyes.
These afore-mentioned differences lie in the eyes (present in C. convexis-
sima, absent in C. anocula), uropodal shape; incised lines on pereonites 6 and 7
in C. convexissima, coxal shape, and pleotelsonic shape. As with C. anocula, the
frontal lamina and clypeus agree with Bruce’s diagnosis of Metacirolana, but
pleonite 5 does not have free lateral margins, and is overlapped by pleonite 4.
Fig. 28. Cirolana convexissima sp. nov.
D. Pleopod 4. EE. Pleopod5. F. Uropod.
A. Pleopod 1.
B. Pleopod 2 male.
G. Pereopod1. H. Pereopod 2.
C. Pleopod 3.
I. Pereopod 7.
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
The specific name, from the Latin meaning very convex or arched, refers to
the strongly convex dorsum of the animal.
Family Sphaeromatidae
Subfamily Sphaeromatinae
Paracilicaea Stebbing, 1910
Paracilicaea cordylina sp. nov.
Figs 29-30
Material
Zululand. Holotype SAM—A17838, SM 15, 27°31’'S 32°45’E, 280-454 m,
1 3, TL 14,5 mm. (Fragment consisting of left uropod and part of pleotelson
taken from same station.)
Description
Male
Body dorsally strongly arched, parallel-sided. Integument indurate, an-
teriorly shallowly pitted, becoming finely granulate posteriorly. Head anteriorly
convex, with strongly pigmented lateral eyes; frontal lamina distally triangular,
proximally having two rounded divergent lobes. Pereonite 1 longer than follow-
ing segments, with broad ventrolateral extension, anteriorly with narrowly
rounded lobe, posteriorly acute. Pereonites 2—7 subequal in length and width;
coxae 2 and 3 triangular, apically subacute; coxae 4—7 rounded, becoming
shorter and broader posteriorly. Pereonites 6 and 7 each with two pairs low
granular tubercles close to posterior margin; pereonite 7 posterior margin faintly
bilobed. Pleonites 1-4 fused medially, pleonite 1 visible only as arc-shaped seg-
ment posterodorsal to coxa 7; pleonite 3 with single granular tubercle on pos-
terior margin; pleonite 4 with two strong conical submedian tubercles near
posterior margin, laterally with bilobed granular tubercle just mesial to rounded
lateral margin. Pleotelson strongly convex, with proximal half raised into two
low granular tubercles and two stronger conical tubercles at about midlength;
posterior margin with shallow terminal notch flanked by low rounded tubercle.
Antennule with basal article longest and widest, distal three-fourths flexed
at right angle to basal part, with faint tubercle on anterior margin; article 2
slightly more than one-third length of slender cylindrical article 3; flagellum of
eighteen articles. Antenna, basal article short, rounded; articles 2 and 3 sub-
equal in length, shorter than article 4; articles 4 and 5 subequal in length; flagel-
lum of seventeen articles. Mandible, incisor semicircular along blunt cutting
edge, strongly sclerotized; lacinia distally broadened, of three blunt cusps; five
strong spines in spine row; molar stout, truncate, fringed with dense band of
short spines; palp with article 1 subequal in length to article 2, latter bearing row
of twelve spines distally; article 3 curved, armed with row of sixteen short and
G
Fig. 29. Paracilicaea cordylina sp. nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view.
view. C. Frontal lamina. D. Mandible. E. Mandibular palp.
G. Maxilla 2. H. Maxilliped. Scale =5 mm.
B. Holotype, lateral
F. Maxilla 1.
270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 30. Paracilicaea cordylina sp. nov. A. Antennule. B. Antenna. CC. Pereopod 1.
D. Pereopod7. E. Pleopod3. F. Pleopod2. G. Pleopod1. H. Pleopod 4.
I. Pleopod 5. J. Penial lobe.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Dal
four elongate spines. Maxilla 1, inner ramus bearing four strong serrate distal
spines; outer ramus with nine stout simple spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus with
about ten elongate serrate spines plus several shorter simple spines mediodis-
tally; inner and outer lobes of outer ramus with six or seven serrate spines each.
Maxilliped, endite with single retinaculum on medial margin, outer margin con-
vex, twelve fringed spines on distal margin; palp articles 2-4 with numerous
spines on tips of lobes. Pereopod 1, unguis about half length of rest of dactylus;
propodus with six spines on posterior margin; carpus triangular, with four spines
and fine spinule patch on posterior margin; merus with rounded distodorsal lobe
bearing few slender spines, four strong spines and broad spinule patch on pos-
terior margin. Pereopod 7, propodus narrow-cylindrical, with five slender spines
and narrow band of spinules on posterior margin; carpus narrow, cylindrical,
with several spines distally, four spines and broad spinule band on posterior
margin; merus with two spines and broad spinule patch on posterior margin.
Penial processes on sternum of pereonite 7 slender elongate, distally faintly
hooked. Pleopod 1, endopod triangular, exopod elongate-oval; pleopod 2 with
slender copulatory stylet articulating basally on triangular endopod, reaching
well beyond apex of rami, exopod elongate-oval; pleopod 3, endopod with outer
margin becoming strongly convex; exopod elongate-oval with narrow distal ar-
ticle; pleopods 4 and 5, exopod biarticulate, thin membranous; endopod
pleated. Uropod with short distally rounded inner ramus fused with basis, outer
ramus elongate-cylindrical, tapering distally to narrowly rounded apex.
Remarks
The present species of Paracilicaea differs from the three intertidal species
described from Mozambique in several features, but is most easily distinguished
by pleonal structure.
Paracilicaea teretron Barnard, 1955, has only two submedian dorsal tuber-
cles on the pleotelson, while the three lobes of the pleotelsonic apex, and the
uropodal endopod, are more elongate than in P. cordylina. The former species
also lacks tubercles on the posterior pereonites.
Paracilicaea mossambicus Barnard, 1914, with trilobed apices of the telsonic
lobes and uropodal rami, is quite distinctive.
Paracilicaea clavus Barnard, 1955, has two very strong, rather than four
smaller, submedian pleotelsonic tubercles and more elongate lobes of the pleo-
telsonic apex.
Paracilicaea hanseni Stebbing, 1910, from Zanzibar, possesses more pereo-
nal tubercles, a very strong submedian pair of pleonal tubercles, curved uropo-
dal exopods, and more elongate pleotelsonic apical lobes.
Of the four species of Paracilicaea recorded by Hale (1929) from South
Australia, P. hamata possesses a distally hooked uropodal exopod; P. septem-
dentata has a strongly dentate uropodal exopod; P. pubescens has a granulate
and densely pubescent body; and P. gigas is also pubescent, with a narrow
notched pleotelsonic apex.
22. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Etymology
The specific name, from the Greek kordylinos, meaning club-like, refers to
the shape of the uropodal ramus.
INFRAORDER ASELLOTA
Family Stenetriidae
Stenetrium Haswell, 1881
Stenetrium perestrelloi sp. nov.
Figs 31-32
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM-—A17839, SM 163/4, 33°04'S 28°06’E,
90 m, 1 6, TL 6,5 mm. Paratypes SAM—A17840, SM 163/4, 90 m, 1 ovig. 2,
TL 5,1 mm, 1 2, TL 5,9 mm, 15 juvs. USNM 18907755 SM163/45 590 niineeslerce
TL 6,0 mm, 3 juvs.
Description
Male
Body three and one-half times longer than wide, widest at pereonite 7. In-
tegument with diffuse brown pigmentation, strongest around eye, localized lat-
eral dark patches on pereonites, diffuse lateral band on pleon. Anterior half of
body with scattered elongate setae. Head with lateral margins entire; anterolat-
eral angle acute; rostrum roughly pentagonal, widest at base, apically narrowly
rounded, distal margin with hyaline teeth (easily broken off). Eyes reniform,
strongly pigmented. Pleon slightly wider than long; lateral margins entire; pos-
terior margin between uropod bases evenly rounded.
Antennule with flagellum of thirteen articles, eleven distal articles each
bearing single aesthetasc. Basal antennal article with tooth-like lobe at outer dis-
tal angle. Mandibular palp, article 2 bearing two strong serrate spines and distal
row of ten short spines; distal article widest at midlength, with distal narrowed
part, both regions bearing spines. Maxilla 1, inner ramus with one narrow and
two stout serrate spines; outer ramus with ten toothed spines. Maxilla 2, inner
ramus with thirteen to fifteen fringed spines on mediodistal margin; both lobes
of outer ramus bearing four elongate fringed spines. Maxilliped with six retina-
culae and distal row of fringed spines on medial margin; article 3 with broadly
rounded mediodistal lobe. Pereopod 1 dactylus overlapping propodal palm by
about one-fourth of its length; propodus broad, palm armed with strong triangu-
lar outer and large inner tooth, with three small teeth between them; small tri-
angular tooth close to dactylar articulation on medial surface; dactylus, anterior
and posterior margins of propodus, and posterior margins of carpus and merus
with dense setae; merus and ischium with triangular lobe on anterodistal angle.
Posterior pereopods with strongly biunguiculate dactyli, with narrower proximal
spine; propodi and carpi elongate-rectangular, with sensory spines on posterior
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 273
Fig. 31. Stenetrium perestrelloi sp. nov. A. Male, dorsal view. B. Antennule. C. Man-
dible. D. Maxillal. E. Maxilla2. FF. Maxilliped. G. Pleopod 1 male. H. Pleopod 2
male. I. Operculum, female. Scale 2 mm.
OTA ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
; 7, ‘a N\ \ y /
pe aa onli : ay
ele
°
\
\
\e
e\e
fo Po)
eee
Le
e\Vo
|
Fig. 32. Stenetrium perestrelloi sp. nov. A. Pereopod 1, male. B. Pereopod 1, female.
C. Pereopod 7.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES AS
margins; meri with strong elongate spine on anterodistal angle. Pleopod 1, rami
with outer distal margins evenly rounded, bearing row of short setae, inner
apices subacute. Uropods with inner ramus slightly longer and narrower than
outer, both rami tipped with elongate setae.
Female
Pereopod 1, dactylus with row of short serrate spines on cutting edge; pro-
podus with strong posterodistal serrate spine, palm with eleven slender fringed
spines. Operculum with short apical notch.
Remarks
Of the eight southern African species of Stenetrium having well-pigmented
reniform eyes, S. perestrelloi most closely resembles S$. esquartum Schultz,
1982a, known from False Bay to the East London area. Schultz’s species has a
very similar rostrum and palmar armature on pereopod 1 ¢d, but a more elon-
gate propodus, serrate lateral margins of the pleon, pleopod 1 4d is distally
truncate-rounded, the antennular flagellum has more articles, while the inner
lobe of maxillipedal palp article 3 is not as broadly rounded.
Stenetrium crassimanus Barnard, 1914, is similar to the present species
in the broadly setose pereopod 1 of the male, but has three equally strong
palmar teeth (see Kensley 1978e, fig. 65F), and a triangular rostrum, unlike
S. perestrelloi which has large and small palmar teeth and a roughly pentagonal
rostrum.
Etymology
The species is named after Manoel de Mesquita Perestrello, a sixteenth-
century Portuguese explorer who mapped the east coast of South Africa.
(K. H. Barnard previously named four species of Stenetrium after Portuguese
explorers. )
Family Janiridae
Tanisera Kensley, 1976
Tanisera expansa sp. nov.
Figs 33-34
Material
Holotype SAM-—A17841, SM 129, 30°53’S 30°31’E, 850m, 1 4,
TL 3,2 mm; allotype, 1 ovig. 2, TL 3,1 mm. Paratypes SAM—A17842, SM 123,
30°33'S 30°48’E, 690 m, 2 3d, 2 2. Paratypes SAM-—A17843, SM 103, 28°31'S
32°34’E, 680 m, 4 2. Paratypes SAM—A17844, SM 86, 27°59’S 32°40’E, 550 m,
1 ovig. 2, 2 2. Paratypes SAM—A17845, SM 129, 850 m, 3 6, 3 ovig. 2,3 &.
Paratypes SAM-A17846, SM 185, 33°39'S 27°11’E, 90m, 1 2, 3 juvs.
Paratypes USNM 189079, SM 226, 32°28'S 28°58’E, 710-775m, 3 6,
NOVA OAS:
276 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Male
Body strongly dorsoventrally flattened, parallel-sided, three times longer
than wide, widest at pereonite 6. Head with poorly pigmented dorsolateral eye-
spots, lacking ommatidia; frontal margin medially very gently convex; lateral
margins convex, finely serrate. Pereonites with lateral margins faintly serrate, ser-
rations becoming obsolete posteriorly in adult specimens; pereonites 2 and 3 lat-
erally bilobed. Pleon of single segment, wider than long, lateral margins finely
serrate, posterior margin evenly rounded between uropodal bases. Antennule
reaching to base of antennal peduncle article 5, with broad flattened basal article,
five distal articles; single aesthetasc on terminal and subterminal article. Antenna
(broken in most specimens) with three proximal peduncle articles together
shorter than article 4; article 2 with short accessory scale; article 5 one and two-
thirds length of article 4; flagellum longer than peduncle, of about thirty articles.
Mandibular palp with basal article longer than article 2, latter with three strong
serrate spines in distal half; article 3 strongly curved, with seven proximal simple
spines and row of distal spines increasing in length to longest terminal spine; inci-
sor of four indurate cusps; lacinia mobilis stout, bearing four or five serrations;
four fringed spines in spine row; molar stout, with distally truncate grinding sur-
face. Maxilla 1, inner ramus with two fringed setae and several finer setules; outer
ramus with eight serrate spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus one and one-half times
wider than lobes of outer ramus, bearing several simple and fringed setae on
mediodistal margin; lobes of outer ramus each bearing three elongate fringed
setae. Maxilliped with articles 2 and 3 of palp expanded; endite with several
fringed and simple spines distally, short single spine at mediodistal angle, two
coupling hooks on medial margin. Pereopods all biunguiculate; pereopod 1
shorter than following legs; few short sensory spines on posterior margins of pro-
podi and carpi. Pleopod 1 basally broad, rami fused for three-fourths of length,
distally with semicircular marginally setose median area, and triangular spinose
lateral lobe. Pleopod 2, inner ramus distally greatly produced into fine whip-like
structure; outer ramus with setose shoulder in distal half of lateral margin. Pleo-
pod 3, inner ramus with three stout plumose setae; outer ramus of two articles,
both setose on outer margins. Uropod with stout basis, inner ramus slightly wider
and almost one-fourth longer than outer, both rami tipped with fine setae.
Ovigerous female
Overall proportions and appendages as in male. Operculum subcircular,
with marginal fringe of setae on distal third.
Remarks
Given the uncertain status of many of the nominal janirid genera, placing of
the present species must be tentative. The general body form and the appen-
dages suggest an affinity with the Janira—Neojaera—Ianiropsis—Janilirata group
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Dag
Fig. 33. lanisera expansa sp. nov. A. Male, dorsal view. B. Antennule. C. Mandible.
D. Maxilla1. E. Maxilla2. F. Maxilliped. G.Uropod. H. Antenna. I. Pereopod 1.
J. Pereopod 7. Scale=2 mm.
278 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
|
C
Fig. 34. lanisera expansa sp.nov. A. Pleopod1, male. B.Pleopod2 male. C. Pleopod 3
male. D.Operculum, female.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 279
of genera. The biunguiculate pereopods, minute eyes, very short uropods,
elongate antennae, lack of rostrum, and the whip-like extension of the inner
ramus of pleopod 2 in the male most closely resemble the situation in Neojaera
(see Menzies 1962b: 74). The remarkable distal expansion of pleopod 1 in the
male, however, is very similar to Janisera trepidus Kensley, 1976, from Amster-
dam Island, southern Indian Ocean, and, mainly for this reason, the new species
is placed in this genus. Janisera expansa differs from I. trepidus in having a less
setose integument, more slender uropodal rami, a more elongate antenna, finely
serrulate lateral margins of the head and pereonites, and shorter spiniform late-
ral lobes of the male pleopod 1. It is possible that Janisera will be found to be
synonymous with Neojaera, when the much-needed revision of the family is pro-
duced.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the expanded distal lobes of the male pleopod 1.
Natalianira gen. nov.
Diagnosis
Head not fused with pereonite 1; eyes lacking. Antennule longer and
broader than antenna. Mandibular palp three-articulate; molar spiciform, slen-
der; spine row reduced. Maxillipedal palp five-articulate. Pereopod 1 pseudo-
chelate. Pereopods 2-7 uni-unguiculate. Pleon consisting of single segment.
Uropod uniramous, of one (?two) articles.
Type species
Natalianira spinosa sp. nov., by original designation.
Remarks
Of the approximately 40 genera of the Janiridae, only Janirella and Kati-
anira possess uniramous uropods. The former, however, unlike Natalianira, al-
ways has a distinctly biarticulate uropod, a prehensile subchelate pereopod 1,
antennae (bearing an accessory scale) longer than the antennules, and a stout
distally truncate molar and well-developed spine row on the mandible.
Katianira Hansen, 1916, resembles Natalianira in the slender tapering man-
dibular molar, reduced spine row, and in the ‘chelate’ pereopod 1. Several dif-
ferences, however, are apparent. The maxillipedal palp is four-articulate, five in
Natalianira; the two pairs of antennae are subequal in Katianira, while the spine
row of the latter consists of two elongate spines. In Natalianira the spine row
consists of two very short spines in the left, and two flattened structures in the
right.
The highly modified mandible and uropod of Natalianira, which differ from
those of most genera of the Janiridae, suggest that this is a far more apomorphic
form than most members of the family. The highly spinose nature of the body
280 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
margins and appendage margins, and the pseudochelate pereopod 1 may be an
adaptation for life in a rubble or organic detritus-rich habitat. In all specimens,
the body outline was obscured by debris entangled in the marginal spines.
Etymology
The generic name is a combination of ‘Natal’, along the continental shelf of
which province the animals were collected, and ‘Janira’, the type genus of the
family. Gender: feminine.
Natalianira spinosa sp. nov.
Figs 35-36
Material
Zululand to southern Natal area. Holotype SAM-—A17865, SM 123, 30°33'S
30°48’E, 690 m, 1 3d, TL 2,5 mm. Paratypes SAM-—A17866, SM 129, 30°53’S
30°31"E, 850m, 1 ovig. 2, TE 3;0mm> 2 65 M2 imme ara
USNM 189082, SM 86, 27°59’S 32°40’E, 550m, 1 36, TL 2,5 mm. Paratype
USNM 189083, SM 103, 28°31’ 32°34’E, 680 m, 1 6, TL 2,1 mm.
Description
Male
Body elongate-oval. Head slightly more than three times wider than long;
frontal margin straight, armed with row of spines; eyes lacking, but unpig-
mented rounded lobe present lateral to antennular base; broader spinose
rounded lobe posterolateral to eye rudiment; dorsum with four spinose tu-
bercles. Pereonite 1 with spinose lateral margin consisting of single lobe; pereo-
nites 2-7 each with bilobed spinose lateral margins; all pereonites bearing one
middorsal and two lateral rounded spine-bearing tubercles. Pleon consisting of
single segment, with rounded lateral lobe in anterior half, posterior margin be-
tween uropodal bases tapering to rounded apex; dorsally rounded with large
middorsal and smaller lateral spinose tubercles.
Antennule with broad flattened basal article bearing two spines on
medial and eight spines on outer margins; flagellum of eight articles, second
article four times longer than first, articles 4-7 each with single aesthetasc,
terminal article with three aesthetascs. Antenna considerably shorter and
narrower than antennule, of five peduncle articles and single flagellar article.
Mandible with three-articulate palp, basal article about one-fifth longer than
second, distal article shorter than second, with six spines on distal margin;
incisor of two or three narrow cusps; bicuspid lacinia mobilis on one side,
with two very small spines in spine row, three flattened spines on other
side; molar spiciform, with one small distal tooth on one side; bluntly tri-
angular keel-like structure distal to palp insertion. Maxilla 1, inner ramus
with three elongate serrate spines and one very short simple spine distally;
Outer ramus with thirteen simple and serrate spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 281
Fig. 35. Natalianira spinosasp.nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B.Maxillal. C. Maxilla 2.
D. Right mandible. E. Left mandible. F. Uropod. G. Pleopod 1 male. H. Pleopod 2
male. I. Pleopod3 male. Scale=1 mm.
282 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 36. Natalianira spinosa sp. nov. A. Antennule. B. Antenna. CC. Pereopod 1.
D. Dactylus and propodus, pereopod 1.__E. Maxilliped. F. Pereopod7. G. Operculum,
female.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 283
with three elongate fringed spines on mesial margin, six simple spines on
distal margin; both lobes of outer ramus each with four elongate spines.
Maxillipedal endite with two coupling hooks on mesial margin, short irregu-
lar spine at mediodistal angle; several fringed setae on mesial and distal
margin, and outer surface; palp of five articles, four distal articles bearing
stout fringed spines on both margins, article 4 as broad as two preceding
articles; terminal article tipped with four simple setae. Pereopod 1 shorter
than following legs; dactylus short, broad, hooked, unguis meeting stout
spine at posterodistal angle of propodus; propodus, carpus, merus, and
ischium bearing stout sensory spines. Pereopods 2-7 similar, anterior and
posterior margins of propodi, carpi, meri, ischia, and anterior margin of
basis bearing row of stout sensory spines. Pleopod 1, rami fused for three-
fourths length, lobes distally rounded-truncate, margins oblique, bearing
several simple setae. Pleopod 2 outer ramus bearing marginal plumose setae,
becoming distally longer. Pleopod 3, endopod with three elongate distal
plumose setae; exopod narrow, tapering distally, uropod elongate-oval, with
feeble indication of line of fusion between basal and distal article; latter
bearing twenty-five sensory spines.
Female
Body only slightly wider than in male. Brood-pouch formed by three pairs
of oostegites on pereonites 2—4. Pleonal operculum slightly longer than wide,
tapering gently in distal half to broadly rounded apex, margin bearing plumose
setae, latter becoming distally longer.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the very spinose margins of the head, pereon,
pleon, and several of the appendages.
Spinianirella Menzies, 1962
Spinianirella walfishensis Menzies, 1962
Bigs
Spinianirella walfishensis Menzies, 1962a: 171, fig. 55. Wolff, 1962: 34, 262, 271, 274, 275.
Material
East London to Durban area. SAM-—A17847, SM 129, 850m, 1 a4,
1 ovig. 2, 3 2, 1 juv. SAM-A17848, SM 162, 630m, 1 2. SAM-—A17849,
SM 226, 710-775 m, 1 6. SAM-—A17850, SM 236, 660-670m, 1 oa.
SAM-A17851, SM 250, 150-200 m, 1 2. USNM 189080, SM 129, 850 m, 1 6,
rye
Previous records
South Atlantic, Walvis Basin, 1 816—2 970 m.
284 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 37. Spinianirella walfishensis Menzies A. Pleopod 1 male. B. Pleopod 2 male.
C. Pleopod 3 male. D. Pereopod 1. EE. Uropod. FF. Pereopod 2. G. Pereopod 7.
H. Operculum, female.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 285
Remarks
The present material agrees well with Menzies’ description. As this is the
first record of the male of this species, figures of the male pleopods 1-3 are pro-
vided, as well as additional appendages, to supplement the original description.
Family Joeropsidae
Joeropsis Koehler, 1885
Joeropsis integer sp. nov.
Fig. 38
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM-—A17852, SM 163, 33°04'S 28°06’E,
90 m, 1 ovig. 2, TL 3,5 mm. Paratypes SAM-—A17853, SM 163, 90 m, 2 2,
TL 2,8 mm, 3,9 mm.
Description
Ovigerous female
Body almost three times longer than wide. Head with lateral margins en-
tire: frontal plate very gently convex; dorsolateral eyes well developed; broad,
roughly pentagonal dorsal pigment patch present. Body widest at pereonite 3.
Pleon with lateral margins entire; posterior margin between uropods triangular.
Antennule, basal article having rounded distolateral lobe; article 2 about half
length and width of article 1; distal article bearing three aesthetascs. Antenna
with article 3 having transparent membrane on median margin; flagellum of
seven articles. Mandible with three-articulate palp, distal article with eight
spines. Maxilla 1, outer ramus with eleven strongly toothed distal spines; inner
ramus with three distal setae. Maxilla 2, inner ramus short, with four simple dis-
tal spines; two lobes of outer ramus each with three elongate fringed spines and
one simple spine. Maxilliped with palp article 2 broadest; article 5 relatively
elongate, about twice length of third; endite with few short distal spines; four
retinaculae on median margin. Pereopod 1 shorter than following pereopods;
dactylus biunguiculate; propodus with four short spines on posterior margin; fol-
lowing pereopods triunguiculate; propodi with seven or eight spines on posterior
margins. Operculum broadly oval, longer than wide. Uropodal basis with
broadly rounded inner lobe; rami very short, inner longer than outer, both rami
bearing elongate setae.
Remarks
All four of the southern African species of Joeropsis have either serrate or
toothed pleonal margins, unlike the present species, which is entire. Joeropsis
paulensis (Vanhoffen) from Gough, St. Paul and Amsterdam islands has entire
head and pleonal margins but a markedly tapering pleon, and is noticeably
286 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 38. Joeropsis integer sp.nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B.Antennule. C. Antenna.
D. Mandible. BY Maxillary le F. Maxilla 2. G. Maxilliped. H. Uropod.
I. Pereopod7. J. Pereopod1. Scale=2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 287
setose; the frontal plate of the head, while resembling J. integer, is more convex,
while the maxillipedal palp article 2 is distinctly lobed.
Etymology
The specific name, meaning ‘entire’, refers to the lateral margins of the
head and pleon.
Joeropsis serrulus sp. nov.
Fig. 39
Material
East London area. Holotype SAM-—A17854, SM 185, 33°39'S 27°11’E,
90 m, 1 ovig. 2, TL 2,3 mm. Paratype SAM-—A17855, SM 163, 33°04’S 28°06’E,
90 m, 1 ovig. 2, TL 2,3 mm. Paratype SAM-—A17856, SM 164, 33°04’S 28°06’E,
90 m, 1 2, TL 2,1 mm.
Description
Ovigerous female
Body about three times longer than wide, broadest at pereonite 3. Head
with well-pigmented dorsolateral eyes; lateral margins finely serrate; frontal
plate roughly triangular with apex truncate, supported by prominent ‘shoulders’;
pigment reticulation over entire dorsum. Pereonites with lateral margins finely
serrate; pigment reticulation on pereonites 1-6, becoming obsolete posteriorly.
Pleon tapering posteriorly, lateral margin with twelve to thirteen teeth; posterior
margin triangular between uropods, apex narrowly rounded. Antennule of six
articles, basal article broadest and longest, terminal article with single aesthe-
tasc. Antennal flagellum of seven articles. Mandibular palp, basal article sub-
equal to article 2; terminal article with six distal fringed spines; spine row
bearing eight slender spines. Maxilla 1, inner ramus with three distal setae,
outer ramus with twelve strongly toothed spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus shorter
than lobes of outer ramus, with four distal setae; inner and outer lobes of outer
ramus each with four elongate fringed spines. Maxilliped, palp article 2 mesial
margin strongly lobed, article 4 elongate, two and one-half times length of ar-
ticle 3; endite with distal margin stepped in mesial half, evenly rounded in outer
half; three retinaculae on mesial margin. Pereopod 1 biunguiculate, shorter than
following triunguiculate legs; propodi with two or three sensory spines on pos-
terior margin. Operculum slightly longer than wide, distaily somewhat narrowly
rounded. Uropod reaching beyond pleotelsonic apex, medial lobe of basis with
strong distal hook, inner ramus twice length of outer, both rami bearing elon-
gate setae.
Remarks
In possessing finely serrate lateral margins of the head, pereon, and pleon,
Joeropsis serrulus bears little resemblance to any of the five species described
288 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
4
Fig. 39. Joeropsis serrulus sp. nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B. Maxilliped. C. Antennule.
D. Antenna. E. Uropod. F. Maxilla2. G. Maxilla1. H. Mandible. I. Pereopod 7.
Scale = 1 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 289
from South Africa (see Kensley 19756). Joeropsis antarctica (Menzies &
Schultz, 1968) possesses coarsely serrate lateral margins of the head and pleon,
but apparently smooth pereonite margins.
Etymology
The specific epithet, from the Latin for a little saw, refers to the fine serra-
tions of the head, pereon, and pleon margins of this species.
Family Pleurogoniidae
Notoxenoides Menzies, 1962
Notoxenoides acalama sp. nov.
Fig. 40
Material
Holotype SAM-—A17857, SM 117, 30°17’S 31°10’E, 820m, 1 ovig. °,
TL 2,0 mm.
Description
Ovigerous female
Integument covered dorsally with very fine circular tubercles. Head with an-
terior margin evenly convex, lacking ocular peduncles and eyes. Pereonites 1-6
each with elongate lateral spinose process and shorter middorsal spine; pereo-
nites 1 and 2 with cluster of three short spines at base of spinose process; coxae
visible in dorsal view in pereonites 5—7; pereonite 7 with short middorsal spine,
but lacking lateral spinose process. Pleon consisting of two segments; pleonite 1
very short, unarmed; pleotelson subglobose, with lateral margin armed with
thirteen or fourteen transparent spines; posterior margin between uropodal
bases broadly triangular, apically rounded.
Basal antennular article armed with five dorsolateral spines and two
stronger distal spines; article 2 about half length of article 1; four distal articles
together subequal to article 2; terminal article bearing single aesthetasc. Man-
dibular palp three-articulate, terminal article short, curved, bearing single seta;
incisor broad, of five cusps; spine row of four elongate serrate spines; molar
stout, distally truncate, with irregular marginal serrations. Maxilla 1, inner
ramus with one simple, one broadly serrate, and one finely fringed distal seta;
outer ramus with eight distal spines. Maxilla 2, inner ramus with eight distal ser-
rate and fringed spines; inner lobe of outer ramus with four elongate setae,
outer lobe with three elongate setae. Maxilliped palp with articles 2 and 3 broad,
but not as wide as endite; latter with distal margin straight, bearing five fringed
setae and two broad sensory fringed spines; two retinaculae on medial margin.
Pereopod 1 prehensile, shorter than ambulatory legs, dactylus with strong un-
guis and shorter accessory spine; propodus with two sensory spines on posterior
margin; carpus distally expanded, posterior margin with two elongate stout
290 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
G
Fig. 40. Notoxenoides acalama sp. nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B. Operculum, female.
C. Antennule. D. Uropod. E. Pereopod 1. FF. Pereopod 7. GG. Maxilliped.
H. Mandible. I. Maxillal. J. Maxilla2. Scale=1 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 291
sensory spines. Ambulatory pereopods with slender, curved dactylus bearing acces-
sory spine at base of unguis; propodus elongate, with four or five sensory spines
on posterior margin; carpus elongate-rectangular, with three sensory spines on
posterior margin; merus short, with sensory spine at anterodistal angle. Opercu-
lum pyriform, apically narrowly rounded, sparsely setose. Uropodal basis hid-
den by lateral margin of pleon, outer (dorsal) ramus shorter and one-third width
of inner, with two apical setae; inner (ventral) ramus with several distal setae.
Remarks
Three species of Notoxenoides Menzies, 1962, have been described:
N. abyssi Menzies, from the west coast of South Africa, 1 816m; N. vemae
Menzies, from 4 047 m on the Walvis Ridge, South Atlantic; and N. dentata
Menzies & George, 1972, from 3 900 m in the Peru—Chile Trench. Notoxe-
noides acalama differs from all three in the lack of ocular peduncles, the lack of
lateral spinose processes on pereonite 7, and the lack of a middorsal spine on
the first free pleonite.
At 820 m this is the shallowest record for this rare genus (this being the
fourth specimen known).
Etymology
The specific name from the Greek, meaning lacking a stalk, refers to the
lack of ocular peduncles.
Family Ischnomesidae
Haplomesus Richardson, 1908
Haplomesus zuluensis sp. nov.
Fig. 41
Material
Zululand. Holotype SAM-—A17858, SM 60, 27°09'S 32°58’E, 800-810 m,
1 ovig. 2, TL 4,9 mm. Paratype SAM-—A17859, SM 60, 800-810 m, 1 ovig. 2,
damaged, pleon missing.
Description
Ovigerous female
Body about five and one-half times longer than broad. Integument brittle,
very finely granulate. Head with anterior margin slightly concave medially; dor-
sally gently convex, sunken into pereonite 1. Latter with small lateral tubercle
posterior to strong dorsolaterally directed spine. Pereonites 2 and 3 each with
two small submedian tubercles and small lateral tubercle. Pereonite 4 half length
of pereonite 5, with small middorsal anterior tubercle, and row of four small
submedian tubercles. Pereonite 5 with two submedian rows of small tubercles,
becoming obsolete in posterior half of segment. Pereonites 6 and 7 fused with
292 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 41. Haplomesus zuluensis sp. nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B. Pereopod 7.
C. Mandible. D. Maxilla1l. E. Maxilla2. F.Pereopod1. G. Maxilliped.
Scale = 1 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 293
pleon. Latter oval-rounded, with central evenly convex area, posterior margin
rounded.
Article 3 of antennule six times longer than article 4. Mandible lacking
palp; molar distally broad, truncate. Maxilla 1, outer ramus with about eleven
distal spines; inner ramus distally broadly rounded, with two fringed setae on
medial margin. Maxilla 2 inner ramus with large double fringed seta on medial
margin, several simple and fringed spines on rounded distal margin; inner lobe
of outer ramus with four elongate distal fringed spines; outer lobe with three
fringed spines. Maxilliped with articles 2 and 3 of palp broad, expanded, article
3 with medial margin evenly rounded; endite with strong median flange at right
angles to endite surface, bearing three retinaculae. Pereopod 1, dactylus (includ-
ing strong unguis) equal in length to propodus; latter with several elongate setae
and two short spines on posterior (inner) margin; carpus slightly longer than
propodus, with two short distal, and two elongate proximal sensory spines on
posterodistal corner; basis slightly more than three times length of ischium.
Pereopods posterior to pereopod 1 elongate slender, with few slender sensory
spines on posterior margins of propodi and carpi. Marsupium formed by four
pairs of oostegites on pereonites 1-4. Operculum almost circular, evenly con-
vex. Uropod of single article barely extending beyond pleotelsonic apex.
Remarks
Haplomesus zuluensis shows some similarity to H. quadrispinosus (Sars),
from the North Atlantic, in the integumental granulation and overall ornamen-
tation, but the lateral spines of pereonite 1 are far more elongate in Sars’s
species. Using Wolff’s key (1962) the present species runs down to H. robustus
Birstein, but this North Pacific species is squatter and more granulate.
Etymology
The specific name is derived from the coastline adjacent to the area in
which the species was collected, i.e. Zululand.
Ischnomesus Richardson, 1908
Ischnomesus glabra sp. nov.
Fig. 42
Material
Transkei. Holotype SAM-—A17860, SM 247, 31°55’S = 29°38’E,
1 800-1 950 m, 1 2, TL 4,0 mm.
Description
Female
Integument brittle, smooth, lacking ornament. Head with anterior margin
convex, sunken into pereonite 1. Latter broadest part of body, anterolateral cor-
ners rounded. Pereonites 2—3 similar, broader than long. Pereonite 4 as wide as
294 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 42. Ischnomesus glabra sp. nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B. Antennule. C. Man-
dible, D.Maxilla1. E. Maxilliped. F.Pereopod7. G.Pereopod 2. H. Pereopod 1.
I. Operculum, female. Scale=2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 295
long. Pereonite 5 longer than wide, about one and one-half times longer than
pereonite 4. Pereonite 7 slightly shorter than pereonite 6. Pleon consisting of
one very short free pleonite plus pleotelson; latter longer than wide, posterior
margin between uropodal bases broadly convex.
Antennule with article 2 subequal in length to article 3 plus flagellum, bear-
ing four elongate ventral sensory spines; flagellum of three articles. Antenna with
two distal peduncle articles slender-elongate, article 5 about one-third longer than
4; flagellum of about thirty articles. Mandible lacking palp. Maxilla 1, outer ramus
with nine distal spines. Endite of maxilliped not as wide as palp article 2, with two
retinaculae on medial margin. Pereopod 1 considerably shorter than pereopod 2;
dactylus claw-like, gently curved; propodus with distal truncate margin bearing
single short spine; carpus distally widened, sinuous, armed with six short spines,
posterior margin with two longer spines. Pereopod 2 slender, propodus and car-
pus bearing spines on posterior margins. Pereopods becoming more slender pos-
teriorly, pereopod 7 with narrow dactylus, propodus and carpus; two latter
articles with few short spines on posterior margins. Operculum broadly subcircu-
lar, distal margin slightly flattened. Uropod with basal article mostly concealed by
dorsal pleonal margin, only slightly shorter than distal tapering article.
Remarks
Using Wolff’s key to the species of Ischnomesus, I. glabra most closely re-
sembles J. anacanthus Wolff, but the Tasman Sea species differs in having a rela-
tively more elongate second antennular article, fewer distal spines on the outer
ramus of maxilla 1, and the proportions of the maxillipedal palp are different.
From Menzies’ (1962a) key, the present species most closely resembles J. sim-
plissimus from the South Atlantic, but this species possesses a mandibular palp,
has a relatively longer second article in the antennule, and a pleon posteriorly
subacute, rather than broadly convex. [schnomesus paucispinis Menzies, from
the South Atlantic, bears some resemblance to I. glabra, but has a relatively
broader pleon bearing one stout and three small setae on the lateral border.
Ischnomesus vinogradovi Birstein, 1963, from the north-western Pacific, lacks
the broad spinose carpus of pereopod 1, and has a more narrowly rounded
pleon.
Etymology
The specific name refers to the smooth, unornamented integument of this
species.
Stylomesus Wolff, 1956
Stylomesus natalensis sp. nov.
Fig. 43
Material
Natal, south of Durban. Holotype SAM-—A17861, SM 129, 30°53’S 30°31’E,
850m, 1 6, TL 4,0 mm. Paratypes SAM-—A17862, SM 117, 30°17’S 31°10’E,
296 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 43. Stylomesus natalensis sp. nov. A. Holotype, dorsal view. B. Mandible. C. Maxilla 1.
D. Maxilla 2. E. Pereopod 1. FF. Antennule- _ G. Maxilliped. H. Pereopod 7.
I. Pleopod 1 male. J. Pleopod2 male. K. Pleopod3 male. Scale =2 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 297
820m, 1 2, TL3,6mm, 1 2 (damaged), 1 juv. Paratypes SAM-A17863,
SM 123, 30°33’S 30°48'E, 690m, 2 2, TL4,0mm, 4,0mm. Paratypes
USNM 189081, SM 129, 850m, 2 6, TL 4,3 mm, 3,9 mm, 1 ovig. ¢ (dam-
aged) ioe
Description
Male
Integument brittle, very finely granulate overall, granulations becoming
coarser dorsally. Head with anterior margin gently convex, with two low sub-
median granulate tubercles near fusion line of pereonite 1. Latter with low sub-
median tubercles, laterally with short dorsal and dorsolateral spine (broken off
in some specimens). Pereonite 2 with single short lateral spine. Pereonite 3 lack-
ing lateral spine. Pereonite 4 about one-third length of pereonite 5; latter with
cylindrical anterior part having double submedian longitudinal row of coarse
granules. Pereonite 6 about one-fourth length of pereonite 5. Pereonite 7 fused
with pleon. Lateral bulge indicates single pleonite fused with pleotelson. Pleotel-
son with central raised area demarked by irregular row of coarse granules, pos-
terior margin evenly rounded.
Antennule with article 2 elongate, bearing three elongate sensory spines on
ventral margin. Antennal peduncle article 2 elongate, densely granulate. Man-
dible lacking palp; molar distally broad, truncate. Maxilla 1, outer ramus with
about ten distal fringed spines; inner ramus triangular between two distal setae.
Maxilla 2, inner ramus with single strong fringed seta on median margin; four
dentate and several simple spines on rounded distal margin; inner lobe of outer
ramus with four fringed spines, outer lobe with three fringed spines. Maxilliped
with palp article 2 broadest, but not markedly expanded; endite with flange at
right angles to endite surface, bearing two aesthetascs, with short blunt spine at
mediodistal angle. Pereopod 1 considerably shorter than following pereopods;
dactylus with strong unguis; propodus with two spines on posterior margin; car-
pus slightly longer than propodus, posterior margin with two short distal spines
and one elongate and one short spine proximally; merus with two elongate distal
spines. Pereopods posterior to pereopod 1 slender-elongate, with short sensory
spines on posterior margins of propodi and carpi. Pleopod 1, length two and
one-half times basal width; distal margin truncate, armed with five setae on each
ramus, and short blunt distolateral process. Pleopods 2 and 3 as illustrated. Uro-
pod reaching well beyond pleotelsonic apex, of two articles, distal article
shorter.
Female
Body essentially similar to male, but cylindrical part of pereonite 5 broader
and lacking double submedian dorsal row of granules. Operculum subcircular,
exposed surface granulate, rounded boss-like tubercle proximally near articula-
tion.
298 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Stylomesus natalensis closely resembles S. granulosus Menzies, 1962a, from
the South Atlantic, especially in the overall granulate integument, the form of
the male pleopod 1 apex, and pereopod 1. Menzies’ species, however, lacks
spines on the anterior pereonites (although these have sometimes been broken
off in the present material), and has a relatively more slender pereonite 5 (three
times longer than wide), and a narrower pleon with a more produced posterior
margin between the uropods. Stylomesus simulans Menzies has a posterior
pereon and pleon similar to S. natalensis, but as the former was described only
from posterior fragments, it is perhaps best not to associate the present material
with it. :
Etymology
The specific name refers to Natal, the coastline close to the type locality.
DISTRIBUTION AND ZOOGEOGRAPHY
The 1975-9 South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises traversed the
area from the southern Mozambique border to just south of East London. Apart
from scattered deep stations occupied by the R.S. Pieter Faure at the turn of the
century, and the transect off Still Bay to 200 m depths by the R.V. Thomas B.
Davie in 1972-3, these cruises represent the only moderately comprehensive
survey in relatively deep water on the southern African east coast. The ninety-
two benthic stations ranged in depth from 40 to 1 950 m, 1.e. from the shallow
continental shelf to the continental slope (see Louw 1977, 1980), with most of
the stations being in the 500—900 m depth range, i.e. in the steep lower shelf to
slope area.
The results of these cruises, in terms of the isopods collected (including the
data from six earlier papers), may be summarized in the following way:
81 species of identifiable isopods were collected; of these, 40 were described as
new; 3 new genera, viz. Agularcturus, Naudea, and Natalianira, and 1 new fam-
ily, the Bathynataliidae, were diagnosed. Of the 81 species, 14 have previously
been recorded from off the west coast of South Africa; 9 occur from relatively
shallow depths to more than 200 m, 4 species appear to be confined to depths of
less than 200 m, and 1 species seems to be a true deep-shelf species, occurring in
depths of more than 200 m.
The depth distribution of the 81 species may be categorized as follows:
29 species seem to be confined to depths of less than 200 m. Of these, only Pan-
athura serricauda, and Stenetrium crassimanus (both from St. Paul and Amster-
dam islands), have been recorded outside South African waters; 23 species occur
from relatively shallow depths to lower shelf depths, with Stenetrium saldanha
known from the St. Paul and Amsterdam islands, and Spinianirella walfishensis
known from the Walvis Basin; 28 species appear to be confined to the lower
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 299
shelf-slope depths, with Bathycopea typhlops known from the Irish Sea (North
Atlantic), Stenetrium abyssale known from the Tasman Sea, and Acanthomunna
spinipes known from the Antarctic.
From all three categories, therefore, only seven species have been recorded
outside southern African waters. While to speak of an endemic fauna may be
too presumptuous with regard to the deeper occurring species, it would certainly
seem that there is a distinct endemic east-coast shallow-shelf isopod fauna.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
My sincere thanks are due to the following individuals who assisted this pro-
ject in various ways: the crew of the R.V. Meiring Naude and the staff of the
Department of Marine Biology of the South African Museum for assistance dur-
ing the cruises; the Director and Trustees of the South African Museum for per-
mission to work on the material presented here; Miss Elizabeth Louw of the
South African Museum for assistance with providing data and arranging loans of
material; Dr H. Zibrowius of Marseille for providing arcturid material; Miss
Helen Lew Ton of the National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne, for valuable
discussion of arcturid taxonomy; Dr Klaus Ritzler of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion for identifying sponge material; Miss Marilyn Schotte of the Smithsonian
Institution for assistance with some of the arcturid illustrations; and Mrs Ione
Rudner for her impeccable editing of the manuscript and proofs.
REFERENCES
BARNARD, K. H. 1914. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 3. Additions to
the marine Isopoda, with notes on some previously incompletely known species. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 10: 325-442.
BARNARD, K. H. 1920. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 6. Further ad-
ditions to the list of marine Isopoda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 17: 319-438.
BARNARD, K. H. 1925. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 9. Further ad-
ditions to the list of Isopoda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 20: 381-412.
BARNARD, K. H. 1940. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 12. Further ad-
ditions to the Tanaidacea, Isopoda and Amphipoda, together with keys for the identifica-
tion of the hitherto recorded marine and freshwater species. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 32:
381-543.
BARNARD, K. H. 1955. Additions to the fauna-list of South African Crustacea and Pycnogonida.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 43: 1-107.
BEDDARD, F. A. 1886. Report on the Isopoda collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years
1873-76. Part 2. Rep. scient. Results Voy. Challenger 17: 1-178.
BirsTEInN, Y. A. 1963. [English translation 1973.] Deep-water isopods (Crustacea, Isopoda) of
the north-western part of the Pacific Ocean. Moscow: Izd-vo Akademii Nauk SSSR.
Bruce, N. L. 1981. Cirolanidae (Crustacea: Isopoda) of Australia. Diagnoses of Cirolana
Leach, Metacirolana Nierstrasz, Neocirolana Hale, Anopsilana Paulian & Debouteville,
and three new genera—WNatatolana, Politolana and Cartetolana. Aust. J. mar. Freshwat.
Res. 32: 945-966.
CorDINER, C. 1795. Remarkable ruins, and romantic prospects, of north Britain. With ancient
monuments, and singular subjects of natural history. London.
Do.trus, A. 1903. Note préliminaire sur les espéces du genre Cirolana recueillies pendant les
campagnes de |’ Hirondelle et de la Princesse Alice sous la direction de S.A.S. le Prince Al-
bert Ier, de Monaco. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 28: 5-10.
300 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hace, H. M. 1929. The Crustaceans of South Australia. Adelaide: Government Printer, South
Australia.
Hate, H. M. 1946. Isopoda—Valvifera. Rep. B.A.N.Z. antarct. Res. Exped. 4: 163-212.
Hansen, H. J. 1916. Crustacea Malacostraca. III. Dan. Ingolf-Exped. 3 (5): 1-262.
HasweELL, W. A. 1881. On some new Australian marine Isopoda. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 5:
478-479.
KENSLEY, B. 1975a. Marine Isopoda from the continental shelf of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 67: 35-89.
KENnSLEY, B. 1975). Five species of Jaeropsis from the southern Indian Ocean. (Crustacea, Iso-
poda, Asellota). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 67: 367-380.
KENSLEY, B. 1976. Isopodan and tanaidacean Crustacea from the St. Paul and Amsterdam
islands, southern Indian Ocean. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 261-323.
KENSLEY, B. 1977. New records of marine Crustacea Isopoda from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 72: 239-265.
KENSLEY, B. 1978a. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 7. Marine Iso-
poda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 74: 125-157.
KENSLEY, B. 1978b. A new marine isopod family from the south-western Indian Ocean. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 75: 41-50.
KENSLEY, B. 1978c. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 8. Isopoda An-
thuridea. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 77: 1-25.
KENSLEY, B. 1978d. Two new species of the genus Pseudanthura Richardson (Crustacea: Iso-
poda: Anthuridea). Proc. biol. Soc. Wash. 91: 222-233.
KENSLEY, B. 1978e. Guide to the marine isopods of southern Africa. Cape Town: South African
Museum.
KENSLEY, B. 1979. A second genus in the marine isopod family Bathynataliidae. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 79: 35-41.
KENSLEY, B. 1980. Marine isopods from Marion, Prince Edward, and Crozet islands (Crusta-
cea, Isopoda). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82: 155-185.
KENSLEY, B. 1982. Revision of the southern African Anthuridea (Crustacea, Isopoda). Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 90: 95-200.
KOEHLER, R. 1885. Description d’un Isopode nouveau le Joeropsis brevicornis. Annls. Sci. nat.
(6) 19: 1-7.
KOEHLER, R. 1911. Arcturidés nouveaux provenant des campagnes de la ‘Princesse Alice’ ou
appartenant au Musée Océanographique de Monaco. Bull. Inst. océanogr. Monaco 214:
1-65.
Leacu, W. E. 1818. Cymothoades. Jn: Cuvirr, F., (ed.) Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles 12.
Levrault: Strasbourg.
Louw, E. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 1. Station Data
1975, 1976. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 147-159.
Louw, E. 1980. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 10. Station Data
1977, 1978, 1979. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 187-205.
MENzIES, R. J. 1962a. The isopods of abyssal depths in the Atlantic Ocean. Vema Res. Ser. 1:
84-206.
MeEnzIES, R. J. 1962b. The zoogeography, ecology, and systematics of the Chilean marine iso-
pods. Acta Univ. lund. (2) 57: 1-162.
Menzies, R. J. & Greorce, R. Y. 1972. Isopod Crustacea of the Peru-Chile Trench. Anton
Bruun Rep. 9: 1-108.
Menzies, R. J., & Scuuttz, G. A. 1968. Antarctic isopod Crustacea. II. Families Haplonisci-
dae, Acanthaspidiidae, and Jaeropsidae, with diagnoses of new genera and species. Ant-
arct. Res. Ser. Washington 11: 141-184.
NorDENSTAM, A. 1933. Marine Isopoda of the families Serolidae, Idotheidae, Pseudidotheidae,
Arcturidae, Parasellidae, and Stenetriidae mainly from the South Atlantic. Further zool.
Results Swed. Antarct. Exped. 3 (1): 1-284.
RICHARDSON, H. 1908. Some new Isopoda of the superfamily Aselloidea from the Atlantic coast
of North America. Proc. U. S. natn. Mus. 34: 71-86.
SCHULTZ, G. A. 1966. Submarine canyons of southern California. Part IV. Systematics: Iso-
poda. Allan Hancock Pacif. Exped. 27 (4): 1-56.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 301
ScHULTZ, G. A. 1982a. Species of Protallocoxoidea and Stenetrioidea (Isopoda, Asellota) from
the Antarctic and Southern Seas. Antarct. Res. Ser. Washington 32: 17-62.
ScHuLTz, G. A. 1982b. Arcturidae from the Antarctic and Southern Seas. Antarct. Res. Ser.
Washington 32: 63-94.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1873. A sphaeromid from Australia, and Arcturidae from South Africa.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 12: 95-98.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1908. South African Crustacea. Part IV. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 6: 1-96.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1910. The Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Indian Ocean in 1905,
under the leadership of Mr J. Stanley Gardiner. Isopoda from the Indian Ocean and Brit-
ish East Africa. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2) (Zool.) 14: 83-122.
TATTERSALL, W. M. 1913. The Schizopoda, Stomatopoda, and non-Antarctic Isopoda of the
Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 49: 865-894.
VANHOFFEN, E. 1914. Die Isopoden der Deutschen stidpolar-Expedition 1901-1903. Dt.
Stidpol.-Exped. 14: 447-598.
WHITELEGGE, T. 1904. Scientific results of the trawling expedition of H.M.C.S. ‘Thetis’ off the
coast of New South Wales in February and March, 1898. Crustacea. Mem. Aust. Mus. 4:
405-416.
Wotrr, T. 1956. Isopoda from depths exceeding 6 000 metres. Galathea Rep. 2: 85-157.
Wot rr, T. 1962. The systematics and biology of the bathyal and abyssal Isopoda Asellota. Gal-
athea Rep. 6: 1-320.
ZUR STRASSEN, O. 1902. Uber die Gattung Arcturus und die Arcturiden der Deutschen Tiefsee-
Expedition. Zool. Anz. 25: 682-689.
wy
aS
oy
-
=
1
}
~ o
7)
‘
=
~
f
i
a Es a, aa :
re ae Ge
Pee
oe toa
.
a
‘
rt ;
Lo
Oe a bl a
i) te ee : Saal deo
- 1 1 os : a
i i _. +
ms = °
‘~ =
ve
= me - mats Ul
- ;
rT oe * NY ty —
a. ip Aaa
n cS aa :
‘< a , aT A
Cen 24 ae
ee vo OS eee) ae Tee
e u >
= i
i 7
i
i q
1 r Al, ¥ -
int c.\ @ i 7
a oe et ae
1
é
gt a]
2
r
¢
1
' ~ + =
’
i
‘
:
r
=
a
‘
7
i
~
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
BRIAN KENSLEY
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 15
MARINE ISOPODA OF THE 1977, 1978, 1979 CRUISES
AD 5 JUNE 1984 ISSN 0303-2515
F THE SOUTH AFRICAN:
we ~ MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines: Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 714: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 93 + Band
June 1984 Junie
Part 5 Deel
SB: 9.9.3.0
v cS
> SY
N
Cans»
NEAR-SURFACE COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
IN THE SOUTH-WESTERN INDIAN AND
SOUTH-EASTERN ATLANTIC OCEAN
By
A. H. B. DE DECKER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
ig AGE2),, S=9), 0%, 255, & tats), SUES, 5, ED).
GO, Gaon), HC), @, VIED, Dy IO GES),
GED Sh are), ICED) 1ECED), A), WSIS), WG), 23, SAO), GO
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 056 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
NEAR-SURFACE COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION IN THE SOUTH-
WESTERN INDIAN AND SOUTH-EASTERN ATLANTIC OCEAN
By
A. H. B. DE DECKER
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 5 figures, 80 maps, and 2 tables)
[MS accepted 27 September 1983]
ABSTRACT
Continuous underway sampling of near-surface plankton by centrifugal pump over a total
distance of nearly 26 000 nautical miles yielded 123 species of free-living copepods in 645
samples. Distribution maps of 80 species are presented, with comments on the physical environ-
ment, diel migration, standing stock, and species diversity. Interpretation of a number of distri-
bution patterns is attempted with reference to major current systems.
CONTENTS
PAGE
INtROCUCHO NMA yas 8 ye wero ack 303
Material and methods............ 305
Remarks on the hydrology........ 307
Dichimicnrdtonig. es cose ea 311
Scttledivolumes sa smiet as. ace SZ
I BINNS) See orn Sere Ae ele See re Bis
IFISHONSPECICSe tate ns cts Sees 313
Distribuvionipatternss. 2452 44-22) 318
INI QPSe eee Sores recs ety aceon sg 327
Acknowledgements ............. 367
INGICRENCES 4c. ee en es te Meh Oe 367
INTRODUCTION
Biological exploration of the oceanic crossroads south of Africa has not
kept pace with recent advances in the physical oceanography of the area.
Research on the area’s pelagic marine copepods, the most abundant and di-
verse group of the zooplankton, has been reviewed by De Decker (1962). Subse-
quent contributions were made by Fukase (1962), Seno et al. (1963a, 19635,
1966), and Tanaka (1964) on transects between Antarctica and South Africa; by
Kollmer (1963), Untertiberbacher (1964), Stander & De Decker (1969), Coetzee
(1974), and De Decker & Coetzee (1979) in the northern Benguela Current; by
Grice & Hiilsemann (1967) south of Madagascar; by Carter (1977) in the Agulhas
Current area; by De Decker (1968, 1973) and Hutchings (1979) in the southern
Benguela Current and western Agulhas Bank; by Wiborg (1964) around Tristan
da Cunha; and by Grindley & Lane (1979) around Marion Island.
303
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 93 (5), 1984: 303-370, 5 figs, 80 maps, 2 tables.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
304
‘sojduies 94} JO BULIOqUINU [eIIOS JY} JO SUOTJEOIPUT YIM ‘SydeI} VSINID [ “SI
“ %.
G7 Nop
CI6L OW
G9
8961 GH
Aeg SIA|JEM\
0S
.
ay
61d
9961 YM
S8
08
SS
SL
eyuns ep ueysuity
“07
SS
Ov ce oe
Sc
10Y4
Ol
Ol
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 305
As a whole, this research lacks methodological uniformity and spatial exten-
sion. The distributional data in the present report, although superficial in more
ways than one, are an attempt towards a comprehensive and homogeneous bio-
geographical image of the complex environment surrounding southern Africa.
On the physical side, surface temperature imagery obtained by satellite,
combined with trajectories of satellite-tracked buoys, revealed a wealth of detail
about the dynamics of the surface waters and provided a unifying background
for previous research. The relevant data and literature have been compiled and
interpreted by Lutjeharms (1981a—c) and Lutjeharms et al. (1981).
Many of the distribution patterns shown in the present report agree well
with the conceptual image derived from these physical studies; others point to
aspects still in need of clarification.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
During the deep-sea cruises of R.S. Africana IT in the years 1961 to 1968, a
continuous sampler was used to collect plankton at keel depth while steaming
between stations.
From 1961 to 1966 six oceanic sectors were surveyed at a rate of one every
year, starting from the latitude of Maputo (26°S) in the Indian Ocean and pro-
ceeding clock-wise to the latitude of Walvis Bay (23°S) in the Atlantic (Fig. 1).
In 1967 and 1968 two areas not covered by these six cruises were visited,
viz. the inshore waters along the south and south-eastern coasts between Cape
Town and Durban comprising the Agulhas Bank, the core region of the Agulhas
Current and the inshore upwelling along the south-eastern coast; and a 100 to
150 nautical miles-wide inshore belt along the west coast between Cape Town
and Walvis Bay, where the Benguela coastal upwelling is the dominant feature.
Also in 1968 three more deep-sea cruises were undertaken: one as far as Tristan
da Cunha with a southward deviation across the Subtropical Convergence; one
southward between the Agulhas Bank and the West Wind Drift; and the third to
the east as far as the Madagascar Ridge (Fig. 1).
The total distance covered by underway sampling was close to 26 000 nauti-
cal miles, and the number of samples analysed was 645.
Table 1 gives some particulars about the cruises and the symbols used in
this text to designate each cruise.
The continuous sampler consisted of a centrifugal pump conveying sea-
water through a pipe connecting an intake near the keel directly with a tap in
the ship’s laboratory. A 30 cm-long cylindrical straining sock of 200 u mesh
nylon gauze was fixed to the tap and ended in a removable bucket of the type
used on the N70 Discovery plankton net (Kemp & Hardy 1929). The pump’s
capacity was approximately 30 1 min.~'.
The plankton retained in the bucket was removed at 4-hourly intervals or
when the ship reduced speed on arriving at station, whichever was the shortest.
The plankton obtained over each individual stretch was preserved in 4 per cent
306 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 1
Data on cruises and collections.
Cruise Dates Samples Copepod Settled volume ranges Average
-examined species (% frequency) ml h-1 standing stock
identified |<0,25 to 0,50 to1 to 2 >2 | (ml 1000 m-3)
IIOE 1961 4-15 July 16 68
MC 1962 19 June— 98 79 70
12 July
AM 1963 3-19 April 47 80 70
SA 1964 10-29 March 65 il 280
CB 1965 2-24 April 3 78 210
WR 1966 6-27 July 99 64 140
NT 1967 11-24 July 25 83 303
TR 1968 4-21 March 88 Vi 70
AP 1968 13-22 June 47 62
WS 1968 4-22 Sept. 59 85 210
HB 1968 5-13 April 49 56 470
formalin, allowed to settle in a graduated cylinder for about 12 hours, and
stored in a vial. Settled volume figures were converted to ml h~!. While on
station, the water delivered by the pump was allowed to run off in a sink, in
order to have the system completely flushed before the continuous sampling re-
sumed. The collecting bucket was replaced when the ship got under way.
Since normal cruising speed was 10 knots, each 4-hour sample contained
plankton caught over a distance of 40 nautical miles, a unit length conferring
sufficient resolution to the distribution patterns in an oceanic area stretching
over more than 3 000 nautical miles longitudinally and nearly 1 500 nautical
miles latitudinally. Reduced speed in bad weather enhances the resolution with-
out affecting the catch figures, as these are based on time intervals, not on dis-
tances. During the 1961 cruise when the method was first attempted, starting
from a station south of Mauritius, the catch was not subdivided in 4-hour sec-
tions, but each sample was taken from one station to the next, i.e. over approxi-
mately 100 nautical miles.
Copepods caught by the continuous pump suffered no more damage than
those caught by a plankton net hauled at low speed. The pump, however, seems
to be selective against larger plankton organisms such as salps, medusae, eu-
phausiids, etc. It was repeatedly observed that in areas where all plankton nets,
including those towed horizontally at or near the surface, were utterly clogged
with salps at successive stations, the pump samples obtained under way between
these stations contained hardly any salps. This selectivity is probably due to the
low suction power of the pump having to contend with the inertia of organisms
sweeping past the intake at a speed of 10 knots: the larger the organism, the less
it will be affected by suction perpendicular to its relative motion. This interpre-
tation is supported by the fact that large amounts of salps or euphausiids were
sometimes caught in pump samples taken while the ship was stationary.
Selectivity against larger organisms is an obvious advantage when sampling
is directed at small forms such as copepods, although it may affect the quantita-
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 307
tive aspect of the results as larger copepods could well be affected by it to an un-
known extent in relation to smaller ones.
Further advantages of pump sampling are its practicability in all weather
conditions, the virtual elimination of the effects of plankton patchiness, the
smaller likelihood of mixing different plankton communities in one sample, as
can happen in vertical net hauls across a thermocline, the improved chances of
capturing less abundant forms and, correlatively, of tracing a species to the limit
of its distribution area where it becomes rarefied. Finally, this method does not
impose delay on the ship and is not affected by loss of gear.
No attempt was made to obtain a complete repertory of all copepod species
present. Non-identifiable juveniles were ignored and so were adults whose iden-
tification was uncertain or too time-consuming.
REMARKS ON THE HYDROLOGY
The hydrological conditions prevailing during individual cruises have been
described in detail by Orren (1963, 1966), Duncan (1968), Visser (1969), Shan-
non & van Rijswijck (1969), Welsh & Visser (1970), and Henry (1972). Bang
(1973) and Andrews & Hutchings (1980) gave detailed accounts of the Southern
Benguela System; Duncan (1970) and Harris & Van Foreest (1977) presented a
general interpretation of existing physical data on the Agulhas Current System.
A conceptual image of the dynamics of the central part of the area under dis-
cussion, based mainly on satellite imagery, was constructed by Lutjeharms
(1981a) (Fig. 2). The general outline of the physical structure of the seas around
southern Africa has been repeatedly described and does not need to be given
here. Only a few features which may be relevant to the interpretation of the
plankton distribution patterns will be discussed; they are based on physical data
collected during the cruises, with due regard to the picture emerging from some
of the more recent publications mentioned above.
The SA cruise in March 1964 took place at the time when a short-circuiting
in the southern Agulhas Current retroflexion had generated an extensive anti-
cyclonic eddy or warm ring centered near the Schmitt-Ott Seamount at about
40°S 15°E, with a diameter of approximately 300 km (Fig. 3) and a depth in ex-
cess of 1 200 m (Fig. 4A). This eddy, called the ‘Schmitt-Ott eddy’ in the pres-
ent context, has been described in detail by Duncan (1968) and Visser (1969).
Lying astride the average latitude of the Subtropical Convergence, its effect on
the latter was either an extensive southward displacement (beyond the survey
area) or, more probably, a complete disintegration. The Agulhas Current
proper ran southward along the 20°E meridian, to the east of the eddy.
The TR cruise in March 1968 crossed the area where the eddy had been
4 years earlier and passed over the Schmitt-Ott Seamount, but a warm ring was
not found. Instead, a thermal front (the Subtropical Convergence) separated the
Subantarctic surface water from a comparatively shallow and wide trough of
308 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
30°S
ecccccce
eocccceces
TITTI TTS
eccegtteoce
° eee
eocest.s. ¢
t.
eepeocer
eogmecese} = =——— “<Géss fv
eeccccedgeccco/ - pe
fe
eocccccece
AUT xe
Fig. 2. A conceptual image of the Agulhas Current System. Heavy dots indicate warm water,
lighter dots colder water, and hatching cold subtropical surface water and upwelled water. The
line demarcating the subtropical water at about 40°S latitude is the Subtropical Convergence.
1. The embryonic stages of a Natal pulse. 2. Small waves or disturbances on the Agulhas Cur-
rent border. 3. Shear edge effects, warm-water plumes or shear edge eddies. 4. Cold up-
welled water. 5. The dispersion of a shear edge feature attached to an Agulhas Current
meander. 6. The Agulhas Current retroflection. 7. An Agulhas Current Ring being advected
northward. 8. The Cape upwelling regime with frontal eddies in evidence. 9. A planetary
wave on the Agulhas Return Current—Subtropical Convergence. 10. An independent cold-
water eddy spawned by an unstable planetary wave. (From Lutjeharms 1981a.)
warm saline water about 270 km north-east of the Schmitt-Ott Seamount, with a
subsurface salinity maximum of 35,4%o just below the 200 m level. As one cross-
ing only was made, it is not possible to conclude from the single vertical section
whether this trough represents a decaying warm ring or a terminal branch of the
Agulhas Current (Fig. 4B).
Warm rings separated from the Agulhas Current near its retroflexion area
are assumed to be moving northward over considerable distances in the south-
eastern Atlantic. This view gained strong support, if not conclusive proof, from
an experiment involving a satellite-tracked buoy placed in an Agulhas Current
fragment detected on enhanced infra-red images received from Meteosat (Lutje-
harms & Valentine 1981). A number of distribution patterns in the present
report appear to illustrate this mode of advection of Indian Ocean species into
the south-eastern Atlantic.
thermograph
(°C) construc
cordings (from Visser 1969).
rface temperature
re
Fig. 3. Cruise SA 1964; sea su
310 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SA5 SAI3 SA17 SAI19 Stations
Ly
m @35,50
S
200 ) a 35,40
) (op)
400 35,00
600
800
3450
A2°S A1°S A0°S 39°S 38°S S7eS
TR17 TR18 TR 19 Stations
an 35,40
200
35,00
400
600 34,50
800
42°S A1°S 40°S BS SES PS 36°S
Fig. 4. A. Salinity section across the Schmitt-Ott eddy, cruise SA 1964.
B. Salinity section along the south-west to north-east leg of cruise TR 1968.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION Sul
The Subtropical Convergence was crossed during the MC 1962 and AM
1963 cruises. Its location shows a discrepancy between the two cruises, which
finds its counterpart in the discrepancy in the northern distribution limits of the
Subantarctic copepod species during the successive visits. The species concerned
seem to follow roughly the 5 to 6 °C isotherms. This observation agrees with the
existence of planetary waves moving along the Convergence, as seen on satellite
infra-red images (Lutjeharms 1981a). Some such waves may become unstable
and lose their tops, which then become separate cold-core eddies drifting
northward and advecting Subantarctic plankton into the notal and subtropical
zones.
Along the landward flank of the Agulhas Current, cold low-saline water is
often found at various places over variable distances, extending at times over a
width of 20 km (Duncan 1970). According to present evidence, this surfacing of
cold water has its predisposition in the near-permanent, steep upward trend of
isotherms and isohalines against the slope to relatively shallow depths, and is
basically the result of dynamic upwelling whenever a meander of the Agulhas
Current swerves away from the coast, creating a divergence. Concomitant fac-
tors of this dynamic uplift may be atmospheric conditions such as south-westerly
winds and cyclonic disturbances travelling up the coast. The resulting hydrologi-
cal situation is a number of temporary cyclonic cells strung along the coast,
whose inshore arcs cause northward advection of plankton and act in the man-
ner of a conveyer-belt carrying surface-living cold-water organisms from the
Agulhas Bank and west coast sometimes as far north as Cape St. Lucia (28°S).
Deeper-living cold-water species find a near-permanent northward advection
tunnel under the shallow thermocline created against the slope by the upward-
trending isolines.
Hydrological conditions south of Madagascar have proved intricate and
variable: apparent contradictions between the various workers may be due to
seasonal reversals; year-round observations are not yet available from the area.
The East Madagascar Current appears to behave like a western boundary
current, retroflecting north-eastward after passing the southern tip of the island.
In the process eddies are generated, some of which may migrate westward
towards the Agulhas Current (Lutjeharms, Bang & Duncan 1981). Certain
details in the distribution pattern of a few of the copepod species discussed
below are reminiscent of such influxes from the direction of the Madagascar
shelf.
DIEL MIGRATION
An indication of diel vertical migration was found when comparing
216 samples taken at night with 160 samples taken during daylight hours.
The 28 species listed in Table 2 occurred in night samples in over 70 per cent
of their total number of occurrence in both sets, and are therefore considered
migrators.
312 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 2
Diel vertical migration, as deduced from 216 night samples and 160 daylight samples.
No. of occurrences
Total % at night
Calanopia minor 3 100
Clytemnestra scutellata 10 100
Pleuromamma robusta 4 100
Heterorhabdus papilliger 33) 97
Scolecithricella glacialis 14 93
Candacia simplex 12 92
Clytemnestra rostrata 11 91
Undeuchaeta plumosa 28 89
Centropages furcatus 9 88
Pleuromamma abdominalis 56 88
Euchaeta acuta 7/ 87
Pleuromamma piseki 116 86
Pleuromamma borealis 65 86
Rhincalanus nasutus 40 85
Undinula darwinii 13 85
Candacia bipinnata 14 85
Eucalanus elongatus 8 83
Pleuromamma gracilis 63 83
Candacia ethiopica Di 81
Euchaeta marina 35 80
Pleuromamma xiphias 19 79
Lucicutia flavicornis 111 Ty
Calanoides carinatus 22 76
Neocalanus gracilis iS 76
Metridia lucens 83 75
Calanus tenuicornis 89 74
Eucalanus subcrassus 15) 73
Scolecithrix danae 31 ql
Some species falling in the lower percentage range of night-time occur-
rence, even below 70 per cent, show increased abundance at night. Such species
are Calanus simillimus, Ctenocalanus vanus, Macrosetella gracilis, Microsetella
norvegica, Calanoides carinatus, Clausocalanus ingens, Lucicutia flavicornis, and
Metridia lucens.
SETTLED VOLUMES
As the settled volumes were generally small—only 7 per cent of the samples
exceeded 1 ml h-!—a notable margin of error is attached to the recorded values.
Nevertheless, a regional trend emerges when comparing the average settled vol-
umes for the individual cruises (Table 1) or when mapping the areas where vol-
umes of 0,5 ml h~! or more were obtained occasionally.
These larger volumes are grouped near the continent and around the
islands, as could be expected, and also in the Schmitt-Ott area and the neigh-
bouring southern branch of the Agulhas Current. Since the percentage of night
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 313
samples taken during the cruise in the latter area was much higher than during
the other cruises, a possible bias was avoided by comparing only the night sam-
ples of the different cruises. This test confirmed the higher abundance of small
zooplankton in the Schmitt-Ott area as compared with the surrounding areas.
DIVERSITY
The pattern of diversity—i.e. the number of species per sample—reflects
the large-scale hydrological structure of the survey area (Fig. 5).
The diversity was lowest in the Subantarctic water and along the Benguela
coastal upwelling. The transition to higher diversity in the South Indian and
South Atlantic central gyres seems to occur somewhat further north in the At-
lantic than in the Indian Ocean, in agreement with the average hydrological con-
ditions for these areas as recorded in the ‘Monatskarten’ published by the
Deutsches Hydrographisches Institut (1960, 1971). Meisenheimer (1905) found a
similar difference in the distribution limits of pteropods in both oceans and at-
tributed it to warming by the Return Agulhas Current in the southern Indian
Ocean.
Two patches of high diversity, based on three and four samples respec-
tively, were found in the Atlantic and contained between 29 and 47 species per
sample. One patch lay west of the Cape of Good Hope (TR 2, 3 and 4) and the
other reached as far north as 31°S (CB 8, 9, 10 and 15). These patches contained
assemblages in which the percentage contribution of Indian Ocean species de-
creased from the southern to the northern samples in the sequence 38, 32 and
36; 34, 28, 28 and 10 per cent respectively. Indian Ocean species are denoted as
such in the present context on the basis of their distribution pattern obtained
from the material under discussion. The diminishing presence of Indian Ocean
faunal elements in a northward direction along the west coast lends support to
the idea that the high diversity patches are manifestations of warm rings orig-
inating from the Agulhas Current and moving northward in the Atlantic. Four
samples taken in the southward branch of the Current (SA 33, 56, 63 and 64)
and containing a total of between 35 and 39 species had a percentage of
Indian Ocean forms ranging between 28 and 40 per cent. Two samples with 36
species each, taken outside the Agulhas branch but close to its thermal front (SA
32 and 37) contained 20 and 22 per cent of Indian Ocean species, respectively.
One sample of 32 species taken in the Atlantic at 26°S 10°E at night (WR 81)
did not contain Agulhas-related species.
LIST OF SPECIES
Occurrences of scarce and scattered species are indicated here by means of
the cruise symbol followed by the sample number (see Fig. 1); occurrences of
other species are shown on the maps that are placed in alphabetical order of
species names on pages 327-366.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
314
O09
OS
OV
“UOHNGIISIP AjsIoaId *¢ “SIq
Oc
Aeg siaj
CAA
Ol
Ol
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION eulS)
Thickened lines on the ship’s routes indicate stretches where the species was
found in the continuous pump samples. Shaded areas are suggested distribution
patterns; darker shading indicates areas of higher abundance.
Order CALANOIDA
Family Calanidae
Calanus finmarchicus (Gunnerus, 1765) s./. (sensu lato)
C. propinquus Brady, 1883 (AP 21)
C. simillimus Giesbrecht, 1902
C. tenuicornis Dana, 1849
Nannocalanus minor (Claus, 1863)
Calanoides carinatus (Kréyer, 1849)
C. macrocarinatus Brodski, 1972
Canthocalanus pauper (Giesbrecht, 1888)
Neocalanus gracilis (Dana, 1848)
N. robustior (Giesbrecht, 1888) (NC 136, 138)
Undinula darwinii (Lubbock, 1860)
U. vulgaris (Dana, 1849)
Family Eucalanidae
Eucalanus attenuatus (Dana, 1849) s.1.
. crassus Giesbrecht, 1888
. hyalinus (Claus, 1866)
longiceps Matthews, 1925 (TR 68)
monachus Giesbrecht, 1888 (SA 33)
. mucronatus Giesbrecht, 1888
. pileatus Giesbrecht, 1888
. subcrassus Giesbrecht, 1888
. subtenuis Giesbrecht, 1888 (MC 147; SA 3, 33; BC 8; TR 2)
Rhincalanus cornutus Dana, 1853
R. gigas Brady, 1883 (MC 78, 82)
R. nasutus Giesbrecht, 1888
Ramah aa ay
Family Paracalanidae
Paracalanus aculeatus Giesbrecht, 1888
P. crassirostris F. Dahl, 1893
Acrocalanus gibber Giesbrecht, 1888
A. gracilis Giesbrecht, 1888
A. monachus Giesbrecht, 1888
Family Calocalanidae
Calocalanus contractus Farran, 1926
C. pavo (Dana, 1849)
C. plumulosus (Claus, 1863)
C. styliremis Giesbrecht, 1888
C. tenuis Farran, 1926
Mecynocera clausi 1. C. Thompson, 1888
Family Pseudocalanidae
Clausocalanus furcatus (Brady, 1883)
C. ingens Frost & Fleminger, 1968
C. laticeps Farran, 1926
Ctenocalanus vanus Giesbrecht, 1888
Drepanopus pectinatus Brady, 1883
316 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Aetideidae
Aetideus armatus (Boeck, 1872) (AP 3)
Euaetideus acutus (Farran, 1929) (MC 35; WS 46)
E. bradyi (A. Scott, 1909) (IIOE 14)
E. giesbrechti (Cleve, 1904) (CB 61)
Gaetanus minor Farran, 1905 (AM 4; HB 1)
Euchirella rostrata (Claus, 1866)
Undeuchaeta plumosa (Lubbock, 1856)
Family Euchaetidae
Euchaeta acuta Giesbrecht, 1892
E. biloba (Farran, 1929) (MC 69)
E. marina (Prestandrea, 1833)
E. media Giesbrecht, 1888 (IIOE 14)
E. wolfendeni A. Scott, 1909
Family Scolecithricidae
Scaphocalanus echinatus (Farran, 1906) (AP 15; WR 51, 52)
Scolecithricella glacialis (Giesbrecht, 1902)
Scolecithrix bradyi Giesbrecht, 1888 (SA 3, 29, 37, 44; WR 44; WS 31)
Scolecithrix danae (Lubbock, 1856)
Family Phaennidae
Phaenna spinifera Claus, 1863 (AP 10)
Family Centropagidae
Centropages brachiatus (Dana, 1849)
C. bradyi Wheeler, 1899
. calaninus (Dana, 1849) (SA 33; IIOE 14)
. chierchiae Giesbrecht, 1889
. elongatus Giesbrecht, 1896
. furcatus (Dana, 1849)
. gracilis (Dana, 1849) (SA 3, 63; WS 46; IIOE 14)
longicornis Mori, 1937 (WS 54)
. orsinii Giesbrecht, 1889 (WS 55)
. violaceus (Claus, 1863)
AWAD AQ AO
Family Pseudodiaptomidae
Pseudodiaptomus nudus Tanaka, 1960 (AM 2; AP 1, 2, 3, 7)
Family Temoridae
Temora discaudata Giesbrecht, 1889
T. stylifera (Dana, 1849) (MC 147; SA 1, 2)
T. turbinata (Dana, 1849)
Family Metridiidae
Metridia lucens Boeck, 1864
Pleuromamma abdominalis (Lubbock, 1956)
. borealis (F. Dahl, 1893)
. gracilis (Claus, 1863)
. piseki Farran, 1929
. quadrungulata (F. Dahl, 1894) (AM 4; SA 61)
. robusta (F. Dahl, 1894) (MC 69, 74, 75, 79)
. xiphias (Giesbrecht, 1889)
acl as} qe} el asl ae)
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
Family Lucicutiidae
Lucicutia flavicornis (Claus, 1863)
L. gaussae Grice, 1963 (SA 45, 59, 63; TR 12; WR 79)
L. clausi (Giesbrecht, 1889) (AM 4)
Family Heterorhabdidae
Heterorhabdus papilliger (Claus, 1863)
H. spinifrons (Claus, 1863) (SA 46)
Family Augaptilidae
Haloptilus longicornis (Claus, 1863) (AM 4)
H. oxycephalus (Giesbrecht, 1889) (SA 46)
H. spiniceps (Giesbrecht, 1892) (WR 81)
Family Candaciidae
Candacia bipinnata (Giesbrecht, 1888)
. bispinosa (Claus, 1863) (AM 3; SA 62; WR 41)
. catula (Giesbrecht, 1889)
. curta Cleve, 1904 (HB 13, 16, 34; MC 147)
. ethiopica (Dana, 1849)
. pachydactyla (Dana, 1849) (MC 147; CB 16; WS 7)
. simplex (Giesbrecht, 1889)
. truncata (Dana, 1849) (TR 2; HOE 14)
. varicans (Giesbrecht, 1892) (AM 36, 40, 46; TR 2, 5)
HE) OQ) OY DG ©
Family Pontellidae
Calanopia elliptica (Dana, 1849) (MC 147)
C. minor A. Scott, 1902
Labidocera acuta (Dana, 1849)
L. acutifrons (Dana, 1849)
L. minutum Giesbrecht, 1889
Pontella securifer Brady, 1883 (TR 85)
Pontellina plumata (Dana, 1849) s.1.
Family Acartiidae
Paracartia africana Steuer, 1915 (WR 47 to 52: Walvis Bay shelf)
Acartia amboinensis Carl, 1907 (WS 55)
A. danae Giesbrecht, 1889
A. negligens Dana, 1849
Order CYCLOPOIDA
Family Oncaeidae
Lubbockia aculeata Giesbrecht, 1891 (WS SO, 57)
L. squillimana Claus, 1863 (MC 20; AM 45; IIOE 1, 2)
Pachos sp. (IIOE 14)
Family Sapphirinidae
Corissa parva Farran, 1936 (IIOE 1)
Order HARPACTICOIDA
Family Ectinosomatidae
Microsetella norvegica (Boeck, 1864)
M. rosea (Dana, 1848)
a7
318 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Tachydiidae
Euterpina acutifrons (Dana, 1852)
Family Clytemnestridae
Clytemnestra rostrata (Brady, 1883)
C. scutellata Dana, 1847
Family Miraciidae
Miracia efferata Dana, 1846 (SA 1, 44, 63, 70)
Oculosetella gracilis (Dana, 1852)
Macrosetella gracilis (Dana, 1848)
DISTRIBUTION PATTERNS
The distribution patterns shown in this report are influenced by a number of
time-dependent factors, the most obvious being shifting currents, eddies and
fronts, and pulses of upwelling, among other physical and chemical conditions,
as well as rhythmic events in the life of the species such as diurnal or seasonal
migration. To give but one example: had the south-western sector been sur-
veyed in October-November instead of in March, Calanus tonsus and Cala-
noides macrocarinatus would have been found at the surface over an extensive
inshore area around the Cape of Good Hope (De Decker 1973).
One might expect that the lack of synopticity of the collections could have a
disrupting effect on the distribution patterns. In most cases, however, no such
effect has been noticed and meaningful patterns have been obtained, at least for
species occurring with sufficient frequency. The reason for this may be that the
environmental factors (currents, fronts, etc.) governing the dispersal of a species
have a reasonable degree of topographical constancy at the scale of the area sur-
veyed.
One exception can be seen in the species found south of the Subtropical
Convergence. Here the planetary waves running along the Convergence may be
responsible for the discontinuity in the patterns in successive years (MC 1962,
AM 1963) and between SA 1964 and TR 1968, south of the Schmitt-Ott Sea-
mount (see e.g. Clausocalanus laticeps).
No attempt has been made to force a biogeographical interpretation on
species showing a rarefied and thinly scattered occurrence in the present ma-
terial. Such species are either rare or have their habitat in deeper levels; their
occasional capture at the surface can be considered merely incidental and offers
no valid basis for a distribution picture.
The two most frequent types of distribution are:
(i) a widespread distribution mainly north of the Subtropical Convergence
in warm and temperate waters, with avoidance of the cold coastal up-
welling, and
(ii) patterns related to the Agulhas Current and its ramifications.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 319
Widespread warm-temperate patterns
The southward extension of this group varies to a notable extent depending
on the species. Mecynocera clausi advances farthest south, following the surface
isolines of 34,30 %o salinity and 10 °C temperature; Acartia danae, A. negligens
and Nannocalanus minor do not extend below 35,00 %o and 13 to 16 °C, whereas
Calocalanus pavo and C. plumulosus are generally confined still further north.
The southern limits of the above-mentioned species converge and practically
coincide at two places where a strong thermohaline front was crossed: near
station MC 3 (40°44’S 33°36’E) where the Subtropical Convergence mani-
fested itself by a temperature gradient of 11°C (18,5 to 7,5°C) in less than
70 nautical miles along the north-western-south-eastern route with relatively
little wind and current activity (Orren 1966, figs 2 and 5), and near station SA 9
(43°04'S 20°09'E) where the impact of the southward branch of the Agulhas
Current on the Subantarctic Water of the West Wind Drift caused a drop in
temperature of 10°C in as many miles (Duncan 1968). At the latter position only
Mecynocera clausi penetrates farther south than the other warm-temperate
species.
The two widespread Pleuromamma species, P. borealis and P. gracilis, ad-
vance further south than any of the above-mentioned species, but being active
diurnal migrators, their occurrences are scattered due to their absence from the
daylight catches, and their southern limit is not well defined. South of the Sub-
tropical Convergence they were caught less frequently. Pleuromamma abdomi-
nalis, P. piseki and P. xiphias—especially the latter—were not found as far
south.
In most of the warm-temperate species the southern limit hes further north
in the Atlantic than in the Indian sector. On the Atlantic Ocean a north-
eastward trend of certain species is noticeable on the western flank of the
Schmitt-Ott eddy, indicating penetration of Subantarctic Water in direction of
the Cape. Within the Schmitt-Ott eddy, however, the warm-temperate species
undergo their furthest southward advection.
Agulhas Current patterns
More than twenty species display a pattern more or less closely related to
the course of the Agulhas Current and its ramifications. There is a gradation in
tolerance of lateral mixing, some species keeping strictly to the warm core of the
Current, while others show a more diffuse pattern.
Centropages furcatus shows a near-ideal picture of the course of the Cur-
rent, a main branch reaching as far as 43°S, with a weak northern branch and
some spillage into the Atlantic to the west. This species had long been con-
sidered as world-wide circumtropical, until Fleminger & Hiilsemann (1973)
showed that the mid-Atlantic population is a separate species, C. velificatus (de
Oliveira, 1947). The specimens in the present material may be taken as Indo-Pa-
cific indicators of the Agulhas Current.
320 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Progressively wider dispersion away from the Current core is apparent in
species such as Acrocalanus gracilis, A. monachus, Temora discaudata, Eucala-
nus mucronatus, E. pileatus, E. crassus, Canthocalanus pauper, and Scolecithrix
danae, revealing structural details of the current, viz. a returning branch around
38°S, an eastward retroflexion of the main current in 42—43°S along the Sub-
antarctic Surface Water, penetration of Agulhas Current water into the Atlantic
with northward transport on the western side of the Benguela front, and
colonization of the warm centre of the Schmitt-Ott eddy.
A most pervading indicator of Agulhas Current admixture is Macrosetella
gracilis. It penetrates as far north as 30°S into the Atlantic, but has not yet been
found in South West African waters, except for one specimen during the 1963
oceanographic anomaly reported by Stander & De Decker (1969). Its world dis-
tribution is circumtropical; in the south-western Atlantic it is an indicator of the
Brazil Current (Bjornberg 1959).
Agulhas Bank patterns
The Agulhas Bank appears to be the centre of dispersal for Calanus finmar-
chicus s.l., Candacia bipinnata, and Centropages chierchiae. The name Calanus
finmarchicus s.l. is used here to designate a form of uncertain taxonomic status
showing morphological resemblances with both C. australis (Brodski, 1959) and
C. pacificus pacificus (Brodski, 1959). The various sibling species derived from
the original C. finmarchicus stock appear to be concentrated (at least in the
Southern Hemisphere) on and near shelf areas (Australia, Tasmania, New
Zealand, Chile, Argentina, and Tristan da Cunha) but rare in the open ocean,
as stated by Jillett (1971) in the case of New Zealand plankton. The Agulhas
Bank form may well constitute a separate taxon, different from the varieties of
C. australis recorded in similar latitudes off Australia, New Zealand and South
America but, like these, falling into the C. helgolandicus-group.
Candacia bipinnata was found by Lawson (1977) in large numbers off the
Somali coast and considered a good indicator of coastal upwelling conditions
there. Unpublished data about the Benguela upwelling show that the latter
opinion needs qualification if applied to southern African conditions: Unter-
uberbacher (1964) did not find the species during his year-round survey in the
Walvis Bay upwelling area, whereas one single specimen was found in the same
area by Stander & De Decker (1969) during the 1963 oceanographic anomaly.
An isolated occurrence of Calanus finmarchicus s.l. and Candacia bipinnata
in two different, but close, neighbouring samples south-west of Madagascar sup-
ports the suspicion that the Madagascar shelf could harbour these species, whose
appearance in the far north-eastern corner of the present survey area would be
due to advection by the East Madagascar Current or by migrating eddies gener-
ated at its retroflexion. The presence of Candacia bipinnata in the waters around
Madagascar has been reported by Binet & Dessier (1968) for the Nosy-Bé area
and by Lawson (1977) for the Mozambique Channel and the southern tip of the
island.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION By)
Centropages chierchiae appears to be more tolerant than the two previous
species and is therefore a good indicator of advection. It avoids the cold
upwelled water off the west coast and generally appears to be entrained by the
mixed waters bordering the main stream of the Agulhas Current. The species
starts following the ramifications of the Current from the moment the latter
reaches the eastern flank of the Agulhas Bank. Along the east coast of South
Africa it is found in the cooler inshore belt and is practically absent from the
Agulhas Current proper, in the same way as can be seen in some other species,
e.g. Calanus finmarchicus s.1. and Calanoides carinatus.
In the south Centropages chierchiae is advected along the southward branch
of the Agulhas Current, whereas in the Atlantic it spreads in a manner similar to
the Agulhas Current species Macrosetella gracilis, but further west and north.
The distribution of C. chierchiae is clearly dictated by the dynamic effect of
the various branches of the Agulhas Current on the surrounding waters,
although it does not belong to the fauna of that Current. Its areas of higher con-
centration are also clearly different from those of Macrosetella gracilis. A similar
effect on the distribution of species not belonging to the Agulhas Current com-
munity is seen in cases such as Calanoides carinatus, Candacia ethiopica, Centro-
pages brady, Eucalanus attenuatus, Labidocera minutum, Rhincalanus cornutus,
R. nasutus, and Temora turbinata.
In the literature Centropages chierchiae is considered a tropical and subtropi-
cal Atlantic species (Vervoort 1965). Its distribution pattern in South African
waters suggests that it is a form of mixed water, preferring higher temperatures
than its congener C. brachiatus, which lives inside the colder belt of coastal upwel-
ling. Available literature data about C. chierchiae convey the impression that the
species is essentially neritic (see Bainbridge 1972), like many other Centropages
species, but the distribution pattern emerging from the present survey suggests
that it can withstand advection over considerable distances, as do some other
neritic forms, e.g. Temora turbinata (Bradford 1977; De Decker & Coetzee 1979).
The small patch of C. chierchiae off Walvis Bay could be an outpost of a
northern population of the species extending from the Moroccan coast (Furnes-
tin 1957) southward along the coast as far as Angola (Marques 1953, 1958; Bain-
bridge 1960a, 1960b; Vervoort 1965; Neto & Paiva 1966; Corral 1970, Corral &
Corral 1970) and occasionally carried towards the vicinity of Walvis Bay by the
warm Angola Current (Untertiberbacher 1964; Stander & De Decker 1969).
Several years’ unpublished data at the author’s disposal do not show a single in-
stance of continuity between the west African and the South African popu-
lations of C. chierchiae.
Benguela Current patterns
Centropages brachiatus is most typical of the Benguela Current System and
one of its most abundant copepods. Its world distribution is limited to certain
areas of coastal upwelling, mainly in the Southern Hemisphere: it is a dominant
species in the Peru Current (Bj6rnberg 1973) and is also present, but less abun-
322 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dantly, over the Atlantic shelf of South America (Ramirez 1966, 1969;
Bjornberg 1963).
Like most Centropages species, it is essentially neritic and, contrary to
C. chierchiae, it thrives in the cool upwelling belt hugging the shoreline between
the Cape and the northern outskirts of the Namib Desert. The sinuosity of its
main distribution boundary to the west reflects the general trend of the depth
contours, as in the case of Calanoides carinatus (see below). Its scattered occur-
rences west of the thermal front may be the expression of cool frontal eddies
spawned by the Benguela System. The 500 nautical miles-long extension of the
distribution area west of Cape Town is difficult to explain: it appears to be con-
nected with some dynamic process as a similar westward trend can be seen to a
variable extent in that area in the patterns of Acrocalanus gibber, A. gracilis,
Calanus finmarchicus s.l., Centropages chierchiae, C. furcatus, Euterpina acuti-
frons, and Temora turbinata, and was observed mainly in samples collected dur-
ing the TR cruise in March 1968. Two distribution maps of surface temperatures
obtained by satellite in May-June 1966 and in 1970 have been published by Sze-
kielda (1972). They show a cold patch centered about 300 nautical miles due
west of Cape Town in approximately the same position as the westward exten-
sion of Centropages brachiatus and the other species named above. A similar hy-
drological configuration was found during March 1969 in the form of a cold-
cored, low-salinity anticyclonic vortex of about 200 nautical miles in diameter
west of Cape Town, and on 9 February 1977 a similar feature in much the same
position was detected on an infra-red image (Harris & Van Foreest 1977).
Apart from this isolated case of long-distance advection, C. brachiatus does
not seem to withstand distant transport: the massive southward advection shown
by C. chierchiae is indicated only faintly by C. brachiatus, whereas the penetra-
tion into the Indian Ocean, conveying a number of west coast species up the
Natal coast by way of the inshore upwelling cells dotting the south-eastern coast-
line, is attested in the case of C. brachiatus merely by its occurrence off Durban
in a single sample.
Northwards C. brachiatus does not appear to reach as far as Angola:
neither Marques nor Neto & Paiva recorded it. Its only mention further north is
by Rose (1929)—Mauretania, Canaries, Azores (authorities not named). The
record from the Gulf of Guinea by Scott (1894) was proved erroneous by Bain-
bridge (Vervoort 1965). Recent investigations in the north-west African Atlantic
by Corral (1970, 1972), Corral & Corral (1970) did not confirm the presence of
C. brachiatus in these parts.
De Decker’s (1962) suspicion that Cleve (1904) misidentified C. brachiatus as
C. typicus in his South African material has been proved correct on examining
Cleve’s specimens in the collections of the South African Museum at Cape Town.
Calanoides carinatus is one of the main components of the zooplankton in
the Benguela Current System, along with Centropages brachiatus (Untertber-
bacher 1964; Hutchings 1979), but may be less abundant in the samples under
discussion because of its preference for deeper levels; the gaps in its occurrence
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 323
along the west coast sampling track (HB cruise) are caused by diurnal vertical
migration.
Like Centropages brachiatus, Calanoides carinatus proliferates in upwelling
areas, but in the Benguela Current System it seems to occur at lower tempera-
tures than those favoured by Centropages brachiatus. On a world-wide scale,
however, it appears to be more eurythermic than C. brachiatus: in tropical
coastal upwellings such as those in the Gulf of Guinea (Bainbridge 1972;
Mensah 1974), along the south coast of Arabia (Vinogradov & Voronina 1962;
Gapishko 1968; Grobov 1968), and off Somalia (Smith 1982), Calanoides cari-
natus occurs in water temperatures between 18 and 25°C, which are the local
minima. Such eurythermy may explain the extensive southward and north-
eastward advection sustained by this species in the survey area, in contrast to
Centropages brachiatus. The latter has never been recorded off Angola, whereas
Marques (1953, 1956, 1958) established the presence of Calanoides carinatus in
sizeable quantities along the whole Angolan coast as far north as Cabinda. Neto
& Paiva (1966) found it practically all year round in Baia Farta (12°36’S). Data
of the occurrence of C. carinatus along the whole Atlantic coast of Africa have
been summarized by Thiriot (1977).
The near-continuous occurrence of Calanoides carinatus along the southern
leg of the 1968 WS cruise is puzzling. In this connection it may be noted that the
author, having examined large numbers of Calanoides specimens taken at vari-
ous depths all around southern Africa, has serious doubts about the taxonomic
homogeneity of the representatives of this genus in the area concerned, apart
from the seasonally occurring C. macrocarinatus. The still problematic C. natalis
Brady comes to mind in this context.
Metridia lucens, another abundant form in the Benguela Current System, dif-
fers fundamentally from both species mentioned above in that its surface distribu-
tion appears to form a direct link between the west coast upwelling and the
Subantarctic. Its presence in the Marion—Crozet region agrees well with the
findings of Seret (1979) around the Crozet and Kerguelen islands, those of Hardy
& Gunther (1935) around South Georgia, and of Ealey (1956) at Heard Island.
Although more cryophilic than Calanoides carinatus and Centropages brachiatus,
the occurrence of M. lucens in surface samples off the west coast of southern
Africa extends further into the warm surface water beyond the Benguela front.
This can be explained by the extensive diurnal vertical migration of Metridia:
whenever the thermocline lies at a depth within the migratory range of this organ-
ism (i.e. a few hundred metres), Metridia may be found near the surface at night.
The isolated occurrence of M. lucens near Durban is another instance
where east-coast upwelling manifests itself. Other species showing a similar
occurrence are Calanus finmarchicus s.l., Candacia bipinnata, Centropages
brachiatus, Clytemnestra scutellata, Ctenocalanus vanus, and Euchaeta wolfen-
deni. The biological effects of the east-coast inshore upwelling seem to be regu-
lar, more intense, and longer lasting in the Durban area than elsewhere along
this coast. One may draw attention, in this connection, to the phenomenon
324 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
called ‘Natal pulse’ by Lutjeharms (1981a), whereby large deflections of the
Agulhas Current away from the coast appear to be initiated in the WNatal Bight,
inducing corresponding dynamic upwelling inshore.
Seret (1979) distinguished two size groups of M. /ucens in her material from
Kerguelen. Size measurements were not made on the material discussed here,
but the author did notice some subtle differences among the specimens taken in
the southern part of the survey area; the lateral profile of the head and the
shape of the fifth thoracic segment were closer to M. gerlachei. A detailed ac-
count of this difference will be rendered elsewhere.
The three species discussed above, although dominant members of the zoo-
plankton assemblage of the Benguela Current System (Untertiberbacher 1964;
Hutchings 1979), have little else in common biogeographically in the eastern Atlan-
tic. Centropages brachiatus is limited to the coastal upwelling belt and its close vicin-
ity between the Cape and the northern part of South West Africa; it is neritic
epiplanktonic. Calanoides carinatus stretches along the whole length of the African
Atlantic, living in mesopelagic depths, probably along the slope, and migrating to the
surface and inshore during the upwelling season (Thiriot 1977, 1978). Metridialucens
extends northward from the Subantarctic to south of Angola; its abundant North
Atlantic population extends southward along the African coast and peters out in the
latitude of Gambia (Kornilova 1967; Thiriot 1978).
Subantarctic patterns
Calanus simillimus and Clausocalanus laticeps have a clearly Subantarctic
distribution, but they display great discrepancies between their occurrences dur-
ing successive cruises.
Along the eastern leg of the AM cruise (April 1963), they were found 300
to 400 nautical miles further north than the neighbouring western leg of the MC
cruise (June 1962), apart from an isolated northern patch along the latter leg. A
similar difference in latitudinal position existed between both legs of the MC
and AM cruises.
During the SA cruise (March 1964) both species were completely absent
from the survey area, which extended beyond 44°S, but the TR cruise (March
1968) showed their presence in the same area even to a point slightly further
north than the position of the warm core of the large anticyclonic eddy found in
1964 at 40°S.
These discrepancies can be explained by the existence of planetary waves of
the same order of magnitude along the Subtropical Convergence and by the
transient character of the eddies generated at the retroflexion of the Agulhas
Current (see Remarks on the hydrology p. 307).
Scolecithrix glacialis occurred at the southern outskirts of the survey area
only in water temperatures below 12°C; between Marion and Crozet islands, in
water temperatures below 6°C, it was somewhat more abundant than elsewhere.
Near the upper limit of its temperature range the species was found in night
catches only.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 325
The neritic Subantarctic species Drepanopus pectinatus shows an amazing
oceanic dispersal extending over 300 nautical miles to the north of its normal oc-
currence on the shelf of the Crozet Islands: it was found in a continuous series of
fourteen samples, in quantities of up to twenty specimens per sample, as against
several hundred per sample in the neighbourhood of the islands. According to
Orren (1966), a northward current was observed at stations between the Crozet
Islands and latitude 41°S. An isolated record of D. pectinatus still further north,
and around 39°30'S, coincides with an upwelling mentioned by Orren (1966: 7,
figs 8, 11).
The complete absence of this species from the surroundings of Marion and
Prince Edward islands is the more intriguing as it also failed to turn up in the
material of Grindley & Lane (1979), who examined fourteen samples taken near
these islands by vertical WP II-net hauls between 300 m and the surface in
March and November 1976. This record of absence appears to be unique among
the Subantarctic islands investigated to date (Bayly 1982).
Notal patterns
Clausocalanus ingens, although widespread, ostensibly avoids temperate ex-
tremes. It is absent both from the coldest inshore part of the west coast upwel-
ling and from the warm southern branch of the Agulhas Current. In the eastern
part of the Indian sector it shows a zonal trend in the middle latitudes (approx.
35 to 42°S) corresponding roughly to water surface temperatures between 10 and
20°C. In the Atlantic sector the isolines of temperature and salinity are deflected
north-eastward against the continent (see Deutsches Hydrographisches Institut
Monatskarten) and so is the northern boundary of C. ingens; the small area in
the south where the species was absent during the TR cruise lay slightly south of
the 10°C surface isotherm (Henry 1972). The zonal, circumglobal distribution of
this species is clearly shown by Frost & Fleminger (1968, chart 3), but dearth of
samples from the south-eastern Atlantic prevented these authors from docu-
menting a north-eastward trend in its distribution in that area.
Calocalanus tenuis shows a zonal pattern of a similar type to, but much
more restricted than, that of Clausocalanus ingens; the Schmitt-Ott eddy dis-
rupts the pattern. Hutching’s (1979) intensive survey of the Cape Peninsula up-
welling showed that Calocalanus tenuis is linked with frontal conditions and is
most abundant in the presence of strong thermoclines.
Two more species have a pattern suggesting zonality: Oculosetella gracilis
and Undeuchaeta plumosa. It should be kept in mind, however, especially in the
case of the latter species, that the present records concern only near-surface pat-
terns of distribution: U. plumosa is well known as an inhabitant of deeper water
over vast areas of the oceans. Its zonal distribution at the surface, if confirmed,
could be linked with some physical or biological factor as yet unidentified, e.g.
the absence of a pycnocline between its deep habitat and the surface.
The pattern of O. gracilis is in perfect agreement with the map presented by
Lang (1948, fig. 314) and the record of Vervoort (1957) south of Tasmania,
326 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
while confirming the notal distribution of this species over an added 1 500 nauti-
cal miles in the south-western Indian Ocean.
The remarks concerning the surface distribution of Undeuchaeta plumosa
also apply in the case of Calanoides macrocarinatus and Calanus tonsus. Though
scarce and widely scattered, their occurrences show a degree of similarity in that
three out of the four or five patches of occurrence of the one species lie in close
proximity to three of the other, viz. south-east of the Schmitt-Ott eddy, near or
on the shelf off Port Elizabeth, and over the Madagascar Ridge in about 35°S
latitude.
The distribution and life cycle of both species, as recorded in the literature
and in unpublished documentation on the South African plankton, appear to
have much in common.
Brodski (1972) is probably right in assigning Calanoides macrocarinatus to
the Notal zone.
Calanus tonsus is typical of the Subantarctic Water (Vervoort 1957; Tanaka
1960, 1964; Sené et al. 1963a, 19636). Jillett (1968), working in southern New
Zealand waters near 46°S, noted that the species appeared closely associated
with the Subtropical Convergence and that it executed extensive seasonal verti-
cal migrations, appearing near the surface in large numbers from September to
January. De Decker (1973), on the basis of unpublished data, mentioned the ap-
pearance of C. tonsus and Calanoides macrocarinatus in the surface water close
to the south and west coasts of South Africa, also from September to January.
Best (1967) found both species regularly in the stomachs of sei whales shot by
shore-based catchers within 200 nautical miles from Cape Town as far as
32°30'S; they appeared from September onward, taking the place of Clausocala-
nus ingens, which the whales had eaten earlier in the year in the same area.
(Best’s paper antedates the original descriptions of Clausocalanus ingens Frost &
Fleminger, 1968, and Calanoides macrocarinatus Brodski, 1972; these two
species are mentioned in the paper as Clausocalanus arcuicornis, forma major
and Calanoides carinatus, respectively.)
At Tristan da Cunha, Wiborg (1964) found Calanus tonsus in large numbers
at the surface between 15 December and 2 February, but absent later in Feb-
ruary and in March.
The record of Calanus tonsus in a single sample south-west of Madagascar
(WS 50, September 1968) may appear suspect, considering the low latitude,
28°S; however, De Decker & Mombeck (1964) recorded a similar isolated occur-
rence of C. tonsus at a station only 60 nautical miles further north in a vertical
net haul between 50 m and the surface, during the ITOE cruise in June 1961.
The occurrence pattern of Calanus tonsus and Calanoides macrocarinatus in
the present material and their near-simultaneous seasonal appearance at the sur-
face in large numbers far north of the Subtropical Convergence are another indi-
cation of a substantial intrusion of southern elements on to the South African
shelf, apparently without relation other than vicinity to the inshore upwelling of
the Benguela Current System.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION a27,
ACARTIA
danae
Walvis Bay
.......* Marion
ACARTIA
negligens
Walvis Bay
Crozet
328 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ACROCALANUS
gibber
Gristan da Cunha
fot. Marion
ACROCALANUS
gracilis
Walvis Bay
———
Gristan da Cunha
\ Crozet
sree... Marion
ACROCALANUS
monachus
{Tristan da Cunha
CALANOIDES
Carinatus
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
Walvis Bay
329
Crozet
Crozet
330 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CALANOIDES
macrocarinatus
Sristan da Cunha
CALANOPIA
minor
Ojristan da Cunha
ee eee ae
wo
seer Ls Marion
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 331
CALANUS
finmarchicus, s.l.
Walvis Bay
o
CeO sss a Ss
. Crozet
toe Marion
CALANUS
Simillimus
-e---------«.
sf
Coro nc meecnncaay ts
332 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CALANUS
tenuicornis
LP
a Coenen
Crozet
CALANUS
tonsus
{Tristan da Cunha
Pd
CL ee re emo IE,
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 559
CALOCALANUS
contractus
Walvis Bay
5. Crozet
--....¢ Marion
CALOCALANUS
pavo
Crozet
334 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CALOCALANUS
plumulosus
Walvis Bay
CALOCALANUS
styliremis
Walvis Bay
Crozet
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 335
CALOCALANUS
tenuis
Crozet
CANDACIA
bipinnata
Walvis Bay
Ofistan da Cunha
336 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CANDACIA
catula
{Tristan da Cunha
10 5 (0) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
15 15
CANDACIA
ae ethiopica 20
Walvis Bay
25 25
|
30 : 30
|
35H A
_ Sa =e =
a ‘ =e oe :
‘Tristan da Cunha = oe
sol, oe
454 45
| % Sie ss Crozet
Spee Marion
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
337)
CANDACIA
simplex
Gristan da Cunha
ao
o¢€--- ------4-----#--» --------- 4,
meen Marion
CANDACIA
truncata
Gristan da Cunha
O46 n == = 8 = 9~ ~~ hg
os
20
25
30
35
40
45
338 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CANTHOCALANUS
pauper
ee ee a
EES La
10 5 (0) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
CENTROPAGES
brachiatus
Hie © dee Walvis Bay
SS i a dad
Fristan da Cunha eee
; i
\,
ss
Xi.
x “, , Crozet
ge ecnemneeiectimeen@eccs, § M@FION
10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
CENTROPAGES
bradyi
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
339
Eee = Marion
CENTROPAGES
calaninus
e¢¢---------e-----4~-e ---------4,
340 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CENTROPAGES
chierchiae
Walvis Bay
Cristan da Cunha
svn. Marion
CENTROPAGES
elongatus
ogé--------------4--» --------- 2. x
eee * Marion
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 341
CENTROPAGES
furcatus
Walvis Bay
ce cis
NY
cere M@FiON
CENTROPAGES
gracilis
ee a ee ee ee,
7 ~Z
342 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CENTROPAGES
violaceus
7
a
o3f---------«-----4--0 ----
CLAUSOCALANUS
furcatus
Walvis Bay
Oristan da Cunha
\ Crozet
sont.» Marion
CLAUSOCALANUS
ingens
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
343
CLAUSOCALANUS
laticeps
og¢---------«-----4--» ~---_____ 4.
ee
344
Sjfistan da Cunha
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CLYTEMNESTRA
rostrata
f
oe"
oa
ogf---------0---- 54-2 ~~ = 88
CLYTEMNESTRA
scutellata
f-—-------e--~--4--» ~~~ a
Jf
a ie
°F
CTENOCALANUS
vanus
DREPANOPUS
pectinatus
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
=, Walvis Bay
345
346 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
EUCALANUS
attenuatus
Sl.
Walvis Bay
Gfristan da Cunha
EUCALANUS
Crassus
{fistan da Cunha
0¢€---------4-----4--+ ---------ag]
es
Marion
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 347
EUCALANUS
hyalinus
Li
Fe eng ie eg 6
est- : ~f--e -----2§
- Z
ren M@FION
EUCALANUS
mucronatus
4
ao
Steno one eocnemeaHeetacsoseeS
woe Marion
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
EUCALANUS
pileatus
Walvis Bay
EUCALANUS
subcrassus
-4--» ---------0.g
ae
Pag
Oe aac Sa
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 349
EUCHAETA
acuta
EUCHAETA
marina
Walvis Bay
7
off ---------0-----4--2 -----_- 4.
Le
a
350 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
EUCHAETA
wolfendeni
Oristan da Cunha
8
o3f--- ------e-----4--2 --------- 6
EUCHIRELLA
rostrata
(Fristan da Cunha
vu. Marion
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 351
EUTERPINA
acutifrons
Walvis Bay
oad
o¢é_--------e-----4-- -------__3 gf
-..¢ Marion
HETERORHABDUS
papilliger
ee
OE een ea ae eee
352 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LABIDOCERA
acuta
Gfristan da Cunha
é
vs
056 ---------4-----=4--0 ~-------- 4,
LABIDOCERA
acutifrons
[Fristan da Cunha
Pry aie Soe ee Sey fa ee ae
7 f ~
as Z
Ze Se
ae
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 353
LABIDOCERA
minuta
Z
tne --- ~~ 0,
/
?
a
Le
/
Pe ene Z
LUCICUTIA
flavicornis
Walvis Bay
20
25
30
35
40
45
354 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MACROSETELLA
gracilis
Walvis Bay
o————
————
eB
Pd
Cg Re S31 OI
10 5 ie) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 is
MECYNOCERA
clausi 20
SEES
tan RDN:
cS
Crozet
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 355
METRIDIA
lucens
ze
Boa
p= — mmm ws
: ey
MICROSETELLA
norvegica
= Walvis Bay
mh
| \
7
356 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MICROSETELLA
rosea
NANNOCALANUS
minor
agen — —_ anaes
—_-
{Ffistan da Cunha
a Ree
Deca
oA
Ke
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 357
NEOCALANUS
gracilis
——_—
Qistan da Cunha
“~~
OCULOSETELLA
gracilis
ane =~ = ~~~,
we
ek
Coe
a a te to
oF
358 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PARACALANUS
aculeatus
Walvis Bay
<d
f
Care aS
o
PARACALANUS
crassirostris
Walvis Ba:
oo %
é
a e
7
ees
£
o3f---------e-----4--» -------
PLEUROMAMMA
abdominalis
_- emp em ---
ue a
fjristan da Cunha
PLEUROMAMMA
borealis
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
359
Walvis Bay
—_
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PLEUROMAMMA
gracilis
PLEUROMAMMA
piseki
GFristan da Cunha
=.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 361
PLEUROMAMMA
xiphias
ad
_
stan da Cunha
@—--------0-----4--» ~---_____4,
oo"
a
°F
PONTELLINA
plumata
S.I.
Walvis Bay
Be ee owe
f
L
<
a
Cffteerosemencnas
362 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
RHINCALANUS
cornutus
Walvis Bay
fin ee nn ew,
A
oe
Woe
a
a oe en ee a
ka
RHINCALANUS
nasutus
Walvis Bay
GFristan da Cunha
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 363
SCOLECITHRICELLA
glacialis
SCOLECITHRIX
Walvis Bay
364 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TEMORA
discaudata
Walvis Bay
ara
Durban, "6s
TEMORA
stylifera
GFristan da Cunha
woe
c ACs
oa
o¢¢---------e-----4--+ ---------4,
- /
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 365
TEMORA
turbinata
Walvis Bay
aa ee ss
ee ge
fv
Crozet
UNDEUCHAETA
plumosa
Walvis Bay
366 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
UNDINULA
darwini
Walvis Bay
Crozet
UNDINULA
vulgaris
Walvis Bay
{ristan da Cunha
Pd
Ose eee ee ey
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 367
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Thanks are due to the numerous staff members of the Division of Sea Fish-
eries, Cape Town, who in between their various duties on board ship most
kindly helped with the collection of the samples; to my wife, M. M. De Decker,
who helped considerably with the processing of the samples; to Mr V. Branco
and Miss E. L. McArdell who produced the artwork; to Miss B. A. White who
typed the manuscript, and to Dr P. A. Hulley who read the report and offered
valuable suggestions and criticism.
REFERENCES
ANDREWS, W. R. J. & Hutcuinecs, L. 1980. Upwelling in the southern Benguela Current. Prog.
Oceanogr. 9: 1-81.
BAINBRIDGE, V. 1960a. The plankton of the inshore waters off Freetown, Sierra Leone. Fishery
Publs colon. Off. 13: 1-48.
BAINBRIDGE, V. 19606. Occurrence of Calanoides carinatus (Kréyer) in the plankton of the Gulf
of Guinea. Nature, Lond. 188: 932-933.
BAINBRIDGE, V. 1972. The zooplankton of the Gulf of Guinea. Bull. mar. Ecol. 8: 61-97.
Bana, N. D. 1973. The southern Benguela System: finer oceanic structure and atmospheric
determinants. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Cape Town.
Bay Ly, I. A. E. 1982. The genus Drepanopus (Copepoda: Calanoida): a review of the species
in Antarctic and Subantarctic waters, with description of D. trispinosus sp. nov. Aust. J.
mar. Freshwat. Res. 33: 161-172.
Best, P. B. 1967. Distribution and feeding habits of baleen whales off the Cape Province.
Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. Rep. S. Afr. 57: 1-44.
Binet, D. & DessigerR, A. 1968. Zooplancton de la région de Nosy-Bé. III. Premiéres données
sur les copépodes. Cah. Off. Rech. Sci. Tech. Outre-Mer (Sér Océanogr.) 6 (3-4): 3-26.
BJORNBERG, T. K. S. 1959. Copepods as indicators of water masses off the Brazilian coast. /st
Internat. oceanogr. Congr. Washington 1959, preprints: 137-138.
BJORNBERG, T. K. S. 1963. On the marine free-living copepods off Brazil. Bolm Inst. Oceanogr.
S. Paulo 13: 3-142.
BJORNBERG, T. K. S. 1973. The planktonic copepods of the Marchile I Expedition and of the
‘Eltanin’ Cruises 3-6 taken in the SE Pacific. Bolm Fac. Filos. Ciénc. Univ. S. Paulo. Zoo-
logia & Biologia Marinha. (N.S.) 30: 245-394.
BRADFORD, J. M. 1977. Distribution of the pelagic copepod Temora turbinata in New Zealand
coastal waters, and possible trans-Tasman population continuity. N.Z. Jl marine Freshwat.
Res. 11: 131-144.
Bropski, K. A. 1959. [On phylogenetic relations of some Calanus (Copepoda) of the northern
and southern hemispheres.] Zool. Zh. 33: 1537-1553.
Bropski, K. A. 1972. [Phylogeny of the family Calanidae (Copepoda) on the basis of a com-
parative morphological analysis of its characters.] In: ZVEREVA, ZH. A., ed. Geografiches-
kava i sezonnaya izmenchivost morskogo planktona: 1-110. Leningrad: Izd. Nauka.
Carter, R. A. 1977. The distribution of calanoid Copepoda in the Agulhas Current System off
Natal, South Africa. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University of Natal.
CLEVE, P. T. 1904. Plankton of the South African seas. I. Copepoda. Mar. Invest. S. Afr. 3:
177-210.
CorETZEE, D. J. 1974. Die ekologie van Calanoides carinatus (Kréyer), Centropages brachiatus
(Dana) en Metridia lucens Boeck in die boonste 50 meter van die waters naby Walvisbaai
gedurende April en Augustus 1972. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University of Stellenbosch.
CorrAL EstraDA, J. 1970. Contribucion al conocimiento del plancton de Canarias. Madrid: Fac-
uldad de Ciencias. (Series A-129.)
CorRAL Estrapa, J. 1972. Nueva aportaci6n al conocimiento de los copépodos pelagicos del
archipielago canario. Boln Inst. esp. Oceanogr. 155: 1-17.
CorRAL EstRADA, J. & Corral, F. G. 1970. Nota sobre el plancton de la costa noroccidental
africana. Boln Inst. esp. Oceanogr. 140: 1-38.
368 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
De Decker, A. 1962. Zur Okologie und Verbreitung der Copepoden aus dem Meeresplankton
Siidafrikas. Biol. Jaarb. 30: 86-122.
De Decker, A. H. B. 1968. The Cape submarine canyon. Part IJ. Hydrology and plankton.
Fish. Bull. S. Afr. 5: 38-45.
De Decker, A. H. B. 1973. Agulhas Bank plankton. Jn: ZEITSCHEL, B., ed. Ecological studies.
Analysis and synthesis: 189-219. Berlin, Heidelberg, New York: Springer-Verlag.
De Decker, A. H. B. & CoETzEE, D. J. 1979. Indicator copepods and oil yield fluctuations in
pelagic fish in the Benguela Current System. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78: 69-79.
De Decker, A. & Momseck, F. J. 1965. A preliminary report on the planktonic copepods.
South African contribution to the International Indian Ocean Expedition. Investl Rep. Div.
Sea Fish. S. Afr. 51: 10-49.
DEUTSCHES HyDROGRAPHISCHES INstITUT. 1960. Monatskarten ftir den Indischen Ozean 2422. 3.
Auflage. Hamburg: Deutsches Hydrographisches Institut.
DEUTSCHES HYDROGRAPHISCHES INSTITUT. 1971. Monatskarten fiir den Stidatlantischen Ozean
2421. 3. Auflage. Hamburg: Deutsches Hydrographisches Institut.
Duncan, C. P. 1968. An eddy in the Subtropical Convergence south-west of South Africa.
J. geophys. Res. 73: 531-534.
Duncan, C. P. 1970. The Agulhas Current. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, University of
Hawaii.
Eaty, E. H. M. 1956. Plankton at Heard Island. Interim Rep. Aust. natn. Antarct. Res. Exped.
15: 1-45.
FLEMINGER, A. & HULSEMANN, K. 1973. Relationship of Indian Ocean epiplanktonic calanoids
to the world ocean. Jn: ZEITSCHEL, B., ed. Ecological studies. Analysis and synthesis 3:
339-347. Berlin, Heidelberg, New York: Springer-Verlag.
Frost, B. W. & FLEMINGER, A. 1968. A revision of the genus Clausocalanus (Copepoda, Cala-
noida) with remarks on distributional patterns in diagnostic characters. Bull. Scripps Instn.
Oceanogr. 12: 1-235.
FUKASE, S. 1962. Oceanographic conditions of surface water between the south end of Africa
and Antarctica. Oceanography Met., Nagasaki. 12 (203): 53-115.
FuRNESTIN, M. L. 1957. Chaetognathes et zooplancton du secteur atlantique marocain. Revue
Trav. Inst. Péch. marit. 21: 1-356.
GapisHko, A. I. 1968. [Description of the zooplankton of the Gulf of Aden during the summer
monsoon of 1962.] Trudy vses. nauchno-issled. Inst. morsk. ryb. Khoz. Okeanogr. 64:
271-277.
Grice, G. D. & HULSEMANN, K. 1967. Bathypelagic calanoid copepods of the Western Indian
Ocean. Proc. U.S. natn. Mus. 122: 1-67.
GRINDLEY, J. R. & Lang, S. B. 1979. Zooplankton around Marion and Prince Edward Islands.
In: Campagne MD. 08/Benthos — Premiers résultats. CNFRA 44: 111-125.
Grosov, A. G. 1968 [Quantitative distribution of zooplankton in the layer 0-100 m in the
northwestern sector of the Indian Ocean.] Trudy vses. nauchno-issled. Inst. morsk. ryb.
Khoz. Okeanogr. 64: 260-270.
Harpy, A. C. & GUNTHER, F. R. 1935. The plankton of the South Georgia whaling grounds
and adjacent waters, 1926-1927. ‘Discovery’ Rep. 11: 1-456.
Harris, T. F. W. & VAN Forest, D. 1977. The Agulhas Current System. Cape Town: Depart-
ment of Oceanography of the University of Cape Town. (Duplicated.)
Henry, A. E. 1972. Hidrologie en voedingsoute van die Suidoos-Atlantiese en Suidwes-Indiese
Oseane in 1968. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 95: 1-64.
Hutcuincs, L. 1979. Zooplankton of the Cape Peninsula upwelling region. Unpublished Ph.D.
thesis, University of Cape Town.
Jittett, J. B. 1968. Calanus tonsus (Copepoda, Calanoida) in Southern New Zealand waters,
with notes on the male. Aust. J. mar. Freshwat. Res. 19: 19-30.
Jittetr, J. B. 1971. Zooplankton and hydrology of Hauraki Gulf, New Zealand. Mem. N. Z.
oceanogr. Inst. 53: 1-103.
JILLeTT, J. B. 1976. Zooplankton associations off Otago Peninsula, south-eastern New Zealand,
related to different water masses. N. Z. JI mar. Freshw. Res. 10: 543-557.
Kemp, S. & Harpy, A. C. 1929. The ships, their equipment and the methods used in research.
‘Discovery’ Rep. 1: 151-222.
KoLiMER, W. E. 1963. Notes on zooplankton and phytoplankton collections made off Walvis
Bay. Investl Rep. mar. Res. Lab. S. W. Afr. 8: 1-78.
COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION 369
Kornitova, G. M. 1967. [Description of the plankton of the fishing grounds of the eastern
Atlantic in the spring of 1961.] In: Materialy Konferentsti po Resultatam Okeanologiche-
skikh Issledovanii v Atlanticheskom Okeane: 158-171. Kaliningrad: AtlantNIRO.
Lana, K. 1948. Monographie der Harpacticiden. Stockholm: Almgqvist & Wiksell.
Lawson, T. J. 1977. Community interactions and zoogeography of the Indian Ocean Candacii-
dae (Copepoda: Calanoida). Mar. Biol. Berlin 43: 71-92.
LUTJEHARMS, J. R. E. 1981a. Interaction between the Agulhas Current and the Subtropical
Convergence. C.S.1.R. Res. Rep. 384: 1-39.
LUTJEHARMS, J. R. E. 1981b. Features of the southern Agulhas Current circulation from satel-
lite remote sensing. S. Afr. J. Sci. 77: 231-236.
LUTJEHARMS, J. R. E. 1981c. Fisiese oseanologie van die Suidwes Indiese Oseaan. WNNR Ver-
slag T/SEA 8016: 1-82.
LUTJEHARMS, J. R. E., VAN BALLEGOOYEN, R. C. & VALENTINE, H. R. 1981. Die fisiese oseano-
logie van die Suidoos Atlantiese Oseaan. WNNR Verslag T/SEA 8104: 1-121.
LUTJEHARMS, J. R. E., BANG, N. D. & Duncan, C. P. 1981. Characteristics of the currents east
and south of Madagascar. Deep-Sea Res. 28A: 879-899.
LUTJEHARMS, J. R. E. & VALENTINE, H. R. 1981. Ocean circulation studies in the vicinity of
southern Africa: preliminary results using FGGE drifters and remote sensing. Adv. Space
Res. 1: 211-223.
Marques, E. 1953. Copépodos marinhos de Angola. Anais Jta Invest. Ultramar 8 (2): 85-126.
MarauEs, E. 1956. Copépodos marinhos de Angola. I. Calanoida. Anais Jta Invest. Ultramar
11 (3): 219-228.
MaraQuEs, E. 1958. Copépodos marinhos de Angola (2? campanha 1952-53). Trabhs Miss. Biol.
marit. 24: 197-222.
MEISENHEIMER, J. 1905. Pteropoda. Wiss. Ergebn. dt. Tiefsee-Exped. ‘Valdivia’ 9: 1-314.
Mensau, M. A. 1974. The occurrence of the marine copepod Calanoides carinatus (Kréyer) in
Ghanaian waters. Ghana J. Sci. 14: 147-166.
Neto, T. S. & Paiva, I. DE. 1966. Ciclo anual do zooplancton colhido na Baia Farta em 1960.
Notas mimeogr. Cent. Biol. aqudat. trop. 2: 1-62.
OrreEN, M. J. 1963. Hydrological observations in the south west Indian Ocean. Investl Rep.
Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 45: 1-61.
Orren, M. J. 1966. Hydrology of the south west Indian Ocean. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish.
S. Afr. 55: 1-35.
RAMIREZ, F. C. 1966. Copépodos calanoides marinos del area del Mar del Plata, con la descrip-
cién de Pontella marplatensis n. sp. Boln Inst. Biol. mar. 11: 1-24.
RAMIREZ, F. C. 1969. Copépodos planctoénicos del sector bonaerense del Atlantico surocciden-
tal. Contrnes Inst. Biol. mar. 98: 1-116.
Rose, M. 1929. Copépodes pélagiques, particuliérement de surface, provenant des campagnes
scientifiques de S.A.S. le Prince Albert Ier de Monaco. Résult. Camp. scient. Prince Albert
I. 78: 1-132.
Scott, T. 1894. Report on the Entomostraca from the Gulf of Guinea collected by John Rat-
tray B.Sc. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2) (Zool.) 6: 1-161.
SENO, J., Komaki, Y. & TAKEDA, A. 1963a Plankton collected by the ‘Umitaka Maru’ in the
Antarctic and adjacent waters, with special reference to Copepoda. J. Tokyo Univ. Fish.
49: 53-62.
SENO, J., Komaki, Y. & TAKEDA, A. 1963b. Plankton collected by the ‘Umitaka Marw’ in the
Antarctic and adjacent waters by larva net, with special reference to Copepoda. J. Tokyo
Univ. Fish. 50: 1-10.
SENO, J., Komaki, Y. & TAKEDA, A. 1966. Plankton collected in the Antarctic and adjacent
waters by closing net, with special reference to copepods. J. Tokyo Univ. Fish. 52: 1-16.
SERET, C. 1979. Taxonomie, biologie et biogéographie des copépodes pélagiques récoltés au
cours de la campagne MD 03 du ‘Marion Dufresne’ (Iles Crozet, Kerguelen et Heard).
Thése de 3e cycle, Université de Paris VI. (Duplicated.)
SHANNON, L. V. & VAN Ruisswisck, M. 1969. Physical oceanography of the Walvis Ridge
region. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 70: 1-19.
SmiTH, S. L. 1982. The northwestern Indian Ocean during the monsoons of 1979: distribution,
abundance and feeding of zooplankton. Deep-Sea Res. 29: 1331-1353.
370 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
STANDER, G. H. & De Decker, A. H. B. 1969. Some physical and biological aspects of an
oceanographic anomaly off South West Africa in 1963. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr.
81: 1-46.
SZEKIELDA, K. H. 1972. Upwelling studies with satellites. J. Cons. perm. int. Explor. Mer. 34:
379-388.
Tanaka, O. 1960. Pelagic Copepoda. In: Biological Results of the Japanese Antarctic Research
Expedition, No. 10. Spec. Publs Seto mar. biol. Lab. 10: 1-95.
TANAKA, O. 1964. Two small collections of copepods from the Antarctic. Scient. Rep. Jap. Ant-
arct. res. Exped. (E) 22: 1-20.
TuirioT, A. 1977. Peuplements zooplanctoniques dans les régions de remontée d’eau le long du
littoral atlantique africain. Docums scient. Centre Rech. océanogr. Abidjan 8: 1-72.
TuirioT, A. 1978. Zooplankton communities in the West African upwelling area. Jn: Bose, R.
& Tomczak, M., eds. Upwelling Ecosystems: 32-61. Berlin, Heidelberg, New York:
Springer-Verlag.
UNTERUBERBACHER, H. K. 1964. Zooplankton studies in the waters off Walvis Bay with special
reference to the Copepoda. Invest] Rep. mar. Res. Lab. S. W. Afr. 11: 1-42.
Vervoort, W. 1957. Copepods from Antarctic and sub-Antarctic plankton samples. Rep. B. A.
N. Z. Antarctic Res. Exped. (B) 3: 1-160.
VeERvoorT, W. 1965. Pelagic Copepoda. Part II. Atlantide Rep. 8: 9-216.
VINOGRADOV, M. E. & Voronina, M. M. 1962. Some data on the distribution of zooplankton in
the northern Indian Ocean. Oceanology 58: 80-111.
VissER, G. A. 1969. Hydrological observations in the south-east Atlantic Ocean. I. The
Schmitt-Ott Seamount area. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 77: 1-23.
WELSH, J. G. & Visser, G. A. 1970. Hydrological observations in the south-east Atlantic
Ocean. 2. The Cape Basin. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 83: 1-28.
WiporG, K. F. 1964. Marine copepods of Tristan da Cunha. Results Norw. Scient. Exped.
Tristan da Cunha 1937-1938. 51: 1-44.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
A. H. B. DE DECKEE
NEAR-SURFACE COPEPOD DISTRIBUTION
IN THE SOUTH-WESTERN INDIAN AND
SOUTH-EASTERN ATLANTIC OCEAN
AY — _——————
IC
EER pe | as SD ee es =
J
INSTITUTION
{ITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
fINOSHLIWS
AITHSONIAN
SJIYVYGIT LIBRARIES
YINOSHLIWS S3II1YV
NVINOSHLIWS
AITHSONIAN
INOSHLINS S3ZIYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION
AITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
ZINOSHLIWS
VINOSHLINS
VS
NOILNLILSNI
SJIUVYGIT LIBRARIES
ow
A
>
Ps)
m
(Cp)
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
NG > et Mi.
WEE SL = fh th
INN O op YG
N \. = “yy
ne GG
saiuyvugiy LIBRARIES
Zz
wn
ca
—
ze
@
= 3
INSTITUTION | NOILNLILSNI
Oo
Ke
=a)
od
Ww
=
YalT_ LIBRARIES
Zz =
YY, =
G =
O: ° \
G fi EX
ie SS
Wie aay -
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
ep)
iJ
&
<
ac
is)
fia
108)
8]
>
A
mM
(Cp)
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
NYS
a x
Se;
=
_ > J
: ae
SJIYVUGIT LIBRARIES
Zz
wn
By
+
| a
s,
oO
za
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
Pack
°
=
=
ES
ke
WY)
=
S31YvVYal LIBRARIES
poo ¥
\
Oo = Oo ~
—, -w ae \
= 2 E 20
ae = ss ae
EB 5s = =
Ee ae
z & Zz S
S3A!IYVYREIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAT
z n z ser n”
<< = pt NS =
z = ot fyi y SS =
Z EGUYL ERK 8
= = “yy E Y =
: a
PP OMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION | NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIW:
us oO e a
oO. sai w =
x 4 a < =
z : : =
zy Z 9 a ro)
Bey — =z
NVINOSHLINS SJIYVYUGIT LIBRARIES
fF & S cand Za
~ ro)
ee = = re
= a =
> = > a
é: E ant =
Ww
0 2 - z
Ww
< < =
= Z 2 yy
O % ae) Vig i
z i= z : pp f° 4/7
: 5 es,
_NVINOSHLINS Sa lIYyY¥Vvuag a te a, BRARIES SMITHSONIAI
wn Ld
: : = Gig
z: ee a Vig
4 ox 4
re) z Oo
Z ar zZ
INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NVINOSHLIW:
NVINOSHLIWS S3I1uYVual LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
: Z 5
a °
eae 4 = -
~~ po ‘4p AG =
iS Mpg = i
- Gy 2 =
SESE ee lyYVvuag ryt BRARIES_ SMITHSONIAI
a = ; z s x < Ne
ae \ We
A
: = ESS
= > = <
a Zz a ie
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIW
wn = 5S ee
= ; ep) = SN
< he = <x = WS %
aw Vy, = a c iN
a “Wf 3 . 5 .
=I z= =I = SS
NVINOSHLINS S3JIYWVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIA
Fae z ie = fas
os z = (| YZ
> WS 2 > ‘a3 Gi
= AS w = on he
ep) _— w ei
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIW
w pend Fa + 2) Pel =
~ O i Oo
o = w 2
Ps) S i =
> 3 > i
~ = z =
2 Z A Z
TUTION NOILNLILSNI SSINVUAIT_LIBRARIES
. g z = z= x
ASS Sas ‘S <= a a Vg > w . \
SS = O er l fy O WYN
2a am Prt nw JY bo n° WN \,
\. o 2 Oo pis <- NN
> = > is = %
a, > Ww Fas 7 ,
vudiqy LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
= vi is
& 2 1B =
Z is
= <5 : <
= = ra
rs) as , iS) em
Zz al < a
TUTION NOILNLILSN!I NVINOSHLINS S3SI1Y¥VYEIT LIBRARIES
z= ry > = iy
= a cz,
= w = ow
S re) S re)
> ~ >
a 0 — 0
be ar a ae
RAR IES | OMATHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI
2 w v © 2)
Ip, < =e =
= = z 4
re) = Oo x
WY Ww Ww) 1 OD
ao O Bi 7 AGS
= z = 2,
> 4
a Z a zs
w = ”) =
WW Z Ww =
= = ms ur
oc = oc a
< z .< =
a a & =
fre 5 co =
a Zz aah 2
VYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNILILSNI
i = ST z=
: Ss ae :
5a Lif
: 6 * :
ae - GY ee =
; a a :
TUTION BOELEE LONI NVINGSsrens 5° lIyYVvuad IWoul BRARIES
« = << = B pees |
A 4 4 5 = ie ages Ne
a = tf Lf 35 = Bij rs)
SE ae = SU4YE x
S$ 2 BY = 2 “iy = |
> GG = > 6 = .
= = . 7) Zz ” ».
_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
z ai = ia
wn om 2W
ras a a <
5 a = oe
Oo = Yi Oo =
er wd z= ae
LNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS (S31uvu gt LIBRARIES
eo S =
D LY = 0
> Wee
SUAS 88 =
5 2 NS 2
= HEM cide .
YURI T_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI
, . = * 2)
ow = w
Pe) 0
> | = > |
A Po)
m S m
op) x ae (op)
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION N
Y = se wn
= < =
= =
7 = ae
O 2 Gs
Zz = 2°
> = >
< ” Bare
NVINOSHLINS S3I1YWVYSIT LI
GN g
EER : S|
= We & =
2 N= 5
Zz Ort wiicot z
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION N¢
Zz ae Ce Zz
2 , w )
= seh es
: = =A
e az F
z oO z
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUSIT LI
z n : Fd
< = <
3 ; :
on n a
Peas fe) =a
re 2) ix
>
es 3 &
INSTITUTION N¢
wn = ”
fr = ul
< a
S| = oc
2 5 z
cod Zz a
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUEIT LI
INSTITUTION
Salayvdalt
INSTITUTION N
wy .
NVINOSHLINS S3!uYvudil
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSHLINS SaiuvugIT L
SNS
ANS
WA
NS
SMITHSONIAN
\
“
N38
.
NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION _ N¢
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
SAIMVUSIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVEEIT LI
N
>
N
ITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES
(iui
3 9088 01206 6890
Neots etek
2 Wendt at Fite
, hot ae]
sp Temee nese teh . rae
peti areirPet te top Stone eres
Vink,
Act
ePTFE VEY tee Pep OR
See Nye
Pore a)
Ea
wee Re
aks ae
pi nsgnw Aero 2
SPR ee Wea Pee eas < ?
pS es co etek Peer Cnt Ci eee aC roy
ey Sone i RSMAS Qa ace Ce a ape
Sere hohee Tinta te kes ak ae ee ve
ee Pa ren
We el, ee BEE
Fert pyre kis aes
beat
5 “V.5h Ue ewaes Y
er ae rs er ee
Pn ee i eee Sie See ee ae
VOR ENSE AIT stole FZ
ere eed
TOSS pa TPE)
Reet oyna, eB,
Wr ey
yest
ek
ite i Sa hie a
lm Hee SwlBatpab aes Pawar s
ee RO SO 8 a Se EWE Se
ee a a 74%
vag pees? Pay ites ha day a SENS
2 bt ee tres wee el ee a ee ae
‘<
ee ie a Wen ea
alte WP epee es tune Be AA Her ere ee Fy Ge)
: Ten tel eens
SUL ey egies
IU EPU EOF grt 2! SO arjers
SOUS ae eS
eae, eee ay Pe Pere ya ee ee
ee Buide ak 2 eV Al shee
SGA ae IS Fae ars dey sh oY 39
Dest Oa OSE Oy ee, ye ®
eee he eed ar ene er ae
ee ee eS th ae en 2
wet BP wee ea eh.
2S. UV YTS
ey gi
DR ee Be
she maar wed Mee
je rw ee wet
verve |
eee bl Ff Wein dae
ee ie ee Few tye
Wie Sop sie ed ae Deysije WY oy Cee wee
lV ew Veus LSP UF Oe Ae
FENCES
ey Svs eres rm eta.
AQ than eiear Fe
Sere oH
Te eS bit
res Se H ratuee! Pere?
FARE ENT ue